JP7670341B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game and executes a presentation based on the result of that determination.

In conventional gaming machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole and it is determined whether or not a special game will be executed, the special symbol is displayed variably on the special symbol display device, and then a special symbol showing the result of the determination is displayed stationary. In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, a specified image display device displays a performance symbol variably in conjunction with the display of the special symbol variably, and as the special symbol is displayed stationary, the performance symbol is displayed stationary in a manner showing the result of the determination.

JP 2015-96091 A

Conventional gaming machines have room for improvement in terms of making the presentation more entertaining.

Therefore, the object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the entertainment value of the presentation.

The present invention adopts the following configuration to solve the above problems.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of shooting out gaming balls in response to an operation using a first operating means, and is equipped with a judgment means for making a judgment, a symbol control means for varying symbols, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation, and the presentation control means is capable of announcing the result of the judgment by displaying a presentation symbol in a varying manner and then displaying the presentation symbol in a stationary manner after a predetermined variation time has elapsed, and is capable of executing a first emphasis presentation that emphasizes a presentation symbol that suggests that a special game advantageous to a player will be played, and is capable of executing a specific notification regarding the operation of the first operating means ... specific notification regarding the operation of the first emphasis presentation. the specific notification can be executed while the player is playing the game, a sound can be output during the execution of the first emphasis performance for a first period of time and an alarm sound related to the specific notification can be output for a second period of time longer than the first period of time, an operation performance can be executed that prompts the player to operate a second operating means, a second emphasis performance that changes at a predetermined period of time to emphasize the operation performance can be executed, any of a plurality of performance modes including a first mode and a second mode can be set, and the sound related to the second emphasis performance can be made different when the first mode is set and when the second mode is set.

The present invention makes it possible to improve the entertainment value of the presentation.

Front view of pachinko game machine 1 A plan view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the rear side of the gaming machine 1. Overall block diagram of gaming machine 1 FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an example of a big win determination table for the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol determination table of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an example of a game flow of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a game state set after a jackpot game when the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a game state that is set after a special symbol indicating a special miss has stopped when the result of the special symbol determination is a special miss. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen of a first image display device 70 in a normal mode. FIG. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of a presentation in which the SPSP reach presentation is performed when the result of the special symbol determination performed in the normal mode is a big win. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a performance at each timing in FIG. 11 . FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance performed following FIG. 12 . FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a big win symbol emphasis effect when a symbol suggesting a big win is displayed in the SPSP reach effect in the normal mode. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot symbol emphasis effect when a symbol suggesting a jackpot is displayed in a special mode. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart from the start of fluctuation to the N-reach performance in normal mode. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of an effect from the start of fluctuation to the N-reach effect in the normal mode, and shows an example of an image displayed on the screen at each timing in FIG. 16. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance from the start of variation to the N-reach performance in the normal mode, in which a different performance pattern is used as the reach pattern. A diagram showing an example of the effects from the start of variation to the N-reach effect in a special mode. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance from the start of variation to an N-reach performance in a special mode, in which a different performance pattern is used as a reach pattern. FIG. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of the effects after the SP reach effect in normal mode. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of an effect after the SP reach effect in the normal mode, and shows an example of an image displayed on the screen at each timing in FIG. 21 . FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation in which a reach presentation is performed using a presentation pattern different from that shown in FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the effects following the SP reach effect in the special mode. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation after the SP reach presentation in the normal mode, in which a miss is notified in the SPSP reach presentation; A diagram showing an example of a full rotation reach effect in normal mode. A diagram showing an example of a performance when a performance pattern indicating a loss is displayed stopped. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which a short button press operation performance is performed immediately before a notice performance before a reach performance is performed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which a rapid-fire operation performance is performed immediately before a notice performance before a reach performance is performed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which a button long press operation performance is performed immediately before a preview performance before a reach performance is performed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an operation presentation executed during the variable display of the pseudo 1 and a notice presentation corresponding to the operation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an operation presentation executed during the variable display of pseudo 2 and a notice presentation corresponding to the operation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart regarding the variation of special symbols after a jackpot game is played. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen at each timing in FIG. 33 as an example of a presentation in the time-saving mode. A diagram comparing specific notifications A and B 1 is a flowchart showing main processing in the main control unit 100. Flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the main control unit 100 Detailed flow chart of the input control process in step S200 of FIG. 37 Detailed flowchart of the first start port switch processing in step S210 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the second start port switch processing in step S220 of FIG. Detailed flow chart of the specific area switch process in step S250 of FIG. 38. Detailed flowchart of special-chart special-electricity control processing in step S300 of FIG. A flowchart showing the special symbol determination process in step S320 of FIG. A flowchart showing the big win determination process of step S3207 of FIG. A flowchart showing the fluctuation pattern determination process of step S3208 in FIG. 43. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a normal variation pattern table Tn used in a normal gaming state. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a low base time-saving fluctuation pattern table Ta used in a low base time-saving state. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern table Tb used in a high base time-saving state; A flowchart showing the special symbol variation process of step S330 in FIG. A flowchart showing the special symbol stopping process of step S340 of FIG. A detailed flowchart showing the big win game process of step S350 of FIG. A flowchart showing the small win game process of step S360 of FIG. A flowchart showing the big win game end process in step S370 of FIG. A flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process performed in the performance control unit 130. A flowchart showing an example of the command receiving process in step E10 of FIG. 54. A flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation start command process in step E113 of FIG. 55. 1 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process performed in the image/audio control unit 140. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol determination table of the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a game flow of the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a game state after a jackpot game when a special symbol indicating a jackpot stops in a case where the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a game state after a special symbol indicating a special miss has stopped when the result of the special symbol determination is a special miss. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining mode setting after power-on in the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the game state and background setting after a big win game in the second embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining mode setting after power-on in a modified example of the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the game state and background setting after a big win game in a modified example of the second embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a game flow according to the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol determination table in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern table set for each period in the fifth embodiment; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a game flow of the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 in a normal mode that is set during a normal gaming state. A timing chart showing the flow of the presentation when the game transitions to the second time-saving game state based on a specified number of changes after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed. FIG. 73 shows an example of an image displayed on the main screen at each timing shown in FIG. 72 . FIG. 73 shows an example of an image displayed on the main screen at each timing shown in FIG. 72 . FIG. 73 shows an example of an image displayed on the main screen at each timing shown in FIG. 72 . FIG. 73 shows an example of an image displayed on the main screen at each timing shown in FIG. 72 . A timing chart showing the flow of the time-saving introduction performance when the first special symbol is not reserved after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed and the specified number of changes are made. FIG. 78 shows an example of an image displayed on the main screen at each timing shown in FIG. 77. Timing chart showing the flow of the presentation when entering pre-introduction mode FIG. 80 shows an example of an image displayed on the main screen at each timing shown in FIG. 79 . FIG. 80 shows an example of an image displayed on the main screen at each timing shown in FIG. 79 . A timing chart showing the flow of the performance when the time-saving introduction performance is performed via the pre-introduction mode. FIG. 83 shows an example of an image displayed on the main screen at each timing shown in FIG. 82 . A diagram showing an example of the performance when the first special symbol is not reserved at the time when the specified number of fluctuations is completed in the pre-introduction mode. A timing chart showing an example of a performance when the SPSP reach performance is performed when the result of the jackpot determination performed in a normal game state other than the introduction mode is a miss. FIG. 86 shows an example of the performance at each timing of FIG. 85 . FIG. 86 shows an example of the performance at each timing of FIG. 85 . FIG. 86 shows an example of the performance at each timing of FIG. 85 . A timing chart showing an example of a presentation in which a reach hit is announced in the SPSP reach presentation when the result of the jackpot determination performed in a normal game state other than the introduction mode is a jackpot. FIG. 90 shows an example of the performance at each timing of FIG. 89 . FIG. 90 shows an example of the performance at each timing of FIG. 89 . A timing chart showing an example of a presentation in which no reach presentation is performed when the result of a jackpot determination performed in a normal game state other than the introduction mode is a miss. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing an example of the performance at each timing of FIG. 92. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing an example of the performance at each timing of FIG. 92. A diagram showing an example of each shielding effect feature. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of lamp control when the second time-saving gaming state is switched to a normal gaming state without a jackpot game being played. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a game flow of a gaming machine according to a first modified example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a game flow of a gaming machine according to a second modified example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a game flow of a gaming machine according to a third modified example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the setting of a third time-saving gaming state according to a special losing symbol in a gaming machine according to a third modified example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a game flow of a gaming machine according to a fourth modified example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of mode transition according to the number of times the special symbol changes in the fourth modified example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of a game state when an activation trigger for each time-saving game state occurs during each game state. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a normal variation pattern table Tn used in a normal mode in a normal gaming state in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a pre-introduction fluctuation pattern table Tnx used in the pre-introduction mode. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a second time-saving fluctuation pattern table Tb1 used in the first fluctuation in the second time-saving gaming state. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a second time-saving fluctuation pattern table Tb2 used in the second and subsequent fluctuations in the second time-saving gaming state. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a second time-saving fluctuation pattern table Tb11 (with jackpot history) used in the first fluctuation in the second time-saving gaming state. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a second time-saving fluctuation pattern table Tb12 (with jackpot history) used in the second and subsequent fluctuations in the second time-saving gaming state. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table Ta2 used in a first time-saving gaming state. A flowchart showing a special symbol variation process in the fifth embodiment Flowchart showing the big win game end process in the fifth embodiment FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a post-jackpot game state setting table used to set a game state after a jackpot game is played. A diagram showing the game state to be referred to at the end of a big win game that does not include a small win game. A diagram showing the game state to be referred to at the end of a big win game via a small win game.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a type of gaming machine known as a type 1/2 mixed machine.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figures 1 to 3. Figure 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, Figure 2 is a plan view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine 1, and Figure 3 is a perspective view of the rear side of the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a gaming board mounting frame 3 that is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 that is rotatably supported relative to the gaming board mounting frame 3, and a gaming board 5 that has a gaming area 5a formed therein through which gaming balls (gaming media) flow down.

The outer frame 2 is made up of a rectangular base frame 2a with a central opening in the front-rear direction, to which a decorative plate 2b is attached at the lower front. The outer frame 2 is fixed to the island equipment of the amusement arcade via fastening members (e.g., nails, fasteners, etc.).

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism 6 at one horizontal end, and is supported rotatably with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door relative to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, making it possible to perform maintenance on various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one horizontal end, and is supported rotatably with the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated like a door relative to the game board mounting frame 3, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-to-rear direction is formed in the approximate center near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or acrylic plate) is attached to cover the opening 8 from the rear, making it possible to see the play area 5a through this opening 8 and transparent member 8a.

A sound output device 9 consisting of a speaker and a frame lighting device 10 having multiple decorative LEDs are provided above the opening 8 of the glass frame 4. In addition, below the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there are an upper tray 11 for storing multiple game balls, such as game balls paid out from a payout device 95 described below based on the establishment of a grant condition, a lower tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that do not fit in the upper tray 11 and flow into an overflow ball flow path described below, and a launch operation device 13 that can be operated to launch the game balls.

The audio output device 9 outputs background music, sound effects, etc. to create a sound effect (music, voice, etc.). Additionally, multiple frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and create lighting effects by changing the direction of light irradiation and the color of light emitted by each lamp (LED). Additionally, the frame lighting device 10 is equipped with an alarm LED 10a that is controlled to light up/blink when the glass frame 4 opens or a payout abnormality occurs in which game balls cannot be paid out from the payout device 95.

The upper tray 11 is for storing game balls to be supplied to the launching device 26. The game balls stored in the upper tray 11 are guided to the launching device 26 and launched into the game area 5a with a ball-hitting force that corresponds to the rotation angle of the launching handle 15.

In addition, the central front portion of the upper tray 11 is provided with a performance button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 1 or FIG. 2) that function as input devices for performing decision and selection operations related to various performances, which will be described later.

The effect button device 16 is equipped with an effect button 17 capable of performing operations such as decision operations (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a for detecting the operation of the effect button 17, a button drive device 17b equipped with a button drive motor for changing the effect button 17 between a normal state and a protruding state positioned higher than the normal state and a button vibration motor for changing the effect button 17 between the normal state and a vibration state in which the effect button 17 vibrates in a predetermined manner, and an effect button light-emitting LED 17c for changing the effect button 17 between an off state and a lit state in which the effect button 17 emits light in a predetermined manner. The player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1 using the effect button device 16.

The selection button device 18 is equipped with a cross key 19 (upper button 191A, left button 192A, lower button 193A, right button 194A) that can perform operations such as selection operations, and a cross key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 4) for detecting the operation of the cross key 19, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1. The cross key 19 is also used to adjust the volume of the sound related to the performance and to adjust the light intensity of each LED used in the performance (LED of the frame lighting device 10, LED of the board lighting device 74, performance button light-emitting LED 17c, etc.). For example, the volume value can be set from "1" to "5", and the volume value may be increased by "1" in response to one press of the upper button 191A, and decreased by "1" in response to one press of the lower button 193A. Also, for example, the light intensity value can be set from "1" to "5," and each press of the right button 194A can increase the light intensity value by "1," and each press of the left button 192A can decrease the light intensity value by "1."

Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed to receive game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and guide them to the lower tray 12. In addition, a full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 4) is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path to detect the occurrence of a full tray error in which the lower tray 12 is full of game balls, and while the full detection switch 32a detects that the lower tray 12 is full, the payout of game balls by the payout device 95, which will be described later, is stopped.

The launch operation device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a launch handle 15 rotatably mounted on the base 14, a touch sensor (not shown) that detects whether the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, and a launch volume consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the launch handle 15. When the touch sensor detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, the launch device 26 (see Figure 4) is configured to be able to launch the game ball.

The game board mounting frame 3 is provided with a game board mounting portion (not shown) for mounting the game board 5, a launching device 26 (see FIG. 4) for launching game balls toward the game area 5a, a locking mechanism 27 for locking the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 in a closed state, and an opening detection switch for detecting the opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4.

The game board mounting section is formed in a recessed chamber shape that opens to the front at approximately the center near the top of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. At the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting section, an opening that opens in the front-to-rear direction is provided, and through this opening, various devices and the like provided on the back side of the game board 5 face the rear of the gaming machine 1.

The launch device 26 includes a launch member for launching the game balls and a launch solenoid for driving the launch member. The launch device 26 launches the game balls toward the game area 5a by operating the launch solenoid with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the launch handle 15 of the launch operation device 13.

The locking mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting part 25, and the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the game board mounting frame 3 is unlocked and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

Curved inner and outer rails 35 and 36 are provided near the outer edge of the game board 5, and the area surrounded by the inner and outer rails 35 and 36 forms a game area 5a into which game balls can flow. A launched ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner and outer rails 35 and 36, which guides game balls launched by the launching device 26 to the upstream part of the game area 5a. An outlet 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a to guide the game balls that have flowed down outside the game area (to the collection part of the game board mounting frame 3).

A decorative frame 40 is provided in the approximate center of the play area 5a, which is a frame-shaped area known as a center case that restricts the entry of game balls into the interior. This decorative frame 40 divides the play area 5a into a left play area where game balls launched with a first launch force flow down, and a right play area where game balls launched with a second launch force that is stronger than the first launch force flow down, and the left play area and the right play area are connected below the decorative frame 40.

A warp device 41 is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 40 to guide the game balls flowing down the left side game area into the interior of the decorative frame 40, and a stage section 42 is provided at the bottom of the decorative frame 40 to roll the game balls introduced into the decorative frame 40 by the warp device 41 and cause them to flow down below the decorative frame 40.

Three general winning openings 43 through which game balls can always enter are provided at intervals at the lower left side of the decorative frame 40, and one general winning opening 43 through which game balls can always enter is provided at the lower right side of the decorative frame 40. When a game ball that has entered this general winning opening 43 is detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 4) (awarding conditions are met), a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., five balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarding prize value).

Below the stage section 42, a first start hole 45 (a start winning area of a first special symbol) is provided, where a game ball can always win (enter). When a game ball wins (enters) the first start hole 45, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not a special game (jackpot game or small jackpot game) is executed is granted (special symbol determination information described later is stored). In addition, when a game ball wins (enters) the first start hole 45, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarded prize value). Inside the first start hole 45, a first start hole detection switch 45a (see FIG. 4) is provided for detecting a game ball that has won (entered) the first start hole 45.

A variable starter 46 is provided in the game area 5a diagonally below and to the right of the first starter hole 45. The variable starter 46 is configured to be able to change from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter (slot in), to an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter, based on a winning result in a winning determination (normal symbol determination) described below.

Specifically, the variable starting section 46 has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 1) to form a flow path for the game ball, and is equipped with a second starting hole opening/closing member 48 that can move in the front-rear direction, a second starting hole 47 (starting winning area of the second special pattern) that opens upward directly below the second starting hole opening/closing member 48, a second starting hole detection switch 47a (see FIG. 4) that detects a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting hole 47, and a second starting hole opening/closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 4) that converts the second starting hole 47 to a closed state by moving the second starting hole opening/closing member 48 forward (winning restriction position) and converts the second starting hole 47 to an open state by moving the second starting hole opening/closing member 48 backward (winning permission position).

When a game ball enters the second start hole 47 that is opened during the auxiliary game described below and is detected by the second start hole detection switch 47a (see FIG. 4) (awarding conditions are met), the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not to play a special game (jackpot game or small jackpot game) is granted (special chart determination information described below is stored). In addition, when a game ball enters the second start hole 47 and is detected by the second start hole detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, two balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarded prize value).

The right side of the game area 5a is provided with a normal pattern gate 44 (normal pattern start area) through which game balls can always pass. When a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern gate 44 is detected by the gate detection switch 44a, no prize balls are awarded, but the player is given the right to make a normal pattern determination (win determination) to determine whether or not to play a winning game (normal pattern determination information, described later, is stored).

Below the normal gate 44 is a first variable winning section 49 (first variable winning device) that can change from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win (enter the prize) to an open state in which it is possible or easy to win, based on a small win being determined in the big win determination.

The first variable winning section 49 (first variable winning device) has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) to become a flow path for game balls (forming part of the bottom surface of the central flow path 91b), and is equipped with a first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 that can move in the front-back direction, a first large winning opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51, a first large winning opening detection switch 50a that detects game balls that have won (entered) the first large winning opening 50, and a first large winning opening opening opening solenoid 51b (see Figure 4) that converts the first large winning opening 50 to a closed state by moving the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 forward (winning restriction position) and changes the first large winning opening 50 to an open state by moving the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 backward (winning permitted position).

Then, during the small win game described below, when the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 moves backward and the first large prize opening 50 is converted from a closed state to an open state, game balls that have flowed down the top surface of the first large prize opening opening opening member 51 and game balls that have reached the first large prize opening 50 can enter the first large prize opening 50. When a game ball that has entered the first large prize opening 50 is detected by the first large prize opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

In addition, a specific area 52 is provided inside the first large prize opening 50. When a game ball enters the first large prize opening 50 during a small prize game, the game ball passes through the specific area 52. When a specific area detection switch 52a provided in the specific area 52 detects the passage of the game ball, a big prize game is played. Here, a big prize that occurs in response to the game ball passing through the specific area 52 is sometimes referred to as a "type 2 big prize."

Below the first variable winning section 49, there is a second variable winning section 55 (second variable winning device) that can change from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win (enter the winning hole) to an open state in which it is possible or easy to win, based on a jackpot being determined in the jackpot determination or the game ball passing through a specific area 52 during a small jackpot game.

The second variable prize winning section 55 (second variable prize winning device) has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in the figure) to become a flow path for game balls (forming part of the bottom surface of the first downstream flow path 91e), and is equipped with a second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57 that can move in the front-back direction, a second large prize winning opening 56 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57, a second large prize winning opening detection switch 56a that detects game balls that have won (entered) the second large prize winning opening 56, and a second large prize winning opening opening opening solenoid 57b (see Figure 4) that converts the second large prize winning opening 56 to a closed state by moving the second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57 forward (winning restriction position) and changes the second large prize winning opening 56 to an open state by moving the second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57 backward (winning permitted position).

When the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 moves backward during a jackpot game and the second large prize opening 56 is converted from a closed state to an open state, game balls that have flowed down the top surface of the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 and game balls that have reached the second large prize opening 56 can enter the second large prize opening 56. When a game ball that has entered the second large prize opening 56 is detected by the second large prize opening detection switch 56a, a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

In addition, game balls shot into the left side game area will win one of the three general winning openings 43 or the first starting opening 45 located below the decorative frame 40, or will flow into the out opening 39. Therefore, game balls shot into the left side game area will not win (pass through) the general winning gate 44, general winning opening 43, first variable winning section 49 (first large winning opening 50), or second variable winning section 55 (second large winning opening 56) located in the right side game area.

In addition, a game ball launched into the right-side game area passes through the normal gate 44 and the like via the upstream flow path 91a, and enters one of the general winning openings 43, the variable starting section 46 (second starting opening 47), the first variable winning opening 49 (first large winning opening 50), or the second variable winning opening 55 (second large winning opening 56) provided in the right-side game area, or flows into the outlet 39. Therefore, a game ball launched into the right-side game area will not enter the general winning opening 43 or the first starting opening 45 provided in the left-side game area.

On the back side of the game board 5, there is an out-ball flow path that receives and collects out-balls, which are game balls that have won in the general winning port 43, the first starting port 45, the second starting port 47, the first large winning port 50, and the second large winning port 56, as well as game balls that have flowed into the outlet 39, and allows them to flow down, and an out-ball detection switch 39a (see Figure 4) is provided at the most downstream part of the out-ball flow path. Game balls detected by the out-ball detection switch 39a are discharged from the outlet on the back side of the game machine 1 to the outside of the game machine 1 (island equipment).

A main information display 59 is provided outside the play area 5a. The main information display 59 includes a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, and a normal symbol display 62. The main information display 59 also includes a first special symbol reserved display 63, a second special symbol reserved display 64, and a normal symbol reserved display 65. The main information display 59 also includes a round number display 66, a right hit display 67, and a status confirmation display 68.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a jackpot determination for a first special symbol, which is made based on the entry (entry) of a game ball into the first starting hole 45, the second special symbol display 61 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a jackpot determination for a second special symbol, which is made based on the entry (entry) of a game ball into the second starting hole 47, and the normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a hit determination for a normal symbol, which is made based on the passage (entry) of a game ball into the normal gate 44.

The jackpot determination is to obtain special symbol determination information (jackpot random number, jackpot pattern random number, small hit pattern random number, special miss pattern random number, reach random number, special symbol change pattern random number, etc.) when the game ball enters (enters) the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, and to determine whether or not to play a jackpot game based on the obtained special symbol determination information, the jackpot pattern if a jackpot is determined, the small hit pattern if a small hit is determined, the change pattern of the special symbol, etc. Note that the jackpot determination is also called a special symbol determination. A jackpot determination based on an entry into the first starting hole 45 (jackpot determination related to the first special symbol) is also called the first special symbol determination, and a jackpot determination based on an entry into the second starting hole 47 (jackpot determination related to the second special symbol) is also called the second special symbol determination.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of multiple (specifically, eight) LEDs. When a jackpot determination is made based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 45, the first special symbol changes and is displayed as a stop after a predetermined time has elapsed. The result of the jackpot determination is reported by the stopping state of this first special symbol. Specifically, in the first special symbol display 60, the lighting state of the LED changes (moving lighting) at a predetermined cycle (32 ms), thereby displaying the variation of the first special symbol, and each LED of the first special symbol display 60 lights up in a state that reports the result of the jackpot determination (jackpot state or miss state (normal miss state or special miss state)), thereby displaying the stop of the first special symbol. In addition, when a jackpot determination is made based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 47, the second special symbol changes and is displayed as a stop after a predetermined time has elapsed. The result of the jackpot determination is reported by the stopping mode of this second special pattern. Specifically, the second special pattern is displayed by changing (moving) the lighting mode of the LEDs in the second special pattern display 61 at a predetermined cycle (32 ms), and the second special pattern is displayed as stopped by lighting each LED of the second special pattern display 61 in a mode that reports the result of the jackpot determination (jackpot mode, small win mode, or miss mode).

In this embodiment, a "jackpot" refers to a state in which a jackpot game (special game) is determined to be executed in the jackpot judgment. A "jackpot game" refers to a round game in which the large prize openings (first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) are converted from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined manner, which is played a predetermined number of times (e.g., four times, ten times, etc.) with intervals in between, and refers to a state that is advantageous for the player in that it is easy for the player to win prize balls. The period of a "jackpot game" may refer to the time when the opening is started by stopping and displaying the first special pattern or the second special pattern in a jackpot manner, and the time when the round game ends and the ending is completed.

The maximum number of times the large prize openings (first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) can be opened and the maximum opening time for each round of play are preset, but if a certain number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enter the large prize openings (balls enter the large prize openings) even before the maximum number of times or maximum opening time are reached, one round of play ends. In this embodiment, it is possible to play one of several types of large prize games (special games) that differ in the degree of advantage given to the player.

"Small hit" refers to a state in which it has been decided in the big hit judgment that a small hit game will be played. "Small hit game" refers to a state in which the first big winning opening 50 is converted from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined manner, and the game ball can pass through the specific area 52.

The normal symbol determination corresponds to obtaining normal symbol determination information (random number value for winning determination, random number value for normal symbol determination, random number value for normal symbol variation pattern determination, etc.) based on the passage (entry) of the game ball into the normal symbol gate 44, and determining whether or not to execute a winning game (auxiliary game) that opens the second starting hole 47 based on the obtained normal symbol determination information. When the normal symbol determination is performed, the normal symbol display 62 displays the variation of the normal symbol, and after a predetermined time has passed, a stationary normal symbol display is performed to notify the judgment result.

The normal symbol display 62 is composed of three LEDs, which flash at a specified interval or sequence when displaying a variable normal symbol. When a normal symbol is displayed stationary, the LEDs light up in a manner that notifies the result of the normal symbol determination (win or miss). The normal symbol display 62 also changes (moving lights up) the lighting mode of the LEDs at the same cycle (32 ms) as the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61.

In this embodiment, "win" refers to a state in which it has been determined in the normal symbol determination that an auxiliary game (a winning game) will be executed. "Auxiliary game" refers to a state in which the second starting hole 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

The maximum number of times the second start hole 47 can be opened and the maximum opening time during the auxiliary game (winning game) are preset, but the auxiliary game (winning game) ends when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enter the second start hole 47 even before the maximum number of times the balls can be opened and the maximum opening time are reached. In other words, the "auxiliary game" is in a state in which the conditions for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are likely to be met. In this embodiment, multiple types of auxiliary games (winning games) with different degrees of advantage to the player may be provided.

The first special symbol reserved indicator 63 is composed of two LEDs, and is intended to display the first reserved number (U1), which is the number of special symbol determination information (first reserved) stored when a gaming ball enters (enters) the first starting hole 45, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of first reserved items. Note that up to a maximum of four first reserved items can be stored, but the number may be more or less than four.

The second special symbol reserve indicator 64 is composed of two LEDs, and is intended to display the second reserve number (U2), which is the number of special symbol determination information (second reserve) stored when a game ball enters (enters) the second starting hole 47, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of second reserves. Note that, although a maximum of four second reserves can be stored, the number may be less or more than four, or no second reserves may be stored.

The normal symbol reserved indicator 65 is composed of two LEDs, and is intended to display the number of reserved normal symbols, which is the number of normal symbol judgment information (normal symbol reserved) stored when a game ball enters (passes) the normal symbol gate 44, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of reserved normal symbols. Note that up to four reserved normal symbols can be stored, but the number may be less or more than four, or no reserved normal symbols may be stored.

The first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can be configured with a seven-segment LED. For example, if the jackpot determination determines that there is a jackpot, numbers such as "3" or "7" can be displayed as static numbers, and if there is a loss, a static "-" can be displayed, and during the varying display, the light can be turned off and the "-" can be displayed alternately.

The round number indicator 66 is made up of six LEDs and is intended to display the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game) occurs. At the start of a jackpot game, the LEDs begin to light up in a predetermined manner indicating the number of rounds, remain lit during the jackpot game, and turn off the LEDs when the jackpot game ends. For example, if the jackpot game has three rounds, only the leftmost LED lights up, and if the jackpot game has ten rounds, all LEDs light up.

The right-hit indicator 67 is composed of one LED and is used to display a right-hit display that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right-side play area (so-called right hit). The LED remains lit during the big win state (big win play), the small win state (small win play), and the time-saving play state described below.

The status confirmation indicator 68 is composed of one LED, and is intended to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode described later is set. When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is entered, the LED starts to light up, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, the LED goes out. In this way, since the status confirmation indicator 68 is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine, it is possible to easily check whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. The status confirmation indicator 68 may be provided in any location, as long as it is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, the same display mode (illuminated display) is used regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but the display may be made so that it is possible to recognize which mode is set. For example, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be illuminated in the setting change mode and flashing in the setting confirmation mode, or vice versa.

In addition, in this embodiment, a status confirmation indicator 68 is provided as a dedicated indicator to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, but it may be used in combination with other indicators. For example, in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol indicator 60, the second special symbol indicator 61, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63, the second special symbol reserved indicator 64, the round number indicator 66, the right hit indicator 67, etc. are turned off, so one or more LEDs of these indicators may be turned on.

A sub-information display 80 is provided inside the play area 5a. The sub-information display 80 includes a sub-first change indicator 81, a sub-second change indicator 82, a sub-first hold indicator 83, a sub-second hold indicator 84, a sub-regular change indicator 85, a sub-regular hold indicator 86, and a sub-right hit indicator 87. Note that the sub-information display 80 does not include an indicator such as the above-mentioned status confirmation indicator 68 that indicates that the mode is set to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, but an indicator corresponding to these may be provided.

The sub-first variable indicator 81 is for displaying (informing) whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed, and the sub-second variable indicator 82 is for displaying (informing) whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed, and each is composed of one LED. When the display of the corresponding special symbol begins to vary, the LED flashes at a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.25 seconds on → 0.25 seconds off), and when the corresponding special symbol is displayed stationary, it displays a stationary indication (off or on).

The result of the special symbol jackpot determination may be notified by the sub-first fluctuation indicator 81 or the sub-second fluctuation indicator 82. In this case, the LED may be lit in the event of a jackpot and turned off in the event of a miss.

The sub-first reserved indicator 83 is for displaying the reserved number (first reserved number) for the jackpot judgment of the first special symbol, and the sub-second reserved indicator 84 is for displaying the reserved number (second reserved number) for the jackpot judgment of the second special symbol, and each is composed of two LEDs. When the reserved number is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the reserved number is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, when the reserved number is "2", the left and right LEDs are turned on, when the reserved number is "3", the left LED flashes at a predetermined cycle (0.25 seconds on → 0.25 seconds off) and the right LED is turned on, and when the reserved number is "4", the left and right LEDs flash at a predetermined cycle (0.25 seconds on → 0.25 seconds off).

The sub-regular symbol variation display 85 is for displaying (informing) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the regular symbol starts, the LED flashes (varies) at a specified interval. Then, when the regular symbol is displayed in a static state, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights up in the case of a win, and goes out in the case of a loss) is displayed in a static state.

In addition, the sub-regular pattern change indicator 85 may be configured to flash while displaying the normal pattern change, and to light up or go out when the normal pattern stops, so that it is possible to know whether or not the normal pattern change is being displayed.

The sub-regular map reservation indicator 86 is used to display the number of reserved regular map memories (regular map reservation number) and is composed of two LEDs. When the regular map reservation number is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the regular map reservation number is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, when the regular map reservation number is "2", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned on, when the regular map reservation number is "3", the left LED flashes at a predetermined cycle and the right LED is turned on, and when the regular map reservation number is "4", the left and right LEDs flash at a predetermined cycle.

The sub right-hit indicator 87 is intended to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the right area of the play area 5a (so-called right hit), and is composed of one LED. The LED remains lit during a big win state (big win play), a small win state (small win play), or a time-saving play state, and is turned off in other play states.

A first image display device 70 is provided at the back of the performance space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40. A second image display device 71, which has a smaller display area than the first image display device 70, is provided at the bottom of the performance space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70. The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 may be liquid crystal displays or organic EL displays. A movable performance device 73 for executing role-play performances is provided at the top of the performance space 40a.

The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 display various effects in accordance with the progress of the game. The effects include a customer waiting demo effect that is performed when the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed, a variable effect (variable effect by the performance symbol 701) that is performed when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, a variable display (update variable) of the small symbol 702 that is performed when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and a jackpot effect that is performed during the execution of a jackpot game.

The second image display device 71 can also perform a moving effect by moving using a movable device (not shown) composed of a solenoid, motor, etc. while the first image display device 70 is performing a moving effect.

Specifically, the second image display device 71 performs a movement effect by moving up and down (rising and descending) between a standby position (lower position) located near the end of the first image display device 70 and a performance position (upper position) located near the center of the first image display device 70. Note that the movement direction of the second image display device 71 may be left and right or forward and backward, or the movement effect may be performed by operating the performance button 17.

The display unit (display area) of the first image display device 70 displays three performance symbols 701 (from left to right, sometimes called the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) and a small symbol 702. The performance symbols 701 and small symbols 702 are performance symbols that change in response to the change in the special symbol and stop in response to the stop of the special symbol. Whether or not a jackpot has been hit is notified based on the stopping mode of the performance symbols 701 and small symbols 702.

The first image display device 70 also displays a hold icon HA and the icon TI. The hold icon HA is an icon indicating the hold on the right to determine a jackpot related to the first special symbol, and up to four icons are displayed. The icon TI is an icon indicating the current fluctuation of the special symbol. The images displayed on the first image display device 70 will be described in detail later.

The movable performance device 73 has a first movable member 73a and a second movable member 73b that can be operated, and is capable of performing a role-playing performance by causing the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b to perform a predetermined operation while the variable display of the performance pattern 701 executed by the first image display device 70 is being executed. In addition, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided with a board lighting device 74 having multiple decorative LEDs, and are capable of emitting light in a predetermined manner while the role-playing performance is being executed.

Specifically, the first movable member 73a moves (rising and descending) between a standby position (first position) located above the top end of the first image display device 70, an appearance position (second position) below the top end and covering a part of the screen of the first image display device 70, and a performance position (third position) located in the center (lower) of the screen of the first image display device 70. The second movable member 73b moves between a standby position (first position) covering a part of the front of the first movable member 73a and a performance position retreating from the front of the first movable member 73a. The first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are hidden by the board surface in the standby position and cannot be or are difficult to see by the player. That is, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are usually hidden by the board surface. When a role-play performance is being performed, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are partially visible when they are moved to the second position, and are entirely visible when they are moved to the third position.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, there are provided a payout device 95 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball loans), a game ball storage section 96 for storing game balls supplied from island equipment etc. and supplying them to the payout device 95, a main control device 110A incorporating a main control section 100, a payout control device 120A incorporating a payout control section 120, a performance control device 130A incorporating a performance control section 130, a power supply device 160A incorporating a power supply board 160, and a game information output terminal board 90 for outputting game information to the outside of the game machine (information collection device such as a hall computer).

In addition, a cover member 23 with an opening and closing door is provided, which opens and closes in the left and right direction on one side around a rotation axis set on the left or right side so as to cover the upper part of the main control device and the entire performance control device from the rear, and the performance control device 130A is provided with a changeover switch 22, which is covered by the cover member 23, for switching adjustment modes related to adjusting the volume of the performance sound output from the audio output device 9 and the light intensity of the display devices (first image display device, second image display device) and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74).

On the front side of the main control device 110A, there are mounted the main control unit 100 for controlling the game, an RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal to clear the memory contents of the main RAM 100c of the main control unit 100 or to update a setting value (probability of determining a jackpot) which is the stage of the advantageous degree of the game, a setting key switch 112a for inputting a signal to switch to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode (described later) by operating the setting key, an information display 113 (see Figure 4) for displaying performance information and setting values that allow the actual performance of the gaming machine to be grasped, and other electronic components.

The information display 113 is composed of four seven-segment displays (113a to 113d) aligned horizontally. The two seven-segment displays from the left, 113a and 113b, form an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type), and the two seven-segment displays from the right, 113c and 113d, form a numeric segment for displaying numeric information indicating setting values and numerical values of the performance information.

(Overall block diagram of the gaming machine)
Next, a control means for controlling the progress of a game will be described with reference to the overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1.

The control configuration of this embodiment includes a main control unit 100 that controls the overall progress of the game (basic operations), a payout control unit 120 that controls the payout of game balls based on receiving a payout control command from the main control unit 100, a presentation control device 130A (presentation control unit 130) that controls presentation related to the game based on receiving a presentation control command from the main control unit 100, and a power supply board 160 that supplies power to the payout control unit 120 and the presentation control device 130A.

Note that the communication between the main control unit 100 and the payout control unit 120 is configured to enable bidirectional transmission and reception of commands, while the communication between the main control unit 100 and the performance control device 130A (performance control unit 130) is configured to enable unidirectional transmission of commands from the main control unit 100 to the performance control device 130A (performance control unit 130).

The main control unit 100 includes a main CPU 100a that performs calculation processing, a main ROM 100b that stores game control programs and the like, a main RAM 100c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports.

The input/output ports of the main control unit 100 are connected to the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the gate detection switch 44a, the first starting hole detection switch 45a, the second starting hole detection switch 47a, the second starting hole opening/closing solenoid 48b, the first large winning hole detection switch 50a, the first large winning hole opening/closing solenoid 51b, the second large winning hole detection switch 56a, the second large winning hole opening/closing solenoid 57b, the magnetic detection sensor 57a, the radio wave detection sensor 58a, the out ball detection switch 39a, the main information display 59, the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display 113. The input/output ports of the main control unit 100 are also connected to the game information output terminal board 90, the payout control unit 120, and the performance control unit 130.

The main CPU 100a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the game control program stored in the main ROM 100b, and performs calculation processing related to the game while using the main RAM 100c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing in response to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (solenoids, displays, etc.), control processing for sending and receiving various control commands, and control processing for sending game information to the outside of the gaming machine (hall computer, etc.) via the game information output terminal board 90.

The "game information" includes a start hole entry signal output each time a game ball enters the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, a pattern determination signal output each time the varying display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern ends, a big win signal output throughout big win play, a small win signal output throughout small win play, an open signal output throughout round play (opening of the big win hole), a signal output throughout the time-saving play state described below, and a security signal output when a situation occurs that poses a problem (threat) to the security of the gaming machine 1 (RWM clear, error, etc.).

The memory area of the main ROM 100b is arranged in order of a game ROM area in which programs and data related to the progress of the game are stored, and an information ROM area in which programs and data related to the performance display of the gaming machine are stored.

The game ROM area contains a game program area in which programs related to the game progress are stored, and a game data area in which data related to the game progress is stored.

The information ROM area contains an information program area in which programs related to the performance display of the gaming machine are stored, and an information data area in which data related to the performance display of the gaming machine is stored.

The memory area of the main RAM 100c contains a game RWM area that is used as a work area when executing game programs, and an information RWM area that is used as a work area when executing information programs.

The gaming RWM area contains a gaming work area that the gaming program uses as work, and a gaming stack area for temporarily saving data being processed by the gaming program.

The game work area is arranged in the following order: a setting value area for storing setting values, a judgment information area for storing judgment information (checksum, described below) for determining abnormalities in the RWM area, and a game data area for storing game data that changes as the game progresses.

The information RWM area contains an information work area that information programs use as work, and an information stack area for temporarily saving data being processed by information programs.

The information work area includes a performance information area for storing information related to the performance of the gaming machine 1, and an error information area for storing information related to various error judgments.

The following explains the relationship between the game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) that performs processing based on the game program and the information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) that performs processing based on the information program.

When the main CPU 100a performs processing based on a game program, it basically refers to the game data area, and refers to and updates the contents of the game RWM area while using the game RWM area as work. Also, when the main CPU 100a performs processing based on an information program, it basically refers to the information data area, and refers to and updates the contents of the information RWM area while using the information RWM area as work.

However, in processing based on the game program, the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referenced. Also, in processing based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referenced.

When processing based on the information program is performed, the flag register is saved to the game RWM area during processing based on the game program, and then the information program is called to execute processing based on the information program, and the flag register is restored from the game RWM area immediately after processing based on the information program ends and returns to the game program.

In addition, immediately after the information program starts, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved to the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, all registers used in the game program are saved to the information RWM area, and immediately before the information program ends, all registers used in the game program are restored from the information RWM area and the stack pointer of the game stack area is restored.

By doing this, data used by the game program can be protected when performing processing based on the information program, and no inconvenience occurs when returning from the information program to the game program.

The payout control unit 120 drives the payout device 95 to control the payout of game balls. The payout control unit 120 also drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 120 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs calculation processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores payout programs, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports.

The input/output port of the payout control unit 120 is connected to an open detection switch, a full detection switch, a payout ball detection switch for detecting game balls being paid out from the payout device 95, a payout motor for paying out game balls from the payout device 95, and a ball presence detection switch for detecting that game balls are stored in the game ball storage unit 96.

The payout CPU 121a receives an operating clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs calculation processing related to the payout of game balls while using the payout RAM 121c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing for paying out game balls from the payout device 95 in response to a payout control command from the main control unit 100, control processing for sending a command based on the result of the calculation processing to the main control unit 100, etc.

The payout control unit 120 is connected to a ball delivery solenoid, a touch sensor, a firing volume, a firing solenoid, etc.

When the payout control unit 120 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15 through a touch signal input from the touch sensor, it allows current to flow to the ball feed solenoid and the launch solenoid, and when it detects a change in the rotation angle of the launch handle 15 through a detection signal from the launch volume, it drives the ball feed solenoid and drives the launch solenoid to launch game balls (99.9 balls/min) with a launch strength that corresponds to the rotation angle of the launch handle 15.

The performance control device 130A includes a performance control unit 130 that performs overall control of the progress of the performance based on the reception of performance control commands from the main control unit 100, an image and audio control unit 140 that performs control processing of image display and audio output based on the reception of performance control commands from the performance control unit 130, and a lamp control unit 150 that performs control processing of various light-emitting components (LEDs, etc.) and various driving sources (motors, etc.) based on the reception of performance control commands from the performance control unit 130.

The performance control unit 130 includes a sub-CPU 130a that performs calculation processing, a sub-ROM 130b that stores the performance control program, a sub-RAM 130c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, an RTC 130d that keeps track of the date and time, and input/output ports.

The performance button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the input/output port of the performance control unit 130.

The sub-CPU 130a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the performance control program stored in the sub-ROM 130b, and performs calculation processing related to the performance while using the sub-RAM 130c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing for determining the performance mode of the variable performance, control processing for sending a performance control command based on the determination result to the image and sound control unit 140, control processing in response to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting devices, motors, etc.), etc.

The image and audio control unit 140 receives commands from the performance control unit 130 and controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 to display a specified image, and controls the audio output device 9 to output a specified voice or sound.

The image and audio control unit 140 includes an overall CPU 141a that performs overall control of image display and audio output based on reception of a performance control command from the performance control unit 130, an overall ROM 141b in which an overall control program is stored, an overall RAM 141c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, a VDP 145 that generates images to be output to the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 based on reception of a display control command (display list) from the overall CPU 141a, a CGROM 146 in which image data and the like are stored, an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) that controls the audio output device 9 based on reception of an audio control command from the overall CPU 141a, and an audio ROM in which audio data and the like are stored.

The general CPU 141a receives an operating clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the general control program stored in the general ROM 141b, and performs calculation processing related to the performance while using the general RAM 141c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing for generating display control commands (display lists) that indicate the performance images to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and sending them to the VDP 145, and control processing for generating audio control commands that indicate the performance sounds to be output from the audio output device 9 and sending them to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

The image and audio control unit 140 is also connected to the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, and the audio output device 9. The image and audio control unit 140 (VDP 145) generates images at a predetermined frame time interval (e.g., 1/30 seconds) and outputs the generated images to the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71. As a result, images including, for example, a performance pattern 701, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71. Furthermore, sound is output by outputting an audio signal generated by the image and audio control unit 140 (audio control unit 148) to the audio output device 9 (speaker).

The performance control device 130A is also connected to a changeover switch 22. The changeover switch 22 is a switch for setting the volume value of the sound (performance sound such as background music or sound effects) output from the sound output device 9. The changeover switch 22 may be a rotatable dial volume. For example, the volume value is set to five levels from "1" to "5" depending on the operation of the changeover switch 22. The changeover switch 22 is also used as a switch for setting the light intensity value of the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, and the board lighting device 74. The light intensity value is set to five levels from "1" to "5" depending on the operation of the changeover switch 22.

The changeover switch 22 may be provided at a predetermined position on the front of the gaming machine 1, rather than on the back. For example, a tiltable lever or a rotatable dial volume may be provided on the left side of the lower tray 11 on the front of the gaming machine as a changeover switch that can adjust the volume and light intensity.

In addition, the performance control device 130A is connected to the performance button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a.

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs calculation processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores the lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports.

The input/output ports of the lamp control unit 150 are connected to the frame lighting device 10, the movable performance device 73, the board lighting device 74, the sub-information display 80, the performance button drive device 17b (performance button drive motor, performance button vibration motor), and the performance button light-emitting LED 17c.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs calculation processing related to the performance while using the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing of the frame lighting device 10, the performance button driving device 17b, the performance button light-emitting LED 17c, the movable performance device 73, and the board lighting device 74.

The power supply board 160 generates the main power supply (operating power supply) required for the operation of the gaming machine from a power supply supplied from outside the gaming machine, and supplies the main power supply to the gaming machine 1 (main control unit 100, payout control unit 120, performance control device 130A, and various electronic components) (corresponding to a power supply supply means). The power supply board 160 is equipped with a power interruption detection circuit 162 that detects whether the supplied power supply voltage has dropped (a power outage has occurred) and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control unit 100 based on the drop in power supply voltage (occurrence of a power outage), and a backup power supply circuit 163 that supplies backup power to the main control unit 100 in the event of a power interruption (power outage).

The power supply board 160 also has a power switch that can be operated by an arcade staff member to switch between an ON state that supplies main power to the gaming machine 1 (main control unit 100, payout control unit 120, performance control device 130A, and various electronic components) and an OFF state that stops the supply. When the power switch is turned ON, the supply of main power begins and the gaming machine 1 starts operating. Note that the supply of backup power to the main control unit 100 is maintained even when the power switch is turned OFF.

The power interruption detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a voltage drop detection signal to the main control unit 100 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, and stops outputting the voltage drop detection signal when the power supply voltage exceeds the predetermined value while the voltage drop detection signal is being output.

The backup power circuit 163 is equipped with a capacitor that stores electricity when the gaming machine is energized, and in the event of a power outage (blackout), the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is supplied to the main RAM 100c of the main control unit 100. This allows the contents stored in the main RAM 100c to be retained even in the event of a power outage (blackout), and after recovery from the power outage (blackout), the game control state can be restored to the state before the power outage (blackout).

Although backup power is not supplied to the payout control unit 120 and the performance control unit 130, backup power may be supplied to the payout control unit 120 and the performance control unit 130 so that the contents stored in the payout RAM 121c and the sub-RAM 130c are retained even in the event of a power outage. Backup power may also be supplied to only one of the payout control unit 120 and the performance control unit 130.

(Game status)
Here, a description will be given of game states of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, the game states of the gaming machine 1 include a normal game state, a time-saving game state A, and a time-saving game state B.

The normal game state is the initial state, and is the game state that is set when the RWM clear process or the setting change process is performed and the gaming machine 1 is started. Specifically, in the "normal game state", the probability of being determined as a winning in the normal pattern determination that is performed on the condition that the gaming ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44 (normal pattern winning probability) is, for example, 1/1.1, the average change time of the normal pattern (normal pattern change time) is about 60 seconds, and the opening time of the second start gate 47 when a winning is won (special 2 start gate opening time) is 0.05 seconds.

In the time-saving game state A, the probability of winning a normal symbol is 1/1.1, the same as in the normal game state, the normal symbol change time is about 59.5 seconds, and the special 2 start hole opening time is set to 0.051 seconds. In the time-saving game state A, the change time of the normal symbol is slightly shorter than in the normal game state, and the opening time of the second start hole 47 is slightly longer. For this reason, the time-saving game state A can be said to be a more advantageous state for the player than the normal game state, but the ease of winning in the second start hole 47 is almost the same as in the normal game state, and it is a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to win in the second start hole 47. In the following, the time-saving game state A in which the ease of winning in the second start hole 47 is almost the same as in the normal game state may be referred to as the "low-base time-saving state" or "slight time-saving state".

In time-saving game state B, the probability of winning a normal symbol is 1/1.1, the same as in the normal game state, the normal symbol change time is about 1 second, and the opening time of the second start hole 47 in the event of a winning combination (special 2 start hole opening time) is set to 3 seconds. In time-saving game state A, the change time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the normal game state, and the opening time of the second start hole 47 is longer. For this reason, time-saving game state B is a more advantageous state for the player than the normal game state and time-saving game state A, and is a state in which it is easier to win the second start hole 47. Hereinafter, time-saving game state B, in which it is easier for the game ball to win the second start hole 47, is referred to as the "high base time-saving state."

In addition, the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state B are set so that the normal map change time and the special 2 start port opening time are more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, but it may be configured so that only one of the normal map change time, the special 2 start port opening time, and the normal map winning probability is more advantageous.

In addition, in gaming machines according to other embodiments, the probability of winning a normal symbol may be different between the normal game state and the time-saving game state. For example, in the normal game state, the probability of winning a normal symbol may be set to 1/100, in time-saving game state A (low-base time-saving state), the probability of winning a normal symbol may be set to 1/99, and in time-saving game state B (high-base time-saving state), the probability of winning a normal symbol may be set to 1/1.1. In addition, gaming machines according to other embodiments have a low probability state in which the probability of being determined as a jackpot in the jackpot determination (special symbol determination) is relatively low (probability of winning a special symbol), and a high probability state in which the probability of winning a special symbol is relatively high, and in the low probability state, the probability of winning a normal symbol may be set to, for example, 1/100, and in the high probability state, the probability of winning a normal symbol may be set to 99/100.

(Big hit determination table)
Next, a jackpot in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table for the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment. When a first special symbol determination is made based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 45, the first special symbol (written as "Special 1" in the figure) fluctuates. When a second special symbol determination is made based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 47, the second special symbol (written as "Special 2" in the figure) fluctuates. As shown in FIG. 5, when the jackpot random number value obtained when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 45 is a value (0 to 199) indicating a jackpot, it is determined to be a jackpot. The probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the first special symbol determination is 1/300. When a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, a special symbol (jackpot symbol) indicating a jackpot is displayed in a stopped state after a predetermined variation time has elapsed, and a special game is played. In addition, in the first special symbol determination, if the obtained jackpot random number is a value (200 to 799) indicating a special miss, it is determined to be a special miss. The probability of being determined to be a special miss as a result of the first special symbol determination is 1/100. Details will be described later, but if it is determined to be a special miss, the special miss symbol that provides time reduction after a predetermined variable time has elapsed is stopped, and the game moves to a time-reduction game state. In addition, if the obtained jackpot random number is not any of the above, it is determined to be a normal miss.

In addition, if the jackpot random number value obtained when the game ball enters the second starting hole 47 is a value indicating a jackpot (0 to 199), it is determined to be a jackpot, and after a predetermined fluctuation time has passed, a special symbol indicating a jackpot is displayed stationary, and a special game is played. In addition, in the second special symbol determination, if the jackpot random number value obtained is a value indicating a small jackpot (200 to 799), it is determined to be a small jackpot. The probability of determining a small jackpot in the second special symbol determination is 1/80. If it is determined to be a small jackpot, a small jackpot game is played, and if the game ball passes through the specific area 52 during the small jackpot game, it is determined to be a jackpot (type 2 jackpot), and a special game is played.

(Pattern Determination Table)
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol determination table of the gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment. FIG. 6(a) is an example of a big win symbol determination table for determining a big win symbol (type of big win) when the result of the special symbol determination is determined to be a big win. FIG. 6(b) is an example of a small win symbol determination table for determining a small win symbol (type of small win) when the result of the special symbol determination is determined to be a small win. FIG. 6(c) is an example of a special miss symbol determination table for determining a special miss symbol (type of special miss) when the result of the special symbol determination is determined to be a special miss. FIG. 6(d) is an example of a normal miss symbol determination table for determining a normal miss symbol when the result of the special symbol determination is determined to be a normal miss.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), when the result of the special symbol determination is determined to be a jackpot, a special symbol (jackpot symbol) indicating a jackpot is determined based on the jackpot symbol random number value obtained when the game ball enters the starting hole. Specifically, when the first special symbol determination is determined to be a jackpot, if the obtained jackpot symbol random number value is 0 to 39, the special symbol A is determined. When the first special symbol determination is determined to be a jackpot, the probability that the special symbol A is determined is 40%. When the special symbol A is displayed as a stop, a round game is played four times as a special game in which the second large winning hole 56 is converted from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined manner. A jackpot in which the special symbol A is displayed as a stop is sometimes called a "1 type 4R jackpot A". Also, when the first special symbol determination is determined to be a jackpot, if the obtained jackpot symbol random number value is 40 to 99, the special symbol B is determined. When the first special symbol determination determines a jackpot, the probability that special symbol B will be determined is 60%. When special symbol B is displayed, a special game is played in which the second large prize opening 56 is converted from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined manner four times. A jackpot in which special symbol B is displayed is sometimes called a "Type 1 4R jackpot B."

In addition, when the second special pattern determination determines a jackpot, if the obtained jackpot pattern random number value is between 0 and 44, special pattern C is determined. The probability that special pattern C will be determined when the second special pattern determination determines a jackpot is 45%. When special pattern C is displayed as a stop, 10 rounds of play are played as a special game in which second large prize winning port 56 is converted from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined manner. A jackpot in which special pattern C is displayed as a stop is sometimes called a "Type 1 10R jackpot C." In addition, when the second special pattern determination determines a jackpot, if the obtained jackpot pattern random number value is between 45 and 99, special pattern D is determined. The probability that special pattern D will be determined when the second special pattern determination determines a jackpot is 55%. When the special symbol D is stopped and displayed, a special game is played in which the second large prize opening 56 is converted from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined manner three times. A jackpot in which the special symbol D is stopped and displayed is sometimes called a "Type 1 3R jackpot D."

In addition, when the second special symbol determination determines a small win, if the acquired small win symbol random number value is 0 to 54, the special symbol Ka is determined. The probability that the special symbol Ka is determined when the second special symbol determination determines a small win is 55%. When the special symbol Ka is displayed, a small win game is played in which the first large winning hole 50 is converted from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined manner, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 52 during the small win game, a type 2 big win game is played in which a round game is played nine times in which the second large winning hole 56 is converted from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined manner. This small win game and type 2 big win game are combined to play a substantial 10R big win game. For this reason, a big win associated with the stop display of the special symbol Ka is sometimes called a "type 2 substantial 10R big win Ka." If the game ball does not pass through the specific area 52 during the small win game, the type 2 big win game will not be played.

In addition, when the second special symbol determination determines a small win, if the obtained small win symbol random number value is between 55 and 89, the special symbol Kb is determined. The probability that the special symbol Kb will be determined when the second special symbol determination determines a small win is 35%. When the special symbol Kb is stopped and displayed, a small win game is played in which the first large winning opening 50 is converted from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined manner, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 52 during the small win game, a type 2 big win game is played in which a round game is played twice in which the second large winning opening 56 is converted from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined manner. This small win game and type 2 big win game are combined to play a substantial 3R big win game, and a big win associated with the stopped display of the special symbol Kb is sometimes called a "type 2 substantial 3R big win Kb."

In addition, when the second special symbol determination determines a small win, if the obtained small win symbol random number value is 90 to 99, the special symbol Kc is determined. The probability that the special symbol Kc is determined when the second special symbol determination determines a small win is 10%. When the special symbol Kc is displayed, a small win game is played in which the first large winning opening 50 is converted from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined manner, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 52 during the small win game, a type 2 big win game is played in which a round game is played twice in which the second large winning opening 56 is converted from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined manner. This small win game and type 2 big win game are combined to play a substantial 3R big win game, and a big win associated with the stop display of the special symbol Kc is sometimes called a "type 2 substantial 3R big win Kc."

Furthermore, if the first special pattern determination determines a special miss, and the obtained special pattern random number value is between 0 and 49, special pattern TH1 is determined, if the obtained special pattern random number value is between 50 and 79, special pattern TH2 is determined, and if the obtained special pattern random number value is between 80 and 99, special pattern TH3 is determined. If the first special pattern determination determines a special miss, there is a 50% chance that special pattern TH1 will be determined, a 30% chance that special pattern TH2 will be determined, and a 20% chance that special pattern TH3 will be determined. If special patterns TH1 to TH3 are stopped and displayed, special play is not performed and the game moves to a time-saving play state. A miss in which the special symbol TH1 is displayed is called a "special miss TH1," a miss in which the special symbol TH2 is displayed is called a "special miss TH2," and a miss in which the special symbol TH3 is displayed is called a "special miss TH3."

In addition, if the first special pattern determination is a normal miss, the special pattern H1 indicating a normal miss H1 is displayed with a 100% probability, and if the second special pattern determination is a normal miss, the special pattern H2 indicating a normal miss H2 is displayed with a 100% probability.

Here, the game flow of the gaming machine 1 will be described. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of the game flow of the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of the game state that is set after a jackpot game when the result of the special pattern determination is a jackpot. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of the game state that is set after a special pattern indicating a special miss stops when the result of the special pattern determination is a special miss.

In normal game mode, the game is basically played by hitting from the left, and the first special symbol is determined. As shown in Figures 7 and 8, if a 1-type 4R jackpot A (special symbol A) is won in normal game mode, the game transitions to the high base time-saving state after the special game. In this case, the number of time-saving times J in the high base time-saving state is set to "100". In the high base time-saving state, if the special symbol changes 100 times without a jackpot, the game returns to the normal game mode. On the other hand, if a 1-type 4R jackpot B (special symbol B) is won in normal game mode, the game transitions to the normal game mode after the special game.

Also, as shown in Figures 7 and 9, when any of the special symbols TH1 to 3 (special miss TH1 to 3) is stopped during normal gameplay, the game transitions to a low base time-saving state. When the special symbol TH1 stops, the number of time-saving times B in the low base time-saving state is set to "500", when the special symbol TH2 stops, the number of time-saving times B is set to "300", and when the special symbol TH3 stops, the number of time-saving times B is set to "100".

In the low base time-saving state, the game is basically played by hitting from the left, and the first special symbol judgment is performed. In the low base time-saving state, if a 1-type 4R jackpot A (special symbol A) is won, the game will transition to the high base time-saving state after the special game. In this case, the number of time-saving times J in the high base time-saving state is set to "100". Also, if a 1-type 4R jackpot B (special symbol B) is won in the low base time-saving state, the game will transition to the normal game state after the special game. Note that even in the high base time-saving state, if the player hits from the left or if the first special symbol judgment is pending, the first special symbol judgment may be performed. In the high base time-saving state, if a 1-type 4R jackpot A (special symbol A) is won, the game will transition to the high base time-saving state after the special game. Also, if a 1-type 4R jackpot B (special symbol B) is won in the high base time-saving state, the game will transition to the high base time-saving state after the special game.

In addition, if the special symbol TH1 is displayed as a stopped symbol in the low base time-saving state, the number of time-saving times J is set to "100" and the state transitions to the high base time-saving state. In addition, if the special symbol TH1 is displayed as a stopped symbol in the high base time-saving state, the game state is maintained (Figure 9). On the other hand, if the special symbol TH2 or TH3 is displayed as a stopped symbol in the low base time-saving state, the low base time-saving state is maintained. In the low base time-saving state, if a jackpot is not determined and the special symbol TH1 is not displayed as a stopped symbol, the state is returned to the normal game state at the end of the Bth variation of the special symbol. In addition, if the special symbol TH2 or TH3 is displayed as a stopped symbol in the high base time-saving state, the high base time-saving state is maintained (Figure 9).

On the other hand, in the high base time-saving state, play is performed by hitting the right button, and the second special symbol determination is performed repeatedly in a short period of time. In the high base time-saving state, if the second special symbol determination results in a 1-type 10R jackpot C (special symbol C) or a 1-type 3R jackpot D (special symbol D), the number of time-saving turns J is set to "100" after the special play, and the state transitions to the high base time-saving state.

In addition, if a small hit Ka or Kb is won in the second special pattern judgment in the high base time-saving state, the number of time-saving times J is set to "100" after the special game, and the state transitions to the high base time-saving state. In addition, if a small hit Kc is won in the second special pattern judgment in the high base time-saving state, the state transitions to the normal game state after the special game.

As is clear from the diagram, in the normal game state, the player will only transition to the high base time-saving state, which is advantageous to the player, if the first special pattern judgment results in a 1-type 4R jackpot A. On the other hand, in the low base time-saving state, the player will transition to the high base time-saving state if the first special pattern judgment results in a 1-type 4R jackpot A or if the special pattern TH1 is displayed in a stopped state. For this reason, the low base time-saving state is a state in which it is easier to transition to the high base time-saving state than the normal game state, and can be said to be an advantageous state for the player.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is set to a high base time-saving state when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a specified number (e.g., 800 times) after the RWM clear process or setting change process described below is performed, or after a jackpot game is played. In this case, the number of time-saving times may be set to, for example, 500 times. The RWM clear process is a process that returns the gaming machine 1 to its factory state. Furthermore, the setting change process is a process that changes the setting value of the gaming machine.

(Performance mode)
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a presentation mode is set according to the game state. The presentation mode is a form of a presentation pattern that changes according to the change of the special pattern, a background image, a reserved icon and the icon, a reserved icon and/or a reserved base showing the display area of the icon, a mode display showing the presentation mode, etc. These forms differ depending on the presentation mode.

In this embodiment, there is a normal mode that is set in the normal game state, a special mode that is set in the low base time-saving state (time-saving game state A), and a time-saving mode that is set in the high base time-saving state (time-saving game state B).

Figure 10 shows an example of an image displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 in normal mode. Figure 10(a) shows an image when the special symbol is displayed stationary, and Figure 10(b) shows an image immediately after the special symbol starts to change.

As shown in FIG. 10, a background image 700 is displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 (hereinafter referred to as the "main screen"). The background image is an image that serves as the background for each image displayed on the screen (performance pattern 701, small pattern 702, first reserved icon HA, icon TI, first reserved number SHA, second reserved number SHB, and other preview images displayed during variable performances, etc.), and is an image with a lower display priority than each image. The images displayed on the screen are managed by multiple layers, and the background image is drawn on the innermost layer (the layer with the lowest display priority).

Different background images are displayed depending on the presentation mode. For example, in the normal mode, a background image for the normal mode is displayed. In the normal mode, for example, an image of a daytime scene such as a beach or a cityscape is displayed as the background image. In the special mode, a background image for the special mode is displayed. In the special mode, an image of an evening scene such as a beach or a cityscape similar to that in the normal mode is displayed as the background image. In the time-saving mode, a background image for the time-saving mode is displayed. In the time-saving mode, a background image different from that in the normal mode and the special mode (for example, an image of a nighttime scene) is displayed as the background image. Note that multiple background images may be prepared for display in each mode. For example, the normal mode, the special mode, and the time-saving mode each have multiple modes (stages), and the background image may be different for each stage.

In the central area of the main screen, a performance pattern 701 corresponding to the special pattern is displayed. The performance pattern 701 is displayed in front of the background image (with priority over the background image). The performance pattern 701 is composed of three performance patterns 701. The three performance patterns 701 are called, from left to right, left pattern 701L, middle pattern 701C, and right pattern 701R. The performance pattern 701 includes, for example, a number pattern showing numbers from "1" to "9" and a character image displayed as the background of the number pattern. In addition to (or instead of) the number pattern, a character pattern represented by letters such as alphabets, kanji, and kana characters such as "A" to "F" may be used. The multiple performance patterns 701 start to change in response to the start of the change display of the special pattern, and stop display in response to the stop of the change display of the special pattern. During a variable performance using performance pattern 701, the character image in performance pattern 701 may separate, leaving only the number pattern.

Different types of effect patterns 701 are used depending on the effect mode. For example, in normal mode, effect patterns for normal mode are used. In special mode, effect patterns for special mode are used. In time-saving mode, effect patterns for time-saving mode are used. Note that multiple effect patterns may be prepared for display in each mode. For example, normal mode, special mode, and time-saving mode each have multiple modes (stages), and the display mode of the effect patterns may differ for each stage.

The performance symbols 701 are displayed in a manner (missing or winning) that notifies the result of the special symbol determination in accordance with the display of the special symbol. If the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, a specific symbol combination that is a combination of the same performance symbols 701, such as "777" or "555", is displayed in a stopped state. If the result of the special symbol determination is a miss (normal miss or special miss), a combination of symbols in which at least one of the three performance symbols 701 is different from the others (for example, "121" or "248") is displayed in a stopped state. Note that different modes of performance symbols may be displayed when the result of the special symbol determination is a normal miss and when it is a special miss. For example, when it is a special miss, the performance symbols may be displayed in a manner that allows the player to easily recognize that it is a special miss (for example, a specific combination that suggests that it is a special miss, or a combination that includes a specific symbol that suggests that it is a special miss). Conversely, the same type of effect pattern may be displayed when the result of the special pattern determination is a normal miss and when it is a special miss.

In addition, a small pattern 702 is displayed in the lower left area of the screen. The small pattern 702 is a type of performance pattern corresponding to the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern), and is composed of three small patterns 701 (left small pattern, medium small pattern, right small pattern). The small pattern 702 is a pattern smaller than the performance pattern 701, and is composed of number patterns indicating numbers from "1" to "9" similar to the performance pattern 701, but does not include a character image like the performance pattern 701. The small pattern 702 is displayed in a variable manner according to the variable display of the special pattern, and is displayed in a stopped manner according to the stopped display of the special pattern. The display mode of the small pattern 702 is the same in any performance mode. The display mode of the small pattern 702 may differ depending on the performance mode. For example, the mode of the small pattern 702 (display mode, size, color, display position of the number image) may differ in each of the normal mode, special mode, and time-saving mode. Also, the appearance of the small pattern 702 may be the same in normal mode and special mode, and may be different in normal mode, special mode, and time-saving mode. Also, the appearance of the small pattern 702 may be the same in normal mode and time-saving mode, and may be different in normal mode, time-saving mode, and special mode.

In addition, the bottom area of the screen displays a reserved base 703. The reserved base 703 indicates the reserved icon and the display position of that icon. A number of first reserved icons HA (HA1 to HA4) corresponding to the first reserved number (U1) of the first special pattern are displayed above the reserved base 703. A maximum of four first reserved icons HA are displayed. The first reserved icons HA1 to HA4 are consumed in order from the right.

In addition, in the normal game state, the second reserve icon HB corresponding to winning in the second start hole 47 is not displayed. In addition, even in the normal game state, if a game ball wins in the second start hole 47, the second reserve icon HB indicating the reservation of the second special pattern may be displayed in an area different from the display area of the first reserve icon HA (for example, the area to the right of the icon TI).

When the first special pattern starts to change, each first hold icon HA shifts to the right, and the first hold icon HA1 is displayed as the icon TI. The icon TI is an icon that corresponds to the special pattern that is changing. The icon TI is displayed in the same manner as the first hold icon HA, but the icon TI is a larger image than the first hold icon HA.

The first hold icon HA and the icon TI are displayed in different display forms depending on the presentation mode. The hold base 703 may also be displayed in different display forms depending on the presentation mode.

The first hold icon HA and the icon TI can change from a normal state (white), which does not indicate a jackpot expectation, to a special state (blue, red, gold, rainbow) which indicates a jackpot expectation. The special state indicates a higher jackpot expectation than the normal state, with the expectation increasing in the order of blue, red, gold, and rainbow. Specifically, the first hold icon HA is changed based on the results of a pre-determination. Also, the icon TI is changed based on the results of a pre-determination and/or a special pattern determination.

In addition, the lower right area of the main screen displays the first reserved number SHA, which is a numerical representation of the first reserved number (U1) indicating the reserved number of the first special symbol, and the second reserved number SHB, which is a numerical representation of the second reserved number (U2) indicating the reserved number of the second special symbol.

The first reserved number SHA and the second reserved number SHB are displayed in the same manner (number image, size, display position) regardless of the presentation mode. The position or size of the first reserved number SHA and the second reserved number SHB may differ depending on the presentation mode, and at least one of the first reserved number SHA and the second reserved number SHB may be hidden depending on the presentation mode. For example, in the normal mode and the special mode, only the first reserved number SHA may be displayed, and in the time-saving mode, both the first reserved number SHA and the second reserved number SHB may be displayed, or only the second reserved number SHB may be displayed. Also, in the normal mode and the special mode, the first reserved number SHA and the second reserved number SHB may be displayed, and in the time-saving mode, neither the first reserved number SHA nor the second reserved number SHB may be displayed.

In addition, a fourth pattern 705a corresponding to the first special pattern and a fourth pattern 705b corresponding to the second special pattern are displayed in the upper right area of the main screen. The fourth pattern 705a changes (blinks) in response to the changing display of the first special pattern, and is stationary in response to the stationary display of the first special pattern. In addition, the fourth pattern 705b changes (blinks) in response to the changing display of the second special pattern, and is stationary in response to the stationary display of the second special pattern.

The fourth symbols 705a and b are displayed in the same manner (color, size, display position) regardless of the presentation mode. Note that the position and size of the fourth symbols 705a and b may differ depending on the presentation mode.

In addition, a mode display 708 indicating the current presentation mode is displayed in the upper left area of the screen. In this embodiment, multiple mode displays 708 corresponding to the presentation mode are provided. Note that multiple mode displays 708 indicating a normal mode, multiple mode displays 708 indicating a special mode, and multiple mode displays 708 indicating a time-saving mode may also be provided.

For example, if a volume adjustment operation is performed using the cross key 19, a volume gauge 720 is displayed.

Here, adjustment of the volume and light intensity using the cross key 19 (adjustment of the performance effect) and adjustment of the volume and light intensity using the changeover switch 22 (adjustment of the performance effect) will be described. In this embodiment of the gaming machine 1, various performance sounds related to the performance can be adjusted using the cross key 19 or the changeover switch 22. For example, while the special symbol is changing, it is possible to adjust the volume of the background music during the changing performance, the sound related to the preview performance, the sound related to the emphasis performance described below, and the sound while the performance gimmick is operating. In addition, the volume of the performance sounds can be adjusted while waiting for customers (when the special symbol is not changing and a jackpot is not being played).

The volume of the effect sounds is determined by adjusting a basic volume value preset for each effect sound based on the volume value set by the changeover switch 22 and the volume value set using the cross key 19. For example, an upper limit value for the volume may be set by the changeover switch 22, and the volume value may be set to a value equal to or less than the upper limit value using the cross key 19. For example, if the volume value is set to "4" by the changeover switch 22, the volume value may be set to a value equal to or less than "4" using the cross key 19. The product of the volume value set by the changeover switch 22 and the volume value set using the cross key 19 may also be set as the volume value. The same applies to setting the light intensity value using the cross key 19 and the changeover switch 22.

When a volume adjustment operation is performed using the cross key 19 while waiting for customers, a volume operation sound is output and the volume gauge 720 indicating the volume value starts to be displayed. Each time a volume adjustment operation is performed using the cross key 19, the same volume operation sound is output and the volume gauge 720 changes by "1". The scale of the volume operation sound may differ depending on the volume. The volume gauge 720 is displayed, for example, on the right side of the screen, superimposed on the performance pattern 701. The volume gauge 720 is not superimposed on the small pattern 702 and the fourth pattern. The volume gauge 720 is hidden a predetermined time after the volume adjustment operation has been performed (for example, 5 seconds). On the other hand, when a volume adjustment operation is performed using the changeover switch 22 while waiting for customers, the volume operation sound is not output and the volume gauge indicating the volume value does not start to be displayed. When a volume adjustment operation is performed using the changeover switch 22 while the volume gauge is displayed, the displayed volume gauge changes.

When the light amount adjustment operation is performed using the cross key 19 while waiting for customers, a light amount operation sound is output and a light amount gauge showing the light amount value starts to be displayed. The light amount operation sound and the volume operation sound may be different or the same. The display mode of the light amount gauge may be different or the same as the display mode of the volume gauge 720. Each time the light amount adjustment operation is performed using the cross key 19, the same light amount operation sound is output and the light amount gauge changes by "1". The tone of the light amount operation sound may differ depending on the light amount. The light amount gauge is displayed superimposed on the performance pattern and is hidden after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the light amount adjustment operation was performed. On the other hand, when the light amount adjustment operation is performed using the changeover switch 22 while waiting for customers, the light amount operation sound is not output and the light amount gauge showing the light amount value does not start to be displayed. When the light amount adjustment operation is performed using the changeover switch 22 while the light amount gauge is displayed, the displayed light amount gauge changes.

In addition, when a volume adjustment operation is performed using the cross key 19 while the special pattern is changing, a volume operation sound is output and the volume gauge 720 starts to be displayed. Note that while the special pattern is changing, the output of the volume operation sound may be restricted, while the display of the volume gauge may not be restricted. Conversely, while the display of the volume gauge is restricted, while the output of the volume operation sound may not be restricted, while the special pattern is changing. In addition, each time a volume adjustment operation is performed using the cross key 19, the same volume operation sound is output and the volume gauge changes by "1". Note that the scale of the volume operation sound may differ depending on the volume value. In addition, the volume gauge 702 is displayed superimposed on the performance pattern (FIG. 10(b)), and is hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 5 seconds) after the volume adjustment operation is performed. Note that when the special pattern starts to change and when it is stopped and displayed, the volume gauge 720 may be hidden. In this case, the volume operation sound may be output. In addition, when the special symbol starts to change and when it is stopped, the volume gauge 720 may be hidden and the output of the volume operation sound may be restricted. In addition, when the special symbol starts to change and when it is stopped, the volume may not be adjustable. In addition, when the special symbol starts to change and when it is stopped, the volume may be adjustable, but the output of the volume gauge and the volume operation sound may be restricted. In addition, when the special symbol starts to change and when it is stopped, the performance symbol 701 may be displayed preferentially (on the front layer) over the volume gauge 720. On the other hand, if a volume adjustment operation is performed using the changeover switch 22 during the changeover of the special symbol, the volume operation sound is not output and the volume gauge 720 is not displayed. If a volume adjustment operation is performed using the changeover switch 22 while the volume gauge 720 is displayed, the volume gauge 720 being displayed changes. In addition, if a volume adjustment operation is performed using the changeover switch 22 during the changeover of the special symbol, the volume gauge 720 may be displayed. Furthermore, if a volume adjustment operation is performed using the changeover switch 22 while the volume gauge is displayed, the displayed volume gauge 720 does not need to change.

In addition, when a light amount adjustment operation is performed using the cross key 19 while the special symbol is changing, a light amount operation sound is output and the light amount gauge starts to be displayed. Note that while the special symbol is changing, the output of the light amount operation sound may be limited, while the display of the light amount gauge may not be limited. Conversely, while the display of the light amount gauge is limited, while the output of the light amount operation sound may not be limited, while the special symbol is changing. Also, while the special symbol is changing, the output of the light amount operation sound may be limited, while the volume adjustment operation may be output. Also, each time a light amount adjustment operation is performed using the cross key 19, the same light amount operation sound is output and the light amount gauge changes by "1". Note that the scale of the light amount operation sound may differ depending on the light amount value. Also, the light amount gauge is displayed superimposed on the performance symbol, and is hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 5 seconds) after the light amount adjustment operation is performed. Note that, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and when it starts to change, the light amount gauge may be hidden. Furthermore, when the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state and when it starts to change, the performance symbol may be displayed with priority over the light intensity gauge. On the other hand, if a light intensity adjustment operation is performed using the changeover switch 22 while the special symbol is changing, no light intensity operation sound is output, and the light intensity gauge indicating the light intensity value does not start to be displayed. Note that if a light intensity adjustment operation is performed using the changeover switch 22 while the special symbol is changing, the light intensity gauge may start to be displayed. Also, if a light intensity adjustment operation is performed using the changeover switch 22 while the light intensity gauge is displayed, the displayed light intensity gauge changes. Note that if a light intensity adjustment operation is performed using the changeover switch 22 while the light intensity gauge is displayed, the displayed light intensity gauge does not have to change.

The volume gauge and light intensity gauge are displayed in the same display mode regardless of the presentation mode, and are displayed in the same display mode whether waiting for customers or changing. Furthermore, when a volume operation sound (or light intensity operation sound) is output, the same sound is output regardless of the presentation mode, and the same sound is output at any timing. Furthermore, regardless of when the volume gauge or light intensity gauge begins to be displayed during the change of the special pattern, its display time is constant. Furthermore, the display time when the volume gauge or light intensity gauge begins to be displayed while waiting for customers is longer than the display time when the volume gauge or light intensity gauge begins to be displayed during the change of the special pattern.

The display mode of the volume gauge and/or light gauge may be different when the special pattern is changing and when waiting for customers. The display mode of the volume gauge and/or light gauge may be the same when the special pattern is changing and when waiting for customers.

The volume gauge and light gauge may be displayed even during a jackpot game. The display of the volume gauge and light gauge may be restricted during a jackpot game.

In addition, the number of steps for adjusting the volume/light intensity using the cross key 19 may be different from the number of steps for adjusting the volume/light intensity using the changeover switch 22.

For example, the volume gauge/light gauge may have five display levels, and the number of volume/light adjustment levels using the changeover switch 22 may be even greater, up to 10 levels. In this case, one display level of the volume gauge/light gauge corresponds to multiple levels of volume/light adjustment using the changeover switch 22.

In addition, when a volume adjustment operation is performed using the cross key 19 to increase (or decrease) the volume by one step, and then a volume adjustment operation is performed using the changeover switch 22 to increase (or decrease) the volume by one step, the volume may be changed by two steps (or more) with one operation.

In addition, when a volume adjustment operation is performed using the selector switch 22 to increase (or decrease) the volume by one step, and then a volume adjustment operation is performed using the cross key 19 to increase (or decrease) the volume by one step, the volume may change by only one step with one operation.

In this embodiment, the first image display device 70 displays the changes in the performance pattern 701, but the first image display device 70 and/or the second image display device 71 may also display the changes in the performance pattern 701. Also, the first image display device 70 may display the changes in the performance pattern 701, and the second image display device 71 may display the changes in the small pattern 702. Also, the first image display device 70 may display the changes in the performance pattern 701 and the small pattern 702, and the second image display device 71 may display the first hold icon HA, the second hold icon HB, and the hold icon TI.

(Reach performance)
Next, the reach performance performed in the variable performance will be explained. The reach performance is a performance using the performance pattern 701, and is a performance that makes the player expect a big win. Specifically, the reach performance is a performance in which the same type of performance pattern 701 is temporarily stopped on the left and right, and the performance pattern 701 changes in the middle area, and it is a performance that makes the player expect that the same type of performance pattern 701 as the performance pattern 701 temporarily stopped on the left and right will stop in the middle area. The left and right performance patterns displayed during the reach performance are called "reach patterns".

In this embodiment, the reach effects include normal reach effects (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "N reach"), SP reach effects, and SPSP reach effects. In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing a full rotation reach effect that indicates a jackpot.

The N-reach effect is the effect with the lowest probability of a jackpot occurring afterwards (also called jackpot expectation or reliability) among multiple reach effects. For example, the jackpot expectation of the N-reach effect is 1% or less. Note that there may be multiple N-reach effects with different (or the same) performance times and/or jackpot expectation.

The SP reach performance is a performance with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the N reach performance, and is a reach performance with a longer performance time than the N reach performance. For example, the expectation of a jackpot for the SP reach performance is 5 to 10%. Note that there may be multiple SP reach performances as SP reach performances. The expectation of a jackpot differs depending on each SP reach performance, and the performance time may also differ. It may be configured so that the longer the performance time of the SP reach performance, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

The SPSP reach performance is a performance with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the SP reach performance, and a longer performance time than the SP reach performance. For example, the expectation of a jackpot for the SPSP reach performance is 30-50%. Note that there may be multiple SPSP reach performances as the SPSP reach performance. The expectation of a jackpot differs depending on each SPSP reach performance, and the performance time may also differ. It may be configured so that the longer the performance time of the SPSP reach performance, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

In the normal game mode, the gaming machine 1 can execute a series of effects: N reach effect → SP reach effect → SPSP reach effect. Also, in the low base time-saving state, the gaming machine 1 can execute a series of effects: N reach effect → SP reach effect → SPSP reach effect. In the high base time-saving state, the gaming machine 1 can execute reach effects that are different from those in the normal game mode and the low base time-saving state.

The full rotation reach effect is an effect that suggests that a jackpot game will be played, and the expectation of a jackpot is 100%. The full rotation reach effect is an effect in which multiple sets of specific symbol combinations, which are combinations of three effect symbols that suggest a jackpot, are displayed, and the multiple sets of specific symbol combinations are displayed in a variable manner. The probability of the full rotation reach effect being executed is lower than that of the SPSP reach effect.

(Example of SPSP reach performance)
An example of the SPSP reach effect will be described below. In the normal mode or special mode, the variation effect including the SPSP reach effect is performed when a specific variation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach is selected when a special symbol determination is determined to be a big hit or a miss.

Figure 11 is a timing chart showing an example of an effect when the result of the special symbol determination performed in normal mode is a jackpot and an SPSP reach effect is performed. Figure 12 is a diagram showing an example of the effect at each timing in Figure 11. Figure 13 is a diagram showing an example of the effect performed following Figure 12.

As shown in FIG. 11, in the normal mode, the normal background is displayed as the background image. The performance pattern 701 is also a normal mode performance pattern. At time t1, when the first special pattern starts to change, a start action is performed in which the three performance patterns 701 that were stopped and displayed move in a predetermined manner (FIG. 12(a)). In the start action, the three performance patterns 701 are displayed to start changing simultaneously or sequentially. For example, the character image included in the performance pattern 701 moves, the background image of the number pattern moves, the performance pattern 701 rotates, or vibrates up and down. Also, during the start action, the first reserved icon HA shifts to the right, and the first reserved icon HA1 is displayed as the icon TI. The small pattern 702 and the fourth pattern 705a also perform a change display. After the start action of the performance pattern 701, a change display performance in which the performance pattern 701 changes at high speed is performed (times t2 to t3, FIG. 12(b)). In the variable display effect, for example, multiple types of effect patterns (e.g., effect patterns "1" to "9") are scrolled from top to bottom at high speed (in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the type of each effect pattern) in each of the left, center, and right areas.

After the variable display performance, a pseudo variable performance (pseudo consecutive) using multiple performance patterns 701 may be performed once or multiple times. The pseudo variable performance is a performance in which at least one of the multiple performance patterns 701 temporarily stops in a predetermined area and changes again. For example, at time t3, a pseudo consecutive development performance is performed by temporarily stopping the "7" pattern in the middle area, suggesting that a pseudo consecutive will be performed (FIG. 12 (c)). Note that the pseudo consecutive development performance may be performed by stopping a pseudo consecutive pattern dedicated to pseudo consecutive in a predetermined area, not limited to the "7" pattern. When the pseudo consecutive development performance is performed, the temporarily stopped performance pattern starts to change again, and a second variable display performance (pseudo 2 variable display performance) is performed. In addition, the pseudo consecutive may be performed multiple times. For example, in the figure, after the pseudo 2 variable display performance, the pseudo 3 variable display performance is further performed. The more pseudo consecutive times, the higher the expectation of a big win. In addition, even when the performance symbol stops in a pseudo-consecutive win, the small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol continue to change and display without stopping in a pseudo-consecutive win.

After the pseudo 3 variable display effect is performed for a predetermined time, the same type of effect pattern temporarily stops in the left and right areas, and a reach is achieved (time t4, Figure 12 (d)). After the reach is achieved, an N reach effect is performed.

Note that various preview effects may be performed during the variable display performance. Preview effects are effects that suggest the possibility of a jackpot, and the degree of expectation of a jackpot is suggested depending on the type of preview effect. For example, preview effects may include a dialogue preview in which a character speaks a line, a step-up preview in which the expectation level increases stepwise, a group preview in which a large number of characters are displayed, a cut-in preview in which a specified image is displayed on all or part of the screen, and an icon change preview in which the reserved icon or the icon in question changes. Preview effects may be executed in response to pressing the performance button 17. Preview effects may also be performed during a reach performance.

During the N-reach performance, the same type of performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the left and right areas, and the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the center area. The N-reach performance is performed for a predetermined time (e.g., 8 to 10 seconds). This makes the player expect that the same type of performance symbol as the left and right performance symbols will stop in the center area, indicating a jackpot. During this time, the normal background image is displayed, and the first hold icon HA and the icon TI are displayed. Also, during the N-reach performance, the performance symbol 701 is displayed in a form that includes a character image and a number symbol.

In addition, a specific piece of music (BGM) will be output continuously from the execution of the start action (or before the start action is executed) until the end of the N reach performance.

Next, after the SP development performance is performed during the N reach performance, the SP reach performance is executed (time t5, FIG. 12(e)). In the SP development performance, a display is made to indicate that the SP reach performance will start. For example, a title display is made to indicate the type of SP reach performance to be executed. For example, one of a plurality of title displays including a first title display corresponding to the first SP reach performance and a second title display corresponding to the second SP reach performance is displayed. The expectation of a big win differs depending on the type of these title displays and the display mode (for example, the color of the characters and background). In addition, in the SP development performance, the left and right patterns are displayed as they shrink and move to the left and right areas above the main screen. In addition, in the N reach performance, a center pattern of a type different from the left and right patterns may temporarily stop to notify the user that the N reach has failed, and then the SP development performance and the SP reach performance may be performed.

During the SP reach performance, the SP reach mode performance symbols are temporarily stopped on the left and right of the screen, and the center symbol changes. The SP reach mode performance symbols include number symbols and no character images, and are smaller than the normal mode performance symbols. In addition, the central area of the main screen displays, for example, a scene of the player's character fighting an enemy character. In addition, a background image for the SP reach performance is displayed as the background image. In addition, during the SP reach performance, background music for the SP reach is continuously output. In addition, during the SP reach performance, the icon TI is displayed, but the first hold icon HA is hidden. Note that in other embodiments, the first hold icon HA may be displayed during the SP reach performance.

On the other hand, the small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705 are displayed even during the SP Reach performance, and their positions and sizes do not change. Also, the first number reserve SHA and the second number reserve SHB are displayed even during the SP Reach performance, and their positions and sizes do not change.

After the SP reach performance is performed for a predetermined time (e.g., 20 seconds), the SPSP reach performance may be performed (time t6). Specifically, after the SPSP development performance, which suggests that the SP reach performance will develop into the SPSP reach performance, the SPSP reach performance starts (FIG. 12(f)). Note that, as a result of the SP reach performance, a center pattern different from the left and right may temporarily stop to temporarily notify a reach miss, and then the SPSP development performance may be performed and the SPSP reach performance may be performed. In the SPSP development performance, a display is performed indicating that the SPSP reach performance will start. For example, a title display is performed to suggest the type of SPSP reach performance to be performed. The expectation of a jackpot varies depending on the type of title display and the display mode (e.g., the color of the text and background).

During the SPSP reach performance, for example, a fighting scene following the SP reach performance is displayed. During the SPSP reach performance, the performance symbols of the SPSP reach mode are temporarily stopped on the left and right of the screen, and a performance in which the middle symbol changes is performed. The performance symbols of the SPSP reach mode, like the SP reach mode, are performance symbols that include number symbols and do not include character images, and are smaller than the performance symbols of the normal mode. In addition, a background image for the SPSP reach performance is displayed as a background image. In addition, during the SPSP reach performance, BGM for the SPSP reach is continuously output. In addition, during the SPSP reach performance, the icon TI and the first reserved icon HA are hidden. The small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705 are displayed during the SPSP reach performance, and their positions and display modes do not change. In addition, the first number reserved SHA and the second number reserved SHB are displayed during the SPSP reach performance, and their positions and display modes do not change.

When a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the SPSP reach performance, at time t7, which is the end of the SPSP reach performance, an operation performance is performed to encourage the player to operate the performance button 17 (FIG. 13(g)). In the operation performance, a button image 710 that imitates the performance button 17 and an operation valid period image 711 that indicates the operation valid period are displayed. In the operation performance, the button image 710 is displayed alternating between a pressed state and a not pressed state, encouraging the player to press the performance button 17. In addition, in the operation performance, the operation valid period image 711 changes over time in a manner that allows the player to recognize the remaining time of the operation valid period. For example, the remaining time of the operation valid period may be indicated by changing the length of a gauge image.

Then, depending on the operation of the effect button 17 during the operation effect, or depending on the passage of the effective operation period, a center pattern of the same type as the left and right patterns stops (time t8, FIG. 13(h)). This causes a jackpot to be announced using the effect pattern 701. After that, the background image changes to a jackpot background indicating a jackpot, and three effect patterns 701 of the same type (here, "666") temporarily stop aligned in the center of the screen (FIG. 13(i)). During the temporary stop, the three effect patterns 701 do not stop completely, but instead sway up and down, for example.

The period from when the reach is reached until a big win (or a miss) is announced (times t4 to t8) is longer than the period from when the fluctuation starts to when the reach is reached via the pseudo 3 fluctuation display performance (times t1 to t4). Conversely, the period from times t1 to t4 may be longer than the period from times t4 to t8.

Next, a re-draw performance is performed (time t9-1, FIG. 13(j)). In the re-draw performance, the three performance symbols 701 that were temporarily stopped in FIG. 13(h) and (i) are changed again, and multiple sets of specific symbol combinations, which are combinations of three similar performance symbols, are displayed. For example, the specific symbol combinations "111" to "999" are displayed and changed in order from top to bottom. In FIG. 13(j), the specific symbol combinations "666" and "777" are displayed, and the movement of these downwards is shown. The three performance symbols 701 that were temporarily stopped in FIG. 13(h) and (i) may be changed by the re-draw performance.

As a result of the re-draw performance, one of the multiple specific symbol combinations is temporarily stopped (time t9-2). After a predetermined temporary stop period has elapsed, the temporarily stopped specific symbol combination is displayed as stopped in response to the stopped display of the special symbol (time t10, FIG. 13(k)). Here, the three performance symbols 701 come to a complete stop without swinging. The small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705a are also displayed as stopped. In the example shown in FIG. 13(k), the specific symbol combination of "666" is changed to the specific symbol combination of "777" by the re-draw performance, but there are also cases where the specific symbol combination is not changed by the re-draw performance.

The type of performance symbols that make up the specific symbol combination suggests the type of jackpot game. For example, a specific symbol combination made up of even number symbols suggests a 1-type 4R jackpot A or a 1-type 4R jackpot B. When a specific symbol combination made up of even number symbols is stopped and displayed, it is highly likely to be a 1-type 4R jackpot B, which is disadvantageous to the player. Also, a specific symbol combination made up of odd number symbols suggests a high possibility of a 1-type 4R jackpot A, which is advantageous to the player. Also, the specific symbol combination of "777" suggests a 1-type 4R jackpot A.

When a specific symbol combination is displayed, the background changes to an opening-only background, and an opening performance indicating the start of the jackpot game is performed (immediately after time t10). Then, the jackpot game begins, with the jackpot opening opening being opened. During the jackpot game, the jackpot background is displayed and the jackpot game performance is performed.

(Emphasis added)
In this embodiment, in the variable presentation, an emphasis presentation may be performed. Here, the emphasis presentation is a presentation that emphasizes the presentation of the target image (target image) and the like, and is a presentation for drawing the player's attention to the target image. For example, an emphasis image that emphasizes the target image may be displayed as the emphasis presentation. The emphasis image may be an effect image displayed around the target image, an image displayed inside the target image, an image superimposed on the target image, or an image displayed behind the target image. In addition, as the emphasis presentation, the size of the target image may be changed, the shape of the target image may be deformed, the inside of the target image may be operated, or the brightness of the target image may be changed.

Specifically, when a jackpot is announced as a result of the SPSP reach effect, a jackpot pattern emphasis effect is performed to emphasize the effect pattern suggesting a jackpot. Figure 14 shows an example of a jackpot pattern emphasis effect when an effect pattern suggesting a jackpot is displayed in the SPSP reach effect in normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 14, for example, during the period from time t8 to t9-1, an emphasis image 850a is added to three performance patterns 701 suggesting a jackpot as a jackpot pattern emphasis performance A. Three emphasis images 850a may be added to each of the three performance patterns 701 so as to be superimposed, or one emphasis image 850a may be added to each of the three performance patterns 701 so as to be superimposed. In addition, a sound (a jackpot pattern emphasis performance sound A) corresponding to the jackpot pattern emphasis performance A is output while the emphasis image 850a is displayed. The jackpot pattern emphasis performance sound A is a sound suggesting a jackpot. The jackpot pattern emphasis performance sound A may be started to be output while the emphasis image 850a is displayed, the jackpot pattern emphasis performance sound A may be started to be output at the timing when the emphasis image 850a is displayed, or the emphasis image 850a may be started to be displayed while the sound is being output after the jackpot pattern emphasis performance sound A is started to be output. In addition, in the jackpot symbol highlighting effect A, at least one of the three effect symbols 701 that indicate a jackpot may be enlarged. In addition, when the jackpot symbol highlighting effect A is executed, the light emitting means (each LED included in the frame lighting device 10, the effect button light emitting LED 17c, the movable effect device 73, and the board lighting device 74) emits light in a predetermined light emitting pattern. This makes it possible to appeal to the player that he or she has won a jackpot.

Here, during the jackpot game, the game is played by hitting to the right, but in the period from time t8 to t9-1, the first special symbol is still changing, and the jackpot game has not started. During this period, the small symbol and the fourth symbol are changing, but due to the effect symbol 701 and the emphasis image 850a, it may be difficult for the player to recognize that the first special symbol is changing, and the player may hit to the right at this point. Also, since the emphasis image 850a is displayed so as to be superimposed on at least a part of the effect symbol 701, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the three effect symbols 701, which indicate a jackpot, are swaying. Also, due to the emphasised effect symbol 701, the player may panic and hit to the right. If the player hits to the right before the jackpot game starts in this way, a specific notification is issued.

For example, when a game ball is detected to have passed through the normal gate 44 during the display of the performance pattern 701 suggesting a jackpot (when the passage of a predetermined number of game balls is detected), a specific notification regarding the operation of the launch handle 15 is given to the player. For example, as a specific notification, a specific notification image 880 encouraging the player to hit to the left is displayed in a predetermined area (for example, the center of the screen). The specific notification image 880 is displayed so as to be superimposed on at least a part of the performance pattern 701 suggesting a jackpot and the emphasis image 850a. The specific notification image 880 is displayed preferentially (on the front layer) over the performance pattern 701 suggesting a jackpot and the emphasis image 850a suggesting a jackpot. The specific notification image 880 may be displayed almost entirely on the screen so that the performance pattern 701 and the emphasis image 850a are difficult or impossible to see. For example, the specific notification image 880 may be displayed semi-transparently on almost the entire screen. In this way, the specific notification image 880 is displayed with priority over the effect pattern 701 and the emphasis image 850a, but is displayed in a manner that allows the effect pattern 701 and the emphasis image 850a to be recognized. Also, the specific notification image 880 may be displayed, for example, on the left side of the screen so that it does not overlap (or partially overlaps) the effect pattern.

As a special notification, a special notification sound (for example, a voice or warning sound saying "please hit left") is output to encourage the player to hit left. This encourages the player to hit left and prevents unnecessary hits to the right. Note that the special notification is not limited to notifications by images, sounds, and light emitted by the light-emitting means, but may also include notifications by vibration, for example. Also, the special notification is not limited to outputting images and sounds encouraging left hits, but may be performed by outputting images and sounds that discourage right hits.

The specific notification is performed for a predetermined execution time (e.g., 15 seconds) after the notification condition (e.g., detecting the passage of a predetermined number of game balls through a gate) is met. The predetermined execution time is longer than the execution time of the jackpot symbol highlighting effect. In other words, the jackpot symbol highlighting effect (display of an image and output of a sound) is executed for a first time, and the specific notification (output of an image and a sound) is executed for a second time that is longer than the first time. Note that the execution time of the specific notification may be shorter than or the same as the execution time of the jackpot symbol highlighting effect.

The specific notification is performed in a first manner and a second manner. For example, when the notification condition is satisfied, the first notification sound is output for a first period of time as a specific notification of the first manner during a specified execution period, and then the second notification sound is output for a second period of time as a specific notification of the second manner. During this time, the specific notification image 880 is continuously displayed at a specified position on the screen. When the notification condition is satisfied, the specific notification may be performed in the first manner during the specified execution period, and when the notification condition is satisfied again, the specific notification may be performed in the second manner during the specified execution period. The second notification sound may be output at a louder volume than the first notification sound, may be output at the same volume as the first notification sound, or may be output at a lower volume.

During the period from time t8 to t9-1, a jackpot pattern highlighting effect A is performed on the performance pattern 701 that indicates a jackpot, and then a re-drawing effect is started at time t9-2, and an emphasis effect (jackpot pattern highlighting effect B) is performed on the three performance patterns 701 during the re-drawing effect. For example, as a result of the re-drawing effect, at the timing when one of the multiple specific pattern combinations temporarily stops (time t9-2 in FIG. 14), a jackpot pattern highlighting effect B is performed on the three performance patterns 701. This jackpot pattern highlighting effect B may be the same as the jackpot pattern highlighting effect A performed during the period from time t8 to t9-1, or may be a different effect. For example, if the specific pattern combination that temporarily stops before the execution of the re-drawing effect is the same as the specific pattern combination that temporarily stops after the re-drawing effect, the jackpot pattern highlighting effect B may be performed in the same performance mode (same image, sound, and light-emitting pattern) as the jackpot pattern highlighting effect A. In addition, if the specific symbol combination that is temporarily stopped before the re-draw performance is different from the specific symbol combination that is temporarily stopped after the re-draw performance, the jackpot symbol highlighting performance B may be performed in a different performance mode from the jackpot symbol highlighting performance A. For example, if the specific symbol combination that is temporarily stopped before the re-draw performance is different from the specific symbol combination that is temporarily stopped after the re-draw performance, the highlighting image 851a is displayed in the jackpot symbol highlighting performance B, and a jackpot symbol highlighting performance sound B that is different from the jackpot symbol highlighting performance sound A is output. In addition, with the execution of the jackpot symbol highlighting performance B, the light-emitting means emits light in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the jackpot symbol highlighting performance B. In addition, in the jackpot symbol highlighting performance B, at least one of the three performance patterns 701 that suggest a jackpot may be enlarged and displayed. During the execution of this jackpot symbol highlighting performance B, if the above-mentioned notification condition is met, the above-mentioned specific notification is performed.

Furthermore, when the jackpot pattern highlighting effect B has ended, during the temporary stop period of the three performance patterns 701 (the period from time t9-2 to t10), the jackpot pattern highlighting effect C is performed. The jackpot pattern highlighting effect C is a different performance mode from the jackpot pattern highlighting effects A and B. For example, in the jackpot pattern highlighting effect C, an emphasis image 852a is displayed that highlights each of the three performance patterns 701 that suggest a jackpot. The emphasis image 852a is an image that is superimposed on each performance pattern 701, and is superimposed on a part or all of each performance pattern 701. Each performance pattern 701 moves (swings) periodically during the temporary stop, and the emphasis image 852a changes in conjunction with the periodic movement of the performance pattern 701. The emphasis image 852a is also displayed in a manner that allows the player to recognize the number pattern among the performance patterns 701. In addition, in the jackpot pattern highlighting effect C, an emphasis image 852a is displayed, and a jackpot pattern highlighting effect sound C different from the jackpot pattern highlighting effect sounds A and B is output. In addition, with the execution of the jackpot pattern highlighting effect C, the light emitting means emits light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the jackpot pattern highlighting effect C. Note that, when this jackpot pattern highlighting effect C is executed, the effect pattern may be displayed in a form including a number pattern and a character image. Even during the execution of this jackpot pattern highlighting effect C, if the above notification condition is met, the above specific notification is performed. Note that, in the jackpot pattern highlighting effect C, the three effect patterns 701 suggesting a jackpot are not enlarged.

After the big win symbol highlighting effect C ends, the three effect symbols 701 are displayed in a stopped state in response to the stopped display of the special symbols after a predetermined temporary stop period has elapsed (time t10). A specific notification can also be executed during this temporary stop period.

In this way, when a performance pattern suggesting a jackpot is displayed, the jackpot pattern highlighting performances A to C are executed. The specific notification can be executed in the same manner regardless of whether any of the jackpot pattern highlighting performances A to C is being executed. The jackpot pattern highlighting performances A to C may be executed while the specific notification is being continuously executed. Also, during the execution period of the jackpot pattern highlighting performances A to C, the notification conditions may be met and the first specific notification may be executed and terminated, and the notification conditions may be met again and the second specific notification may be executed. In this way, the jackpot pattern highlighting performances A to C and the specific notification may be executed simultaneously. Note that "the highlighting performance and the specific notification are executed simultaneously" means that the execution period of the highlighting performance and the execution period of the specific notification overlap at least partially, and the start timing of the highlighting performance and the start timing of the specific notification may or may not coincide. In other words, "the emphasis effect and the specific notification are executed simultaneously" includes cases where the specific notification is started while the emphasis effect is being executed, cases where the emphasis effect is started while the specific notification is being executed, and cases where the emphasis effect and the specific notification are started simultaneously.

The specific notification ends when the jackpot game starts (when the special pattern stops) even before the specified execution period has elapsed. In other words, the specific notification image is hidden when the jackpot game starts, even before the specified execution period has elapsed, and the output of the specific notification sound also ends when the jackpot game starts. During the execution of the specific notification, the first notification sound is output for a first period of time, and then the second notification sound is output for a second period of time. In this case, if the jackpot game starts during the output of the first notification sound (or the second notification sound), the playback of the first notification sound (or the second notification sound) being output may be terminated midway, and the output of the first notification sound (or the second notification sound) may be stopped. Also, if the jackpot game starts during the output of the first notification sound, the first notification sound being output may continue to be output until the end (output for the first period of time), and the second notification sound may not be output. In other words, ending the output of a specific notification sound includes stopping the sound being output midway, and outputting the sound being output to the end (a predetermined playback time) and then stopping the output of the sound thereafter.

For example, the special notification may end in response to receiving a stop fluctuation command, or in response to receiving an opening command. The special notification is not executed during a jackpot game. In addition, the special notification is not executed when the game transitions to the time-saving mode after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, if a special symbol indicating a loss appears, the special notification will not end when the special symbol stops.

In addition, after the jackpot pattern highlighting effect C is executed, the execution of the specific notification may be restricted for a predetermined period of time. For example, the execution of the specific notification may be restricted during the period from when the jackpot pattern highlighting effect C is executed until the jackpot game in which the jackpot opening is opened starts.

In addition, in Figures 12 to 14, the explanation is based on the premise that after the performance symbol suggesting a jackpot is displayed at the end of the SPSP reach performance, a re-lottery performance is performed to change the performance symbol suggesting a jackpot again. The re-lottery performance may or may not be performed. If the re-lottery performance is not performed, the performance symbol suggesting a jackpot is temporarily stopped at the end of the SPSP reach performance and a jackpot pattern highlighting performance A is performed, and then a jackpot pattern highlighting performance C is performed for the performance symbol that is temporarily stopped, and the performance symbol is stopped and displayed.

Next, we will explain the effects in the special mode. Figure 15 shows an example of a jackpot symbol emphasis effect when a symbol suggesting a jackpot is displayed in the special mode.

As shown in Figure 15, the series of effects from the N reach effect to the SPSP reach effect can also be performed in special mode.

In the special mode, a background image for the special mode is displayed until the SP reach performance starts (from the start action to the N reach performance). In addition, the performance pattern 701 for the special mode is used until the SP reach performance starts. For example, the performance pattern 701 for the special mode may have at least a part of the character image different from the character image in the performance pattern for the normal mode.

In addition, in the special mode, during the SP reach performance, the same background image for the SP reach performance as in the normal mode is displayed, the same SP reach performance (video display for the SP reach performance) as in the normal mode is performed, and the same performance pattern as in the normal mode is used. Note that the performance pattern used during the SP reach performance may be different between the special mode and the normal mode. In addition, during the SPSP reach performance, the same background image for the SPSP reach performance as in the normal mode is displayed, the same SPSP reach performance (video display for the SPSP reach performance) as in the normal mode is performed, and the same performance pattern as in the normal mode is used. Note that the performance pattern used during the SPSP reach performance may be different between the special mode and the normal mode. Then, as in the normal mode, a jackpot is announced using the performance pattern as a result of the SPSP reach performance.

Here, as shown in FIG. 15, when the special mode is set, when a jackpot is announced as a result of the SPSP reach performance, a jackpot pattern highlighting performance A is performed on the performance pattern 701 suggesting a jackpot, as in the normal mode (times t8 to t9-1). Specifically, in the special mode, a jackpot pattern highlighting performance A of a different mode from the jackpot pattern highlighting performance A in the normal mode is performed. For example, in the jackpot pattern highlighting performance A in the special mode, an emphasis image 850b is added to the three performance patterns 701 suggesting a jackpot. In addition, while the emphasis image 850b is displayed, a jackpot pattern highlighting performance sound A (a sound corresponding to the emphasis image 850b) is output. The jackpot pattern highlighting performance sound A in the special mode is a sound different from the jackpot pattern highlighting performance sound A in the normal mode, and is a sound suggesting a jackpot. Note that, even in the special mode, the light-emitting means emits light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern in association with the execution of the jackpot pattern highlighting performance A. The lighting pattern may be the same as the lighting pattern in normal mode, or it may be different.

After the jackpot symbol highlighting effect A, a re-drawing effect is performed, and the three effect symbols 701 suggesting a jackpot are temporarily stopped in the re-drawing effect, and the jackpot symbol highlighting effect B is performed (time point 9-2). Specifically, in the special mode, a jackpot symbol highlighting effect B different from the jackpot symbol highlighting effect B in the normal mode is performed. For example, in the jackpot symbol highlighting effect B in the special mode, an emphasis image 851b is added to the three effect symbols 701 suggesting a jackpot. Also, while the emphasis image 851b is displayed, a jackpot symbol highlighting effect sound B (a sound corresponding to the emphasis image 851b) is output. The jackpot symbol highlighting effect sound B in the special mode is a sound different from the jackpot symbol highlighting effect sound B in the normal mode, and is a sound suggesting a jackpot. Note that, even in the special mode, the light-emitting means emits light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern in association with the execution of the jackpot symbol highlighting effect B. The lighting pattern may be the same as the lighting pattern in normal mode, or it may be different.

Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot symbol highlighting effect B, the jackpot symbol highlighting effect C is performed during the period when the three performance symbols 701 are temporarily stopped (the period from time t9-2 to t10). Specifically, in the special mode, the jackpot symbol highlighting effect C is performed in a manner different from the jackpot symbol highlighting effect C in the normal mode. For example, in the jackpot symbol highlighting effect C in the special mode, an emphasis image 852b is displayed that highlights each of the three performance symbols 701 that suggest a jackpot. The emphasis image 852b is an image that is superimposed on each performance symbol 701, and is superimposed on a part or all of each performance symbol 701. The emphasis image 852b is displayed in a manner that allows the player to recognize the number symbols among the performance symbols 701. In addition, while the emphasis image 852b is displayed, the jackpot symbol highlighting effect sound C (sound corresponding to the emphasis image 852b) is output. The jackpot symbol highlighting sound C in the special mode is a different sound from the jackpot symbol highlighting sound C in the normal mode, and is a sound that suggests a jackpot. In the special mode, the light emitting means also emits light in a predetermined light emitting pattern when the jackpot symbol highlighting sound C is executed. The light emitting pattern may be the same as or different from the light emitting pattern in the normal mode. In addition, in the jackpot symbol highlighting sound C in the special mode, the three display patterns 701 that suggest a jackpot are not enlarged.

The presentation style of the jackpot symbol highlighting effect C may be the same in normal mode and special mode.

In special mode, when any of the jackpot symbol highlighting effects A to C is being performed, if the notification conditions are met, a specific notification can be performed. Also, in special mode, specific notifications are performed in the same manner as in normal mode.

In this way, when the performance is performed in the normal mode (when the normal mode is set) and when the performance is performed in the special mode (when the special mode is set), the performance mode (image, sound, light emission pattern of the light emitting means, etc.) of the jackpot pattern highlighting performance that highlights the performance pattern that suggests a jackpot is different. This allows the performance to have variety and improves interest. In addition, the mode of the jackpot pattern highlighting performance can make the player recognize which mode is set. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the normal mode is set and when the special mode is set, a common SP reach performance and SPSP reach performance are performed, and at least the background image is common after the SP reach performance. For this reason, for example, when a jackpot is notified in the SPSP reach performance, it may be difficult for the player to recognize which mode the jackpot has been achieved in, but the mode can be recognized by the performance mode of the jackpot pattern highlighting performance. Note that even after the SP reach performance, the mode of the background image and the performance pattern may be different between the normal mode and the special mode.

The presentation mode of the jackpot symbol highlighting presentation may be the same when the presentation is being performed in normal mode and when the presentation is being performed in special mode. For example, in any of the multiple normal modes, a jackpot symbol highlighting presentation that can be performed in special mode may be performed. Also, in any of the multiple special modes, a jackpot symbol highlighting presentation that can be performed in normal mode may be performed.

When a performance is being performed in normal mode and when a performance is being performed in special mode, the emphasis image that emphasizes the performance pattern suggesting a jackpot may be the same, but the sound output while the emphasis image is displayed may be different. Conversely, when a performance is being performed in normal mode and when a performance is being performed in special mode, the emphasis image that emphasizes the performance pattern suggesting a jackpot may be different, but the sound output while the emphasis image is displayed may be the same. In addition, the light emission pattern of the light-emitting means may be the same in normal mode and special mode, but the emphasis image and sound may be different. In addition, the light emission pattern of the light-emitting means may be different in normal mode and special mode, but the emphasis image and sound may be the same.

Meanwhile, the above-mentioned specific notification is performed in the same manner in the special mode as in the normal mode. That is, when a performance is being performed in the normal mode (when the normal mode is set) and when a performance is being performed in the special mode (when the special mode is set), a common specific notification image is displayed and a common specific notification sound is output. Also, in the normal mode and the special mode, the light emitting means emits light in a common light emitting pattern.

In this way, specific notifications are made in a common manner in both normal mode and special mode, encouraging players to perform operations in an easy-to-understand manner.

Although the above describes the case where the SPSP reach performance is performed, there are also cases where a jackpot is announced in the SP reach performance. In this case, the performance symbol suggesting a jackpot is temporarily stopped in the SP reach performance, and the above-mentioned jackpot symbol highlighting performance A is performed, and then, via a re-selection performance (or without), the jackpot symbol highlighting performance C is performed on the temporarily stopped performance symbol. Alternatively, when a jackpot is announced in the SP reach performance, either one of the jackpot symbol highlighting performances A and C may be omitted. Even when the jackpot symbol highlighting performance is executed in the SP reach performance, a specific announcement is made in the same manner if the above-mentioned announcement conditions are met.

In addition, a jackpot may be announced in the N-reach performance. In this case, the performance symbol suggesting a jackpot is temporarily stopped in the N-reach performance, and the above-mentioned jackpot symbol highlighting performance A is performed, after which, via a re-selection performance (or without), the jackpot symbol highlighting performance C is performed on the temporarily stopped performance symbol. Alternatively, when a jackpot is announced in the N-reach performance, either one of the jackpot symbol highlighting performances A and C may be omitted. Even when the jackpot symbol highlighting performance is executed in the N-reach performance, a specific announcement is made in the same manner if the above-mentioned announcement conditions are met.

In addition, there may be cases where the performance pattern suggesting a jackpot stops provisionally from the variable display performance using the performance pattern without going through the reach performance. Even in this case, the jackpot pattern highlighting performances A to C may be executed. For example, the performance pattern suggesting a jackpot stops provisionally from the variable display performance, and the jackpot pattern highlighting performance A is executed, and then a re-variable performance is executed, and as a result of the re-variable performance, another or the same performance pattern suggesting a jackpot stops provisionally, and the jackpot pattern highlighting performance B is executed, and the jackpot pattern highlighting performance C is executed for the performance pattern suggesting a jackpot during the provisional stop. Such a performance may be impossible to execute in the normal mode and the special mode, but may be executable in the time-saving mode. Also, such a performance may have a higher probability of being executed in the time-saving mode than in the normal mode and the special mode. Conversely, such a performance may be configured to be executed (or easily executed) in the normal mode and the special mode, and not executed (or difficult to execute) in the time-saving mode.

The timing at which the jackpot pattern highlighting effects A to C are executed may differ depending on the variable performance. The time from when the jackpot pattern highlighting effects A to C are executed until the performance pattern is stopped and displayed may differ depending on the variable performance. For example, in a variable performance based on a certain variable pattern, the time from when the jackpot pattern highlighting effect A is executed until the performance pattern is stopped and displayed may be a first time, and in a variable performance based on another variable pattern, the time from when the jackpot pattern highlighting effect A is executed until the performance pattern is stopped and displayed may be a second time that is longer (or shorter) than the first time. Note that, regardless of which variable performance is executed, the time from when the jackpot pattern highlighting effects A to C are executed until the performance pattern is stopped and displayed may be the same.

The timing at which the jackpot pattern highlighting effects A-C are executed and the time from when the jackpot pattern highlighting effects A-C are executed until the display of the display pattern may differ depending on the mode. For example, the execution timing of the jackpot pattern highlighting effects A-C when executed in normal mode may differ from the execution timing of the jackpot pattern highlighting effects A-C when executed in special mode. The time from when the jackpot pattern highlighting effects A-C are executed in normal mode until the display of the display pattern may differ from the time from when the jackpot pattern highlighting effects A-C are executed until the display of the display pattern may differ in special mode.

The emphasis effect that emphasizes the above-mentioned effect patterns is not limited to the effect patterns that indicate a jackpot, but may be performed at various times during the change of the effect patterns. Also, emphasis effect may be performed on the effect patterns not only when a jackpot is announced, but also when a miss is announced.

Figure 16 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart from the start of fluctuation to the N-reach presentation in normal mode. Figure 17 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation from the start of fluctuation to the N-reach presentation in normal mode, and is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen at each timing in Figure 16. Note that in Figure 17, the mode display 708 has been omitted to simplify the illustration.

As shown in FIG. 16, in normal mode, when the variation of the special pattern starts, the start action of the performance pattern is performed and the reserved icon is shifted to the right and displayed as the icon, and an icon movement effect is performed. During the execution of the start action of the performance pattern, an emphasis effect (start emphasis effect) that emphasizes the performance pattern may be performed (time t1-1, FIG. 17(a)). For example, a start emphasis effect may be performed for each of the three performance patterns. Also, a start emphasis effect may be performed for some of the three performance patterns. For example, in normal mode, a start emphasis effect can be performed in which an emphasis image 800a is added to the performance pattern that is executing the start action. Also, a start emphasis effect sound may be output along with the display of the emphasis image 800a. Note that the same type of start emphasis effect may be performed for each of the performance patterns in the left area, middle area, and right area. Also, a different type of start emphasis effect may be performed for each of the performance patterns in the left area, middle area, and right area. In addition, the first type of start-up emphasis performance (display of the first type of emphasis image 800a) may be performed for the performance patterns in the left and right areas, and the second type of start-up emphasis performance (display of the second type of emphasis image 800a) may be performed for the performance patterns in the middle area.

When the start emphasis effect is performed, the expectation of a jackpot may be higher than when the start emphasis effect is not performed. In addition, there may be multiple presentation modes for the start emphasis effect, and the expectation of a jackpot may differ depending on the presentation mode. In addition, the start emphasis effect may be an effect that suggests that a jackpot game will be played.

The timing of executing the start action may be different for each of the three performance symbols. For example, after the left symbol performs the start action, a variable display performance (scrolling display) may be performed, and then the right symbol may perform the start action. In this case, while the left symbol is performing the variable display performance, the right symbol performs the start action, and a start emphasis performance is performed.

After the start action, a specific pattern highlighting effect may be performed to highlight a pattern that has stopped (temporarily stopped) in a specific area among the three areas (time t2-1, FIG. 17(b)). For example, when the pattern stops in the order of the left area, right area, and center area, a specific pattern highlighting effect is performed in which an emphasis image 802a is added to the "6" pattern when the "6" pattern stops as the left pattern. In addition, a specific pattern highlighting effect sound is output along with the display of the emphasis image 802a. The timing of the execution of the specific pattern highlighting effect may be the same as the timing when the left pattern stops, may be the timing immediately before the left pattern stops, or may be the timing immediately after the left pattern stops. In addition, the timing when the specific pattern highlighting effect sound starts to be output may be the same as the timing when the emphasis image 802a starts to be displayed, may be the timing immediately after the emphasis image 802a starts to be displayed, or may be the timing immediately before the emphasis image 802a starts to be displayed.

After that, a pseudo consecutive development performance may be performed (time t3, FIG. 17(c)). In the pseudo consecutive development performance, a pseudo consecutive pattern emphasis performance is performed in which an emphasis image 803a different from the emphasis image 802a is added to the pattern suggesting a pseudo consecutive (the "7" pattern in the middle area in the figure). A pseudo consecutive pattern emphasis performance sound (a sound corresponding to the emphasis image 803a) is output while this emphasis image 803a is displayed. In addition, the light-emitting means emits light in a predetermined pattern suggesting a pseudo consecutive. In addition, the performance role (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) may operate. For example, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b may move from the standby position to the performance position, or move from the standby position to the second position and return to the standby position. When the pseudo consecutive development performance is performed, the performance pattern that was temporarily stopped starts to fluctuate again (time t3-1, FIG. 17(d)). As shown in FIG. 17(d), a pseudo consecutive image 706 is displayed, indicating that a pseudo variation effect has been performed and the number of times it has been performed. A pseudo consecutive effect may occur multiple times (Pseudo 2 to Pseudo 4), and the more pseudo consecutive effects there are, the higher the chance of winning. In this example, after Pseudo 2, it will progress to Pseudo 3.

As shown in FIG. 17(d), a preview effect may be performed in which a preview image 707 is displayed during the change in the performance pattern, suggesting the possibility of a jackpot. For example, the preview image 707 is an image that becomes larger with each step, and the greater the number of steps, the higher the jackpot expectation. In addition, a preview emphasis effect may be performed in which an emphasis image 807a (an example of a preview emphasis image) is displayed around the preview image 707 to emphasize the preview image 707. When a preview emphasis image is displayed, the expectation may be higher (or lower) than when a preview emphasis image is not displayed, or it may be the same. A preview emphasis effect sound is output during the display of this preview emphasis image. Note that there are multiple modes of the preview emphasis image with different expectations, and when a first preview emphasis image is displayed and when a second preview emphasis image is displayed, the sound output is different, and the output time of the sound is also different. In addition, even after a reach is established, a preview effect as shown in FIG. 17(d) or other preview effects may be executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 17(d), an icon change effect may be performed in which the display mode of the icon TI changes during the change of the effect pattern. When the display mode of the icon TI changes, an icon highlight image 808a that highlights the icon TI may be displayed around the icon TI after the change (or superimposed on the icon TI). Also, a sound is output along with the display of the icon highlight image 808a. For example, when the icon TI changes to a display mode (e.g., red or higher) with a predetermined expectation level or higher, the icon highlight image 808a may be added to the icon TI. The icon highlight image 808a may be continuously displayed while the icon TI is displayed, or may be displayed for a predetermined time from the timing when the icon TI changes. The sound associated with the display of the icon highlight image 808a may be output only for a predetermined time when the display of the icon highlight image 808a starts, or may be continuously output while the icon highlight image 808a is displayed. Also, the display mode of the icon highlight image 808a differs depending on the display mode of the icon TI. For example, when the icon TI is displayed in a first display mode (e.g., red), the icon highlight image 808a of the first mode is added and a first sound is output for a first time, and when the icon TI is displayed in a second display mode (e.g., gold), the icon highlight image 808a of the second mode is added and a second sound (a sound different from the first sound) may be output for a second time. The same applies when an icon change performance in which the display mode of the reserved icon HA changes is performed. The reserved icon HA may change its display mode based on the result of a pre-determination at a predetermined timing when the reserved icon HA enters the starting hole or after the winning. When the reserved icon HA changes, an icon highlight image 808a of a mode corresponding to the display mode of the reserved icon HA is added and a sound is output. Note that the icon change performance in which the icon TI or reserved icon HA changes is not limited to the timing shown in the figure, and may be performed at any timing such as when the reserved icon enters the starting hole, when the performance pattern starts to change, before the pseudo consecutive development, after the reach is established, etc.

In the pseudo 3 variable display performance, after the first performance pattern (for example, the "6" pattern) stops as the left pattern, a reach suggestion performance that suggests the establishment of a reach may be performed (time t3-2, FIG. 17(e)). The reach suggestion performance is a performance in which a performance pattern of the same type as the stopped left pattern moves from top to bottom in the right area while decelerating, and the same type of performance pattern is expected to stop in the right area. In the reach suggestion performance, in addition to the performance in which the same type of performance pattern moves while decelerating in the right area, a performance that suggests the possibility of a reach being established by text or sound may be performed. During the execution of the reach suggestion performance, a reach suggestion emphasis performance that emphasizes the reach suggestion performance is performed. Specifically, as a reach suggestion emphasis performance, an emphasis image 804a that emphasizes the right pattern moving at a low speed is added to the right pattern. Together with the display of this emphasis image 804a, a sound (reach suggestion emphasis performance sound) corresponding to the reach suggestion emphasis performance is output. In addition, when a reach suggestion emphasis effect is being performed on the right symbol, a reach suggestion emphasis effect may also be performed on the left symbol.

After the reach suggestion effect, the first effect pattern (the "6" pattern) stops as the right pattern, and the reach is established (time t4, FIG. 17(f)). When this right pattern stops, a specific pattern emphasis effect may be performed in which an emphasis image 802a is added to the right pattern. A specific pattern emphasis effect sound is output along with the display of this emphasis image 802a. For example, if a performance pattern of the same type as the left pattern stops in the right area after the left pattern stops, a specific pattern emphasis effect of the same type as the left pattern may be performed for the right pattern. Also, if a performance pattern different from the left pattern stops in the right area after the left pattern stops, an emphasis effect may not be performed for the right pattern, or a specific pattern emphasis effect of a different type from the specific pattern emphasis effect performed when the left pattern stopped may be performed. The specific pattern highlighting effect may be started when the right pattern stops, or may be started just before the right pattern stops, and the right pattern stops while the specific pattern highlighting effect is being performed. The specific pattern highlighting effect may be started just after the right pattern stops. The specific pattern highlighting effect performed when the right pattern stops has multiple modes that indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. For example, the likelihood of a jackpot may differ depending on the color, shape, pattern, etc. of the highlighting image 802a. The likelihood of a jackpot may also differ depending on the specific pattern highlighting effect sound while the highlighting image 802a is being displayed. The highlighting image 802a may be added to the right pattern when a reach is achieved, and the highlighting image 802a may also be added to the stopped left pattern.

Immediately after the reach is established, a reach pattern emphasis effect is performed in which an emphasis image 810a that emphasizes the reach pattern (left pattern and right pattern) is added (time t4-1, FIG. 17(g)). In the reach pattern emphasis effect, an emphasis image 810a that is superimposed over the left pattern and the right pattern is displayed. At least a part of the left pattern and the right pattern is hidden by the emphasis image 810a. In addition, in conjunction with the display of the emphasis image 810a, a sound corresponding to the reach pattern emphasis effect (reach pattern emphasis effect sound) is output. In addition, in conjunction with the display of the emphasis image 810a, the light-emitting means may emit light in a predetermined manner. In addition, there are multiple modes of the reach pattern emphasis effect with different jackpot expectation degrees. The jackpot expectation degree may differ depending on the color, shape, and pattern of the emphasis image 810a. In addition, there are multiple types of reach pattern emphasis effect sound, and the jackpot expectation degree may differ depending on the type of reach pattern emphasis effect sound. To emphasize the reach symbol, letters or characters may be displayed superimposed on the left and right symbols, and the likelihood of a jackpot may differ depending on the letters or characters.

After that, the highlighted image 810a is erased, the reach symbol highlighting effect ends, and the N reach effect is performed. In the N reach effect, the left and right symbols stop and the effect symbol changes in the middle area.

During the N reach performance, an N reach emphasis performance may be performed in which an emphasis image 811a is added to the reach symbols (the temporarily stopped left and right symbols) (time t4-2, FIG. 17(h)). In addition, along with the display of the emphasis image 811a, a sound corresponding to the N reach emphasis performance (N reach emphasis performance sound) is output. Note that the N reach emphasis performance may be performed on the changing middle symbol instead of (or in addition to) the reach symbol. After the N reach performance, there are cases where a notification is given as to whether or not a jackpot has been won, and cases where it may further develop into a SP reach performance.

Note that a predetermined BGM starts to be output when the special symbol starts to change, and the predetermined BGM continues until a reach is established (the start of the N reach performance), and continues during the N reach performance. In other words, the BGM does not change before and after the start of the N reach performance. The predetermined BGM may continue to be output during the reach symbol highlight performance, or the output of the BGM may be temporarily suspended during the reach symbol highlight performance, and the same BGM may be output again after the start of the N reach performance. Also, the volume of the predetermined BGM may be lowered while the reach symbol highlight performance sound is being output, and the volume of the predetermined BGM may be returned to normal after the end of the reach symbol highlight performance. Note that the predetermined BGM may be output from the start action until the reach is established, and the output of the predetermined BGM may end with the execution of the reach symbol highlight performance, and the BGM for the N reach may be output during the N reach performance thereafter. Note that a predetermined BGM may be output from the start action until the reach is established, and the output of the predetermined BGM may end with the execution of the reach symbol highlight performance, and the BGM for the N reach may be output during the N reach performance thereafter.

Note that a first specific pattern highlighting effect may be performed when the effect pattern stops in the left area, and a second specific pattern highlighting effect may be performed when the effect pattern stops in the right area. In the first specific pattern highlighting effect, an emphasis image 802a may be added to the effect pattern and the effect pattern may operate in a first manner, and in the second specific pattern highlighting effect, an emphasis image different from the emphasis image 802a may be added to the effect pattern and the effect pattern may operate in a second manner. That is, the display manner may be different between the first specific pattern highlighting effect and the second specific pattern highlighting effect. On the other hand, the same sound (common specific pattern highlighting effect sound) may be output when the first specific pattern highlighting effect is performed and when the second specific pattern highlighting effect is performed. Note that, when the first specific pattern highlighting effect is performed and when the second specific pattern highlighting effect is performed, different specific pattern highlighting effect sounds may be output. Note that, when the first specific pattern highlighting effect is performed and when the second specific pattern highlighting effect is performed, different specific pattern highlighting effect sounds may be output.

In addition, when the performance pattern stops in the middle area, a third specific pattern emphasis performance may be performed to emphasize the middle pattern. The first specific pattern emphasis performance and the third specific pattern emphasis performance may have different display modes and may also have different specific pattern emphasis performance sounds. In addition, the first specific pattern emphasis performance and the third specific pattern emphasis performance may have different display modes, but may share the same specific pattern emphasis performance sound. In addition, the first specific pattern emphasis performance and the third specific pattern emphasis performance may have the same display mode, but may share different specific pattern emphasis performance sounds.

Figure 18 shows an example of the effects from the start of fluctuation in normal mode to the N-reach effect, and is a diagram showing an example of the effect when a different effect pattern is used as the reach pattern. When a reach is achieved using a different effect pattern, the same effect as in Figure 17 is basically executed, but the form of the emphasis effect before and after the reach is achieved differs from that in Figure 17.

As shown in FIG. 18, at time t2-1, when the "1" symbol stops as the left symbol, a specific symbol emphasis effect is performed in which an emphasis image 805a is added to the "1" symbol (FIG. 18(b)). The emphasis image 805a is an image different from the emphasis image 802a in FIG. 17(b). In addition, a specific symbol emphasis effect sound (a sound different from that when the above-mentioned emphasis image 802a is displayed) is output in conjunction with the display of the emphasis image 805a. Note that the display mode (emphasis image) of the emphasis effect is the same when the first effect symbol (e.g., the "6" symbol) stops in the left area and when the second effect symbol (e.g., the "1" symbol) stops, and the specific symbol emphasis effect sound may also be the same. In addition, the display mode (emphasis image) of the emphasis effect is different when the first effect symbol stops in the left area and when the second effect symbol stops, but the specific symbol emphasis effect sound may also be the same. In addition, when the first effect pattern stops in the left area and when the second effect pattern stops, the display mode of the emphasis effect (emphasis image) is the same, but the specific pattern emphasis effect sound may be different.

Also, as shown in FIG. 18(e), after the second performance pattern (for example, a "1" pattern) stops as the left pattern, a reach suggestion performance is performed using the second performance pattern to suggest the establishment of a reach (time t3-2). During the execution of the reach suggestion performance using the second performance pattern, a reach suggestion emphasis performance is performed to emphasize the reach suggestion performance. Specifically, as the reach suggestion emphasis performance, an emphasis image 806a that emphasizes the second performance pattern moving at a low speed in the right area is added to the second performance pattern. The emphasis image 806a is an image different from the emphasis image 804a added in the reach suggestion performance using the first performance pattern. Together with the display of this emphasis image 806a, a reach suggestion emphasis performance sound (a sound different from the reach suggestion emphasis performance sound when the emphasis image 804a is displayed) is output. When a reach suggestion emphasis performance is performed for the right pattern, a reach suggestion emphasis performance may also be performed for the left pattern. Note that the display mode (emphasis image) of the emphasis effect may be different between the reach suggestion emphasis effect when the reach suggestion effect is performed using the first effect pattern and the reach suggestion emphasis effect when the reach suggestion effect is performed using the second effect pattern, but the reach suggestion emphasis effect sound may be the same. Also, the display mode (emphasis image) of the emphasis effect may be the same between the reach suggestion emphasis effect when the reach suggestion effect is performed using the first effect pattern and the reach suggestion emphasis effect when the reach suggestion effect is performed using the second effect pattern, and the reach suggestion emphasis effect sound may be the same. Also, the display mode (emphasis image) of the emphasis effect may be the same between the reach suggestion emphasis effect when the reach suggestion effect is performed using the first effect pattern and the reach suggestion emphasis effect when the reach suggestion effect is performed using the second effect pattern, and the reach suggestion emphasis effect sound may be different.

After the reach suggestion effect, the second effect pattern (e.g., the "1" pattern) stops as the right pattern, and the reach is established (time t4, FIG. 18(f)). When this right pattern stops, a specific pattern emphasis effect is performed in which an emphasis image 805a is added to the right pattern as described above. In this way, the specific pattern emphasis effect performed on the right pattern when the reach is established differs depending on the pattern when the reach is established. Note that the display mode (emphasis image) of the specific pattern emphasis effect is different when the reach is established with the first effect pattern (e.g., the "6" pattern) and when the reach is established with the second effect pattern (e.g., the "1" pattern), but the specific pattern emphasis effect sound may be the same. Also, the display mode of the specific pattern emphasis effect is the same when the reach is established with the first effect pattern and when the reach is established with the second effect pattern, and the specific pattern emphasis effect sound may also be the same. In addition, when a reach is achieved with the first performance pattern and when a reach is achieved with the second performance pattern, the display mode of the specific pattern highlighting performance is the same, but the specific pattern highlighting performance sound may be different.

Immediately after the reach is established, a reach pattern emphasis effect is performed in which an emphasis image 812a that emphasizes the reach pattern (the second effect pattern stopped on the left and right) is added (time t4-1, FIG. 18 (g)). The emphasis image 812a is an image different from the emphasis image 810a when the first effect pattern is displayed in the reach mode. In addition, with the display of the emphasis image 812a, a reach pattern emphasis effect sound (a sound different from the reach pattern emphasis effect sound while the emphasis image 810a is being displayed) is output. In this way, the reach pattern emphasis effect performed on the reach pattern after the reach is established differs depending on the reach pattern. Note that the display mode (emphasis image) of the reach pattern emphasis effect differs when the reach is established with the first effect pattern and when the reach is established with the second effect pattern, but the reach pattern emphasis effect sound may be the same. In addition, when a reach is achieved with the first performance pattern and when a reach is achieved with the second performance pattern, the display mode of the reach pattern highlighting performance may be the same, and the reach pattern highlighting performance sound may also be the same. In addition, when a reach is achieved with the first performance pattern and when a reach is achieved with the second performance pattern, the display mode of the reach pattern highlighting performance may be the same, but the reach pattern highlighting performance sound may be different.

During the N reach performance, an N reach emphasis performance may be performed in which an emphasis image 813a is added to each of the reach patterns (second performance patterns that are temporarily stopped) (time t4-2, FIG. 18 (h)). The emphasis image 813a is an image different from the emphasis image 811a when the first performance pattern is displayed in the reach mode. In addition, with the display of the emphasis image 813a, an N reach emphasis performance sound (a sound different from the N reach emphasis performance sound while the emphasis image 811a is being displayed) is output. In this way, the N reach emphasis performance performed on the performance patterns during the N reach differs depending on the reach pattern. Note that the display mode (emphasis image) of the N reach emphasis performance differs when the N reach performance is performed with the first performance pattern and when the N reach performance is performed with the second performance pattern, but the N reach emphasis performance sound may be the same. In addition, when an N-reach performance is performed with the first performance pattern and when an N-reach performance is performed with the second performance pattern, the display mode of the N-reach emphasis performance may be the same, and the N-reach emphasis performance sound may also be the same. In addition, when an N-reach performance is performed with the first performance pattern and when an N-reach performance is performed with the second performance pattern, the display mode of the N-reach emphasis performance may be the same, but the N-reach emphasis performance sound may be different.

After the N reach performance, you may be notified whether or not you have won the jackpot, or it may progress further into a SP reach performance.

Next, we will explain the effects that are produced when the special mode is set. When the special mode is set, emphasis effects different from those shown in Figures 17 and 18 are produced.

Figure 19 is a diagram showing an example of the effects from the start of fluctuation to the N-reach effect in special mode. Figure 20 is a diagram showing an example of the effects from the start of fluctuation to the N-reach effect in special mode, in which a different effect pattern is used as the reach pattern.

As shown in Figures 19 and 20, in special mode, a special background image is displayed as the background image. Also, in special mode, a different type of effect pattern is used than in normal mode. Note that in special mode, the display mode of either the background image or the effect pattern may be different from that in normal mode. Also, a part of the background image and/or a part of the effect pattern may be different between normal mode and special mode. Also, although not shown, in special mode, the mode display 708 becomes the mode display 708 for special mode.

In addition, when comparing FIG. 17 with FIG. 19, the emphasis images used for each emphasis effect are different. In addition, when comparing FIG. 18 with FIG. 20, the emphasis images used for each emphasis effect are different.

For example, the highlighted images 800a to 804a, 807a, 808a, 810a, and 811a used in FIG. 17 may be replaced with highlighted images 800b to 804b, 807b, 808b, 810b, and 811b, respectively, in FIG. 19. Also, the highlighted images 805a, 806a, 812a, and 813a used in FIG. 18 may be replaced with highlighted images 805b, 806b, 812b, and 813b, respectively, in FIG. 20. Also, in the special mode, the sound when each highlighted image is displayed is different from that in the normal mode. Also, the output time (length) of each sound may be different.

The display mode of the emphasis effect (emphasis image) may be different when the effect is being performed in normal mode and when the effect is being performed in special mode, but the sound while the emphasis image is displayed may be the same. The display mode of the emphasis effect may be the same when the effect is being performed in normal mode and when the effect is being performed in special mode, but the sound while the emphasis image is displayed may be different. The display mode of the emphasis effect (emphasis image) may be the same when the effect is being performed in normal mode and when the effect is being performed in special mode, and the sound while the emphasis image is displayed may also be the same.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute an emphasis effect (e.g., a start emphasis effect) that emphasizes a performance pattern (e.g., a right pattern) during the variable display of a performance pattern (e.g., a left pattern). When a performance is executed in normal mode and when a performance is executed in special mode, the display mode of the emphasis effect differs, and the sound during execution of the emphasis effect differs. The output time of the sound also differs. That is, in normal mode, a first emphasis effect can be executed on the performance pattern, and in special mode, a second emphasis effect can be executed on the performance pattern. The first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect have different display modes, different display times, different types of sounds, and different output times (lengths) of sounds.

In addition, in the normal mode, when the first performance pattern (for example, the "6" pattern) is temporarily stopped in the specific area and when the second performance pattern (for example, the "1" pattern) is temporarily stopped in the specific area, the display mode of the specific pattern highlighting performance may be different, while the specific pattern highlighting performance sound during the execution of the specific pattern highlighting performance may be common. For example, as shown in FIG. 17(b), when the first performance pattern (the "6" pattern) is temporarily stopped in the specific area (left area), an emphasis image 802a is added to the first performance pattern. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18(b), when the second performance pattern (the "1" pattern) is temporarily stopped in the specific area (left area), an emphasis image 805a is added to the second performance pattern. In this case, the specific pattern highlighting performance sound may be common when the specific pattern highlighting performance is performed on the first performance pattern and when the specific pattern highlighting performance is performed on the second performance pattern. In addition, the specific pattern highlighting effect is performed even when the performance pattern temporarily stops in an area other than the specific area, and the display mode of the specific pattern highlighting effect differs when the first performance pattern stops and when the second performance pattern stops, but the specific pattern highlighting effect sound may be the same.

In addition, while the display mode (highlighted image) of the specific pattern highlighting effect for the first performance pattern differs between when the performance is being performed in normal mode and when the performance is being performed in special mode, the specific pattern highlighting effect sound may be the same.In addition, while the display mode of the specific pattern highlighting effect for the second performance pattern differs between when the performance is being performed in normal mode and when the performance is being performed in special mode, the specific pattern highlighting effect sound may be the same.

For example, when the effect is being performed in normal mode, as shown in FIG. 17(b), an emphasis image 802a is added to the first effect pattern (e.g., the "6" pattern), and when the effect is being performed in special mode, as shown in FIG. 19(b), an emphasis image 802b is added to the first effect pattern (e.g., the "6" pattern). On the other hand, for the specific pattern emphasis effect sound, a sound common to the normal mode and the special mode may be output.

As shown in FIG. 18(b), in normal mode, an emphasis image 805a is added to the second effect pattern (e.g., the "1" pattern). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20(b), in special mode, an emphasis image 805b is added to the second effect pattern (e.g., the "1" pattern). On the other hand, a common sound may be output for the specific effect pattern emphasis sound in normal mode and special mode.

In other words, while the display mode of the specific pattern highlighting effect differs when the first performance symbol stops in normal mode, when the second performance symbol stops in normal mode, when the first performance symbol stops in special mode, and when the second performance symbol stops in special mode, the sound that is played while the specific pattern highlighting effect is being executed may be the same.

The display mode (highlighted image) of the specific pattern highlighting effect for the first performance pattern may be the same when the performance is being performed in normal mode and when the performance is being performed in special mode, but the specific pattern highlighting effect sound may be different. Also, the display mode of the specific pattern highlighting effect for the second performance pattern may be the same when the performance is being performed in normal mode and when the performance is being performed in special mode, but the specific pattern highlighting effect sound may be different.

In addition, the display mode (highlighted image) of the specific pattern highlighting effect may be different when the specific pattern highlighting effect is performed for the third effect pattern (e.g., the "2" pattern) and when the specific pattern highlighting effect is performed for the first effect pattern (e.g., the "6" pattern), and the specific pattern highlighting effect sound may be different. The output time (length) of the sound may also be different. The sound during the execution of the specific pattern highlighting effect may be the same when the first effect pattern stops and when the second effect pattern stops, while the sound during the execution of the specific pattern highlighting effect may be different when the first effect pattern stops and when the third effect pattern stops. In this case, the mode of the specific notification (specific notification image and specific notification sound) when the notification condition is met is the same when the first to third effect patterns stop.

The specific pattern highlighting effect sound may be different when the specific pattern highlighting effect is performed on the first effect pattern in normal mode, when the specific pattern highlighting effect is performed on the third effect pattern in normal mode, when the specific pattern highlighting effect is performed on the first effect pattern in special mode, and when the specific pattern highlighting effect is performed on the third effect pattern in special mode.

In addition, the display mode (highlighted image) of the specific pattern highlighting effect for the third performance pattern may be different between normal mode and special mode, and the specific pattern highlighting effect sound may be different.In addition, the display mode (highlighted image) of the specific pattern highlighting effect for the third performance pattern may be the same between normal mode and special mode, but the specific pattern highlighting effect sound may be different.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute an icon change effect that changes the reserved icon or the icon (corresponding display corresponding to the acquired information) (FIG. 17(d)). In the icon change effect, the icon is changed to one of a plurality of display modes including a first display mode and a second display mode. In addition, when the icon change effect is executed, an icon highlight effect that displays an icon highlight image (808a) around the icon can be executed. When the icon is displayed in the first display mode and when it is displayed in the second display mode, the display mode of the icon highlight effect can be made different, and the sound during the execution of the icon highlight effect can be made different. That is, when the icon is displayed in the first display mode, the icon highlight effect of the first display mode is displayed and the first sound is output for a first time, and when the icon is displayed in the second display mode, the icon highlight effect of the second display mode is displayed and the second sound is output for a second time. On the other hand, when the icon is displayed in the first display mode and when it is displayed in the second display mode, the mode of the specific notification when the notification condition is established is common.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can change the display mode of the icon emphasis image between normal mode and special mode. When an icon change presentation is performed, the first icon emphasis image or the second icon emphasis image can be displayed when normal mode is set, and the third icon emphasis image or the fourth icon emphasis image can be displayed when special mode is set. A different sound can be output while each icon emphasis image is displayed. Furthermore, regardless of which icon emphasis image is displayed, if the notification condition is met, a specific notification is performed in the same manner.

In addition, before the N reach performance is performed, a reach suggestion performance that suggests the N reach performance is performed. In the reach suggestion performance, a performance of whether or not the performance pattern of the same type as the performance pattern stopped in the left area will stop in the right area (a performance that makes you expect that the performance pattern of the same type as the performance pattern stopped in the left area will stop in the right area) is performed. In the reach suggestion performance, a reach suggestion emphasis performance that emphasizes the performance pattern is performed. The performance mode (emphasis image and sound accompanying the display of the emphasis image) of the reach suggestion emphasis performance is different between the case where the reach suggestion performance is performed using the first performance pattern and the case where the reach suggestion performance is performed using the second performance pattern (Figure 17 (e), Figure 18 (e)). In addition, the performance mode of the reach suggestion emphasis performance is different between the normal mode and the special mode. Specifically, in the normal mode, when the reach suggestion performance is performed using the first performance pattern, the reach suggestion emphasis performance is performed in the first mode, and when the reach suggestion performance is performed using the second performance pattern, the reach suggestion emphasis performance is performed in the second mode. In addition, in the special mode, when the reach suggestion effect is performed using the first effect pattern, the reach suggestion emphasis effect is performed in the third manner, and when the reach suggestion effect is performed using the second effect pattern, the reach suggestion emphasis effect is performed in the fourth manner. Note that in the normal mode or special mode, when the reach suggestion effect is performed using the first effect pattern and when the reach suggestion effect is performed using the second effect pattern, the display manner (emphasis image) of the reach suggestion emphasis effect may be different, but the reach suggestion emphasis effect sound may be the same. Also, in the normal mode or special mode, when the reach suggestion effect is performed using the first effect pattern and when the reach suggestion effect is performed using the second effect pattern, the display manner (emphasis image) of the reach suggestion emphasis effect may be the same, and the reach suggestion emphasis effect sound may be different.

When the two performance symbols are displayed in a reach state as a result of the reach suggestion performance (i.e., when a reach is established), a specific pattern highlight performance is performed on the stopped right symbol. Specifically, in normal mode, when the first performance symbol is displayed in a reach state, a specific pattern highlight performance is performed in the first state, and when the second performance symbol is displayed in a reach state, a specific pattern highlight performance is performed in the second state (Fig. 17(f), Fig. 18(f)). In special mode, when the first performance symbol is displayed in a reach state, a specific pattern highlight performance is performed in the third state, and when the second performance symbol is displayed in a reach state, a specific pattern highlight performance is performed in the fourth state (Fig. 19(f), Fig. 20(f)).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance pattern is displayed in a reach state, an emphasis effect (a specific pattern emphasis effect when a reach is established, or a reach pattern emphasis effect) that emphasizes the performance pattern is performed. There are multiple performance modes for the emphasis effect when the performance pattern is displayed in a reach state. For example, when a reach is established, a specific pattern emphasis effect in a first display mode is performed for the right pattern, and a specific pattern emphasis effect in a second display mode with a higher expectation than the first display mode is performed. In addition, after a reach is established, a reach pattern emphasis effect for the left and right patterns is performed in a first display mode, and a second display mode with a higher expectation than the first display mode is performed. When the emphasis effect (a specific pattern emphasis effect when a reach is established, or a reach pattern emphasis effect) is performed in the first display mode, the sound corresponding to the emphasis effect is different from that when it is performed in the second display mode. Note that while the display mode of the emphasis effect is different, the sound corresponding to the emphasis effect may be common. Also, while the display format of the emphasis effects may be the same, the sounds corresponding to the emphasis effects may be different.

In addition, in the normal mode, the emphasis effect when the effect pattern is displayed in a reach state can be executed in a first display state and a second display state having a higher expectation than the first display state, and in the special mode, the emphasis effect when the effect pattern is displayed in a reach state can be executed in a third display state and a fourth display state having a higher expectation than the third display state. In this case, the sound corresponding to the emphasis effect may be different in the first to fourth display states. Also, the sound corresponding to the emphasis effect may be the same regardless of whether the emphasis effect is executed in any of the first to fourth display states.

Next, the effects after the N reach effect will be explained. Figure 21 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart of the effects after the SP reach effect in normal mode. Figure 22 is a diagram showing an example of an effect after the SP reach effect in normal mode, and is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen at each timing in Figure 21. Figure 23 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when a reach effect is performed using an effect pattern different from that in Figure 22.

As shown in FIG. 22, when the SP reach performance starts at time t5, a title display showing the title of the SP reach performance is performed (FIG. 22(a)). There are several types of SP reach performances with different expectation levels, and there is a title display corresponding to each SP reach performance. At time t5, the title corresponding to the SP reach performance to be performed is displayed. Here, although not shown, a title highlight image that emphasizes the title of the SP reach performance may be added and sound may be output. The title highlight image may be an image that is superimposed on a part or all of the title display, or an image that is added to the periphery of the title display. In addition, the display mode of the title highlight image may differ depending on the title display. In addition, when a title highlight image is added to a title display, the expectation level of a jackpot may be higher (or lower) than when it is not added. In addition, the expectation level may be the same when a title highlight image is added and when it is not added. In addition, BGM for the SP reach starts to be output in response to the start of the SP reach performance.

The icon TI continues to be displayed during the SP reach performance. If the icon TI has changed from a normal state to a special state before the start of the SP reach performance, the icon TI in the special state will continue to be displayed. If an icon emphasis image 808a was added to the icon TI before the start of the SP reach performance, the icon emphasis image 808a will be added during the SP reach performance. The display state of the icon TI may change at the start of the SP reach performance or during the SP reach performance.

After the SP reach performance starts, a roulette performance is performed in which multiple performance symbols change in the middle area during the SP reach performance. For example, as shown in FIG. 22(b), a roulette performance is performed in the middle area using the same performance symbols ("6" symbols) as on the left and right, a different performance symbol ("7" symbols) from the left and right, and an advanced symbol that suggests development to an SPSP reach performance. In this roulette performance, an SP highlight performance that highlights the performance symbols that are changing in the middle area may be performed for each performance symbol. In the SP highlight performance, an emphasis image is added to each symbol that constitutes the roulette performance. Note that there are times when the SP highlight performance is not performed in the roulette performance. In the roulette performance, the expectation of a jackpot may differ depending on whether or not an emphasis image is added to each symbol.

For example, as shown in FIG. 22(b), in the middle area, an emphasis image 820a is added to the changing "6" symbol, an emphasis image 821a is added to the changing "7" symbol, and an emphasis image 822a is added to the changing developing symbol. Each emphasis image is moved so as to follow the movement of the performance symbol. Each emphasis image may be displayed so as to be superimposed on each performance symbol, for example, or may be displayed around each performance symbol. Also, each emphasis image is displayed so that parts of it overlap with each other. While each emphasis image is displayed, a common sound (SP emphasis performance sound) is output. Note that even during this performance, if the notification condition is met, a specific notification is made.

Next, as a result of the roulette performance, an SPSP development suggestion performance is executed, which suggests the development to the SPSP reach performance (time t5-2, FIG. 22(c)). In the SPSP development suggestion performance, a performance in which the development pattern stops in the middle area is executed. Also, a development suggestion emphasis performance in which an emphasis image 823a is added to the development pattern may be executed. A sound corresponding to the development suggestion emphasis performance is output while this emphasis image 823a is displayed. When the development suggestion emphasis performance is executed, the expectation of a jackpot may be higher than when the development suggestion emphasis performance is not executed. Also, the development suggestion emphasis performance may have multiple modes with different expectation levels. Note that, in the SPSP development suggestion performance, the development pattern may stop in the middle area and an emphasis image (for example, the emphasis image 825a in FIG. 22(e)) may be added to the reach pattern (the performance pattern temporarily stopped on the left and right). Also, when the development pattern stops and the development suggestion emphasis performance is executed, the background music for the SP reach is stopped. In addition, when a jackpot is announced in the SP reach performance, if the same performance pattern as the left and right stops in the middle area as a result of the roulette performance, it is a jackpot. In this case, as described above, a jackpot pattern emphasis performance is performed. Also, if a performance pattern different from the left and right stops in the middle area as a result of the roulette performance, it is a miss. Note that after a performance pattern different from the left and right stops in the middle area, it may develop into an SPSP reach performance. Also, if a special miss has been won, when a performance pattern different from the left and right stops in the middle area, an emphasis performance is performed on the performance pattern suggesting a miss, and a transition to a low base time-saving state may occur.

After the development pattern stops in the middle area, a role-playing performance is performed (time t5-3, FIG. 22 (d)). In the role-playing performance, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b move from the standby position to a performance position in front of the screen (the center of the screen) and operate at that performance position. In addition, as the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b operate, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are illuminated by multiple LEDs emitting light in a predetermined illumination pattern. In addition, a role-playing highlighting image 824a that highlights the first movable member 73a is displayed on the screen behind the first movable member 73a. The role-playing highlighting image 824a is displayed around the first movable member 73a when viewed by the player. In addition, a role-playing operation sound is output in conjunction with the display of the role-playing highlighting image 824a. Note that there are multiple illumination modes of the first movable member 73a, and the display mode of the role-playing highlighting image 824a may differ depending on each illumination mode. The light emission state of the first movable member 73a and the display state of the reel highlighting image 824a may be, for example, blue, green, and red, in which order the probability of a big win increases. If the notification conditions are met during this reel performance, a specific notification is issued. Note that the reel performance at time t5-3 may be executed immediately before time t5 (i.e., before the start of the SP reach performance).

Next, the title of the SPSP reach performance is displayed, and the SPSP reach performance starts (time t6, FIG. 22(e)). With the start of the SPSP reach performance, BGM for the SPSP reach is output. There are several types of SPSP reach performances with different degrees of expectation, and there is a title display corresponding to each SPSP reach performance. At time t6, the title corresponding to the SPSP reach performance to be executed is displayed. Here, although not shown, a title highlight image that highlights the title of the SPSP reach performance may be added and sound may be output. The title highlight image may be an image that is superimposed on a part or all of the title display, or an image that is added around the title display. In addition, the display mode of the title highlight image may differ depending on the title display. In addition, when a title highlight image is added to a title display, the expectation of a jackpot may be higher (or lower) than when a title highlight image is not added. In addition, the expectation may be the same when a title highlight image is added and when it is not added.

As shown in FIG. 22(e), in the SPSP reach performance, an emphasis performance may be performed in which an emphasis image 825a that emphasizes the reach pattern is added. This emphasis image 825a may be added to the reach pattern during the SP reach performance of FIGS. 22(a) to (c). When the emphasis image 825a is added to the reach pattern, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the emphasis image 825a is not added to the reach pattern. Note that when the emphasis image 825a is added to the reach pattern, the expectation of a jackpot may be lower than when the emphasis image 825a is not added, or it may be the same. Also, there are multiple types of emphasis images 825a that are added to the reach pattern, and the expectation of a jackpot may be different or the same depending on the type of emphasis image 825a added.

Note that when a SPSP reach performance is performed using different reach patterns, the same emphasis image 825a may be added to the reach patterns. For example, as shown in FIG. 23, when a SPSP reach performance is performed using a "7" pattern, an emphasis image 825a is added to the "7" pattern. Note that the probability of adding an emphasis image 825a to a reach pattern may differ depending on the reach pattern. For example, the probability of adding an emphasis image 825a may be higher for a "7" pattern than for a "6" pattern. Note that the form of the emphasis image 825a may differ depending on the reach pattern. For example, a first emphasis image 825a may be added to a "6" pattern, and a second emphasis image 825a may be added to a "7" pattern.

During the SPSP reach performance, a background image corresponding to the SPSP reach performance is displayed, and a video corresponding to the SPSP reach performance is displayed. For example, a video performance of characters fighting each other is displayed. At the end of the video performance, a middle pattern performance is performed in the middle area using the same performance pattern ("6" pattern) as the left and right and a different performance pattern ("7" pattern) from the left and right (time t6-1, FIG. 22(f)). For example, as a middle pattern performance, a performance in which two performance patterns push each other is performed. In the middle pattern performance, a middle pattern emphasis performance in which an emphasis image that emphasizes each performance pattern is added may be performed for each performance pattern. For example, when one of the two performance patterns pushes the other, an emphasis image is added to one performance pattern, and when the other pushes the other, a different emphasis image is added to the other performance pattern. Note that the expectation of a jackpot may differ when an emphasis image is added to a performance pattern and when it is not added.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22(f), different emphasis images are added to the two performance patterns used in the middle pattern performance. For example, emphasis image 826a is added to the "6" pattern, and emphasis image 827a is added to the "7" pattern. Each emphasis image may be displayed so as to be superimposed on each performance pattern, or may be displayed around each performance pattern. When emphasis image 826a is added to the "6" pattern, emphasis image 827a is not added to the "7" pattern, and when emphasis image 827a is added to the "7" pattern, emphasis image 826a is not added to the "6" pattern. That is, emphasis image 826a and emphasis image 827a are not displayed at the same time. In this case, when emphasis image 826a is displayed and when emphasis image 827a is displayed, a common sound (middle pattern emphasis performance sound) corresponding to the middle pattern emphasis performance is output. Regardless of the type of the performance pattern used in the middle pattern performance, the same emphasis images 826a and 827a are added. For example, in the SPSP reach performance shown in FIG. 22, a "6" symbol is used as the reach symbol, and in the SPSP reach performance, a middle pattern performance using the "6" symbol and the "7" symbol is performed. In this case, the emphasis image 826a is added to the "6" symbol, and the emphasis image 827a is added to the "7" symbol. In the SPSP reach performance in the variable performance related to another special symbol judgment, a "2" symbol is used as the reach symbol, and a middle pattern performance using the "2" symbol and the "3" symbol may be performed. In this case, the same emphasis image 826a is added to the "2" symbol suggesting a big hit, and the same emphasis image 827a is added to the "3" symbol suggesting a miss. That is, regardless of the type of reach pattern, an emphasis image 826a is added to the performance pattern that is the same as the reach pattern, and an emphasis image 827a is added to the performance pattern that is different from the reach pattern. An emphasis image corresponding to each performance pattern is prepared, and an emphasis image corresponding to the performance pattern used in the middle pattern performance may be added to that pattern. For example, an emphasis image 826a corresponding to the "6" pattern, an emphasis image 827a corresponding to the "7" pattern, and another emphasis image corresponding to the "8" pattern may be prepared. During this performance, if the notification condition is met, a specific notification is issued in the same manner as above.

Note that the middle pattern effect is not limited to two effect patterns, but may be performed using three or more effect patterns. In this case, a different emphasis image is added to each pattern. When an emphasis image is added to one effect pattern and displayed, an emphasis image is not added to the other effect patterns even if the other effect patterns are displayed. Alternatively, when an emphasis image is added to one effect pattern and displayed, the other effect patterns are not displayed, and the emphasis image corresponding to the other effect patterns may not be displayed. Even in this case, a common sound is output while any one of the emphasis images is displayed. Also, there may be times when two or more emphasis images are displayed simultaneously. For example, when the "6" pattern and the "7" pattern are displayed simultaneously in the middle area, the emphasis image 826a and the emphasis image 827a may be displayed simultaneously. In this case, for example, there are times when the "6" pattern and its emphasis image 826a are mainly displayed, and times when the "7" pattern and its emphasis image 827a are mainly displayed, and a common sound is output regardless of which pattern and its emphasis image are mainly displayed.

Next, at time t6-2 at the end of the SPSP reach performance, a button fanning performance is performed (FIG. 22(g)). The button fanning performance is a performance performed before the operation performance that encourages the pressing of the performance button 17, and is a performance that makes the player expect the operation performance to be performed. In the button fanning performance, a performance is performed in which a button portion image 712 that imitates the performance button 17 moves from the left or right to the center of the screen. The button portion image 712 is an image that shows a part of the button image 710, and may be a part of the button image 710, or may be an image of the button image 710 made semi-transparent. The button image 710 is formed by overlapping a plurality of button portion images 712. In addition, in the button fanning performance, a button fanning emphasis performance may be performed in which an emphasis image 828a that emphasizes the button portion image 712 is displayed. During the display of the emphasis image 828a, a sound corresponding to the button fanning emphasis performance is output. The emphasis image 828a moves according to the movement of the button portion image 712. The emphasis image 828a may be displayed around the button portion image 712, or may be displayed superimposed on the button portion image 712. During this performance, if the notification conditions are met, a specific notification is made in the same manner as described above.

Although not shown in the figures, there are multiple modes of button highlighting, and the button highlighting can be performed in any of the multiple modes. For example, in the first mode of button highlighting, a first highlight image 828a is displayed and a first sound is output, and in the second mode of button highlighting, a second highlight image 828a is displayed and a second sound is output. The degree of expectation may differ depending on the mode of the button highlighting.

There are also multiple modes for the button-teasing effect. For example, in a first button-teasing effect, the button portion image 712 may be displayed moving from the left and right, and in a second button-teasing effect, the button portion image 712 may be displayed moving from the top and bottom. When the first button-teasing effect is performed and when the second button-teasing effect is performed, a different emphasis image 828a may be displayed and a different sound may be output.

When two button portion images 712 overlap and stop in the center of the screen, the button image 710 that mimics the effect button 17 is completed, and operation of the effect button 17 becomes effective. On the other hand, when the two button portion images 712 do not overlap and pass each other, the button image 710 is not completed, and operation of the effect button 17 is not effective.

When the button image 710 is completed, an operation performance is performed to encourage the pressing of the performance button 17 (time t7, FIG. 22 (h)). When an operation performance is performed, the expectation of a big win is higher than when an operation performance is not performed. In addition, when the emphasized image 828a is displayed in the button teasing performance, the operation performance may be performed more easily than when it is not displayed. In addition, when the emphasized image 828a is displayed in the button teasing performance, the operation performance may always be performed. There are multiple modes of operation performance. For example, there is a first change mode operation performance in which the display mode of the button image changes in a first cycle by the button image 710 blinking. In addition, there is a second change mode operation performance in which the display mode of the button image changes in a second cycle by the button image 710 moving up and down (changing between a non-operation state and an operation state). In addition, the mode of operation performance has a mode that suggests the expectation. For example, there is a normal color mode operation performance in which the button image 710 is displayed in a normal color, and a red mode operation performance in which the button image 710 is displayed in a red color with a higher expectation than the normal color. There may be multiple other modes. In addition, the operation presentation displays an operation valid period image 711 indicating the operation valid period.

Also, as shown in FIG. 22(h), a button highlight effect may be executed to display an emphasis image 829a that highlights the button image 710. At this time, a sound accompanying the display of the emphasis image 829a is output. The emphasis image 829a is displayed around the button image 710. Even if the button image 710 changes periodically (for example, moves up and down), the emphasis image 829a does not change periodically and is displayed in a fixed area. Note that the emphasis image 829a may be displayed superimposed on the button image 710, and in this case, the emphasis image 829a changes periodically in conjunction with the periodic movement of the button image 710. Also, when the emphasis image 829a is displayed, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when it is not displayed. When the emphasis image 829a is displayed, the jackpot may be confirmed. Also, when the emphasis image 829a is displayed, the effect button 17 may vibrate. Note that when the emphasis image 829a is displayed, the expectation of a jackpot may be lower than when it is not displayed, or may be the same. The highlighted image 829a may have multiple patterns that indicate the likelihood of a big win. If the notification conditions are met during this performance, a specific notification will be made in the same manner as above.

In this embodiment, the operation effects include a short button press operation effect that prompts the player to press the effect button 17 once, a rapid press operation effect that prompts the player to press the effect button 17 repeatedly, and a long button press operation effect that prompts the player to press the effect button 17 for a long time. Figures 22(h) and 23(h) show cases where a short button press operation effect is performed.

22(h), when a rapid-fire operation presentation is performed, a button image 710 that resembles the presentation button 17 is displayed, and an image or text that encourages rapid tapping of the presentation button 17 is displayed, or a sound that encourages rapid tapping is output. In addition, in the rapid-fire operation presentation, the display mode of the button image 710 changes at a predetermined cycle, and the cycle is shorter (or longer) than the cycle of change in the display mode when a short button press operation presentation is performed. For example, the rapid-fire operation presentation includes a first change mode rapid-fire operation presentation and a second change mode rapid-fire operation presentation, and in the first change mode rapid-fire operation presentation, the button image 710 may be displayed blinking at a third cycle that is shorter than the first cycle. In the second change mode rapid-fire operation presentation, the button image 710 may move up and down at a fourth cycle that is shorter than the second cycle. During the rapid-fire operation presentation, a rapid-fire response presentation is performed in response to one press of the presentation button 17. For example, as a rapid-fire response presentation, a presentation in which a gauge accumulates in response to one press of the presentation button 17 is performed. When the gauge is filled to its maximum value by pressing the button multiple times, a jackpot is announced, and when the valid operation period has elapsed without the gauge filling to its maximum value, a miss is announced. Also, when a rapid-fire operation presentation is performed, if the valid operation period has elapsed without the presentation button 17 being operated, a jackpot or miss is announced according to the result of the special pattern determination. When such a rapid-fire operation presentation is performed, an emphasis image different from the emphasis image 829a is added to the button image 710 each time the presentation button 17 is pressed, and a sound corresponding to the emphasis image is output. Also, each time the presentation button 17 is pressed, the color of the button image 710 may change, the presentation button 17 may emit light, or the presentation button 17 may vibrate.

In addition, when a long button press operation performance is performed in FIG. 22 (h), a button image 710 that imitates the performance button 17 is displayed, and an image or text that encourages the long press of the performance button 17 is displayed, or a sound that encourages the long press is output. When a long button press operation performance is performed, a long press response performance is performed in response to the long press of the performance button 17. For example, as a long press response performance, a performance in which multiple part images gather according to the press time of the performance button 17 is performed. When a specified number of part images gather and one overall image is completed by the long press of the button, a jackpot is notified, and when the effective operation period has elapsed without the overall image being completed, a loss is notified. In addition, when a long button press operation performance is performed, if the effective operation period has elapsed without the operation of the performance button 17, a jackpot or loss is notified according to the result of the special pattern judgment. When such a long button press operation effect is performed, an emphasis image (an image different from the emphasis image displayed in the above-mentioned short button press operation effect and rapid-fire operation effect) is added to the button image 710 according to the elapsed time since the effect button 17 was pressed and held, and a sound corresponding to the emphasis image is output. Also, according to the elapsed time since the effect button 17 was pressed and held, the color of the button image 710 may change, the illumination state of the effect button 17 may change, the effect button 17 may vibrate, or the vibration state may change.

As shown in FIG. 22(i), if the result of the special pattern determination is a jackpot, a jackpot is announced in response to a single press of the effect button 17 during the short button press operation effect, or in response to the passage of the effective operation period (time t8). Here, the same type of "6" pattern as on the left and right stops in the middle area. When the middle pattern stops, an emphasis image 830a is added to the middle pattern and a sound is output, resulting in a jackpot announcement emphasis effect. The emphasis image 830a is displayed so as to be superimposed on the middle pattern that suggests a jackpot. During this effect, if the announcement condition is met, a specific announcement is made in the same manner as above.

In FIG. 22, a "6" symbol is used as the reach symbol, but when a reach effect is executed using a "7" symbol, for example, the same "7" symbols as on the left and right are stopped in the middle area as shown in FIG. 23(i). The "7" symbol is stopped as the middle symbol, and a jackpot notification highlight effect is performed for the middle symbol. The jackpot notification highlight effect when the "7" symbol is stopped to notify a jackpot is different in presentation mode from the jackpot notification highlight effect when the "6" symbol is stopped to notify a jackpot. Specifically, a highlight image 831a different from the highlight image 830a is added to the "7" symbol, and a different sound is output. For example, when an even number symbol is used to perform a reach effect and the even number symbol stops in the middle area to notify a jackpot, an emphasis image 830a may be added to the middle symbol and a first sound may be output, and when an odd number symbol is used to perform a reach effect and the odd number symbol stops in the middle area to notify a jackpot, an emphasis image 831a may be added to the middle symbol and a second sound may be output. Also, different emphasis images may be added and different sounds may be output for the "7" symbol and symbols other than the "7". Also, when a jackpot is notified by a symbol other than the "7" symbol, the same emphasis image may be added and the same sound may be output.

After the middle pattern indicating a jackpot stops, a special feature performance is performed (time t8-1, FIG. 22(j)). In this special feature performance, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b move from the standby position to a performance position in front of the screen (the center of the screen) and operate at that performance position. In addition, as the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b operate, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are illuminated by a plurality of LEDs emitting light in a specific light emission pattern. In addition, as the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b operate, a special feature operation sound is output. Here, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b operate in the same manner as in FIG. 22(d), but the LED light emission pattern is different from the special feature performance in FIG. 22(d). In addition, a special feature highlight image 835a that highlights the first movable member 73a is displayed on the screen behind the first movable member 73a. The reel highlighting image 835a is an image different from the reel highlighting image 824a displayed in FIG. 22(d). In addition, a reel operation sound is output in accordance with the operation of the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b. The reel operation sound output here is a sound different from the reel operation sound output in FIG. 22(d). Note that the operation mode of the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b may be different between FIG. 22(j) and FIG. 22(d). Also, there may be times when the LED light emission pattern is the same between FIG. 22(j) and FIG. 22(d). There may be times when the reel highlighting image displayed is the same between FIG. 22(j) and FIG. 22(d). There may be times when the reel operation sound output is the same between FIG. 22(j) and FIG. 22(d). Also, during this reel performance, if the notification condition is met, a specific notification is performed in the same manner as described above.

Next, at time t8-2, a performance symbol suggesting a jackpot is displayed and a jackpot symbol emphasis performance A is performed in which an emphasis image 850a is added (FIG. 22(k)). Along with the display of the emphasis image 850a, a jackpot symbol emphasis performance sound A is output. The jackpot symbol emphasis performance A at time t8-2 is as described above.

As shown in FIG. 23(k), when a reach effect is executed using a different effect pattern (e.g., a "7" pattern), an emphasis image 856a different from the emphasis image 850a is displayed in the jackpot pattern emphasis effect A. In addition, a sound corresponding to the emphasis image 856a is output in conjunction with the display of the emphasis image 856a. Note that, regardless of which effect pattern is used to execute the reach effect, the same emphasis image 850a may be displayed in the jackpot pattern emphasis effect A and the same jackpot pattern emphasis effect sound A may be output.

Furthermore, after that, a re-draw performance may be performed (time t9-1, FIG. 22(l)). In the re-draw performance, a combination of three performance symbols suggesting a jackpot is displayed in a variable manner. In this re-draw performance, a re-draw pattern emphasis performance may be performed in which an emphasis image 855a is added to the performance symbol suggesting a jackpot. The emphasis image 855a is displayed so as to be superimposed on the performance symbol. In addition, a re-draw pattern emphasis performance sound is output while the emphasis image 855a is being displayed. When a re-draw pattern emphasis performance is performed, the performance symbol to which the emphasis image 855a is added may be more likely to stop and be displayed than when a re-draw pattern emphasis performance is not performed.

As a result of the re-draw effect, the three effect symbols that indicate a jackpot are stopped, and jackpot symbol highlighting effect B is performed (time t9-2, FIG. 22(m)). Here, the "6" symbol that was the same effect symbol that stopped before the re-draw effect was stopped, so the jackpot symbol highlighting effect B is the same effect as jackpot symbol highlighting effect A.

On the other hand, if the re-selection effect results in the display of a "7" symbol, which indicates a jackpot, an emphasis image 856a is displayed in the jackpot symbol emphasis effect B (FIG. 23(m)). In addition, a sound corresponding to the emphasis image 856a is output in conjunction with the display of the emphasis image 856a.

After the display of FIG. 22(m), while the three performance symbols suggesting a jackpot are temporarily stopped, a jackpot pattern emphasis performance C is performed in which an emphasis image 852a is added to each performance symbol (time t9-3, FIG. 22(n)). Along with the display of the emphasis image 852a, a jackpot pattern emphasis performance sound C is output. The jackpot pattern emphasis performance C at time t9-3 is as described above. As shown in FIG. 22(n) and FIG. 23(n), in the jackpot pattern emphasis performance C, the same emphasis image 852a is displayed for each performance symbol. Note that different emphasis images 852a may be displayed depending on the type of performance symbol.

Then, the big win symbol highlighting effect C ends, and at time t10, the special symbol is displayed and the three effect symbols are displayed. The highlighting image 852a is not displayed when the three effect symbols are displayed. Note that the big win symbol highlighting effect sound C may continue to be output even while the three effect symbols are displayed.

After the three performance symbols are stopped and displayed, an opening performance is performed to indicate the start of the jackpot game (time t10-1, FIG. 22(o)). In the opening performance, an opening background image is displayed, and a predetermined right-hit notification is performed to encourage the player to hit to the right. For example, as a right-hit notification, a right-hit notification sound (e.g., a sound such as "Aim to the right") is output to encourage the player to hit to the right, and a right-hit notification image 900 is displayed. The opening performance is performed for a predetermined opening time (e.g., 15 to 20 seconds), and the right-hit notification continues while the opening performance is being performed.

Then, the opening presentation ends, and the big prize opening opens, and the big prize presentation starts with the start of the first round of round play (time t10-2, FIG. 22(p)). In the big prize presentation, a video dedicated to the big prize play is displayed in the center of the screen. In addition, in the big prize presentation, a right-hit notification image 901 that encourages the player to hit right, and a round number image 910 that indicates the current round number are displayed. When the right-hit notification image 901 starts to be displayed, the above-mentioned right-hit notification sound that encourages the player to hit right is not output. In addition to or instead of the round number image 910, the number of prize balls that will be paid out in response to winning at the big prize opening may be displayed.

Next, we will explain the effects that occur after the SP reach effect in special mode. Figure 24 shows an example of the effects that occur after the SP reach effect in special mode.

After the SP reach performance, the same reach performance as in the normal mode is performed in the special mode, but the manner of each emphasis performance is different from that in the normal mode. As shown in FIG. 24, in the special mode, at time t5-1, emphasis images 820b to 822b with different display manners may be added to each performance pattern instead of emphasis images 820a to 822a (FIG. 24(b)). Also, in a performance that suggests the development to the SPSP reach performance, emphasis image 823b with different display manners may be added to the development pattern instead of emphasis image 823a (time t5-2, FIG. 24(c)). Also, in the role performance before the start of the SPSP reach performance, emphasis image 824b may be displayed around the first movable member 73a instead of emphasis image 824a (time t5-3, FIG. 24(d)).

In addition, during the SPSP reach performance, an emphasis image 825b different from emphasis image 825a may be added to the reach pattern (time t6, FIG. 24(e)).In addition, during the SPSP reach performance, emphasis images 826b and 827b different from emphasis images 826a and 827a may be added to the performance pattern displayed in the middle area (time t6-1, FIG. 24(f)).

In addition, in the button promotion effect, a button promotion highlight effect may be executed in which a highlight image 828b different from the highlight image 828a is used to highlight the button partial image 712 (time t6-2, FIG. 24(g)). In addition, in the operation effect, a button highlight effect may be executed in which a highlight image 829b different from the highlight image 829a is used to highlight the button image 710 (time t7, FIG. 24(h)). When the highlight image 829b is displayed, a button highlight effect sound different from that when the highlight image 829a is displayed is output.

Similarly, highlighted images 830b, 835b, 850b, 852b different from those in normal mode may be displayed and different sounds may be output (times t8 to t9-3, Figures 24(i) to (n)).

In this way, when an emphasis effect is performed on the effect pattern or effect device (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) during a reach effect, the display mode of the emphasis effect differs between normal mode and special mode. This makes it possible to diversify the effects and increase interest. Even when the same reach effect is performed in normal mode and special mode, interest can be increased by making the display mode of the emphasis effect different.

The display mode of the emphasis effects may be different between normal mode and special mode, while the emphasis effect sound associated with the emphasis effects may be the same. The display mode of the emphasis effects may be the same between normal mode and special mode, while the emphasis effect sound associated with the emphasis effects may be different.

If the notification conditions are met during the execution of each of the above-mentioned emphasis effects, the specific notification is performed in the same manner. The specific notification image is displayed preferentially over the effect pattern and the emphasis image that emphasizes the effect pattern, and is displayed superimposed on the effect pattern and the emphasis image. In addition, the execution time of the specific notification is longer than the execution time of each emphasis effect. For example, if the notification conditions are met when the effect pattern starts to change, the specific notification is executed during the execution of the effect shown in FIG. 17(a), and the specific notification image is displayed superimposed on the effect pattern 701 (the number pattern and the character image behind it) and the emphasis image 800a. In addition, a specific notification sound is output at that time. The execution time of the specific notification is longer than the start-time emphasis effect at the start of the change. In addition, even when at least one of the three effect patterns is temporarily stopped (for example, FIG. 17(b)), if the notification conditions are met, the specific notification image is displayed superimposed on the effect pattern and its emphasis image. A specific notification can be executed even while the preview image is being displayed (FIG. 17(d)), and the specific notification image is displayed with priority over the preview image and the emphasis image 807a. Also, when a reach suggestion effect using an effect pattern is executed (FIG. 17(e)), if the notification conditions are met, the specific notification image is displayed superimposed on the effect pattern and the emphasis image 804a, and a specific notification sound is output. Also, when the effect pattern is displayed in a reach mode (FIGS. 17(f)(g)), if the notification conditions are met, a specific notification is executed, the specific notification image is displayed superimposed on the reach pattern, and a specific notification sound is output. Also, the execution time of the specific notification is longer than the execution time of the emphasis effect for the reach pattern. In addition, specific notifications can be issued during the N reach performance (Figure 17 (h)), SP reach performance (Figures 22 (a)-(c)), and SPSP reach performance (Figures 22 (e)-(i)), and specific notification images are displayed superimposed on each image (performance pattern, emphasis image, button portion image, button image, etc.).

Specific notifications can also be executed while the special feature emphasis images 824, 835 that emphasize the special feature are displayed. If a special feature performance is executed while a specific notification is being executed, the special feature (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) is operated and the special feature emphasis images are displayed, but the specific notification image is displayed with priority over the special feature emphasis images.

The manner in which the special notification occurs is the same regardless of whether any of the emphasis effects are being performed, and is the same in both normal mode and special mode. In other words, when a special notification occurs during any of the emphasis effects, the same special notification image is displayed and the same special notification sound is output.

Next, we will explain an example of a performance when a miss is announced from the SPSP reach performance. Figure 25 shows an example of a performance after the SP reach performance in normal mode, and is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a miss is announced in the SPSP reach performance.

As shown in FIG. 25, the same presentation as in FIG. 22 is performed until the operation presentation at time t7. When a miss is announced, the possibility of each highlighted image being displayed may be lower than when a jackpot is announced. After the operation presentation, a miss announcement presentation is performed at time t8 in which a presentation pattern different from the reach pattern is stopped in the middle area (FIG. 25(i)). Here, in the miss announcement presentation, an emphasis image 860a may be added to the middle pattern suggesting a miss. When an emphasis image 860a is added, the expectation of a jackpot may be higher than when an emphasis image 860a is not added. Also, while the emphasis image 860a is displayed, a sound corresponding to the emphasis image 860a is output.

Next, a switching image is displayed across the entire screen (Figure 25 (j)). This switching image is an image for switching from the background image for the SPSP reach to the normal background image. While the switching image is displayed, the display of the performance pattern (and the emphasis image 860a added to the performance pattern) is restricted, and the output of the sound corresponding to the emphasis image 860a is also restricted. Note that a hold icon or the icon in question may be displayed while the switching image is displayed.

Next, the screen switches to the background image before the SP reach development, and the three performance symbols suggesting a miss are displayed in a temporarily stopped state (Figure 25 (k)). Here, the reserved icon HA and the icon TI are also redisplayed. The display mode of the icon TI is returned to the normal mode. Even if an icon highlight image 808a was added to the icon TI before the SPSP reach performance started, the icon highlight image 808a is erased when the icon is redisplayed. After the switching image is displayed, when the reserved icon HA and the icon TI are redisplayed, the display mode of the icon TI may be maintained as the special mode. The icon highlight image 808a may also be maintained.

In addition, a performance pattern suggesting a jackpot may be displayed on the screen of FIG. 25(k) after the switching image is displayed. In that case, an emphasis effect (jackpot pattern emphasis effect) is executed on the performance pattern suggesting a jackpot. For example, if emphasis image 860a is added to the middle pattern in FIG. 25(i), the performance pattern suggesting a jackpot may be more likely to be displayed on the screen of FIG. 25(k) after the switching image is displayed than if emphasis image 860a was not added. Here, an example is shown in which a performance pattern suggesting a miss is displayed on the screen of FIG. 25(k) after the switching image is displayed.

Then, after a predetermined temporary stop period has elapsed, at time t10, the special symbol is displayed as still, and the three performance symbols are displayed as still (actual stop) (Figure 25 (l)).

Next, we will explain an example of a full rotation reach effect. Figure 26 shows an example of a full rotation reach effect in normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 26, for example, in the same way as when an SPSP reach performance is performed, the start action is performed to the reach suggestion performance (FIG. 26(a) to (e)). In the pseudo 3 variable display performance, after the reach suggestion performance is performed, the reach is not established and a pseudo consecutive development performance is performed (FIG. 26(f)). As a result, the pseudo 4 variable display performance is performed (FIG. 26(g)). Next, the screen goes black (FIG. 26(h)), and the full rotation reach performance starts (FIG. 26(i)). In the full rotation reach performance, a background image for the full rotation reach performance is displayed, and a video dedicated to the full rotation reach is displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in FIG. 26(i), multiple sets of specific pattern combinations (combinations of patterns with the same numbers) consisting of a combination of three performance patterns that suggest a jackpot are displayed, and the multiple sets of specific pattern combinations are scrolled downward at a relatively slow speed. An emphasis image 857a is added to one of the multiple specific symbol combinations, and a sound corresponding to the emphasis image 857a is output while the emphasis image 857a is being displayed. For example, the emphasis image 857a is added to the specific symbol combination that is most advantageous to the player. Then, after a full rotation reach effect is performed for a predetermined time, one of the multiple specific symbol combinations stops, and a jackpot is announced (FIG. 26(j)). At this time, a jackpot symbol emphasis effect A is performed. After the effect symbol suggesting a jackpot stops, a jackpot symbol emphasis effect C is performed on the three provisionally stopped effect symbols without going through a re-draw effect (or through a re-draw effect) (FIG. 26(k)). Then, three effect symbols are stopped in response to the stop display of the special symbol (FIG. 26(l)).

Also, when the full rotation reach effect shown in FIG. 26 is being executed, if the notification conditions are met, a specific notification is issued in the same manner. In this case, too, the specific notification image is displayed superimposed on the effect pattern and the highlighted image 857a that indicate a jackpot.

Note that even when the special mode is set, the full rotation reach effect may be executed. In this case, during the full rotation reach effect, an emphasis image 857b different from the emphasis image 857a is added to the specific symbol combination and a different sound is output. Note that the same emphasis effect as in the normal mode may be performed in the special mode.

Next, we will explain the effects that occur when a loss is notified without a reach effect. Figure 27 shows an example of an effect that occurs when a loss-indicating effect pattern is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 27, after the special symbol starts to change, the left symbol stops, and then the right symbol different from the left symbol stops (FIG. 27(a)-(c)). Then, the left symbol and the center symbol different from the right symbol stop, and the chance eye effect is performed (FIG. 27(d)). This combination of three even symbols suggesting a miss is a chance eye that indicates a relatively high expectation of a big win in the next and subsequent special symbol changes. When the chance eye stops, a chance eye emphasis effect is performed in which an emphasis image 815a is displayed for each of the three effect symbols suggesting a miss, and a sound corresponding to the image is output. In addition, in the chance eye emphasis effect, the light emitting means emits light in a predetermined light emitting pattern. This chance eye effect is performed based on the result of a pre-determination for the reserved. Specifically, when the ball enters the starting hole, whether or not to perform the chance eye effect is determined based on the result of the pre-determination. In addition, the chance eye effect may be performed when multiple consecutive special symbols change. In addition, there are multiple forms of chance eye effect with different expectations. Then, after the chance highlighting effect has ended, the three effect patterns are displayed in a stopped state in accordance with the stopped display of the special pattern (Figure 27 (e)).

Even during the execution of the chance eye effect shown in FIG. 27, if the notification conditions are met, a specific notification is issued. In this case, too, the specific notification image is displayed superimposed on the effect pattern and the emphasis image 815a that indicate a miss. The display time of the emphasis image 815a is shorter than the display time of the specific notification image. In addition, the output time of the sound accompanying the display of the emphasis image 815a is shorter than the output time of the specific notification sound.

Note that the chance eye effect may be executed even when the special mode is set. In this case, the mode of the chance eye emphasis effect is different, and an emphasis image 815b different from the emphasis image 815a is added to each effect pattern, and a different sound is output. Note that the same mode of chance eye emphasis effect as in the normal mode may be executed in the special mode as well.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the first performance symbol (for example, the "6" symbol) is displayed in a reach state, and in the reach performance using the first performance symbol, a predetermined performance is performed using the first performance symbol suggesting a jackpot and a second performance symbol (for example, the "7" symbol) different from the first performance symbol (for example, FIG. 22 (f)). The predetermined performance is a performance that makes the player expect a jackpot or not. During the predetermined performance, an emphasis performance (for example, the emphasis image 826a) that emphasizes the first performance symbol and an emphasis performance (for example, the emphasis image 827a) that emphasizes the second performance symbol are performed. While the display mode is different between the emphasis performance that emphasizes the first performance symbol and the emphasis performance that emphasizes the second performance symbol, a common sound is output during the execution of the emphasis performance. In addition, a specific notification can be executed during the emphasis performance that emphasizes the first performance symbol and during the emphasis performance that emphasizes the second performance symbol, and the specific notification sound is common in the specific notification.

In addition, in both normal mode and special mode, a predetermined effect can be executed using the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern. The display manner is different between the emphasis effect for the first effect pattern in normal mode, the emphasis effect for the second effect pattern in normal mode, the emphasis effect for the first effect pattern in special mode, and the emphasis effect for the second effect pattern in special mode. Meanwhile, a common sound is output during execution of the emphasis effect in both normal mode and special mode. Note that the sound during execution of the emphasis effect may be different between normal mode and special mode. For example, a first common sound may be output during execution of the predetermined effect in normal mode, and a second common sound may be output during execution of the predetermined effect in special mode.

In addition, there are cases where a first performance pattern (e.g., a "6" pattern) is displayed in a reach state and a first reach performance is performed using the first performance pattern, and cases where a second performance pattern (e.g., a "7" pattern) is displayed in a reach state and a second reach performance is performed using the second performance pattern (FIGS. 22 and 23). In the first reach performance, when the first performance pattern is stopped in the middle area (i.e., when a jackpot is announced using the first performance pattern), a first emphasis performance (display of emphasis image 830a) can be executed for the first performance pattern. In the second reach performance, when the second performance pattern is stopped in the middle area (i.e., when a jackpot is announced using the second performance pattern), a second emphasis performance (display of emphasis image 831a) can be executed for the second performance pattern. The display mode is different between the first emphasis performance and the second emphasis performance, and the sound that is generated during the execution of the emphasis performance is also different. On the other hand, during both the first emphasis performance and the second emphasis performance, if the notification condition is met, a specific notification is issued. The specific notification mode is the same during both the first emphasis performance and the second emphasis performance, and a common specific notification image is displayed and a common specific notification sound is output. Note that while the display mode is different between the first emphasis performance and the second emphasis performance, the sound that is generated during the execution of the emphasis performance may be the same.

In addition, in both the normal mode and the special mode, there are times when the first performance symbol (e.g., the "6" symbol) is displayed in a reach state and the first reach performance is performed using the first performance symbol, and times when the second performance symbol (e.g., the "7" symbol) is displayed in a reach state and the second reach performance is performed using the second performance symbol. In both the normal mode and the special mode, when the first performance symbol stops in the middle area in the first reach performance, the first emphasis performance can be performed on the first performance symbol, and when the second performance symbol stops in the middle area in the second reach performance, the second emphasis performance can be performed on the second performance symbol. The display modes and emphasis performance sounds are different between the first emphasis performance in the normal mode, the second emphasis performance in the normal mode, the first emphasis performance in the special mode, and the second emphasis performance in the special mode. On the other hand, in both the normal mode and the special mode, a specific notification can be executed during the first emphasis performance, and a specific notification can be executed during the second emphasis performance. In both the normal mode and the special mode, the manner of the specific notification is the same, and a common specific notification image is displayed and a common specific notification sound is output. Note that while the display manner is different between the first emphasis performance in the normal mode, the second emphasis performance in the normal mode, the first emphasis performance in the special mode, and the second emphasis performance in the special mode, the emphasis performance sound may be the same. Also, while the display manner is common between the first emphasis performance in the normal mode, the second emphasis performance in the normal mode, the first emphasis performance in the special mode, and the second emphasis performance in the special mode, the emphasis performance sound may be different.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute a jackpot pattern highlighting effect that highlights a performance pattern that suggests a jackpot game is being played during the display of the performance pattern (Fig. 22 (k), (n), Fig. 24 (k), (n)). When the performance is being performed in the normal mode and when the performance is being performed in the special mode, the display mode (highlighted image) of the jackpot pattern highlighting effect is different, and the sound (jackpot pattern highlighting effect sound) during the execution of the jackpot pattern highlighting effect is different. That is, in the normal mode, the first jackpot pattern highlighting effect can be executed for the performance pattern that suggests a jackpot, and in the special mode, the second jackpot pattern highlighting effect can be executed for the performance pattern that suggests a jackpot. The first jackpot pattern highlighting effect and the second jackpot pattern highlighting effect have different display modes, different display times, different types of sounds, and different sound output times (lengths). On the other hand, whether the performance is being performed in the normal mode or the special mode, if the notification condition is met, a specific notification is performed. The specific notification format is the same when the effect is being performed in normal mode and when the effect is being performed in special mode, and a common specific notification image is displayed and a common specific notification sound is output.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute reach effects using performance symbols, and the reach effects include early effects (e.g., N reach effects) and late effects (e.g., SP reach effects and SPSP reach effects). In the early effects (N reach effects), a first emphasis effect (e.g., N reach emphasis effect in FIG. 17(h). Addition of emphasis image 811a) can be executed for the performance symbols. In the late effects (SPSP reach effects), a second emphasis effect (e.g., SP emphasis effect in FIG. 22(e). Addition of emphasis image 825a) can be executed for the performance symbols. The first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect have different performance modes (images and sounds). In the first emphasis effect, a first emphasis image can be displayed and a first emphasis effect sound can be output, and in the second emphasis effect, a second emphasis image can be displayed and a second emphasis effect sound can be output. The first emphasis performance sound is a different sound from the second emphasis performance sound, and the output time (length) is also different. During both the first emphasis performance and the second emphasis performance, if the notification condition is met, a specific notification is issued. The specific notification is the same during both the first emphasis performance and the second emphasis performance, and a common specific notification image is displayed and a common specific notification sound is output.

In addition, a first emphasis performance may be executed in the early performance (e.g., N reach performance) in the normal mode, a second emphasis performance may be executed in the late performance (e.g., SPSP reach performance) in the normal mode, a third emphasis performance may be executed in the early performance in the special mode, and a fourth emphasis performance may be executed in the late performance in the special mode. In this case, the performance mode (image and sound) may be different in each of the first to fourth emphasis performances, and different emphasis performance sounds may be output. A specific notification can be executed in the same mode while any of the first to fourth emphasis performances is being executed. Note that the first emphasis performance and the third emphasis performance may have different display modes but the same sound. Also, the second emphasis performance and the fourth emphasis performance may have different display modes but the same sound. Also, the first emphasis performance and the third emphasis performance may have the same display mode but different sounds. Furthermore, the second and fourth emphasis effects may have the same display format but different sounds.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute a reach effect using a performance pattern, and the reach effect includes a front-stage effect (for example, an SP reach effect) and a rear-stage effect (for example, an SPSP reach effect). In the front-stage effect (SP reach effect), a role effect that operates a performance role object can be executed, and when the role effect is executed, a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the performance role object can be executed (FIG. 22 (d)). In addition, in the rear-stage effect, a role effect can be executed, and when the role effect is executed, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the performance role object can be executed (FIG. 22 (j)). The performance mode of the emphasis effect is different when the first emphasis effect is executed and when the second emphasis effect is executed. When the first emphasis effect is executed and when the second emphasis effect is executed, if the notification condition is established, a specific notification is executed in the same manner, a common specific notification image is displayed, and a common specific notification sound is output. In addition, when the first emphasis performance is performed and when the second emphasis performance is performed, the display mode of the emphasis performance may be different, while the emphasis performance sound may be the same. In addition, when the first emphasis performance is performed and when the second emphasis performance is performed, the display mode of the emphasis performance may be common, and the emphasis performance sound may be different. In addition, in both the normal mode and the special mode, the first emphasis performance that emphasizes the performance role object can be executed in the first stage performance, and the second emphasis performance that emphasizes the performance role object can be executed in the second stage performance. The performance mode (image and sound) of the emphasis performance may be different between the first emphasis performance in the normal mode, the second emphasis performance in the normal mode, the first emphasis performance in the special mode, and the second emphasis performance in the special mode. In addition, while the display mode of the emphasis performance is different between the first emphasis performance in the normal mode, the second emphasis performance in the normal mode, the first emphasis performance in the special mode, and the second emphasis performance in the special mode, the emphasis performance sound may be the same. Conversely, the display mode of the emphasis effect may be the same, but the emphasis effect sound may be different. Also, the effect mode may be the same for the first emphasis effect in normal mode and the first emphasis effect in special mode, and the effect mode may be the same for the second emphasis effect in normal mode and the second emphasis effect in special mode.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute a first role performance (FIG. 22 (d) or (j)) that operates the role performance in normal mode, and can execute a second role performance (FIG. 24 (d) or (j)) that operates the role performance in special mode. When executing the first role performance, a first emphasis performance that emphasizes the role performance can be executed, and when executing the second role performance, a second emphasis performance that emphasizes the role performance can be executed. The display mode of the first emphasis performance is different from the display mode of the second emphasis performance. In addition, the sound during the execution of the first emphasis performance is different from the sound during the execution of the second emphasis performance, and the output time (length) of the sound is also different. Note that the display mode may be common between the first emphasis performance and the second emphasis performance, and the sound during the emphasis performance may be different. In addition, the display mode may be different between the first emphasis performance and the second emphasis performance, and the sound during the emphasis performance may be common. Furthermore, whether the first emphasis effect is performed or the second emphasis effect is performed, if the notification conditions are met, the specific notification is performed in the same manner, a common specific notification image is displayed, and a common specific notification sound is output.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment may display a suggestive image (preview image, title display, etc.) suggesting the possibility of a jackpot at a predetermined timing during the variable performance (for example, before a reach is achieved or during the reach performance), and can display an emphasis image that emphasizes this suggestive image (FIG. 17(d)). There are a first emphasis image and a second emphasis image. When the first emphasis image is displayed and when the second emphasis image is displayed, the sound during the display of the emphasis image is made different, and the output time (length) of the sound is made different. On the other hand, whether the first emphasis image is displayed or the second emphasis image is displayed, if the notification condition is met, a specific notification is performed. The form of the specific notification is the same when the first emphasis image is displayed and when the second emphasis image is displayed, and a common specific notification image is displayed and a common specific notification sound is output.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can display the emphasis image in different ways depending on whether it is in normal mode or special mode. When a preview image is displayed, the first emphasis image or the second emphasis image can be displayed when normal mode is set, and the third emphasis image or the fourth emphasis image can be displayed when special mode is set. A different sound can be output while each emphasis image is being displayed. Furthermore, regardless of which emphasis image is displayed, if the notification condition is met, a specific notification is made in the same way.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute an operation effect (FIG. 22(h)) that displays an operation prompting image (button image 710) that prompts the user to operate the operation means (effect button 17). In addition, an emphasis effect that emphasizes the operation prompting image (display of emphasis image 829a in FIG. 22(h)) can be executed. In addition, when the notification condition is met, a specific notification can be executed during the emphasis effect. When the effect is executed in the normal mode and when the effect is executed in the special mode, the display mode of the emphasis effect can be made different and the sound corresponding to the emphasis effect can be made different. That is, in the normal mode, a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the operation prompting image can be executed, and in the special mode, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the operation prompting image can be executed. The first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect have different display modes, different display times, different types of sounds, and different sound output times (lengths). In addition, when the effect is executed in the normal mode and when the effect is executed in the special mode, the specific notification can be executed in the same manner, and a common specific notification image is displayed and a common specific notification sound is output.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can also execute an operation presentation (FIG. 22(h)) that displays an operation prompting image (button image 710) that prompts the player to operate the operation means (presentation button 17). Before displaying the operation prompting image, an operation suggestion presentation (button teasing presentation in FIG. 22(g)) that suggests an operation presentation can be executed. In the operation suggestion presentation, a suggestion image (button part image 712) that suggests the operation prompting image and an emphasis image (828a in FIG. 22(g)) that emphasizes the suggestion image can be displayed. The emphasis images include a first emphasis image and a second emphasis image, and it is possible to make the sound during the display of the emphasis image different when the first emphasis image is displayed and when the second emphasis image is displayed. In addition, when the notification condition is met, a specific notification can be executed during the display of the emphasis image, and a common specific notification image is displayed and a common specific notification sound is output when the first emphasis image and the second emphasis image are displayed.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute the above operation suggestion effects in both normal mode and special mode. The first emphasis image or the second emphasis image can be displayed in both normal mode and special mode, and the display mode of the emphasis image may be different between the first emphasis image in normal mode, the second emphasis image in normal mode, the first emphasis image in special mode, and the second emphasis image in special mode, and the sound during the display of the emphasis image may be different. In this case, the display mode of the emphasis image may be the same, and the sound during the display of the emphasis image may be different. Conversely, the display mode of the emphasis image may be different, and the sound during the display of the emphasis image may be the same.

Also, in the above, an example of an operation performance in an SPSP reach performance has been described. The operation performance is not limited to this timing, and can be performed at any timing. Also, there are cases where an operation performance is performed multiple times in one variable performance. For example, an operation performance may be performed before the reach is established, during the N reach performance, during the SP reach performance, in the middle of the SPSP reach performance, just before the role performance is performed, etc. Also, different types of operation performances can be performed at each timing. For example, there may be a time when a short button press operation performance is performed, a time when a continuous tap operation performance is performed, and a time when a long button press operation performance is performed before the reach is established. Also, there may be a time when a short button press operation performance is performed, a time when a continuous tap operation performance is performed, and a time when a long button press operation performance is performed during the SP reach performance. Also, there may be a time when a short button press operation performance is performed, a time when a continuous tap operation performance is performed, and a time when a long button press operation performance is performed during the SPSP reach performance.

Figure 28 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation in which a short button press operation presentation is performed immediately before the preview presentation before the reach presentation. Figure 29 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation in which a rapid-hit operation presentation is performed immediately before the preview presentation before the reach presentation. Figure 30 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation in which a long button press operation presentation is performed immediately before the preview presentation before the reach presentation.

As shown in FIG. 28, if a short button press operation effect is performed before a reach effect is performed, an emphasis image 840a that emphasizes the button image 710 may be displayed around the button image 710. A sound corresponding to the emphasis image 840a is also output. In a special mode, an emphasis image 840b is displayed and a sound corresponding to the emphasis image 840b is output. If the effect button 17 is pressed once within the effective operation period, a preview image is displayed.

This short button press operation performance is executed in any of the modes including a normal color mode in which the button image 710 is displayed in a normal color and a red mode in which the button image 710 is displayed in red. The short button press operation performance may also be executed in a first change mode in which the button image 710 flashes, or a second change mode in which the button image 710 moves up and down. In this case, the change mode of the button image 710 may be different between the short button press operation performance (FIG. 22(h)) executed before the big win notification after the reach performance starts and the short button press operation performance (FIG. 28) executed immediately before the notice performance before the reach performance starts. For example, the flashing cycle of the button image 710 may be different between the short button press operation performance of the first change mode executed before the reach performance starts and the short button press operation performance of the first change mode executed after the reach performance starts. In addition, the period of the up and down movement of the button image 710 may be different between the short button press operation performance of the second change mode executed before the reach performance starts and the short button press operation performance of the second change mode executed after the reach performance starts. In addition, the probability of a jackpot may be different between the short button press operation performance of the red mode executed before the reach performance starts and the short button press operation performance of the red mode executed after the reach performance starts, and the latter may have a higher probability of a jackpot than the former.

Also, as shown in FIG. 29, when a rapid-fire operation performance is performed before a reach performance is performed, an emphasis image 841a that emphasizes the button image 710 may be displayed around the button image 710. A sound corresponding to the emphasis image 841a is also output. In the rapid-fire operation performance, a gauge image is displayed. When the performance button 17 is pressed once in the rapid-fire operation performance, one gauge is accumulated. In addition, in response to the pressing of the performance button 17, an emphasis image 842a that emphasizes the button image 710 is displayed and a sound corresponding to the operation is output. The emphasis image 842a is an image that is displayed in response to the pressing of the button, and is displayed only for a predetermined period from the pressing of the button. In contrast, the emphasis image 841a is an image that is displayed during the rapid-fire operation performance regardless of the pressing of the button, and is continuously displayed during the rapid-fire operation performance. The rapid-fire operation performance continues until the gauge reaches MAX or until the operation valid period has elapsed, and when the gauge reaches MAX, the rapid-fire operation performance ends and the next performance is performed. In FIG. 29, after the effect button 17 is pressed multiple times, a preview image is displayed.

This rapid-fire operation presentation is executed in any of the following modes: a normal color mode in which the button image 710 is displayed in a normal color; and a red mode in which the button image 710 is displayed in red. The rapid-fire operation presentation may be executed in a first change mode in which the button image 710 flashes, or in a second change mode in which the button image 710 moves up and down. In this case, the change mode of the button image 710 may be different between the rapid-fire operation presentation executed before the big win notification after the reach performance starts and the rapid-fire operation presentation (FIG. 29) executed immediately before the notice performance before the reach performance starts. For example, the flashing period of the button image 710 may be different between the rapid-fire operation presentation of the first change mode executed before the reach performance starts and the rapid-fire operation presentation of the first change mode executed after the reach performance starts. Also, the period of the up and down movement of the button image 710 may be different between the rapid-fire operation presentation of the second change mode executed before the reach performance starts and the rapid-fire operation presentation of the second change mode executed after the reach performance starts. In addition, the probability of winning may be different between the red-colored rapid-fire operation effect executed before the reach effect starts and the red-colored rapid-fire operation effect executed after the reach effect starts, and the latter may have a higher probability of winning than the former.

Although not shown in the figure, in the special mode, in response to a button press during the rapid-fire operation, an emphasis image 841b is displayed in place of the emphasis image 841a, and a sound corresponding to the emphasis image 841b is output. Also, in the special mode, in response to a button press during the rapid-fire operation, an emphasis image 842b is displayed in place of the emphasis image 842a, and a sound corresponding to the emphasis image 842b is output.

Also, as shown in FIG. 30, when a button long press operation performance is performed before a reach performance is performed, an emphasis image 843a that emphasizes the button image 710 may be displayed around the button image 710. A sound corresponding to the emphasis image 843a is also output. When the performance button 17 is pressed long in the button long press operation performance, some images of the preview image are collected according to the long press time. For example, when the left half of the preview image in the center of the screen is displayed, and the performance button 17 is pressed long for a predetermined time, a 1/4 image of the preview image is added, and a 3/4 image of the preview image (an image with 1/4 missing at the bottom right) is displayed. Then, when the performance button 17 is pressed long again, the entire preview image is displayed. Also, during the button long press operation performance, an emphasis image 844a that emphasizes the button image 710 is displayed in response to the long press of the performance button 17, and a sound corresponding to the emphasis image 844a is also output. The emphasis image 844a is an image that is displayed in response to the long press of the button, and is displayed for a predetermined period of time. In contrast, the emphasis image 843a is an image that is displayed during the long button press operation regardless of whether the button is pressed, and continues to be displayed during the long button press operation.

Although not shown, in the special mode, during the long button press operation performance, emphasis image 843b is displayed in place of emphasis image 843a, and a sound corresponding to emphasis image 843b is output. Also, in the special mode, in response to pressing the button during the long button press operation performance, emphasis image 844b is displayed in place of emphasis image 844a, and a sound corresponding to emphasis image 844b is output.

Note that, although an example of executing an operation presentation with a different operation mode before executing a preview performance has been described in FIG. 28 to FIG. 30, such an operation presentation may be executed, for example, before the development of an SP reach performance, before the development of an SPSP reach performance, or before a jackpot is announced. Whether or not an operation presentation is executed at each timing, and which of the three operation modes is executed, is determined based on the variation pattern. For example, the variation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach performance may include a variation pattern in which a short button press operation presentation is executed, a variation pattern in which a rapid-fire operation presentation is executed, and a variation pattern in which a long button press operation presentation is executed in the operation presentation before a jackpot is announced (the operation presentation at time t7).

In this way, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute an operation presentation that displays an operation prompting image (button image 710) that prompts an operation on the operating means (presentation button 17), and can display an emphasis image (841a, 843a) that emphasizes the operation prompting image in the operation presentation. The operation presentation includes a first operation presentation that prompts an operation of a first type (e.g., rapid tapping), and a second operation presentation that prompts an operation of a second type (e.g., long press). When executing the first operation presentation and when executing the second operation presentation, the display form of the emphasis image can be made different, and the sound during the display of the emphasis image can be made different. Furthermore, when executing the first operation presentation and when executing the second operation presentation, the form of the specific notification (specific notification image and specific notification sound) when the notification condition is met is the same when executing the first operation presentation and when executing the second operation presentation.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing the above operation presentation in both normal mode and special mode. The first operation presentation or the second operation presentation can be displayed in both normal mode and special mode, and the display mode of the highlighted image may be different when the first operation presentation is executed in normal mode, when the second operation presentation is executed in normal mode, when the first operation presentation is executed in special mode, and when the second operation presentation is executed in special mode, and the sound during the display of the highlighted image may be different. In this case, the display mode of the highlighted image may be common, and the sound during the display of the highlighted image may be different. Conversely, the display mode of the highlighted image may be different, and the sound during the display of the highlighted image may be common.

In addition, if an operation is performed on the operating means during the operation presentation, an emphasis presentation (842a, 844a) can be executed to emphasize the operation prompting image in response to the operation. The operation presentation includes a first operation presentation that prompts a first type of operation (e.g., rapid tapping) and a second operation presentation that prompts a second type of operation (e.g., long press). The emphasis presentation includes a first emphasis presentation (842a) that corresponds to an operation during the first operation presentation, and a second emphasis presentation (844a) that corresponds to an operation during the second operation presentation. It is possible to make the sound during the execution of the emphasis presentation different between when the first emphasis presentation is executed and when the second emphasis presentation is executed. In addition, the specific notification mode (specific notification image and specific notification sound) when the notification condition is satisfied during the execution of the first emphasis presentation is the same as during the execution of the second emphasis presentation.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute the above-mentioned first and second emphasis effects in both normal mode and special mode. When executing the first emphasis effect (emphasis image 842a) in normal mode, when executing the second emphasis effect (emphasis image 844a) in normal mode, when executing the first emphasis effect (emphasis image 842b) in special mode, and when executing the second emphasis effect (emphasis image 844b) in special mode, the display mode of the emphasis image may be different and the sound during the display of the emphasis image may be different. In this case, the display mode of the emphasis image may be the same and the sound during the display of the emphasis image may be different. Conversely, the display mode of the emphasis image may be different and the sound during the display of the emphasis image may be the same.

In addition, the display mode of the emphasis image emphasizing the operation prompting image related to the operation performance differs between the operation performance performed before the reach is established (Figure 28) and the operation performance performed after the reach is established (Figure 22 (h)), and the sound accompanying the display of the emphasis image differs. In addition, the display mode of the emphasis image emphasizing the operation prompting image related to the operation performance may differ between the operation performance before the SP reach performance starts and the operation performance after the SP reach performance starts, and the sound accompanying the display of the emphasis image may be different. In other words, the display mode of the emphasis image emphasizing the operation prompting image may differ between before the special performance (e.g., N reach, SP reach, SPSP reach, etc.) starts and after the special performance starts, and the sound accompanying the display of the emphasis image may be different. In addition, the mode of the specific notification (specific notification image and specific notification sound) when the notification condition is established is the same before the special performance starts and after the special performance starts. The display mode of the highlighted image may be different before and after the special effect starts, while the sound accompanying the display of the highlighted image may be the same. Also, the display mode of the highlighted image may be the same before and after the special effect starts, while the sound accompanying the display of the highlighted image may be different.

In addition, the display mode of the emphasis image that emphasizes the operation prompting image may be different between the operation performance performed before the special performance starts in normal mode (FIG. 28), the operation performance performed after the special performance starts in normal mode (FIG. 22(h)), the operation performance performed before the special performance starts in special mode, and the operation performance performed after the special performance starts in special mode (FIG. 24(h)), and the sound that accompanies the display of the emphasis image may be different. In this case, while the display mode of the emphasis image is different, the sound that accompanies the display of the emphasis image may be the same. Furthermore, while the display mode of the emphasis image is the same, the sound that accompanies the display of the emphasis image may be different.

In addition, the operation presentation and the presentation that is performed in response to the operation during the operation presentation may be executed at multiple times during the variable presentation. For example, during the variable display presentation of pseudo 1 (between t2 and t3 in FIG. 16), the short button press operation presentation shown in FIG. 28 may be executed, and a preview presentation may be executed in response to the button being pressed. After that, during the variable display presentation of pseudo 2, the short button press operation presentation may be executed, and a preview presentation may be executed in response to the button being pressed. Furthermore, after that, during the variable display presentation of pseudo 3, during the N reach presentation, or during the SP reach presentation, the short button press operation presentation may be executed, and a preview presentation may be executed in response to the button being pressed.

Figure 31 shows an example of an operation display executed during the change display of Pseudo 1 and a preview display corresponding to the operation. Figure 32 shows an example of an operation display executed during the change display of Pseudo 2 and a preview display corresponding to the operation.

As shown in FIG. 31, during the display of the pseudo 1 variation, a first button short press operation presentation is performed, and when the presentation button 17 is pressed during the first button short press operation presentation, a preview image is displayed. An emphasis image 809a that emphasizes this preview image is displayed, and a sound corresponding to the emphasis image 809a may be output. In addition, the light-emitting means may be caused to emit light in a first manner in conjunction with the display of the emphasis image 809a. For example, when the emphasis image 809a is displayed, the probability of a jackpot may be higher (or lower) than when the emphasis image 809a is not displayed, or it may be the same.

Also, as shown in FIG. 32, during the variable display of pseudo 2, a second button short press operation presentation is performed, and if the presentation button 17 is pressed during the second button short press operation presentation, a preview image is displayed. An emphasis image 807a that emphasizes this preview image is displayed, and a sound corresponding to the emphasis image 807a may be output. Also, the light-emitting means may be caused to emit light in a second manner in conjunction with the display of the emphasis image 807a.

Although not shown in the figure, when the special mode is set, a first button short press operation presentation can be executed while the pseudo 1 variation display is in progress. When the presentation button 17 is pressed during the first button short press operation presentation, a preview image is displayed and an emphasis image 809b may be displayed. A sound corresponding to the emphasis image 809b is also output. When the special mode is set, a second button short press operation presentation can be executed while the pseudo 2 variation display is in progress. When the presentation button 17 is pressed during the second button short press operation presentation, a preview image is displayed and an emphasis image 807b that emphasizes the preview image may be displayed. A sound corresponding to the emphasis image 807b is also output.

In this way, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute a special effect (e.g., pseudo consecutive, reach effect) that suggests the possibility of a special game being played. In addition, it is possible to execute an operation effect that displays an operation prompting image that prompts an operation on the operation means, and it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (e.g., a notice effect) according to an operation during the operation effect. It is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes a predetermined effect. The operation effect includes a first operation effect (operation effect during the fluctuation of pseudo 1) that is performed before the start of the special effect, and a second operation effect (operation effect during the fluctuation of pseudo 2) that is performed after the start of the special effect. In accordance with an operation during the execution of the first operation effect, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect (display of emphasis image 809a and output of sound corresponding to the image). In addition, in accordance with an operation during the execution of the second operation effect, it is possible to execute a second emphasis effect (display of emphasis image 807a and output of sound corresponding to the image). It is possible to make the sound during the execution of the emphasis effect different when executing the first emphasis effect and when executing the second emphasis effect. In addition, when the first emphasis performance is executed and when the second emphasis performance is executed, the specific notification mode (specific notification image and specific notification sound) when the notification condition is met is the same. Note that, while the display mode of the emphasis performance is different when the first emphasis performance is executed and when the second emphasis performance is executed, the sound during the emphasis performance may be the same. In addition, while the display mode of the emphasis performance is the same when the first emphasis performance is executed and when the second emphasis performance is executed, the sound during the display of the emphasis performance may be different.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing special effects (e.g., SP reach effects) that use effect symbols, and is also capable of executing emphasis effects (e.g., FIG. 22(c)) that emphasize the effect symbols in the special effects. BGM can be output while the effect symbols are changing, and it is possible to make the BGM different before and after the emphasis effect is executed. Meanwhile, the form of the specific notification (specific notification image and specific notification sound) when the notification conditions are met is the same before and after the emphasis effect is executed.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute a special effect (e.g., a reach effect) using the effect pattern, and the special effects include a first special effect (e.g., an N reach effect) and a second special effect (e.g., an SPSP reach effect). When executing the first special effect, a first emphasis effect (Fig. 17(g)) can be executed on the effect pattern, and when executing the second special effect, a second emphasis effect (Fig. 22(c)) can be executed on the effect pattern. Also, background music can be output while the effect pattern is changing. When executing the first emphasis effect, the background music before the execution of the first emphasis effect can be continuously output even after the execution of the first emphasis effect. Also, when executing the second emphasis effect, the background music before the execution of the second emphasis effect can be stopped. On the other hand, when the first emphasis performance is executed while a specific notification is being executed, the specific notification sound being output can be continued even after the first emphasis performance is executed, and when the second emphasis performance is executed while a specific notification is being executed, the specific notification sound being output can be continued even after the second emphasis performance is executed. In other words, the background music does not change before and after the first emphasis performance, and the background music changes before and after the second emphasis performance, but the specific notification sound does not change before and after the first or second emphasis performance, and does not stop.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment also executes an emphasis effect (FIG. 22(m)) that emphasizes the effect pattern that suggests a jackpot, and executes a right-hit notification (FIG. 22(o)) after the emphasis effect. In addition, if the notification condition is met, a specific notification can be executed. The specific notification is executed for a first time, and the right-hit notification is executed for a second time that is longer than the first time.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment executes an emphasis effect (FIG. 22(k)) that emphasizes the effect pattern that suggests a jackpot, and if the notification conditions are met during the emphasis effect, a specific notification can be executed. After the emphasis effect, the specific notification may be restricted even if the notification conditions are met. For example, the execution of the specific notification may be restricted during the period after the jackpot pattern emphasis effect (FIG. 22(k)) until the start of the jackpot game when the jackpot opening is opened (for example, FIG. 22(l)-(n)).

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment also executes an emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect symbols that suggest a jackpot, and executes a right-hit notification in response to the start of a jackpot game. Also, if the notification conditions are met, a specific notification can be executed. The specific notification is fixedly displayed in the first position (e.g., the center of the screen; FIG. 15), and the right-hit notification is displayed in the second position (the upper region of the screen; FIG. 22(o)) and then in the third position (the upper right region of the screen). Also, while the display mode of the specific notification does not change during the specific notification, the display mode of the right-hit notification changes from the first mode (900 in FIG. 22(o)) to the second mode (901 in FIG. 22(p)).

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute a re-display effect (re-lottery effect) in which a first effect symbol (e.g., "666"; FIG. 22(k)) suggesting a jackpot is displayed, and then a second effect symbol or the first effect symbol suggesting a jackpot is displayed. In the re-display effect, an emphasis effect (display of emphasis image 855a; FIG. 22(l)) in which the effect symbol is emphasized can be executed. A specific notification can be executed during the emphasis effect, and the specific notification is displayed with priority over the emphasis effect.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing a specific variation effect (full rotation reach effect) that displays multiple combinations of specific symbols, each of which is a combination of three symbols that suggest a jackpot (FIG. 26). In the specific variation effect, an emphasis effect (display of emphasis image 857a) that emphasizes the effect symbols that suggest a jackpot can be executed. A specific notification can be executed during the emphasis effect, and the specific notification is displayed with priority over the emphasis effect.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing a special effect (e.g., an SPSP reach effect) using effect symbols, which is an effect suggesting the possibility of a jackpot game being played. An emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect symbols in the special effect can be executed (FIGS. 25(f)-(h)). In addition, after displaying an effect symbol that suggests that a jackpot game will not be played in the special effect, a specific image (switching image) can be displayed (FIG. 25(j)). While the specific image is being displayed, the output of sound during the execution of the emphasis effect is restricted. On the other hand, if the notification condition is met, a specific notification can be executed even while the specific image is being displayed, and a specific notification image can be displayed superimposed on the specific image, and a specific notification sound can be output.

(Example of the time-saving mode)
Next, an example of the performance of the time-saving mode will be described. Fig. 33 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart regarding the variation of special symbols after a big win game is played. Fig. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the performance in the time-saving mode, and an example of an image displayed on the screen at each timing in Fig. 33. Figs. 33 and 34 show the performance after the big win game in Fig. 22(p).

As shown in Figures 33 and 34, when the final round of the jackpot game ends at time t0, the high base time-saving state is set, an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game is performed, and a time-saving mode entry effect is performed in the ending effect (Figure 34 (a)). The time-saving mode entry effect is an effect that suggests a transition to the time-saving mode. In addition, the right-hit notification image 901 is also displayed continuously during the jackpot game.

When the ending performance is over, the screen switches to the time-saving mode. In the time-saving mode, the background image for the time-saving mode, the performance pattern 701 for the time-saving mode, and the mode display 708 for the time-saving mode are displayed (Figure 34 (b)). In the high base time-saving state, the game is played by hitting to the right, the fluctuation time of the second special pattern is shortened, and the fluctuation of the second special pattern is repeated in a short time. Also, in the high base time-saving state, the right-hit notification image 901 is displayed so as not to overlap with the performance pattern. Note that an emphasis image that is not displayed in the normal mode and that emphasizes the mode display 708 may be added to the mode display 708 for the time-saving mode.

Specifically, after a jackpot is played, the first determination of the second special symbol is made at time t2, and the second special symbol begins to change. If the first determination of the second special symbol is determined to be a miss, the second special symbol stops after a predetermined change time (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed (time t3, Figure 34 (c)).

In the time-saving mode, the time for the second special symbol to change is shorter than in the normal mode and the special mode. In the normal mode and the special mode, even if the result of the special symbol judgment is a miss, the effect symbol temporarily stops (oscillates) before the effect symbol stops (before the special symbol stops) and stops after the temporary stop period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed. This temporary stop period makes it easier for the player to recognize the stop of the effect symbol. However, in the time-saving mode, if the result of the second special symbol judgment is a miss, the time for the special symbol to change is extremely short, so the effect symbol 701 is stopped in response to the stop of the second special symbol without setting a temporary stop period. When the effect symbol 701 stops, as shown in FIG. 34(c), a miss highlight image 870 is added to the effect symbol 701 suggesting a miss, and a sound accompanying the display of the image is output. As a result, in the time-saving mode, the performance pattern 701 can be stopped immediately without a temporary stop period, and the performance pattern can be emphasized by the miss highlight image 870. Furthermore, by displaying the miss highlight image 870, the player can be made to clearly recognize the stop of the performance pattern 701 without setting a temporary stop period. The miss highlight image 870 may be displayed around the performance pattern 701 or may be displayed inside the performance pattern 701. Furthermore, by operating the miss highlight image 870 inside the performance pattern 701 without changing the position of the performance pattern 701 (without shaking the entire performance pattern 701), the performance pattern 701 may be displayed as if it is shaking while being stopped.

After FIG. 34(c), the next special symbol starts to change, and a change effect is performed according to the change of the special symbol. In this change effect, if the result of the second special symbol determination is a miss, as shown in FIG. 34(c), the effect symbol 701 indicating a miss is displayed in a stopped state in response to the stop display of the second special symbol, and a miss highlighting image 870 is displayed.

After that, the second special symbol is repeatedly displayed and stopped, and the second special symbol is judged to be a small win Ka at the second special symbol judgment at time t4 (for example, the 50th change). In this case, the display of the second special symbol starts (FIG. 34(d)), and a reach suggestion display is performed (FIG. 34(e)). In the reach suggestion display, two of the same type of display symbols 701 move from top to bottom at a low speed, and a display that makes you expect a reach will be achieved is performed. In the reach suggestion display, an emphasis image 871 that emphasizes the display symbols 701 is displayed, and a sound accompanying the display of the image is output. Then, the same type of display symbols 701 (here, the "3" symbol) stop in the left and right areas, and a reach is achieved (FIG. 34(f)). When a reach is achieved, a reach display is performed for a predetermined time.

If the second special symbol determination is determined to be a miss and a reach variation pattern is selected, a miss is announced as a result of the reach effect, with different symbols on the left and right stopping in the middle symbol. Also, even if a miss variation pattern is selected, the reach suggestion effect shown in FIG. 34(e) may be performed. In this case, the reach suggestion effect results in no reach being achieved and a miss is announced.

As shown in FIG. 34(g), three performance symbols 701 indicating a jackpot are temporarily stopped as a result of the reach performance, and a jackpot pattern highlighting performance A is performed on the temporarily stopped performance symbols. In this jackpot pattern highlighting performance A, an emphasis image 872 is added to the three performance symbols 701, and a sound accompanying the display of the image 872 is output. In addition, the light-emitting means emits light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern. The jackpot pattern highlighting performance A in the time-saving mode is a different aspect (emphasis image, sound, and light-emitting pattern are different) from the jackpot pattern highlighting performance A in the normal mode and special mode (see FIG. 14). Note that the jackpot pattern highlighting performance A in the time-saving mode and the jackpot pattern highlighting performance A in the normal mode or special mode may be the same aspect.

Furthermore, the jackpot pattern highlighting effect C is performed on the three performance symbols 701 that suggest a jackpot (FIG. 34(h)). In this jackpot pattern highlighting effect C, an emphasis image 873 is added to the three performance symbols 701, and a sound accompanying the display of the image 873 is output. In addition, the light-emitting means emits light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern. The jackpot pattern highlighting effect C in the time-saving mode is a different form from the jackpot pattern highlighting effect C in the normal mode and the special mode (see FIG. 14). Note that the jackpot pattern highlighting effect C in the time-saving mode and the jackpot pattern highlighting effect C in the normal mode or the special mode may be the same form. Note that the above-mentioned re-lottery effect may be performed between FIG. 34(g) and FIG. 34(h). In this case, as a result of the re-lottery effect, the performance symbols that suggest a jackpot stop and the jackpot pattern highlighting effect B is performed.

Then, in response to the stop display of the second special symbol, three effect symbols 701 indicating a jackpot are displayed (time t5, FIG. 34(i)). Immediately after that, an opening effect is performed and the jackpot game begins (FIG. 34(j)). In the opening effect, an image 902 is displayed encouraging the player to hit to the right, and a sound is output encouraging the player to hit to the right. Here, a display is made and a sound is output that strongly encourages the player to shoot the game ball into the first large winning opening 50. If the game ball passes through the specific area 52 in the first large winning opening 50 during a small winning game, a jackpot game is played. Then, when the jackpot game ends, a high base time-saving state is set.

When the jackpot game ends, the first determination of the second special symbol after the jackpot game is made (time t6), and a variation effect is performed according to the determination (FIG. 34(k)). Furthermore, the variation and stopping of the second special symbol are repeatedly performed.

Without being judged as a big win or a small win, the 100th special pattern judgment is made from the last big win game (time t8), and a change performance according to the judgment is performed (Fig. 34 (l)). In the last change in the high base time-saving state, a change pattern with a long change time is selected even if it is a miss. If the last change is judged as a miss, a result display is performed (Fig. 34 (m)). In the result display, the number of big win games from the normal game state (or low base time-saving state) to the big win and the transition to the normal game state again are displayed, the number of winning balls during that time, the number of rounds, and the time during that time are displayed. In addition, the right-hit notification image 901 is displayed during the result display. In addition, when the result display is performed, the display of the performance pattern 701 indicating a miss and the display of the miss emphasis image 870 are restricted. Then, a performance is performed to indicate the transition from the high base time-saving state to the normal game state.

In addition, during a predetermined period before the high base time-saving state ends (for example, the 91st to 100th fluctuation period), a relatively long fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds) may be more likely to be selected. During this predetermined period, even if the result of the special pattern determination is a miss, the execution of the emphasis effect in which the miss emphasis image 870 is displayed may be restricted. In this case, a different emphasis effect may be performed. Also, during this predetermined period, if the result of the special pattern determination is a miss, the reach fluctuation pattern may be more likely or less likely to be selected than during periods other than the predetermined period (the 1st to 90th fluctuation period).

When the special symbol is displayed in the last change of the high base time-saving state (time t9), the high base time-saving state is set to the normal game state and the mode is changed to the normal mode. Then, at time t10, the next special symbol starts to change, and the change effect corresponding to the change is performed in the normal mode (FIG. 34 (n)). When the high base time-saving state is changed to the normal game state, the result display ends, the right-hit notification image 901 is also erased, and the screen is changed to the normal mode. Note that the result display may continue until the reserve (remaining reserve) of the second special symbol judgment during the last change of the high base time-saving state is consumed. In other words, during the period in which the remaining reserve is consumed (the period in which the second special symbol related to the remaining reserve is changed), the game is in the normal game state, but the mode is not changed to the normal mode, and the result display may continue. In this case, the display of the performance pattern 701 and the execution of the highlighting effect for the performance pattern 701 are restricted while the result display is continuing.

When the game transitions from the high base time-saving state to the normal game mode and then returns to normal mode, a left-hit notification (specific notification B) is issued to encourage the player to hit to the left, as shown in FIG. 34 (n). In this specific notification B, a specific notification image 880 is displayed encouraging the player to hit to the left, and a sound is output encouraging the player to hit to the left. Note that if there is a hold (hold for second special pattern determination) at the time of transition from the high base time-saving state to the normal game mode, the left-hit notification will be issued even if the hold includes a jackpot. Note that in this case, the left-hit notification may be restricted.

The specific notification B that is performed when the game transitions from the high base time-saving state to the normal game state is different in form from the specific notification (herein referred to as specific notification A) that is executed when the notification conditions are met in the normal game state or the low base time-saving state described above.

If the result of the special pattern judgment at time t10 is a miss, the three performance patterns 701 suggesting a miss are temporarily stopped at time t11 (Fig. 34 (o)). At this time, an emphasis image 802a may be added to the performance pattern 701 and a sound corresponding to the image may be output. At this time, the specific notification B may continue. If the specific notification B is continuing at time t11, as shown in Fig. 34 (o), the specific notification image 880 is preferentially displayed in a layer in front of the performance pattern and the emphasis image 802a. Then, at time t12, the special pattern is displayed in a stopped state, and the performance pattern 701 is displayed in a stopped state (Fig. 34 (p)). When the special pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the emphasis image 802a is erased. Even when the special pattern is displayed in a stopped state, if the specific notification B is continuing, the specific notification image 880 is displayed superimposed on at least a part of the performance pattern 701. When the special symbol is stopped, the performance symbol 701 may be displayed preferentially (i.e., in the front layer) over the specific notification image 880. When the special symbol is stopped, the specific notification image 880 may be temporarily hidden, and then redisplayed after the period during which the special symbol is stopped has elapsed. When the special symbol is stopped, the specific notification image 880 may be temporarily displayed semi-transparently. Furthermore, the specific notification B may continue even when the next special symbol changes.

In FIG. 34 above, the right hit notification image 901 during the time-saving mode is displayed relatively small in the upper right area not covering the performance pattern, but the right hit notification image 901 may be displayed larger and in a more prominent position. The right hit notification image 901 may be displayed toward the center of the screen so as to cover part of the performance pattern and its highlighted image, and may be displayed so as to be superimposed on the performance pattern and part of its highlighted image. The right hit notification image 901 may be displayed in a position and size that does not cover the performance pattern but covers part of the highlighted image. This makes it possible to clearly display the right hit without interfering with the visibility of the performance pattern and its highlighted image.

Here, the specific notification A and the specific notification B will be explained. FIG. 35 is a diagram comparing the specific notification A and the specific notification B. As shown in FIG. 35, the specific notification A is executed when the notification condition (detection that a predetermined number of game balls have passed through the gate within a predetermined time) is satisfied in the normal game state or the low base time-saving state. The notification condition is merely an example, and may be, for example, that a game ball has entered the general winning hole 43 provided in the right game area. In addition, in the specific notification A, the specific notification image 880 is displayed in the center of the screen so as to be superimposed on at least a part of the performance pattern. In addition, in the specific notification A, the specific notification image 880 is displayed for, for example, 15 seconds. In addition, in the specific notification A, the first notification sound is first output for, for example, 5 seconds, and then the second notification sound is output for, for example, 10 seconds. In addition, the volume of the first notification sound in the specific notification A can be adjusted according to the volume adjustment operation on the cross key 19 or the changeover switch 22. For example, if a volume adjustment operation is performed using the cross key 19 while specific notification A is being executed, the volume of the first notification sound is adjusted. At that time, the volume gauge 720 is displayed, but the specific notification image 880 is displayed with priority over the volume gauge 720 (the specific notification image 880 is displayed superimposed on the volume gauge). Note that the volume gauge 720 may be displayed so that it does not overlap the specific notification image 880. Also, the volume gauge 720 may be displayed with priority over the specific notification image 880.

In contrast, the volume of the second alert sound in the specific alert A cannot be adjusted using either the cross key 19 or the changeover switch 22. Specifically, the volume of the second alert sound is larger than the volume of the first alert sound, and even if the volume is adjusted using the cross key 19 and the changeover switch 22, it is output at the maximum volume (a volume exceeding the upper limit value set using the cross key 19 and the changeover switch 22). In addition, if a volume adjustment operation is performed using the cross key 19 while the second alert sound is being output, the second alert sound cannot be adjusted, but the volume gauge 720 is displayed. Note that if a volume adjustment operation is performed using the cross key 19 while the second alert sound is being output, the volume gauge 720 does not have to be displayed. In addition, when the second alert sound is output, the light-emitting means may be illuminated in a predetermined light-emitting pattern. The display of the specific alert image 880 may be adjustable using the cross key 19 and the changeover switch 22.

On the other hand, the specific notification B is only performed for a predetermined period of time after the transition from the high base time-saving state to the normal game state. For example, the specific notification B is performed for 20 seconds after the transition from the high base time-saving state to the normal game state. Specifically, the specific notification image 880 is displayed continuously for, for example, 20 seconds. The specific notification image 880 is displayed in the center of the screen so as to be superimposed on at least a part of the performance pattern. In addition, the first notification sound is output for, for example, 5 seconds. The volume of the first notification sound in the specific notification B can be adjusted according to the volume adjustment operation using the cross key 19 or the changeover switch 22. On the other hand, the second notification sound is not output in the specific notification B. In addition, the display of the specific notification image 880 can be adjusted using the cross key 19 and the changeover switch 22.

Note that, although the same specific alert image 880 is displayed for specific alert A and specific alert B here, different specific alert images may be displayed for specific alert A and specific alert B. Furthermore, the first alert sound in specific alert A and the first alert sound in specific alert B may be different sounds, or the output times (lengths) of these sounds may be different. Furthermore, the volume of the first alert sound in specific alert A may not be adjustable, while the volume of the first alert sound in specific alert B may be adjustable.

In this way, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can display a suggestive image (e.g., a preview image) that suggests the possibility of a special game being executed, and can display an emphasis image that emphasizes the suggestive image. The presentation effect (volume and light intensity) can be adjusted according to the operation of the adjustment means (cross key 19). In addition, a specific notification related to the operation of the operation means (launch handle 15) can be executed. According to the operation of the adjustment means, the sound during the display of the emphasis image can be adjusted, and the notification sound related to the specific notification (the first notification sound of specific notification A) can be adjusted.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of displaying a suggestive image that suggests the possibility of a special game being executed, and is also capable of displaying an emphasis image that emphasizes the suggestive image. The presentation effect (volume and light intensity) can be adjusted in response to the operation of the adjustment means (cross key 19). Also, a specific notification can be executed in response to the operation of the operation means (launch handle 15). While it is possible to adjust the sound during the display of the emphasis image in response to the operation of the adjustment means, the adjustment of the notification sound related to the specific notification (the second notification sound of specific notification A) is restricted.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of displaying a suggestive image (e.g., a preview image) that suggests the possibility of a special game being executed, and is also capable of displaying an emphasis image that emphasizes the suggestive image. The presentation effect (volume and light intensity) can be adjusted in response to an operation on the first adjustment means (cross key 19), and the presentation effect (volume and light intensity) can be adjusted in response to an operation on the second adjustment means (changeover switch 22). In response to an operation on the first adjustment means, it is possible to perform a predetermined notification (display of a volume gauge and output of a volume operation sound) and adjust the sound while the emphasis image is being displayed. In addition, it is possible to adjust the sound while the emphasis image is being displayed without performing a predetermined notification in response to an operation on the second adjustment means.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing an emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect symbols in the variable effect. The effect (volume and light intensity) can be adjusted in response to the operation of the first adjustment means (cross key 19), and the effect (volume and light intensity) can be adjusted in response to the operation of the second adjustment means (changeover switch 22). In response to the operation of the first adjustment means, it is possible to perform a predetermined notification (display of the volume gauge and output of the volume operation sound) and adjust the sound during the emphasis effect. In addition, it is possible to adjust the sound during the emphasis effect without performing a predetermined notification in response to the operation of the second adjustment means.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a backup power supply is supplied to the main control unit 100 when the power is cut off, and the contents stored in the main RAM 100c are retained even when the power is cut off. Therefore, when the power is restored after the power is cut off, the game control state including the game state can be restored to the state before the power is cut off. If a power cut occurs when the special mode is set in the performance control unit 130 and the power is restored thereafter, the main control unit 100 sets the game state of the gaming machine 1 to the low base time-saving state before the power is cut off and sends a power recovery command to the performance control unit 130. Based on the command, the performance control unit 130 sets the special mode as the performance mode and executes the performance in the special mode. If a power cut occurs when the time-saving mode is set in the performance control unit 130 and the power is restored, the performance control unit 130 sets the time-saving mode as the performance mode and executes the performance in the time-saving mode. On the other hand, the setting of the performance effect using the adjustment means (cross key 19) is not restored to the state before the power is cut off and is returned to the default setting. That is, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can be set to one of a plurality of modes including a normal mode and a special mode, and can execute a suggestive effect (preview effect) that suggests the possibility of a jackpot game being executed in either the normal mode or the special mode. It can also execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the suggestive effect, and the effect of the emphasis effect can be adjusted using the adjustment means (cross key 19). If a power outage occurs when the special mode is set and the effect is adjusted from the first state to the second state, and the power is restored, the game can be resumed in the special mode and the first state.

In the above embodiment, the effects performed in the special mode may also be executable in the normal mode. For example, the highlighted image displayed in the special mode may also be displayed in the normal mode. In the above embodiment, the effects performed in the special mode may also be executable in the time-saving mode.

In addition, immediately after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the performance control device 130A (e.g., the performance control unit 130) may cause the first image display device 70 to display a background image of an evening background (background image of a special mode), which is the background of the low base time-saving state, as a performance image common to the normal gaming state and the low base time-saving state, regardless of whether the gaming machine 1 is powered on in the normal gaming state or in the low base time-saving state. The same applies to the display of performance patterns, reserved pedestals, etc. other than the background image.

In addition, immediately after the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the performance control unit 130 may cause the first image display device 70 to display a background image of a daytime background, which is the background of the normal gaming state (background image of the normal mode), as a performance image common to the normal gaming state and the low base time-saving state, regardless of whether the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is restored in the normal gaming state or in the low base time-saving state. The same applies to the display of performance patterns, reserved pedestals, etc. other than the background image.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can perform various highlighting effects that highlight the performance symbols, preview effects, performance gimmicks, etc., and can perform different types of highlighting effects depending on the mode. In addition to the effects described above, the following effects may also be performed.

For example, when the left, right, and center symbols stop, the first and second modes of emphasis performance can be performed for each symbol, and the first mode emphasis performance can be performed for each of the three symbols (first pattern performance), the first mode emphasis performance can be performed for one or two symbols among the three symbols, and then the second mode emphasis performance can be performed for the remaining two or one symbols (second pattern performance), and the second mode emphasis performance can be performed for each of the three symbols (third pattern performance). In this case, the expectation level may differ for each pattern. For example, the first pattern may have a higher expectation level than the second and third patterns. In addition, when the first pattern is performed, another performance with a higher expectation level may be performed. In addition, it is possible to perform the first mode emphasis performance for the three symbols and then the second mode emphasis performance, but it may be impossible to perform the second mode emphasis performance for the three symbols and then the first mode emphasis performance. Also, the probability of performing the highlighting effect in the first mode and then the highlighting effect in the second mode for three patterns may be higher than the probability of performing the highlighting effect in the second mode and then the highlighting effect in the first mode for three patterns.

The first highlighting effect can be performed in both normal mode and special mode, but the second highlighting effect may be performed only in normal mode. In this case, the third highlighting effect may also be performed in special mode.

The highlighting effects performed in the normal mode or special mode may also be performed in the time-saving mode.

In addition, the highlighting effect using the highlighting image 870 (Figure 34 (m)) performed in the time-saving mode may also be executable in the normal mode or special mode.

In addition, an emphasis image that is not added in normal mode and that emphasizes the mode display may be added to the mode display 708 in the special mode. In addition, in the special mode, a first change effect may be performed in which the emphasis image that emphasizes the mode display is changed. In addition, in normal mode, an emphasis image may be added to the mode display, and a first change effect may be performed in which the emphasis image is changed.

Also, based on the result of the special symbol determination or the result of the advance determination, a zone effect including a change in the background image may be executed. The zone effect may be executed over the variation of multiple special symbols, or may be executed during one variation of the special symbol. The zone effect may have multiple modes with different degrees of expectation, and the mode of the zone effect may change. Also, during the zone effect, the zone display image may be continuously displayed in addition to the background image for the zone effect, and an emphasis effect (display of an emphasis image) may be executed on the zone display image. A second change effect may be executed in which the mode of the emphasis effect on the zone display image changes. The degree of expectation may differ depending on the mode of the emphasis effect on the zone display image. Also, the expectation may be higher (or lower) when the second change effect is executed than when the above-mentioned first change effect is executed.

During the zone performance, the above-mentioned highlighting effect may be applied to the performance pattern or the preview image, and the highlighting effect may be different from when the zone performance is not being performed. For example, the highlighting effect may be different when the zone performance is being performed (in zone mode) from when the zone performance is not being performed (in normal mode, not in zone mode). In this case, the display mode of the highlighting effect may be different but the sound during the highlighting effect may be the same, or the display mode of the highlighting effect may be the same but the sound during the highlighting effect may be different. Conversely, the highlighting effect may be the same when the zone performance is being performed and when the zone performance is not being performed.

The background image for the zone presentation may be displayed until before the reach presentation starts, and may be switched to the background image for the reach presentation when the reach presentation starts. Also, the background image for the zone presentation may be displayed until partway through the reach presentation (for example, until the SPSP reach presentation starts), and thereafter (after the SPSP reach presentation starts) may be switched to the background image for the reach presentation. Also, the zone display image may be erased when a reach is achieved, may be displayed during the reach presentation, or may be displayed until partway through the reach presentation (for example, until the SPSP reach presentation starts) and then hidden.

During a zone performance, the performance symbols may be displayed in a different manner than in normal mode. During a zone performance, the performance symbols may be displayed in the same manner as in special mode, or in a different manner.

In addition, in this embodiment, the form of the emphasis effect differs between the first mode (e.g., normal mode) and the second mode (e.g., special mode). For example, there are early stage effects (e.g., before a reach is reached) and late stage effects (after a reach is reached), and the form of the emphasis effect in the early stage effects differs between the first mode and the second mode, but the form of the emphasis effect in the late stage effects may be the same between the first mode and the second mode.

Here, "different modes of emphasis effects" include different images displayed in the emphasis effects, different sounds output, different light emission patterns of the light-emitting means, and different execution times for the emphasis effects (image display periods, sound output periods).

In addition, in the first mode and the second mode, the manner in which the highlighting effect is performed on each of the left and right symbols when a reach effect is performed is different, but the manner in which the highlighting effect is performed across both the left and right symbols may be the same.

In addition, the manner of emphasis for the first effect pattern displayed in the middle area differs between the first mode and the second mode, but the manner of emphasis for the second effect pattern displayed in the middle area may be the same.

The manner of the highlighting effect when the left and right patterns stop (the behavior of the patterns when stopped and/or the display manner of the highlighting image) may be different between the first mode and the second mode. In addition, in a specific mode, the manner of the highlighting effect when the performance pattern stops may be different depending on the type of performance pattern.

The probability of the above-mentioned reach suggestion effect being executed may differ depending on the type of effect pattern. The probability of the reach suggestion effect using the first effect pattern being executed may be higher than the probability of the reach suggestion effect using the second effect pattern being executed. The probability of the emphasis effect being executed in the reach suggestion effect may differ depending on the type of effect pattern. When the reach suggestion effect is executed, the probability of the emphasis effect being executed for the first effect pattern may be higher than the probability of the emphasis effect being executed for the second effect pattern. The probability of a reach being established after a reach suggestion effect using the first effect pattern may be lower (or higher) than the probability of a reach being established after a reach suggestion effect using the second effect pattern.

In addition, there is a first type of highlighting effect for the left or right pattern, and a second type of highlighting effect for the center pattern, and there may be more or less of the second type than the first type.

In addition, the mode of the emphasis effect when the performance pattern stops in the reach state (the behavior of the pattern when stopped and/or the display mode of the emphasis image) may differ depending on the type of reach pattern when a reach is achieved. Also, only in a specific mode, the mode of the emphasis effect when the performance pattern stops in the reach state may differ depending on the type of reach pattern.

In addition, it may be possible to make the manner of the emphasis effect when the performance pattern stops different between the first and second fluctuation patterns, and it may be possible to make the manner of the emphasis effect when the performance pattern stops common between the first and third fluctuation patterns. Also, when the first fluctuation pattern is selected, it may be possible to make the manner of the emphasis effect when the performance pattern stops different between the first and second modes.

The sound when the left, right, and center patterns stop may be the same, but the emphasis effect may be different. The sound when the pattern stops may be shorter than the movement time of the pattern when it stops.

Furthermore, there are early stage effects (for example, before a reach is reached) and late stage effects (after a reach is reached), and the early stage effects and late stage effects may have the same emphasis effect that emphasizes the button teasing effect before displaying the button image (operation prompt image). Conversely, the emphasis effect may be different between the early stage effects and the late stage effects.

The first and second modes may share the same highlighting effect that emphasizes the button teasing effect before displaying the button image (operation prompt image). Conversely, the highlighting effect may differ between the first and second modes.

In addition, the emphasis effect that emphasizes the operation effect that displays a button image (operation prompting image) includes a first emphasis effect (for example, an emphasis image around the button image) and a second emphasis effect (an emphasis image of another image that encourages pressing a button), and both the first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect may be common to the front and back performances. Conversely, both the first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect may be different to the front and back performances. In addition, either the first emphasis effect or the second emphasis effect may be common to the front and back performances, or the other may be different. In addition, both the first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect may be common to the first mode and the second mode. Conversely, both the first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect may be different to the first mode and the second mode. In addition, either the first or second emphasis effect may be common to the first and second modes, or the other may be different.

The first emphasis effect may be an effect that is operated in a first operation mode in a first cycle, and the second emphasis effect may be an effect that is operated in a second operation mode that is different from the first operation mode in a second cycle (which may be the same as or different from the first cycle).

In addition, the emphasis effect of the first operation effect (e.g., a short press of a button) that prompts the first operation mode may include a first emphasis effect (e.g., an emphasis image around the button image) and a second emphasis effect (an emphasis image of another image that prompts the button to be pressed), and the emphasis effect of the second operation effect (e.g., a button repeatedly pressed) that prompts the second operation mode may include a third emphasis effect (e.g., an emphasis image around the button image) and a fourth emphasis effect (an emphasis image of another image that prompts the button to be pressed repeatedly). In addition, the emphasis effect of the first operation effect (e.g., a button image in a normal display mode) in which the operation prompting image is the first display mode may include a first emphasis effect (e.g., an emphasis image around the button image) and a second emphasis effect (an emphasis image of another image that prompts the button to be pressed), and the emphasis effect of the second operation effect (e.g., a red button image) in which the operation prompting image is the second display mode may include a third emphasis effect (e.g., an emphasis image around the button image) and a fourth emphasis effect (an emphasis image of another image that prompts the button to be pressed repeatedly). In this case, the first emphasis effect and the third emphasis effect may have different presentation modes or may be the same. The second emphasis effect and the fourth emphasis effect may have different presentation modes or may be the same. The first emphasis effect and the third emphasis effect are presentation modes that include periodic operations, and the cycle of the first emphasis effect and the cycle of the third emphasis effect may be different or may be the same. The second emphasis effect and the fourth emphasis effect are presentation modes that include periodic operations, and the cycle of the second emphasis effect and the cycle of the fourth emphasis effect may be different or may be the same. The execution times of any of the first to fourth emphasis effects may be different, or only some of the execution times may be different, or all of the execution times may be the same.

In addition, in operation effects (for example, operation effects encouraging rapid button taps or long button presses), it is possible to implement emphasis effects that emphasize the button image when a button is pressed, and the manner in which emphasis effects are used when a button is pressed may differ depending on whether or not a jackpot has been reached. For example, in the case of a jackpot, the button image may be more likely to be displayed in red when the button is pressed in an operation effect encouraging rapid button taps, and in the case of a miss, the button image may be more likely to be displayed in black when the button is pressed.

The manner of the emphasis effect when the button is operated in the first mode and the second mode may be different or the same. The manner of the emphasis effect when the button is operated when there is a jackpot may be different or the same in the first mode and the second mode. The manner of the emphasis effect when the button is operated when there is a miss may be different or the same in the first mode and the second mode.

In addition, the button may be vibrated by a vibration means during an operation presentation, and an emphasis presentation for the operation presentation (an emphasis presentation of the button image, an effect in which the button itself is illuminated) may be executed. The presentation mode of the emphasis presentation of the operation presentation when the button is vibrating may be common to the first mode and the second mode. In addition, the presentation mode of the emphasis presentation may be different between the first mode and the third mode (e.g., the time-saving mode). For example, in the first mode and the second mode, the button image may be displayed in red when the button vibrates, and in the third mode, the button image may be displayed in a different color when the button vibrates. In addition, the button vibration time and the execution time of the emphasis presentation may be different or the same.

The button itself may be illuminated while vibrating. The illumination state (color and illumination pattern) of the button may be different or common between the first mode and the second mode. The illumination state of the button may be different or common before and after the start of a special performance (for example, a reach performance). The vibration pattern of the button may have a first vibration pattern and a second vibration pattern, and the button may be more likely to vibrate with the first vibration pattern before the start of the special performance and more likely to vibrate with the second vibration pattern after the start of the special performance. The vibration time of the button may be different before and after the start of the special performance, and the execution time of the emphasis performance for the operation performance may be different. The ratio of the execution time of the emphasis performance to the vibration time of the button may be different before and after the start of the special performance. For example, the button may be illuminated for only a moment while the button is vibrating before the start of the special performance, and the button may be continuously illuminated while the button is vibrating after the start of the special performance. Additionally, the ratio of the time during which the highlighting effect is performed to the button vibration time may be different between the first and second modes.

In addition, the highlighting effects when announcing a jackpot may be the same or different between the first and second modes.

It is also possible to execute a preview effect that suggests the possibility of a big win, and the execution time of the emphasis effect of the preview effect in the first mode and the emphasis effect of the preview effect in the second mode may be different or the same.

In addition, the behavior of the special effects in the special effects may be the same or different before and after the start of a special effect (e.g., reach effect). In addition, the emphasis effect that emphasizes the special effects may be different before and after the start of a special effect.

The emphasis effects that emphasize the props include a first emphasis effect (an emphasis image around the props) and a second emphasis effect (an effect that causes the props themselves to emit light), and the execution time of the first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect may be different before and after the start of the special effect. The execution time of the first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect before the start of the special effect may be different. The execution time of the first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect after the start of the special effect may be different. The execution time of the first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect may be different between the first mode and the second mode. The execution time of the first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect in the first mode may be different. The execution time of the first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect in the second mode may be different.

In addition, when each of the above-mentioned highlighting effects is executed, the light-emitting means may be caused to emit light in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the highlighting effect.

In addition, when a button image (operation prompting image) is displayed in a predetermined manner, the manner of the emphasis effect in the button promotion effect before the button image is displayed may be different between the first mode and the second mode.

In addition, there are two types of emphasis effects that emphasize the operation effect of displaying a button image (operation prompting image): a first emphasis effect (e.g., an emphasis image around the button image) and a second emphasis effect (an emphasis image of another image that prompts the user to press the button). The form of the first emphasis effect is the same in the first mode and the second mode, but the form of the second emphasis effect may be different.

In the above, an operation effect is performed for the operation of the effect button 17, and the operation effect has multiple modes (short button press, repeated button press, long button press). In addition to the effect button 17, other operation parts (for example, an effect lever that can be pulled toward the player) may be provided. In this case, the operation effect that prompts the operation of the first mode may be an effect for making the player press the effect button 17, and the operation effect that prompts the operation of the second mode may be an effect for making the player pull the effect lever. Also, the effect button 17 may be changeable between a normal mode and a protruding mode in which the top surface of the button protrudes more than the normal mode. In this case, the operation effect that prompts the operation of the first mode may be an effect for making the player press the effect button 17 in the normal mode, and the operation effect that prompts the operation of the second mode may be an effect for making the player press the effect button 17 in the protruding mode.

In addition, a special feature effect may be performed during a jackpot game. When a special feature effect is executed during a jackpot game, an emphasis effect may be executed to emphasize the special feature.

In addition, in the above embodiment, when a special symbol indicating a jackpot stops, the specific notification ends when the special symbol stops. In other embodiments, when a special symbol indicating a jackpot stops, the specific notification may not end when the special symbol stops, but may continue until a specified execution period has elapsed.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the notification conditions are met when a special symbol indicating a jackpot stops, a specific notification is not executed. Note that if the notification conditions are met when a special symbol indicating a jackpot stops, a specific notification may be executed.

In addition, when the specific notification is issued, a specific notification image is displayed, and the same specific notification image is displayed in both the first mode and the second mode. Different specific notification images may be displayed in the first mode and the second mode.

In addition, when a special feature performance is executed, the special feature moves to the performance position, but even in this case, at least a part of the specific notification image may be visible. In addition, at least a part of the volume gauge and the light intensity gauge may be visible even during the special feature performance.

In the above embodiment, a first image showing the numbers in the performance pattern and a second image (e.g., a character image) displayed behind the first image are displayed, and the performance pattern including the first image is stopped while the special pattern is stopped. While the special pattern is stopped, a stop performance may be executed in which the first image is stopped and the second image is operated in a predetermined manner. During the change of the special pattern, a motion performance is executed in which the second image is operated in a manner different from the stop performance. In addition, if the special pattern starts to change while the second image is operating in a predetermined manner due to the stop performance, a start action of the performance pattern may be executed while maintaining the state in which the second image is operating in the predetermined manner. In addition, the start action may be executed together with the start action. In addition, the manner of the stop performance may be different between the first mode and the second mode. In addition, the manner of the motion performance may be different between the first mode and the second mode.

(Flowchart of the main control unit)
Next, the progress of the game on the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to a flowchart.

(Main processing of the main control unit)
The main processing of the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 36. Fig. 36 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the main control unit 100. This main processing is performed when a system reset, which occurs when a power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, is input to the main CPU 100a.

First, the main CPU 100a performs an initial setting process in step S10. Specifically, the main CPU 100a performs a preparation process for starting game control, a setting change process for changing the setting value based on a setting change operation, an RWM clear process for initializing a predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 100c based on an RWM clear operation, a setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value based on a setting confirmation operation, and a drive source initial operation process for initializing the various drive sources (second start opening opening solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening opening solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b, etc.) provided in the board unit 500.

Specifically, when a setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on, the main CPU 100a performs processing to change (update) the setting value stored in the setting value area of the game RWM area of the main RAM 100c based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a in the setting change process. The setting value is a level of advantageous degree of the game, and the probability of being judged as a jackpot in the jackpot judgment differs depending on the setting value. The setting value ranges from 1 to 6, for example, and the higher the number, the higher the probability of being judged as a jackpot in the jackpot judgment. Note that there may be only one setting value. In addition, when a setting value is changed in the setting change process, the main CPU 100a resets the number of operations n stored in the main RAM 100c to an initial value (e.g., 800). In addition, the main CPU 100a resets (turns OFF) the time-saving history flag stored in the main RAM 100c. The number of times n is activated is a value that is updated each time a special symbol is displayed, and indicates the number of times the special symbol will change remaining until the high base time-saving state is set. The time-saving history flag is set to ON when the high base time-saving state is set, and is reset when a jackpot is played.

In addition, when an RWM clear operation is performed when the power is turned on, the main CPU 100a initializes (clears to 0) the game RWM area of the main RAM 100c other than the setting value area in the RWM clear process. This initializes the game progress state to the initial state (the state when the gaming machine 1 is shipped), and data (other than the setting values) in the game RWM area before the RWM is cleared is not carried over. In addition, when the above initialization is performed in the RWM clear process, the main CPU 100a resets the number of operation times n stored in the main RAM 100c to an initial value (e.g., 800) and resets the time-saving history flag.

In addition, if the above setting change operation or RWM clear operation is not performed during the initial setting process, the main CPU 100a performs a power recovery process to return (restore) the game progress state (control state) to the state before the power was cut using the data saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 100c. This makes it possible to resume play from the state before the power was cut. For example, if the special symbol was changing before the power was cut, it will be resumed from the changing state, and if a jackpot game was in progress before the power was cut, it will be resumed from the jackpot game state. Also, if the game was waiting for customers before the power was cut, it will be resumed from the waiting state. Also, the number of reserved special symbols, game state, the number of times the game was activated n, and the time-saving history flag will all maintain their values before the power was cut.

The main CPU 100a also transmits a power-on command or a power recovery command to the presentation control unit 130 during the initial setting process. The power-on command is transmitted when the above-mentioned setting change process or RWM clear process is performed. The power-on command may include the game status, the value of the number of activations n, and the time-saving history flag. The power recovery command is a command indicating that the game control status has been restored by the power recovery process. The power recovery command includes information indicating the game progress status, game status, and number of reserved balls before the power outage occurred. The power recovery command may also include the above-mentioned number of activations n and the time-saving history flag.

In step S51, the main CPU 100a updates the initial random number value for determining a jackpot, the initial random number value for determining a jackpot pattern, the initial random number value for determining a win, and the initial random number value for determining a normal pattern.

In step S52, the main CPU 100a determines whether a voltage drop detection signal indicating a voltage drop in the power supply (for example, a voltage drop from 24 volts to less than 18 volts) has been input from the power interruption detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160. If a voltage drop detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S51, and if a voltage drop detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 100a determines whether the voltage drop detection signal has been continuously input for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 milliseconds). If the voltage drop detection signal has been continuously input for the predetermined period, it is assumed that a complete power outage has occurred and the process proceeds to step S54. If the voltage drop detection signal has not been input for the predetermined period, it is assumed that a momentary power outage has occurred, in which the voltage of the power supply drops for just a moment, and the process proceeds to step S52.

In step S54, the main CPU 100a sets an interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, and in step S55, sends a power cutoff designation command to the payout control unit 120 to notify it that the power cutoff process has begun. In response to this, the payout control unit 120 receives the power cutoff designation command and sends a remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining number of game balls stored in the payout RAM 121c to be paid out.

In step S56, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not a remaining payout number designation command has been received. If a remaining payout number designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S57. If a remaining payout number designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 100a determines whether the waiting time for receiving the remaining payout number designation command has elapsed. If the waiting time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S56. If the waiting time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S58, assuming that normal communication with the payout control unit 120 is not possible.

In step S58, the main CPU 100a saves the payout number in a payout counter set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 100c. Specifically, if a remaining payout number designation command has been received, the remaining payout number specified by the remaining payout number designation command is saved, and if a remaining payout number designation command has not been received, "0" is saved as the remaining payout number. The remaining payout number saved here is referenced in the timer interrupt payout control process described below, and after the power is restored, a payout number designation command corresponding to the remaining payout number is sent to the payout control unit 120.

In step S59, the main CPU 100a clears the output port. This initializes the output state of the output port and stops the operation of various displays and various drive sources (motors, solenoids).

In step S60, the main CPU 100a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 100c and saves it in a specified area of the gaming RWM area. By doing this, it becomes possible to perform an abnormality determination of the data in the gaming RWM area using the checksum the next time the power is turned on.

In step S61, the main CPU 100a saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the main RAM 100c has been backed up (power has been restored) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 100c, and in step S62, it prohibits RWM access and waits thereafter until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of the operating power (18 volts or more) required for the operation of the gaming machine 1 begins, the initial setting process is performed, but when the supply of operating power resumes following a momentary power outage (voltage drop to less than 18 volts), the initial setting process is not performed. In other words, even if a setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, or RWM clear operation is being performed due to some factor when a momentary power outage occurs, the setting change process, setting confirmation process, and RWM clear process will not be executed, so the gaming machine will not perform unintended operations, and it is possible to ensure the reliability of the gaming machine.

(Timer interrupt processing of the main control unit)
The timer interrupt process (game program and information program) of the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 37. Fig. 37 is a flow chart showing the timer interrupt process in the main control unit 100.

This timer interrupt process is executed after the main processing initialization process is completed, by inputting a clock pulse at a predetermined period (4 milliseconds) from the reset clock pulse generating circuit provided in the main control unit 100, and controls the progress of the game.

First, when the timer interrupt process starts, the main CPU 100a saves the information stored in the registers to the stack area and performs time control processing (game program). Specifically, it performs processing to update various timer counters such as the stop time of special symbols and the opening time of special electric devices.

In step S100, the main CPU 100a performs a random number update process (game program). Specifically, it updates the jackpot random number, jackpot symbol random number, special symbol variation pattern random number, small win symbol random number, special miss symbol random number, hit determination random number, normal symbol determination random number, and normal symbol variation pattern random number. Specifically, it performs a process of adding +1 to each random number and random number counter to update them. Note that if the incremented random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (if the random number counter has completed one revolution), it resets the random number counter to 0, and if the random number counter has returned to the initial value of the revolution, it sets the corresponding initial random number value as a new revolution initial value and updates the random number value.

The main CPU 100a performs input control processing in step S200. In the input control processing, start port switch processing, gate switch processing, special prize port switch processing, specific area switch processing, and general prize port switch processing are performed. The details of the input control processing will be described later.

The main CPU 100a performs special symbol special electricity control processing in step S300. Specifically, the main CPU 100a performs processing such as determining the special symbol determination information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, controlling the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, processing the big hit game when it is determined that there is a big hit, and processing the small hit game when it is determined that there is a small hit. The details of the special symbol special electricity control processing will be described later.

In step S400, the main CPU 100a performs a normal pattern control process. Specifically, the main CPU 100a performs processes such as judging the normal pattern determination information (random number for winning determination, random number for normal pattern determination, random number for normal pattern change pattern determination, etc.) acquired based on the passage of the game ball through the normal pattern gate 44, controlling the change display of the normal pattern, and performing a winning game when the normal pattern determination determines that a winning is made. For example, when the normal pattern is not being changed, the main CPU 100a performs a normal pattern determination to determine whether or not a winning is made based on the normal pattern determination information acquired in step S200, sets the change time of the normal pattern based on the result of the determination, and starts the change display of the normal pattern on the normal pattern display 62. In addition, when the normal pattern is being changed, it determines whether or not the change time has elapsed, and if the change time has elapsed, stops and displays the normal pattern according to the result of the normal pattern determination. When the normal symbol indicating a win is stopped, the main CPU 100a performs a winning game in which the second start hole 47 is opened. The change time of the normal symbol differs depending on the game state. Specifically, in the normal game state, the change time of the normal symbol is set to 60 seconds. In the low base time-saving state, the change time of the normal symbol is set to 59.5 seconds. In the high base time-saving state, the change time of the normal symbol is set to 3 seconds. The opening time of the second start hole 47 differs depending on the game state. Specifically, in the normal game state, the opening time of the second start hole 47 is set to 0.05 seconds, and in the low base time-saving state, the opening time of the second start hole 47 is set to 0.051 seconds. In the high base time-saving state, the opening time of the second start hole 47 is set to 3 seconds.

In step S700, the main CPU 100a performs a payout control process. Specifically, based on the detection of input by various switches (general winning opening detection switch 43a, first large winning opening detection switch 50a, second large winning opening detection switch 56a, first start opening detection switch 45a, second start opening detection switch 47a), the main CPU 100a refers to various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 100c, and performs a process to send a payout number designation command corresponding to the various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first start opening 45, second start opening 47, first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) to the payout control unit 120. This causes the payout control unit 120 to execute a process to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95.

The main CPU 100a performs an abnormality determination process in step S800. Specifically, it determines whether various errors (illegal winning errors in which a game ball enters the second start port 47 when not in auxiliary play or a game ball enters the large winning port when not in special play, abnormal winning errors in which the number of game balls entering various winning ports does not match the number of game balls discharged from the winning ball flow path through which the winning balls flow, magnetic errors in which the magnetic detection sensor 57a detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period of time, radio wave errors in which the radio wave detection sensor 58a detects abnormal radio waves for a predetermined period of time, door opening errors in which the opening detection switch 31a changes from an OFF state to an ON state, and operation errors in which the RWM clear switch 111a or the setting key switch 112a is operated while the game progress control is being performed) have occurred, and performs processing to transmit an error designation command corresponding to the error that has occurred to the performance control unit 130. As a result, the performance control unit 130 executes processing to notify the error.

The main CPU 100a performs data creation processing in step S810. Specifically, the main CPU 100a performs processing to create data such as external output data (game information) output from the game information output terminal board 90, start opening/closing data output to the second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, large prize opening opening/closing data output to the first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b, special pattern display data output to the first special pattern display 60 and the second special pattern display 61, normal pattern display data output to the normal pattern display 62, special pattern reserved display data output to the first special pattern reserved display 63 and the second special pattern reserved display 64, and normal pattern reserved display data output to the normal pattern reserved display 65.

In step S820, the main CPU 100a performs output control processing. Specifically, port output processing for outputting signals such as the external information data, start gate opening/closing data, and large prize gate opening/closing data created in step S810, display output processing for outputting signals such as special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol reserved display data, and normal symbol reserved display data, and processing for sending a payout status confirmation designation command to the payout control unit 120 to check the payout status of the payout control unit 120, and processing for sending a payout number designation command corresponding to each winning port to the payout control unit 120 by referring to the prize ball counters (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter) described later. As a result, the payout control unit 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100. In addition, the main CPU 100a transmits various commands to the performance control unit 130 for executing the set performance.

Next, the main CPU 100a calls the information program and performs processing from step S900 onwards.

Specifically, the main CPU 100a performs game ball counting processing (information program) in step S900. Specifically, it performs processing to count game performance information such as the normal payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into various winning ports (general winning port, big winning port, start port) during the normal game state, the normal out number, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a during the normal game state, and the total out number, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a regardless of the game state.

The total number of outs, number of payouts during normal play, and number of outs during normal play are game performance information that are not affected by changes to the setting value (are unrelated to the setting value), so by counting these, it is possible to calculate performance information that eliminates the influence of the setting value (the normal base value, described below), which can be used to understand the performance of the gaming machine 1.

In step S910, the main CPU 100a performs a normal base value calculation process (information program). Specifically, it calculates the normal base value ((normal payout number ÷ normal out number) × 100) in the current play section, which is divided by the total number of outs, and performs a process of saving the normal base value rounded off to the first decimal place in the first area of the base memory area set in the information RWM area.

The play section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000. The base memory area has a first area in which the normal base value for the current play section is stored, a second area for storing the normal base value for the play section one period before, a third area for storing the normal base value for the play section two periods before, and a fourth area for storing the normal base value for the play section three periods before, and the normal base values for four play sections including the current one are saved in each area.

In step S920, the main CPU 100a performs a performance display data setting process (information program). Specifically, the main CPU 100a performs a process of setting performance display data for displaying on the information display 113 the normal base values (performance information) for the four play intervals calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base memory area while switching them every five seconds.

In step S930, the main CPU 100a performs a test data creation process (information program). Specifically, the main CPU 100a performs a process to create test data (test information) to be output to the test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1.

In step S940, the main CPU 100a performs output control processing (information program). Specifically, it performs display output processing to output signals such as the performance display data (performance information) set in step S920 above to various displays, and processing to output signals such as the test data created in step S930 above.

Then, the main CPU 100a restores the flag register from the gaming RWM area, performs processing to allow the interrupt and return to the gaming program, restores the information saved at the start of this timer interrupt processing to the main CPU 100a register, and ends this timer interrupt processing.

(Input control process of main control unit)
Next, details of the input control process executed in the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 38. Fig. 38 is a detailed flowchart of the input control process in step S200 in Fig. 37.

The main CPU 100a performs first start hole switch processing in step S210. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the first start hole 45, and if so, performs processing to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three balls), as well as processing to obtain and store special game ball determination information. Details of the first start hole switch processing will be described later.

The main CPU 100a performs second start hole switch processing in step S220. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the second start hole detection switch 47a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the second start hole 47, and performs processing to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three balls) if a prize has been entered, as well as processing to obtain and store special game ball determination information. Details of the second start hole switch processing will be described later.

The main CPU 100a performs gate switch processing in step S230. Specifically, it determines whether the gate detection switch 44a has detected the passage of a gaming ball, and if so, acquires and stores normal map determination information (random number value for winning determination, random number value for normal pattern determination, random number value for normal map fluctuation pattern determination). The gaming machine 1 can reserve up to four pieces of normal map determination information, and if the number of currently reserved pieces of normal map determination information is less than four, new normal map determination information is acquired. In addition, if it detects that the gate detection switch 44a has detected the passage of a gaming ball, the main CPU 100a sets a gate pass command. The gate command is sent to the performance control unit 130 in the output control process of step S820.

The main CPU 100a performs a large prize opening switch process in step S240. Specifically, the main CPU 100a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the first large prize opening detection switch 50a or the second large prize opening detection switch 56a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the first large prize opening 50 or the second large prize opening 56, and performs a process to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., 10 balls) if a prize has been entered.

The main CPU 100a performs specific area switch processing in step S250. Specifically, the main CPU 100a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the specific area detection switch 52a, i.e., whether the game ball has passed through the specific area 52, and performs processing to set predetermined data. Details of the specific area switch processing will be described later.

The main CPU 100a performs general winning port switch processing in step S260. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning port detection switch 43a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the general winning port 43, and performs processing to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls if a prize has been entered. The main CPU 100a then ends the input control processing.

(First start port switch processing of the main control unit)
Next, details of the first start port switch processing executed in the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 39. Fig. 39 is a detailed flowchart of the first start port switch processing in step S210 of Fig. 38.

In step S2101, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not a signal has been input by the first start hole detection switch 45a detecting a game ball (whether or not a game ball has entered the first start hole 45). If it is determined that there has been an input to the first start hole detection switch 45a, the process proceeds to step S2102, and if it is determined that there has been no input, the process shown in FIG. 39 is terminated.

The main CPU 100a updates the prize ball counter in step S2102. This causes three prize balls to be paid out.

In step S2103, the main CPU 100a determines whether the first reserved number U1, which indicates the reserved number of rights to determine a jackpot related to the first special symbol stored in the main RAM 100c, is less than a predetermined maximum reserved number Umax1 (e.g., 4). If the first reserved number U1 is less than Umax1, the process proceeds to step S2104; if not, the process shown in FIG. 39 is terminated.

In step S2104, the main CPU 100a updates the value of the first reserved number U1 by adding "1".

In step S2105, the main CPU 100a acquires special pattern determination information (jackpot random number value, jackpot pattern random number value, small win pattern random number value, special miss pattern random number value, reach random number value, special pattern change pattern random number value), and stores the acquired special pattern determination information in the first special pattern determination information storage area in the main RAM 100c. Specifically, the first special pattern determination information storage area has first to fourth storage areas, and the main CPU 100a searches for an empty area in the first special pattern determination information storage area, starting from the first storage area, and stores the acquired special pattern determination information in the empty area.

In step S2106, the main CPU 100a determines whether the current game state is a normal game state or a low-base time-saving state. If it is a normal game state or a low-base time-saving state, the process proceeds to step S2107; if not, the process proceeds to step S2109.

In step S2107, the main CPU 100a performs a first advance determination process (first pre-reading process) based on the special chart determination information acquired in step S2105.

The first advance judgment process is a process for making an advance judgment on the special pattern judgment information acquired this time before the first special pattern change display is performed based on the special pattern judgment information acquired this time. Specifically, based on the special pattern judgment information acquired this time and the advance judgment table, it is determined in advance whether or not there is a jackpot, and if there is a jackpot, the jackpot pattern and the special pattern change pattern. The main CPU 100a also makes an advance judgment on whether or not there is a special miss.

The advance determination table is a table that contains the same random number values as the jackpot determination table used in the jackpot determination process in the special symbol processing. The advance determination table also includes a table that contains the same random number values as the fluctuation pattern table used in the special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process in the special symbol processing.

In step S2108, the main CPU 100a generates first look-ahead information for notifying the performance control unit 130 of the result of the first advance judgment process, and sets it in the main RAM 100c. The first look-ahead information is sent to the performance control unit 130 in the output control process of step S820. As a result, a look-ahead performance may be executed before the variable display of the first special pattern related to the current winning starts. For example, as a look-ahead performance, an icon change performance is performed to change the display mode (color) of the first reserved icon HA. In addition, a zone performance is performed as a look-ahead performance. The zone performance is a performance in which the background image is changed to a special background image, the performance pattern is changed to a special mode, or a special image suggesting a zone performance is continuously displayed on the screen, and is a performance with a high probability of winning. In addition, the zone performance may have multiple modes with different chances of winning.

In step S2109, the main CPU 100a sets the first start winning command in the main RAM 100c. The first start winning command is a command indicating that a game ball has won in the first start hole 45 (the jackpot determination for the first special symbol has been reserved), and includes the first reserved number U1. In addition, if the first pre-reading information is set, the first start winning command includes the first pre-reading information. The first start winning command is sent to the performance control unit 130 in the output control process of step S820. As a result, the first reserved icons are displayed in the number corresponding to the first reserved number U1 on the first image display device 70. With this, the main CPU 100a ends the process shown in FIG. 39.

(Second start port switch processing of the main control unit)
Next, details of the second start port switch processing executed in the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 40. Fig. 40 is a detailed flowchart of the second start port switch processing in step S220 of Fig. 38.

In step S2201, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not a signal has been input by the second start hole detection switch 47a detecting a game ball (whether or not a game ball has entered the second start hole 47). If it is determined that there has been an input to the second start hole detection switch 47a, the process proceeds to step S2202, and if it is determined that there has been no input, the process shown in FIG. 40 is terminated.

The main CPU 100a updates the prize ball counter in step S2202. This causes three prize balls to be paid out.

In step S2203, the main CPU 100a determines whether the second reserved number U2, which indicates the reserved number of rights to determine a jackpot related to the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 100c, is less than a predetermined maximum reserved number Umax2 (e.g., 4). If the second reserved number U2 is less than Umax2, the process proceeds to step S2204; if not, the process shown in FIG. 40 is terminated.

In step S2204, the main CPU 100a updates the value of the second reserved number U2 by adding "1".

In step S2205, the main CPU 100a acquires special pattern determination information (jackpot random number value, jackpot pattern random number value, small jackpot pattern random number value, reach random number value, special pattern change pattern random number value) and stores the acquired special pattern determination information in the second special pattern determination information storage area in the main RAM 100c. Specifically, the second special pattern determination information storage area has first to fourth storage areas, and the main CPU 100a searches for an empty area in the second special pattern determination information storage area, starting from the first storage area, and stores the acquired special pattern determination information in the empty area.

In step S2206, the main CPU 100a determines whether the current game state is a high base time-saving state. If it is, the process proceeds to step S2207; if not, the process proceeds to step S2209.

In step S2207, the main CPU 100a performs a second advance judgment process (second pre-reading process) based on the special symbol judgment information acquired in step S2205. The second advance judgment process is similar to the first advance judgment process described above, but in the second advance judgment process, it is also determined in advance whether or not there is a small win, and if there is a small win, the small win symbol.

In step S2208, the main CPU 100a generates second look-ahead information for notifying the performance control unit 130 of the result of the second advance judgment process, and sets this in the main RAM 100c. The second look-ahead information is sent to the performance control unit 130 in the output control process of step S820. As a result, a look-ahead performance may be executed before the variable display of the second special pattern related to the current winning starts. For example, as the look-ahead performance, an icon change performance is performed to change the display mode (color) of the second pending icon HA. In addition, a zone performance may be performed as the look-ahead performance.

In step S2209, the main CPU 100a sets the second start winning command in the main RAM 100c. The second start winning command is a command indicating that a game ball has won the second start hole 47 (the jackpot determination for the second special symbol has been reserved), and includes the second reserved number U2. In addition, if the second pre-reading information is set, the second start winning command includes the second pre-reading information. The second start winning command is sent to the performance control unit 130 in the output control process of step S820. As a result, the first image display device 70 displays a number of second reserved icons corresponding to the second reserved number U2. With this, the main CPU 100a ends the process shown in FIG. 40.

(Specific area switch processing of main control unit)
Next, the specific area switch processing executed in the main control unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 41. Fig. 41 is a detailed flow chart of the specific area switch processing in step S250 of Fig. 38.

In step S2501, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the specific area detection switch 52a. If a detection signal has been input from the specific area detection switch 52a, the process proceeds to step S2502. If a detection signal has not been input, the process shown in FIG. 41 ends.

In step S2502, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not a small win game is in progress. Here, it is determined whether or not a specific area valid period that includes a period during which a small win game is being played is in progress. If a small win game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S2503, and if a small win game is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S2505.

In step S2503, the main CPU 100a sets in the main RAM 100c a specific area passing flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 52 during a small win game, and specific area passing game state information indicating the game state when the game ball passed through the specific area 52. For example, if the current game state is a normal game state, information indicating that the game state is a normal game state is set, and if the current game state is a time-saving game state, information indicating that the game state is a time-saving game state is set.

In step S2504, the main CPU 100a sets a specific area passing command in the main RAM 100c, indicating that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area 52 during a small win game, and ends the processing shown in FIG. 41. This causes the specific area passing command to be sent to the performance control unit 130, and a passing notification performance is executed to notify the player that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area 52 (a big win game is being executed). This allows the player to know that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area 52 during a small win game, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Meanwhile, in step S2505, the main CPU 100a sets a specific area passage error command indicating that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area 52 at an abnormal timing, and ends the processing shown in FIG. 41. As a result, the specific area passage error command is sent to the performance control unit 130, and a passing error notification performance is executed to notify the occurrence of a passing error in which the gaming ball has passed through the specific area 52 at an abnormal timing. This allows the employees of the gaming establishment to be aware of the occurrence of a passing error.

(Special diagram special power control processing of the main control unit)
Next, details of the special picture special power control process executed in the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 42. Fig. 42 is a detailed flowchart of the special picture special power control process in step S300 in Fig. 37.

In step S310, the main CPU 100a loads the value of the special chart special power status data stored in the main RAM 100c, and performs branching processing based on the special chart special power status data.

Specifically, if the special symbol special power status data = 0, the main CPU 100a executes a special symbol determination process (step S320). In the special symbol determination process, a process is performed in which the variable display of the special symbol is started based on the reserved memory (special symbol determination information) and the special symbol special power status data is changed to "1". The details of the special symbol determination process will be described later.

If the special symbol special electricity state data = 1, the main CPU 100a executes a special symbol change process (step S330). In the special symbol change process, the special symbol is changed and displayed, and the special symbol is stopped and displayed as the change time elapses, and a pattern determination command (change stop command) is sent to the performance control unit 130, and the special symbol special electricity state data is changed to "2". Details of the special symbol change process will be described later.

If the special symbol special power state data = 2, the main CPU 100a executes the special symbol stop process (step S340). In the special symbol stop process, the special symbol is stopped for a predetermined fixed period, and the special symbol special power state data is set according to the stopped symbol as the fixed period elapses. For example, if the stopped symbol is a losing symbol, the special symbol special power state data is changed to "0", if it is a big win symbol, the opening time for the big win game is set and the special symbol special power state data is changed to "3", and if it is a small win symbol, the opening time for the small win game is set and the special symbol special power state data is changed to "4". Details of the special symbol stop process will be described later.

If the special symbol special electricity state data = 3, the main CPU 100a executes the jackpot game process (step S350). In the jackpot game process, a process for executing the jackpot game and a process for changing the special symbol special electricity state data to "5" are performed in response to the end of the final round of the jackpot game. The details of the jackpot game process will be described later.

If the special symbol special electricity state data = 4, the main CPU 100a executes the small win game process (step S360). In the small win game process, a process for executing the small win game and a process for changing the special symbol special electricity state data to "0" or "3" depending on the completion of the ending of the small win game are performed. The details of the small win game process will be described later.

If the special chart special power status data = 5, the main CPU 100a executes the jackpot game end process (step S370). In the jackpot game end process, a process for ending the jackpot game and a process for setting the game status according to the end of the jackpot game are performed. The details of the jackpot game end process will be described later.

(Special symbol determination process of the main control unit)
The special symbol determination process of the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 43. Fig. 43 is a flow chart showing the special symbol determination process in step S320 of Fig. 42.

In step S3201, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not a special symbol is being displayed in a changing state. If a special symbol is being displayed in a changing state, the main CPU 100a ends the current special symbol determination process, and if a special symbol is not being displayed in a changing state, the process proceeds to step S3202.

In step S3202, the main CPU 100a determines whether the second reserved number (U2) is 1 or greater. If the second reserved number (U2) is 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S3203, and if the second reserved number (U2) is not 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S3204.

In step S3203, the main CPU 100a updates the second reserved number (U2) by subtracting "1".

On the other hand, in step S3204, the main CPU 100a determines whether the first reserved number (U1) is 1 or greater. If the first reserved number (U1) is 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S3205, and if the first reserved number (U1) is not 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S3214.

In step S3205, the main CPU 100a updates the first reserved number (U1) by subtracting "1".

The main CPU 100a performs a shift process in step S3206. Specifically, when step S3206 is performed following step S3203, a shift process is performed to shift the special pattern determination information stored in the first storage area of the second special pattern determination information storage area to the storage area for determination, and the special pattern determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas to the first to third storage areas, respectively. Also, when step S3206 is performed following step S3205, a shift process is performed to shift the special pattern determination information stored in the first storage area of the first special pattern determination information storage area to the storage area for determination, and the special pattern determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas to the first to third storage areas, respectively.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second special chart determination information reserve memory area is shifted in priority over the first special chart determination information reserve memory area in steps S3202 to S3205 (the second reserved number is subtracted in priority over the first reserved number), but the first special chart determination information reserve memory area or the second special chart determination information reserve memory area may be shifted in the order in which the game balls enter the starting hole (the first reserved number and the second reserved number are subtracted in the order of winning), or the first special chart determination information reserve memory area may be shifted in priority over the second special chart determination information reserve memory area (the first reserved number is subtracted in priority over the second reserved number).

In step S3207, the main CPU 100a executes a jackpot determination process to determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached and the special symbol to be stopped, based on the special symbol determination information stored in the determination memory area. The details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

The main CPU 100a performs a variation pattern determination process in step S3208. In the variation pattern determination process, a variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern table and the special chart determination information stored in the determination memory area. The main control unit 100 stores multiple variation pattern tables, and a variation pattern table is selected according to the game state. The variation pattern determination process will be described in detail later.

Next, in step S3209, the main CPU 100a sets a fluctuation start command. The fluctuation start command includes a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process, a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the fluctuation pattern determination process, and a game state designation command indicating the game state. The fluctuation start command is sent to the performance control unit 130, and the fluctuation performance begins.

In step S3210, the main CPU 100a sets the special symbol variation time (counter value) corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern in the main RAM 100c, and in step S3211 starts displaying the variation of the special symbol. This causes the variation of the special symbol to be displayed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61.

In step S3212, the main CPU 100a resets the customer waiting state flag to end the customer waiting state, and in step S3213, sets the special symbol special power state data to "1" and ends this special symbol determination process.

Meanwhile, in step S3214, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not a customer waiting state flag indicating that the machine is in a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 100c. If the customer waiting state flag is set, the current special symbol determination process is terminated, and if the customer waiting state flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3215. The customer waiting state refers to a state in which the variable display of special symbols and special games (big win game, small win game) are not being executed.

In step S3215, the main CPU 100a sets the customer waiting state flag to ON, and in step S3216, sets a customer waiting command in the main RAM 100c indicating that the machine is in a customer waiting state, and ends this special symbol determination process. This causes the customer waiting command to be sent to the performance control unit 130, and processing is performed to execute a customer waiting demo performance to encourage the player to play.

(Big hit determination process of the main control unit)
The big win determination process will be described with reference to Fig. 44. Fig. 44 is a flow chart showing the big win determination process in step S3207 of Fig. 43.

In step S3231, the main CPU 100a refers to the setting values stored in the main RAM 100c and performs a jackpot determination to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred, or whether or not a small jackpot has occurred, based on the jackpot determination table (see FIG. 5) and the jackpot random number value.

When the main CPU 100a determines that a jackpot has occurred as a result of the jackpot determination (step S3232: YES), it sets game status information at the time of jackpot determination, which indicates the current game status (at the time of jackpot determination), in the main RAM 100c (step S3233).

In step S3234, the main CPU 100a determines the jackpot pattern indicating the type of jackpot based on the jackpot pattern determination table and the jackpot pattern random number value, sets it in the main RAM 100c, and ends the process shown in FIG. 44.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 100a determines that the big win has occurred as a result of the big win determination (NO in step S3232, YES in step S3235), it determines the small win pattern based on the small win pattern random number value, sets it in the main RAM 100c (step S3236), and ends the processing shown in FIG. 44.

If the result is not a small win, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the result is a special miss in step S3237. If the result is a special miss (YES in step S3237), the main CPU 100a determines the special miss symbol based on the special miss symbol random number value, sets it in the main RAM 100c (step S3238), and ends the process shown in FIG. 44. On the other hand, if the result is not a special miss (NO in step S3237), the main CPU 100a proceeds to step S3239 assuming that the result is a normal miss. In step S3239, the main CPU 100a sets the miss symbol and ends the process shown in FIG. 44.

(Variation pattern determination process of the main control unit)
The variation pattern determination process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol will be described with reference to Fig. 45. Fig. 45 is a flow chart showing the variation pattern determination process of step S3208 in Fig. 43.

In step S3251, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the game is in a normal game state based on the time-saving flags (low base time-saving flag, high base time-saving flag) stored in the main RAM 100c.

If the game is in normal play mode (step S3251: YES), the main CPU 100a sets the normal variation pattern table Tn in the main RAM 100c (step S3252).

When the game is not in the normal game mode (step S3251: NO), the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the game is in the low base time-saving mode (step S3253). When the game is in the low base time-saving mode (step S3253: YES), the main CPU 100a sets the fluctuation pattern table Ta for the low base time-saving mode in the main RAM 100c (step S3254).

On the other hand, if the low base time reduction state is not established (step S3253: NO), the main CPU 100a sets the fluctuation pattern table Tb for high base time reduction in the main RAM 100c (step S3255).

The fluctuation pattern table is a table that specifies the conditions for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of special symbols. Each fluctuation pattern table contains multiple fluctuation patterns.

Following the processing of step S3252, step S3254, or step S3255, the main CPU 100a uses the set variation pattern table to perform a lottery based on the special pattern determination information (special pattern variation pattern random number value, reach random number value) to determine the variation pattern of the special pattern (step S3256).

Then, the main CPU 100a sets the determined variation pattern in the main RAM 100c (step S3257) and ends the processing shown in FIG. 45.

(An example of a fluctuation pattern table)
Next, an example of the variation pattern table will be described. Fig. 46 is a diagram showing an example of the normal variation pattern table Tn used in the normal gaming state.

Figure 46(a) is a jackpot fluctuation pattern table used when a jackpot is determined, Figure 46(b) is a reach fluctuation pattern table used when there is a miss (special miss or normal miss) and the reach random number value is within a specified range, and Figure 46(c) is a special miss fluctuation pattern table used when there is a special miss and the reach random number value is outside the specified range. Also, Figure 46(d) is a normal miss fluctuation pattern table used when there is a normal miss and the reach random number value is outside the specified range.

For example, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 46(a) includes a fluctuation pattern OP1 in which a jackpot is notified after an N-reach performance is performed, a fluctuation pattern OP2 in which a jackpot is notified after an SP-reach performance is performed, a fluctuation pattern OP3 in which a jackpot is notified after an SP-SP-reach performance is performed, and a fluctuation pattern OP4 in which a jackpot is notified after a full rotation-reach performance is performed. Note that the fluctuation patterns OP1, OP2, and OP3 may each include a plurality of fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times. For example, the fluctuation pattern OP1 may include a fluctuation pattern OP1-1 (fluctuation time 25 seconds) in which an N-reach performance is performed without a pseudo-ream, a fluctuation pattern OP1-2 (fluctuation time 30 seconds) in which a pseudo-2 is performed and then an N-reach performance is performed, and a fluctuation pattern OP1-3 (fluctuation time 35 seconds) in which a pseudo-3 is performed and then an N-reach performance is performed. In addition, the variation pattern OP2 may include a variation pattern OP2-1 (variation time 50 seconds) in which the SP reach performance is performed without performing a pseudo consecutive win, a variation pattern OP2-2 (variation time 60 seconds) in which the SP reach performance is performed after performing a pseudo 2, and a variation pattern OP2-3 (variation time 65 seconds) in which the SP reach performance is performed after performing a pseudo 3. In addition, the variation pattern OP3 may include a variation pattern OP3-1 (variation time 80 seconds) in which the SPSP reach performance is performed without performing a pseudo consecutive win, a variation pattern OP2-2 (variation time 90 seconds) in which the SPSP reach performance is performed after performing a pseudo 2, and a variation pattern OP3-3 (variation time 95 seconds) in which the SPSP reach performance is performed after performing a pseudo 3.

The reach fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 46(b) includes a fluctuation pattern RP1 in which a miss is reported after an N reach performance is performed, a fluctuation pattern RP2 in which a miss is reported after an SP reach performance is performed, and a fluctuation pattern RP3 in which a miss is reported after an SPSP reach performance is performed. Note that each of the fluctuation patterns RP1, RP2, and RP3 may include a plurality of fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times. For example, the fluctuation pattern RP1 may include a fluctuation pattern RP1-1 (fluctuation time 20 seconds) in which an N reach performance is performed without a pseudo consecutive performance, a fluctuation pattern RP1-2 (fluctuation time 25 seconds) in which a pseudo 2 is performed and then an N reach performance is performed, and a fluctuation pattern RP1-3 (fluctuation time 30 seconds) in which a pseudo 3 is performed and then an N reach performance is performed. In addition, the variation pattern RP2 may include a variation pattern RP2-1 (variation time 45 seconds) in which the SP reach performance is performed without performing a pseudo consecutive win, a variation pattern RP2-2 (variation time 55 seconds) in which the SP reach performance is performed after performing a pseudo 2, and a variation pattern RP2-3 (variation time 60 seconds) in which the SP reach performance is performed after performing a pseudo 3. In addition, the variation pattern RP3 may include a variation pattern RP3-1 (variation time 75 seconds) in which the SPSP reach performance is performed without performing a pseudo consecutive win, a variation pattern RP3-2 (variation time 85 seconds) in which the SPSP reach performance is performed after performing a pseudo 2, and a variation pattern RP3-3 (variation time 90 seconds) in which the SPSP reach performance is performed after performing a pseudo 3.

The special miss fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 46(c) includes a fluctuation pattern HP1 that executes a normal miss effect 1 that notifies a miss in a normal miss mode without performing a reach effect, and a fluctuation pattern HP2 that executes a normal miss effect 2 that notifies a miss in a normal miss mode without performing a reach effect. The normal miss fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 46(d) includes fluctuation patterns HP1 and HP2, similar to the special miss fluctuation pattern. In this way, a fluctuation pattern is selected from the same fluctuation pattern group whether it is a special miss or a normal miss. Note that different fluctuation patterns may be selected for special misses and normal misses. For example, a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time may be more likely to be selected for a special miss than for a normal miss.

Depending on the selected variation pattern, the performance control unit 130 performs various performances. In addition to these, various other variation patterns are also included.

Figure 47 is a diagram showing an example of a low base time-saving fluctuation pattern table Ta used in the low base time-saving state. As shown in Figure 47, the low base time-saving fluctuation pattern table Ta is the same as the normal fluctuation pattern table Tn. That is, in the low base time-saving state, the same fluctuation pattern as in the normal game state is used. Note that the low base time-saving fluctuation pattern table Ta may be different from the normal fluctuation pattern table Tn. The low base time-saving fluctuation pattern table Ta may include some or all of the fluctuation patterns of the normal fluctuation pattern table Tn, as well as special fluctuation patterns not included in the normal fluctuation pattern table Tn.

Figure 48 shows an example of a fluctuation pattern table Tb used in a high base time-saving state.

Figure 48(a) is a big hit fluctuation pattern table used when a big hit is determined, Figure 48(b) is a small hit fluctuation pattern table used when a small hit is determined, Figure 48(c) is a reach fluctuation pattern table used when there is a miss and the reach random number value is within a specified range, and Figure 48(d) is a miss fluctuation pattern table used when there is a miss and the reach random number value is outside the specified range.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 48(a) includes a fluctuation pattern OPb1 that executes reach effect 1, and a fluctuation pattern OPb2 that executes reach effect 2. Regardless of which fluctuation pattern is selected, a symbol matching effect is performed, and the player is notified that a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player will be played.

The small win fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 48(b) includes a fluctuation pattern KPb1 that executes reach effect 1, and a fluctuation pattern KPb2 that executes reach effect 2. Regardless of which fluctuation pattern is selected, a symbol matching effect is performed, and the player is notified that a special game (big win game) that is advantageous to the player will be played.

The reach fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 48(c) includes a fluctuation pattern RPb1 that executes reach performance 1, and a fluctuation pattern RPb2 that executes reach performance 2. Regardless of which fluctuation pattern is selected, after the reach performance is performed, a performance is performed in which a reach miss is notified.

The miss fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 48(d) includes a fluctuation pattern HPb1 that executes normal miss 1, and a fluctuation pattern HPb2 that executes normal miss 2. When fluctuation pattern HPb1 is selected, three different performance symbols 701 stop without a reach performance, and a miss is announced (see FIG. 34(m)). When fluctuation pattern HPb2 is selected, a performance that gives the expectation of a reach being achieved is performed, and then a performance is performed in which a reach is not achieved and a miss is announced.

Note that the above fluctuation pattern table is merely an example, and each fluctuation pattern table may include various fluctuation patterns other than those described above.

(Special symbol variation processing of the main control unit)
The special symbol variation process of the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 49. Fig. 49 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process of step S330 in Fig. 42.

First, in step S3301, the main CPU 100a determines whether the change time set in the change pattern determination process described above has elapsed. If the change time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3302, and if the change time has not elapsed, the current special symbol change process is terminated.

In step S3302, the main CPU 100a stops the display of the special symbol set in the jackpot determination process described above. Here, the main CPU 100a sets a fixed period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) for which the special symbol is stopped. The fixed time may be set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c depending on the game situation (e.g., the stopped symbol or game state). For example, in the normal game state and low base time-saving state, the fixed time may be set to 0.5 seconds, and in the high base time-saving state, the fixed time may be set to 0.3 seconds.

Next, in step S3303, the main CPU 100a decrements (subtracts "1") the number of activations n. Here, the number of activations n is an integer equal to or greater than 0. This update process of step S3303 is performed each time the special symbol changes, whether in the normal game state or when the time-saving game state is set. This update process of step S3303 is performed even when n=0, but n is never set to a value smaller than 0. Note that in a gaming machine that can be set to a high probability state and a low probability state, the process of step S3303 is performed only when the state is the low probability state. Note that the update process of n may be performed when the special symbol starts to change. The update process of n may also be performed when a predetermined determination period has elapsed since the special symbol stopped.

In step S3304, the main CPU 100a determines whether the time-saving flag (low-base time-saving flag or high-base time-saving flag) stored in the main RAM 100c is ON. If the low-base time-saving flag or high-base time-saving flag is ON, the process moves to step S3305 to update the remaining number of time-saving times, and if the low-base time-saving flag or high-base time-saving flag is OFF, the process moves to step S3311 to not update the remaining number of time-saving times.

In step S3305, the main CPU 100a decrements (subtracts "1") J, which is the number of time-saving times in the high base time-saving state, or B, which is the number of time-saving times in the low base time-saving state, stored in the main RAM 100c.

In step S3306, the main CPU 100a determines whether J or B has become "0." If it has become "0," the process moves to step S3307 to end the time-saving game state; if it has not become "0," the process moves to step S3310.

In step S3307, the main CPU 100a resets the time-saving flags (low base time-saving flag and high base time-saving flag) and the number of time-saving times (J and B) stored in the main RAM 100c to their initial values (OFF and "0"), and ends the time-saving game state. Next, the main CPU 100a proceeds to step S3310.

In step S3310, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not a jackpot symbol (special symbols A to D) has stopped and been displayed. If it is not a jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to step S3311. If it is a jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to step S3312, where the time-saving flags (low base time-saving flag and high base time-saving flag) and the number of times for each type of time-saving (J and B) are reset, and the time-saving game state ends. Next, the main CPU 100a proceeds to step S3316.

In step S3311, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not a special losing symbol (special symbols TH1 to TH3) has stopped being displayed. If it is not a special losing symbol, the process proceeds to step S3313. If it is a special losing symbol, the process proceeds to step S3315.

In step S3313, the main CPU 100a determines whether the number of times the operation is performed n stored in the main RAM 100c is "0" and the time-saving history flag is OFF. Here, it is determined whether the number of times the special symbol has changed has reached a specified number (800 times). If the number of times the special symbol has changed has reached the specified number (if the number of times the operation is performed n is "0" and the high base time-saving state based on the specified number has not yet been executed), the time-saving history flag is set to ON (step S3314), and the process proceeds to step S3315 to start the high base time-saving state. If the number of times the special symbol has changed has not reached the specified number, the process proceeds to step S3317.

In step S3315, the main CPU 100a sets the number of time-saving times in the high base time-saving state, turns on the time-saving flag, and transitions to a time-saving game state. Specifically, if the answer is YES in step S3313, the main CPU 100a turns on the high base time-saving flag, and sets the number of time-saving times J in the high base time-saving state to, for example, "800". Also, if the answer is YES in step S3311, the main CPU 100a sets the time-saving flag and the number of time-saving times based on the special losing symbol and the game state. For example, if the low base time-saving flag is ON and the special losing symbol TH1 is stopped, the main CPU 100a turns off the low base time-saving flag and resets the number of time-saving times B in the low base time-saving state, while turning on the high base time-saving flag and setting the number of time-saving times J in the high base time-saving state to "100". As a result, if the special losing symbol TH1 stops in the low base time-saving state, the state transitions to the high base time-saving state. Also, if the low base time-saving flag is ON and the special losing symbol TH2 or TH3 stops, the main CPU 100a maintains the time-saving flag and the number of time-saving times. Also, if the high base time-saving flag is ON and the special losing symbols TH1 to TH3 stop, the main CPU 100a maintains the time-saving flag and the number of time-saving times. Also, in the normal game state (i.e., the low base time-saving flag and the high base time-saving flag are OFF) and the special losing symbols TH1 to TH3 stop, the main CPU 100a turns the low base time-saving flag ON and sets the number of time-saving times B for the low base time-saving state according to the special losing symbols TH1 to TH3.

In the next step S3316, the main CPU 100a sets a time-saving count designation command corresponding to the number of time-saving times in the main RAM 100c. This causes the time-saving count designation command to be sent to the performance control unit 130, which notifies the user of the remaining number of time-saving times.

In step S3317, the main CPU 100a sets the special symbol special power status data to "2". Then, in step S3318, the main CPU 100a sets a variation stop command indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed. The variation stop command includes a symbol determination command indicating the special symbol that has been stopped and displayed, and a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state (game state determined from the presence or absence of the time-saving flag). When the variation stop command is sent to the performance control unit 130, the variation performance ends (the performance symbol is stopped and displayed), and processing according to the game state is performed. When the main CPU 100a executes the processing of step S3318, it ends the current special symbol variation processing.

(Special symbol stop processing of the main control unit)
The special symbol stop processing of the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 50. Fig. 50 is a flow chart showing the special symbol stop processing of step S340 in Fig. 42.

First, in step S3401, the main CPU 100a determines whether the determination period set in the special symbol change process described above has elapsed. If the determination period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3402, and if the determination period has not elapsed, the current special symbol stop process is terminated.

In step S3402, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not a jackpot symbol is displayed. If a jackpot symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to step S3403. If a jackpot symbol is not displayed (if a small jackpot symbol or a miss symbol is displayed), the process proceeds to step S3405.

In step S3403, the main CPU 100a sets the special chart special power status data to "3" in order to execute the jackpot game, and in the following step S3404, starts the opening to transition to the jackpot game.

In step S3405, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not a small win symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol. If a small win symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol, the process proceeds to step S3406. If a small win symbol is not displayed as a stopped symbol (it is a losing symbol), the process proceeds to step S3408.

In step S3406, the main CPU 100a sets the special chart special power status data to "4" to execute the small win game, and in the following step S3407, starts the opening to transition to the small win game.

In step S3408, the main CPU 100a sets the special symbol special power status data to "0" to move processing to the special symbol determination process, and ends this special symbol stop process.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 100a executes the processing of step S3404 or step S3407, in step S3409, it sets an opening command corresponding to a big win or small win in the main RAM 100c. This causes the opening command to be sent to the performance control unit 130, and processing is performed to execute the opening performance for a big win game or a small win game. When this processing is completed, the current special pattern stop processing is terminated.

(Jackpot Game Processing of the Main Control Unit)
Next, the details of the big win game process executed by the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 51. Fig. 51 is a detailed flow chart showing the big win game process of step S350 in Fig. 42.

First, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the opening is in progress (step S3501). Here, it is determined whether or not the opening of the jackpot game that started in step S3404 above is in progress.

If the opening is in progress (step S3501: YES), the main CPU 100a judges whether the opening time has elapsed (step S3502). The opening time differs depending on whether the symbol is a big win symbol or a small win symbol. If the opening time has elapsed (step S3502: YES), the main CPU 100a sets R, which indicates the number of rounds in the big win game, to "0" according to the result of the big win judgment process (big win symbol or small win symbol), and sets the value of Rmax, the opening pattern of the big win port (first big win port 50 or second big win port 56) (opening time, number of openings, interval time, etc.), etc. (step S3503).

Here, as described above, the value of Rmax differs depending on whether the symbol is a big win or a small win, and the main CPU 100a sets Rmax, which indicates the number of rounds of big win play, depending on whether the symbol is a big win or a small win.

Following step S3503, the main CPU 100a adds "1" to R and stores it in the main RAM 100c (step S3504). Next, the main CPU 100a starts controlling the opening of the large prize opening based on the opening pattern set in step S3503 (step S3505), and sets a round start command indicating the start of the round in the main RAM 100c (step S3506). This round start command is sent to the performance control unit 130 by executing the output control process of step S820. After the process of step S3506, the main CPU 100a then executes the process of step S3510.

On the other hand, if the game is not in the opening mode (step S3501: NO), the main CPU 100a judges whether or not the game is ending (step S3507). If the game is in the ending mode (step S3507: YES), the main CPU 100a then executes the process of step S3517. If the game is not in the ending mode (step S3507: NO), the main CPU 100a judges whether or not the game is in an interval between rounds of play (step S3508). If the game is in an interval (step S3508: YES), the main CPU 100a judges whether or not the interval time has elapsed (step S3509), and if the interval time has elapsed (step S3509: YES), the main CPU 100a then executes the process of step S3504. If the interval time has not elapsed (step S3509: NO), the main CPU 100a ends the current jackpot game process.

On the other hand, if it is not during an interval (step S3508: NO), i.e., if a round is being played, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the round end condition has been met (step S3510). If the round end condition has not been met (step S3510: NO), the main CPU 100a ends the jackpot game process.

The round end condition is that a predetermined time (e.g., 29.5 seconds) has elapsed since the opening control of the large prize opening for this round was started in step S3505, or that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening for this round since the opening control of the large prize opening was started in step S3505 has reached a predetermined value (e.g., 10 balls). If either of these two conditions is met, the main CPU 100a determines that the round end condition has been met.

If the round end condition is met (step S3510: YES), the main CPU 100a ends the control of opening the special prize opening for this round (step S3511). Next, the main CPU 100a sets a round end command (step S3512). This round end command is sent to the performance control unit 130 by executing the output control process of step S820.

The main CPU 100a then determines whether R is equal to Rmax (step S3513). In other words, the main CPU 100a determines whether the current round is equal to the maximum number of rounds set in step S3503.

If it is determined that R is not equal to Rmax (step S3513: NO), the main CPU 100a starts measuring the interval time (step S3514) and ends the current jackpot game processing.

If it is determined that R is equal to Rmax (step S3513: YES), the main CPU 100a starts the ending (step S3515) and sets an ending command in the main RAM 100c (step S3516). This ending command is sent to the performance control unit 130 by executing the output control process of step S820.

When the main CPU 100a has performed the processing of step S3516, or when the processing of step S3507 has been judged as YES, the main CPU 100a judges whether or not a preset ending time has elapsed since the ending was started in step S3515 (step S3517). If the ending time has elapsed (step S3517: YES), the main CPU 100a sets the special chart special electric state data to "5" in order to execute the jackpot game end processing (step S3518).

If the process of step S3510 returns NO, if the process of step S3517 returns NO, if the process of step S3502 returns NO, if the process of step S3514 is executed, or if the process of step S3518 is executed, the main CPU 100a ends the jackpot game process shown in FIG. 51.

(Small hit game processing of the main control unit)
The small win game processing of the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 52. Fig. 52 is a flow chart showing the small win game processing of step S360 in Fig. 42.

First, in step S3601, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the opening is currently in progress. Specifically, it determines whether or not the opening time set in the special symbol stop process described above is equal to or greater than "0". If the opening is in progress, the process proceeds to step S3602, and if the opening is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S3605.

In step S3602, the main CPU 100a determines whether the opening time has elapsed. If the opening time has elapsed, in step S3603, an operation pattern for opening and closing the large prize opening and the specific area 52 is set, and in the following step S3604, opening control of the large prize opening is started. If the opening time has not elapsed, the current small prize game processing is ended.

In step S3605, the main CPU 100a determines whether the small win game is ending. If it is ending, the process proceeds to step S3614. If it is not ending, the process proceeds to step S3606.

In step S3606, the main CPU 100a performs opening control of the specific area 52, and opens the specific area 52.

In step S3607, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not to block the large prize opening based on the set operation pattern. If it is determined that the large prize opening should be blocked, in step S3608, the opening control of the large prize opening is terminated and the opening control of the specific area 52 is terminated. Note that the opening control of the specific area 52 may be terminated before the opening control of the large prize opening is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the large prize opening should be blocked (if the set opening time for the large prize opening has not elapsed), the current small prize game processing is terminated.

In step S3609, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 52 during the small win game. Specifically, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the specific area passage flag stored in the main RAM 100c is ON.

If the game ball passes through the specific area 52 during a small win game, the main CPU 100a transitions to a type 2 big win game state in step S3610. Specifically, the time-saving flag is turned OFF, as in step S3312 above, and the number of time-saving times is reset.

In the next step S3611, the main CPU 100a sets the special chart special power status data to "3" and ends this small win game processing.

On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 52 during the small win game, the main CPU 100a starts the ending of the small win game in step S3612, and sets an ending command in step S3613. This causes the ending command to be sent to the performance control unit 130, and processing is performed to execute the ending performance of the small win game.

In step S3614, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not to end the ending based on the time elapsed since the beginning of the ending. If the ending is to be ended, in the next step S3615, the special chart special power status data is set to "0" and the current small win game processing is ended. If the ending is not to be ended, the current small win game processing is ended.

(Jackpot game end processing of the main control unit)
The big win game ending process of the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 53. Fig. 53 is a flow chart showing the big win game ending process in step S370 of Fig. 42.

First, in step S3701, the main CPU 100a refers to the special stop symbol data stored in the main RAM 100c to determine whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped. If the jackpot symbol is stopped, the process proceeds to step S3702. If the jackpot symbol is not stopped (if the small win symbol is stopped), the process proceeds to step S3704.

In step S3702, the main CPU 100a acquires the game state information at the time of jackpot determination stored in the main RAM 100c, and in the following step S3703, sets a post-jackpot game state setting table for setting the game state after the jackpot game based on the game state information at the time of winning the jackpot. The post-jackpot game state setting table stores parameters for setting the time-saving flag (low base time-saving flag or high base time-saving flag) and the number of time-saving times (J or B) based on the game state at the time of jackpot determination and the jackpot pattern (see Figure 8).

In step S3704, the main CPU 100a acquires the game state information at the time of passing through the specific area stored in the main RAM 100c, and in the following step S3705, sets a type 2 jackpot post-play state setting table for setting the game state after the jackpot play based on the game state information at the time of passing through the specific area. The type 2 jackpot post-play state setting table stores parameters for setting the time-saving flag (low base time-saving flag or high base time-saving flag) and the number of time-saving times (J or B) based on the game state at the time of passing through the specific area 52 and the small win pattern (see FIG. 8).

After processing step S3703 or step S3705, in step S3706, the main CPU 100a refers to the set state setting table to set the game state after the big win game. Specifically, in step S3706, the main CPU 100a sets the time-saving flag (low base time-saving flag or high base time-saving flag) and the number of time-saving times (J or B) in the main RAM 100c.

Next, in step S3707, the main CPU 100a resets the number of activations n to its initial value (800) and resets the time-saving history flag to OFF.

In step S3708, the main CPU 100a sets a game state designation command indicating the game state. This causes the game state designation command to be sent to the performance control unit 130, which then performs processing to update the game state.

In step S3709, the main CPU 100a sets the special symbol special power status data to "0" to move processing to the special symbol determination process, and ends the current jackpot game end process.

In this way, at the end of a big win game that is executed when the game ball passes through the specific area 52 during a small win game, it is possible to perform a predetermined process (specifically, a process of determining the game conditions after the big win game (game state, number of time-saving times) and setting the determined game conditions in the main RAM 100c) based on the game state when the game ball passed through the specific area during the small win game.

In addition, at the end of a big win game that does not go through a small win game, it is possible to perform a predetermined process (specifically, a process of determining the game conditions after the big win game (game state, number of time-saving times) and setting the determined game conditions in the main RAM 100c) based on the game state when it is determined that there is a big win. Therefore, it is possible to make the gameplay different depending on whether it is a big win game that goes through a small win game or a big win game that does not go through a small win game, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, at the end of a big win game that does not go through a small win game, a predetermined process may be performed based on the game state when the big win symbol is displayed stopped, rather than performing a predetermined process based on the game state when a big win is determined.

(Timer interrupt processing of the production control unit)
Next, the details of the performance control based on various commands from the main control unit 100 will be described.

Figure 54 is a flow chart showing an example of a timer interrupt process performed in the performance control unit 130. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the sub-CPU 130a of the performance control unit 130 repeatedly executes the series of processes shown in Figure 54 at regular intervals (e.g., 4 milliseconds) by interruption.

The sub-CPU 130a first executes a command reception process (step E10). The command reception process of step E10 is a process for controlling the performance based on various commands from the main control unit 100. The performance control unit 130 receives a command from the main control unit 100, determines the content of the performance according to the received command, generates a command for causing the image/sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 to execute the determined performance, and sets the generated command in the sub-RAM 130c. The command reception process of step E10 will be described in detail later.

Following step E10, the sub-CPU 130a performs customer waiting control processing (step E20). Specifically, when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the sub-CPU 130a received a customer waiting command from the main control unit 100, the sub-CPU 130a starts a customer waiting demo performance. In this case, the performance control unit 130 stops the background music being output and outputs background music for the customer waiting demo performance.

Next, the sub-CPU 130a performs a command transmission process to transmit each command set in the sub-RAM 130c to the image/sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 (step E30). As a result, the image/sound control unit 140 performs effects such as image display and sound output, and the lamp control unit 150 controls the movable effect device 73, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, etc.

(Command Reception Processing by the Performance Control Unit 130)
The command reception process executed in the performance control unit 130 will be described below with reference to Fig. 55. Fig. 55 is a flow chart showing an example of the command reception process in step E10 of Fig. 54. The performance control unit 130 determines the content of the performance based on a command from the main control unit 100, and causes the image/sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 to execute the determined performance. Some or all of the processing related to the performance shown below may be performed in any of the performance control unit 130, the image/sound control unit 140, and the lamp control unit 150.

First, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 100 (step E101). If a command has been received (step E101: YES), the sub-CPU 130a proceeds to step E102, and if a command has not been received (step E101: NO), the sub-CPU 130a ends the current command reception process.

If the answer is YES in step E101, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a power-on command or a power-restoration command (step E102).

If it is a power-on command or a power recovery command (step E102: YES), the sub-CPU 130a performs a power-on notification process (step E103). Specifically, if the received command is a power-on command, a notification instruction command for executing a power-on notification is set in the sub-RAM 130c, and if the received command is a power recovery command, a notification instruction command for executing a power recovery notification is set in the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is sent to the image and sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing a power-on notification or a power recovery notification, and processing for executing an initial operation for operating the movable performance device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) in a predetermined mode and an initial light emission for emitting light from the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 in a predetermined mode (the above-mentioned recovery mode) are performed.

Specifically, when the power supply is stopped while the special symbol is not being displayed or when the special symbol is being displayed, and the power supply is then restored, the performance prop is made to perform an initial operation for a predetermined initial operation period. This initial operation period includes a period during which the performance effects such as the volume and light intensity cannot be adjusted using the cross button or the changeover switch. In addition, if the power supply is stopped while the special symbol is being displayed, and the power supply is then restored without any setting change operation or RWM clear operation being performed, the special symbol is displayed again from the time the power supply was stopped, but even if the special symbol is displayed again, the performance symbol corresponding to the special symbol is not displayed, and a power restoration screen indicating that the power is being restored is displayed. The power restoration screen is displayed until the resumed special symbol is displayed (until the remaining time has elapsed). In addition, during the display period of the power restoration screen, the performance effects cannot be adjusted using the cross button or the changeover switch. If the specified initial operation period ends while the power recovery screen is being displayed, adjustment of the performance effect is not possible during the specified initial operation period and during the display period of the power recovery screen. Then, when the resumed variable display of the special symbol ends, the display period of the power recovery screen ends, and adjustment of the performance effect becomes possible. Also, if the power supply is stopped when the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed and the power supply is then restored, adjustment of the performance effect becomes possible after the specified initial operation period has elapsed. Also, if the power supply is stopped while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed and then a setting change operation or an RWM clear operation is performed when the power supply is restored, the performance prop performs its initial operation for the specified initial operation period, and adjustment of the performance effect becomes possible after the specified initial operation period has elapsed.

This power restoration command includes information such as the game status, game situation (changing or hitting the jackpot), number of reserved times, number of activations n, and time-saving history flag. It may also include the remaining number of time-saving times. This information is stored in the sub-RAM 130c of the performance control unit 130. Based on this information, the performance control unit 130 controls the performance. For example, based on the value of the number of activations n, the performance control unit 130 can know the remaining number of times the game will change until the high base time-saving state is set. This value is stored in the sub-RAM 130c and is decreased each time the special symbol changes.

If step E103 is executed, or if step E102 is judged as NO, the sub-CPU 130a judges whether the received command is an error command (step E104).

Error commands include unrecoverable error commands, illegal winning error commands, abnormal winning error commands, magnetic error commands, radio wave error commands, door opening error start commands, door opening error end commands, and operation error commands.

If it is an error-related command (step E104: YES), the sub-CPU 130a performs error notification processing (step E105). Specifically, a notification instruction command is set in the sub-RAM 130c to execute an error notification (unrecoverable error notification, illegal winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door open error notification, operation error notification, etc.) according to the type of error-related command received. This causes the notification instruction command to be sent to the image/sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and various types of error notifications are issued. In the error notification, an error sound is output at maximum volume regardless of the volume set using the cross key 19 or the changeover switch 22.

When a gate passing command is received (step E106: YES), the sub-CPU 130a performs gate passing processing (step E107). Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the notification conditions are met, and if the notification conditions are met, sends a command to the image/sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 to execute a specific notification. The notification condition is, for example, that a predetermined number of gate passes are detected within a predetermined time when the normal mode or special mode is set. This causes a specific notification using images, sounds, and lamps to be executed.

When step E107 is executed, or when step E106 is judged as NO, the sub-CPU 130a judges whether the received command is a start winning command (first start winning command or second start winning command) (step E110). Here, the start winning command includes the first reserved number U1 and the second reserved number U2. In addition, the start winning command may include the first look-ahead information or the second look-ahead information.

If the received command is a start winning command (step E110: YES), the sub-CPU 130a executes the start winning command process (step E111). The start winning command process is a process executed when a game ball wins in the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47. For example, the start winning command process causes a reserved icon to be additionally displayed on the main screen. At this time, the color of the reserved icon may be changed based on the result of the pre-determination. A scenario for changing the color of the reserved icon or the icon (a scenario for changing the color at what timing) is determined based on the result of the pre-determination. In addition, whether or not to execute a zone performance is determined based on the result of the pre-determination. If it is determined to execute a zone performance based on the result of the pre-determination, a scenario for a zone performance covering multiple variations including the variation of the target of the pre-determination is determined. In addition, it is determined whether or not to execute a chance eye performance, and a scenario for the chance eye performance when it is determined to execute the chance eye performance is determined.

When step E111 is executed, or when step E110 is judged as NO, the sub-CPU 130a judges whether the received command is a fluctuation start command (step E112). When it is a fluctuation start command (step E112: YES), the sub-CPU 130a executes a fluctuation start command process (step E113). The fluctuation start command process is a process that is executed when the fluctuation display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern starts. When the fluctuation start command process is executed, a fluctuation performance is started in the image/sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. In the fluctuation performance, a performance according to the fluctuation pattern is performed as described above.

When step E113 is executed, or when step E112 is judged as NO, the sub-CPU 130a judges whether the received command is a fluctuation stop command (step E114). When it is a fluctuation stop command (step E114: YES), the sub-CPU 130a executes fluctuation stop command processing (step E115). The fluctuation stop command processing is processing that is executed when the first special pattern or the second special pattern is stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the fluctuation stop command processing, the display pattern 701 or the small pattern 702 according to the result of the jackpot judgment is stopped and the fluctuation performance is ended. In addition, in the fluctuation stop command processing, the disappearance performance of the icon described later is performed.

When step E115 is executed, or when step E114 is judged as NO, the sub-CPU 130a judges whether the received command is an opening command (step E116). When it is an opening command (step E116: YES), the sub-CPU 130a executes opening processing (step E117). Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a determines an opening effect indicating that a big win game is about to start, and sets a command in the sub-RAM 130c for causing the image/sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 to execute the opening effect. This causes the command to be sent to the image/sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing to execute the opening effect is performed.

When step E117 is executed, or when step E116 is judged as NO, the sub-CPU 130a judges whether the received command is an ending command (step E118). When it is an ending command (step E118: YES), the sub-CPU 130a executes ending processing (step E119). Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a determines an ending performance indicating that the big win game has ended, and sets a command in the sub-RAM 130c for causing the image/sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 to execute the ending performance. This causes the command to be sent to the image/sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing to execute the ending performance is performed.

(Processing of variable start command by the performance control unit 130)
Hereinafter, the fluctuation start command processing executed in the performance control unit 130 will be described with reference to Fig. 56. Fig. 56 is a flow chart showing an example of the fluctuation start command processing in step E113 of Fig. 55.

The sub-CPU 130a analyzes the received fluctuation start command and determines the result of the jackpot determination (jackpot pattern, small win pattern, special losing pattern, or losing pattern), the special pattern fluctuation pattern, the current game state, the first reserved number U1, and the second reserved number U2 (step E113-1).

Next, the sub-CPU 130a performs a presentation mode setting process (step E113-2). Specifically, the presentation mode is set according to the game status.

Next, the sub-CPU 130a determines a variable performance pattern based on the special chart variation pattern (step E113-3). The performance control unit 130 stores a variable performance pattern corresponding to the special chart variation pattern, and a variable performance pattern corresponding to the special chart variation pattern is determined. Here, the content of the performance, such as the presence or absence of pseudo consecutive, the number of pseudo consecutive, the presence or absence of reach performance, the type of reach performance, the presence or absence of role performance, the presence or absence of operation performance, and the content of the operation performance, is determined based on the special chart variation pattern. Also, if the execution of the zone performance is determined as a result of the start winning command processing, the execution of the zone performance is determined according to the determined scenario. Also, if the execution of the chance eye performance is determined as a result of the start winning command processing, the execution of the chance eye performance is determined according to the determined scenario. For example, if the special chart variation pattern is the variation pattern OP3, a variable performance pattern including the SPSP reach performance is determined as the variable performance pattern. A command for executing the variable performance based on the determined variable performance pattern is transmitted to the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the variable performance is executed in the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. This results in, for example, the variation effects shown in Figures 17 and 22 being executed.

Then, the sub-CPU 130a determines the preview performance by drawing lots using the performance random number based on the variable performance pattern (step E113-4). For example, preview performances include line previews, step-up previews, cut-in previews, etc., which suggest the possibility of a jackpot. Preview performances also include confirmed performances, which suggest a jackpot. The sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not to perform a preview performance based on the special chart variable performance pattern, and determines which preview performance to perform at what timing of the variable performance. Also, for example, by drawing lots using the variable performance pattern and the performance random number, it is determined whether or not to perform each of the above-mentioned emphasis performances, and the mode of the emphasis performance if it is determined to perform it.

Next, the sub-CPU 130a sets the icon change effect (step E113-5). Here, the icon change effect that changes the reserved icon or the icon in question is set according to the scenario determined in the start winning command processing. For example, if it has been determined that the reserved icon will be changed when the current special pattern changes, the sub-CPU 130a sets the timing for changing the reserved icon, the mode of the icon change suggestion effect to be performed before the reserved icon is changed, and the like. As a result, an icon change effect that changes the reserved icon is performed while the current special pattern is changing.

Next, the sub-CPU 130a updates the first reserved number N1 or the second reserved number N2 (step E113-6). As a result, if the fluctuation start command is a command indicating the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the first reserved number N1 is decremented by "1", and if the command is a command indicating the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol, the second reserved number N2 is decremented by "1". The sub-CPU 130a checks the consistency of the currently displayed number of reserved icons based on the first reserved number N1 or the second reserved number N2 updated in step S113-11, and if there is an inconsistency, controls the number of reserved icons to be consistent with the first reserved number N1 or the second reserved number N2.

Next, the sub-CPU 130a sets various commands for executing each of the set effects (step E113-7). The various commands are sent to the image/sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, whereby each of the set effects is executed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the image and audio control unit)
Next, the timer interrupt process performed in the image/audio control unit 140 will be described.

Figure 57 is a flow chart showing an example of a timer interrupt process performed in the image/audio control unit 140. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the overall CPU 141a of the image/audio control unit 140 repeatedly executes the series of processes shown in Figure 57 at regular intervals (e.g., 4 milliseconds) by interruption.

The general CPU 141a performs a changeover switch process (step E401). Here, when the changeover switch 22 is operated, the volume value and/or the light amount value is adjusted. Specifically, the general CPU 141a determines whether the changeover switch 22 has been operated based on a signal from the changeover switch 22, and when the changeover switch 22 has been operated, adjusts the volume value of the performance sounds (BGM, sound effects, sounds during reach performances, sounds related to each emphasis performance, the first notification sound of a specific notification, etc.) output from the sound output device 9, the light amount value of the backlight of the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, and the light amount value of the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74. The volume value and the light amount value can be set within a predetermined adjustment range (for example, 1 to 5).

Next, the overall CPU 141a performs a volume adjustment process (step E402). Here, the volume value of the effect sound output from the audio output device 9 is adjusted in response to an operation performed on the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. Specifically, the overall CPU 141a determines whether the left button or the right button of the cross key 19 has been pressed based on a signal from the cross key detection switch 19a, and if the left button or the right button has been pressed, adjusts the volume value within the above-mentioned predetermined adjustment range. As described above, the volume of the first notification sound related to the specific notification can be adjusted, whereas the volume of the second notification sound cannot be adjusted and is output at maximum volume. Furthermore, the volume of various error sounds cannot be adjusted either and is output at maximum volume.

Next, the overall CPU 141a performs a light intensity adjustment process (step E403). Here, in response to an operation performed on the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player, the light intensity values of the backlights of the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, and the light intensity values of the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are adjusted. Specifically, the overall CPU 141a determines whether the up button or the down button of the cross key 19 has been pressed based on a signal from the cross key detection switch 19a, and if the up button or the down button has been pressed, adjusts the light intensity value within the above-mentioned predetermined adjustment range.

At the start and end of the variable performance, adjustments to the volume and light intensity values using the cross key 19 are restricted (suppressed). Adjustments to the volume and light intensity values using the cross key 19 are also restricted from the time the gaming machine 1 is powered on until the main control unit 100 starts controlling the game.

Next, the overall CPU 141a sets the animation (step E404). When a command to execute various effects is received from the performance control unit 130, the overall CPU 141a determines the animation that corresponds to the received command.

Next, the overall CPU 141a sets the sound (step E405). When a command to execute various effects is received from the performance control unit 130, the overall CPU 141a determines the sound that corresponds to the received command.

Next, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the frame time has elapsed (step E406). Here, the frame time is the time to display one frame of image, and is, for example, 1/30 seconds. In other words, here, it is determined whether or not it is frame update timing to update the images displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71.

If the frame time has elapsed (step E406: YES), the overall CPU 141a performs drawing control processing (E407). Here, the overall CPU 141a causes the VDP 145 to generate an image according to the set animation. This causes the image next to the currently displayed image to be generated and displayed. By generating and displaying one frame of image at frame time intervals (e.g., 1/30 seconds), the first image display device 70 displays, for example, the changing performance pattern 701.

Next, the overall CPU 141a performs audio control processing (step E408). This causes the sound effects to be output. This concludes the explanation of the processing shown in FIG. 31.

The image and sound control unit 140 may be configured to receive a specific signal during the execution of the variation performance, and may be configured to output an image or sound (determined by the performance control unit 130) determined at the start of the variation when the specific signal is received, and may be configured not to output the image or sound determined at the start of the variation when the specific signal is not received. For example, when it is determined to add an emphasis image to the performance pattern at a specific timing from the start of the variation, if a specific signal is received at the specific timing, the emphasis image may be drawn and displayed on the first image display device 70, and if the specific signal is not received, the emphasis image may not be displayed on the first image display device 70. Also, when it is determined to output a sound related to the emphasis performance at a specific timing from the start of the variation, if a specific signal is received at the specific timing, the sound may be output, and if the specific signal is not received, the sound may not be output.

Note that even if the performance control unit 130 is unable to receive commands from the main control unit 100 after receiving a fluctuation start command from the main control unit 100, the fluctuation performance can be executed, but specific notifications cannot be executed. For example, in the fluctuation performance, it is possible to execute pre-performances (e.g., reserved icons or performances that change the icons, zone performances, chance eye performances), it is possible to execute reach performances and emphasis performances that emphasize reach patterns, and it is possible to execute emphasis performances for performance patterns (performance patterns that suggest a jackpot, performance patterns that suggest a miss, and performance patterns that have stopped in a specific area).

Even if the special symbol starts to change, if the performance control unit 130 does not receive a change start command from the main control unit 100, the start action of the performance symbol in response to the change start command and the first pre-performance (change of the pending icon, chance eye performance) cannot be executed, but the second pre-performance (zone performance) may be executable.

In addition, if the performance control unit 130 does not receive a change stop command from the main control unit 100, it continues the change performance (changing display performance or oscillation of the performance pattern), and if it receives the next change start command in that state, it executes the change performance according to the received change start command. Specifically, it performs a start action for the performance pattern without stopping the display of the performance pattern. If it is decided to perform a start emphasis performance for the performance pattern when the start action is executed, it causes the oscillating performance pattern to perform a start action and performs a start emphasis performance for that performance pattern. In addition, for the small and fourth patterns, if it receives the next change start command, it continues the change display as it is without stopping the display of the small and fourth patterns.

In addition, if the performance control unit 130 is unable to receive commands from the main control unit 100 while a specific notification is being executed, it will continue the variable performance (variable display performance or oscillation of the performance pattern) and continue the specific notification. If the execution time for the specific notification has elapsed, the specific notification will be terminated, and will not be executed even if the notification conditions are met.

In addition, the manner of the start action of the performance pattern and the manner of the start emphasis performance are the same when the performance control unit 130 receives a change start command in response to the change of a special pattern and when it receives a change start command in response to the change of the next special pattern without receiving a change start command, but the manner of the movement display of the reserved icon may be different. For example, the movement speed of the reserved icon may be faster or slower when it receives a change start command in response to the change of the next special pattern without receiving a change start command than when it receives a change start command in response to the change of a special pattern.

In addition, when the performance control unit 130 receives a first variation pattern related to a jackpot from the main control unit 100, the time from when the highlighting effect on the jackpot pattern starts to when the performance pattern stops may be a first time, and when the performance control unit 130 receives a second variation pattern related to a jackpot, the time from when the highlighting effect on the jackpot pattern starts to when the performance pattern stops may be a second time that is longer than the first time. In addition, when the performance control unit 130 is in a state where it cannot receive commands from the main control unit 100 after receiving the first or second variation pattern from the main control unit 100, the time from when the highlighting effect on the jackpot pattern starts to when the performance pattern stops may be a third time that is longer than the first and second times.

In addition, when the performance control unit 130 receives a first variation pattern related to a jackpot or a specific reach performance from the main control unit 100, the time from when the highlighting performance for the reach pattern starts to when the performance pattern stops may be a first time, and when the performance control unit 130 receives a second variation pattern related to a jackpot or a specific reach performance from the main control unit 100, the time from when the highlighting performance for the reach pattern starts to when the performance pattern stops may be a second time that is longer than the first time.In addition, when the performance control unit 130 is in a state where it cannot receive commands from the main control unit 100 after receiving the first variation pattern or the second variation pattern from the main control unit 100, the time from when the highlighting performance for the reach pattern starts to when the performance pattern stops may be a third time that is longer than the first and second times.

In addition, when the performance control unit 130 receives the first variation pattern from the main control unit 100, the time from when the highlighting effect on the performance pattern in the specific area starts to when the performance pattern stops may be a first time, and when the performance control unit 130 receives the second variation pattern, the time from when the highlighting effect on the performance pattern in the specific area starts to when the performance pattern stops may be a second time that is longer than the first time.In addition, when the performance control unit 130 receives the first or second variation pattern from the main control unit 100 and is in a state where it cannot receive commands from the main control unit 100, the time from when the highlighting effect on the performance pattern in the specific area starts to when the performance pattern stops may be a third time that is longer than the first and second times.

In addition, when the performance control unit 130 receives the first variation pattern from the main control unit 100, the time from when the emphasis performance for the preview performance starts to when the performance pattern stops may be a first time, and when the performance control unit 130 receives the second variation pattern, the time from when the emphasis performance for the preview performance starts to when the performance pattern stops may be a second time that is longer than the first time.In addition, when the performance control unit 130 receives the first or second variation pattern from the main control unit 100 and then becomes unable to receive commands from the main control unit 100, the time from when the emphasis performance for the preview performance starts to when the performance pattern stops may be a third time that is longer than the first and second times.

In addition, when the performance control unit 130 receives a first variation pattern from the main control unit 100, the time from when the emphasis performance for the pre-performance (for example, a performance that changes a reserved icon or the icon) starts to when the performance pattern stops may be a first time, and when the performance control unit 130 receives a second variation pattern, the time from when the emphasis performance for the pre-performance starts to when the performance pattern stops may be a second time that is longer than the first time.In addition, when the performance control unit 130 receives the first or second variation pattern from the main control unit 100 and is in a state where it cannot receive commands from the main control unit 100, the time from when the emphasis performance for the pre-performance starts to when the performance pattern stops may be a third time that is longer than the first and second times.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern when the effect pattern temporarily stops, and can execute a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the change in the effect pattern during the temporary stop (for example, an effect in which the effect pattern repeatedly oscillates and emits light), and it may be possible to differentiate between the form of the first emphasis effect and the form of the second emphasis effect.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern when the effect pattern temporarily stops, and can execute a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the change in the effect pattern during the temporary stop, and the first emphasis effect can emphasize the effect pattern with an emphasis different from that of the second emphasis effect, and the second emphasis effect can emphasize the effect pattern by changing the emphasis area of the effect pattern (the display area of the emphasis effect).

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can also execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern when the effect pattern temporarily stops, and can execute a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the change in the effect pattern during the temporary stop, and the first emphasis effect can emphasize the effect pattern without repeatedly (periodically) changing the emphasis area, and the second emphasis effect can emphasize the effect pattern by repeatedly (periodically) changing the emphasis area.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern when the effect pattern temporarily stops, and a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the change in the effect pattern during the temporary stop, and the first emphasis effect may be capable of emphasizing the effect pattern by emphasizing at least the outer area of the effect pattern, and the second emphasis effect may be capable of emphasizing the effect pattern by emphasizing the surface area of the effect pattern.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern when the effect pattern temporarily stops, and a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the change in the effect pattern during the temporary stop, and the first emphasis effect can include an action effect (such as a character action) that emphasizes the effect pattern by causing a predetermined part of the effect pattern (such as a character part) to perform a predetermined action, and a first image effect that displays a predetermined emphasis image (effect image) to emphasize the effect pattern, and the second emphasis effect can include a second image effect that displays a specific emphasis image different from the predetermined emphasis image to emphasize the effect pattern.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can also execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern when the effect pattern starts to change, and can execute a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern when the effect pattern temporarily stops. The first and second emphasis effects can include an action effect (such as a character action) that emphasizes the effect pattern by causing a predetermined part of the effect pattern (such as a character part) to perform a predetermined action, and an image effect (effect) that emphasizes the effect pattern by displaying a predetermined emphasis image (effect image). The action effect and image effect of the first emphasis effect and the action effect and image effect of the second emphasis effect can be configured to be different from each other.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment may also be capable of executing a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern when the effect pattern starts to change, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern when the effect pattern temporarily stops, and a third emphasis effect that emphasizes the change in the effect pattern during the temporary stop, and may be capable of starting the display of the change in the effect pattern after executing the first emphasis effect, ending the display of the change and executing the second emphasis effect before executing the third emphasis effect.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern when the effect pattern starts to change, and a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the change in the effect pattern during a temporary stop, and the first emphasis effect can include an action effect (such as a character action) that emphasizes the effect pattern by causing a predetermined part of the effect pattern (such as a character part) to perform a predetermined action, and a first image effect (effect) that displays a predetermined emphasis image (effect image) to emphasize the effect pattern, and the second emphasis effect can include a second image effect that displays a specific emphasis image different from the predetermined emphasis image to emphasize the effect pattern.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern when the effect pattern starts to change, and a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the change in the effect pattern during a temporary stop, and the first emphasis effect may be capable of emphasizing the effect pattern by emphasizing at least the outer area of the effect pattern, and the second emphasis effect may be capable of emphasizing the effect pattern by emphasizing the surface area of the effect pattern.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern when the effect pattern starts to change, and a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern of a specific state (reach state) that raises the expectation of the execution of a special game, and the first emphasis effect can emphasize the effect patterns individually (in sequence), and the second emphasis effect can simultaneously emphasize the effect patterns that constitute the specific state.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can also execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect symbols in a specific state (reach state) that creates the expectation of a special game being played, and can execute a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect symbols when the effect symbols temporarily stop. The first emphasis effect can simultaneously emphasize the effect symbols that constitute the specific state, and the second emphasis effect can emphasize the effect symbols individually (in sequence).

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the first effect pattern when the reel is temporarily stopped, and can execute a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the change in the second effect pattern during the temporary stop, and it may be possible to make the proportion of the emphasis area relative to the first effect pattern different from the proportion of the emphasis area relative to the second effect pattern.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the performance symbol in the first column (left column) when the performance symbol temporarily stops, can execute a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the performance symbol when the performance symbol in the third column (middle column) temporarily stops after the performance symbols in the first and second columns (right columns) temporarily stop, and can execute a third emphasis effect that emphasizes the change in the performance symbol during the temporary stop, and can execute the third emphasis effect of the performance symbol in the first column and the third emphasis effect of the performance symbol in the third column in synchronization after executing the first emphasis effect on the performance symbol in the first column and the second emphasis effect on the performance symbol in the third column when executing the third emphasis effect.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the performance symbol in the first column (left column) when the performance symbol temporarily stops, can execute a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the performance symbol when the performance symbol in the second column (right column) temporarily stops after the performance symbol in the first column temporarily stops, and can execute a third emphasis effect that emphasizes the change in the performance symbol during the temporary stop, and can execute the third emphasis effect of the performance symbol in the first column and the third emphasis effect of the performance symbol in the second column in synchronization after executing the first emphasis effect on the performance symbol in the first column and the second emphasis effect on the performance symbol in the second column when executing the third emphasis effect after executing the first emphasis effect on the performance symbol in the first column.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can also execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect symbols of a specific state (reach state) that anticipates the execution of a special game, and after executing the first emphasis effect in the specific state, can execute a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect symbols that form a combination that notifies the player that a special game will not be executed. The first emphasis effect can emphasize the effect symbols that form the specific state by displaying a specific image across the effect symbols (reach eyes) that form the specific state, and the second emphasis effect can emphasize the effect symbols that form a combination that notifies the player that a special game will not be executed by emphasizing the effect symbol that stops last.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect symbols of a specific state (reach state) that anticipates the execution of a special game, and a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect symbols that form a combination that notifies the player that a special game will not be executed without entering a specific state. The first emphasis effect may emphasize the effect symbols that form a specific state by displaying a first specific image across the effect symbols (reach eyes) that form the specific state, and the second emphasis effect may emphasize the effect symbols that form a combination that notifies the player that a special game will not be executed by emphasizing each of the effect symbols that stop.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute a first emphasis effect that highlights the effect symbols that form a combination that notifies that a special game will not be executed after a specific state (reach state) that expects the execution of a special game is reached, and can execute a second emphasis effect that highlights the effect symbols that form a combination that notifies that a special game will not be executed without reaching a specific state. The first emphasis effect can highlight the effect symbols that make up the combination that notifies that a special game will not be executed by highlighting the effect symbol that stops last, and the second emphasis effect can highlight the effect symbols that make up the combination that notifies that a special game will not be executed by highlighting each of the effect symbols that stop.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect symbol that is temporarily stopped, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the change in the effect symbol that has been temporarily stopped, and a specific notification (such as a volume/light gauge) regarding the effect of the effect that can be adjusted according to the operation, the first emphasis effect can include an image display and a sound output, the second emphasis effect can include an image display that is different from the image display of the first emphasis effect and does not include a sound output, the specific notification can include an image display and a sound output, and it may be possible to limit the effect of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern that is temporarily stopped, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the change in the temporarily stopped effect pattern, and a specific notification (such as a volume/light gauge) regarding the effect that can be adjusted according to the operation, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can provide emphasis different from that of the second emphasis effect and can include sound output, the second emphasis effect includes an image display that can change the emphasis area of the effect pattern and can not include sound output, the specific notification can include an image display and sound output, and it may be possible to limit the effect of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern that is temporarily stopped, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the change in the temporarily stopped effect pattern, and a specific notification regarding the effect effect that can be adjusted according to the operation, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize the effect pattern without repeatedly (periodically) changing the emphasis area (display area of the emphasis effect) and can include sound output, the second emphasis effect includes an image display that can repeatedly (periodically) change the emphasis area and can not include sound output, the specific notification can include an image display and sound output, and it may be possible to limit the effect of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern that is temporarily stopped, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the change in the temporarily stopped effect pattern, and a specific notification regarding the effect that can be adjusted according to the operation, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize at least the outer area of the effect pattern and can include an audio output, the second emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize the surface area of the effect pattern and can not include an audio output, the specific notification can include an image display and an audio output, and it may be possible to limit the effect of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern that is temporarily stopped, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the change in the temporarily stopped effect pattern, and a specific notification regarding the effect effect that can be adjusted according to the operation, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can include an action display that moves a specific part of the effect pattern (such as a character part) and a specific emphasis display, and can include a sound output, the second emphasis effect includes an image display that can include a specific emphasis display different from the specific emphasis display and can not include a sound output, the specific notification can include an image display and a sound output, and it may be possible to limit the influence of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing a first emphasis effect that emphasizes a performance pattern that starts to change, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes a performance pattern that temporarily stops, and a specific notification regarding a performance effect that can be adjusted according to operation, the first and second emphasis effects include image displays that can include an action display that operates a specific part of the performance pattern and a specific emphasis display, and can include sound outputs that are different from each other, the action display and emphasis display of the first emphasis effect and the action display and emphasis display of the second emphasis effect are different from each other, the specific notification can include an image display and a sound output, and it may be possible to limit the effect of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect symbols that start to change, can execute a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect symbols that temporarily stop, can execute a third emphasis effect that emphasizes the change in the effect symbols that have temporarily stopped, can execute a specific notification regarding the effect effect that can be adjusted according to the operation, the first and second emphasis effects can include image display and sound output, the third emphasis effect (oscillating light emission) can include image display and not sound output, the image displays of the first to third emphasis effects are different from each other, and the sound outputs of the first and second emphasis effects can be different, the first emphasis effect can be executed before starting the display of the effect symbols that changes, the display of the change is ended and the second emphasis effect is executed before the third emphasis effect is executed, the specific notification can include image display and sound output, and it may be possible to restrict the image displays of the first to third emphasis effects from affecting the specific notification.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing a first emphasis effect that emphasizes a performance pattern that is about to start changing, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes a change in a performance pattern that has been temporarily stopped, and a specific notification regarding a performance effect that can be adjusted according to an operation, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can include an action display that activates a specific part of the performance pattern and a specific emphasis display, and can include a sound output, the second emphasis effect includes an image display that can include a specific emphasis display different from the specific emphasis display and can not include a sound output, the specific notification can include an image display and a sound output, and it may be possible to limit the effect of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing a first emphasis effect that emphasizes a performance pattern that is about to start changing, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes a change in a performance pattern that has temporarily stopped, and a specific notification regarding a performance effect that can be adjusted according to operation, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize at least the outer area of the performance pattern and can include an audio output, the second emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize the surface area of the performance pattern and can not include an audio output, the specific notification can include an image display and an audio output, and it may be possible to limit the effect of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect symbols that start to change, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect symbols in a specific state (reach state) that anticipates the execution of a special game, and a specific notification regarding the effect that can be adjusted according to operation, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize the effect symbols individually (in sequence) and can include an audio output, the second emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize the effect symbols in a specific state simultaneously and can include an audio output different from the first emphasis effect, the specific notification can include an image display and an audio output, and it may be possible to limit the influence of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect symbols in a specific state (reach state) that anticipates the execution of a special game, is capable of executing a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect symbols that are temporarily stopped, and is capable of executing a specific notification regarding the effect that can be adjusted according to the operation, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can simultaneously emphasize the effect symbols in the specific state and can include a sound output different from the second emphasis effect, the second emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize the effect symbols individually (in sequence) and can include a sound output, the specific notification can include an image display and a sound output, and it may be possible to limit the influence of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the first effect symbol that is temporarily stopped, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the change in the second effect symbol during the temporary stop, and a specific notification regarding the effect that can be adjusted according to the operation, the proportion of the emphasis area (display area of the emphasis effect) to the first effect symbol in the first emphasis effect can be made different from the proportion of the emphasis area to the second effect symbol in the second emphasis effect, the first emphasis effect can include an image display and a sound output, the second emphasis effect can include an image display and not a sound output, the specific notification can include an image display and a sound output, and it may be possible to limit the effect of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect symbol in the first column (left column) that temporarily stops, is capable of executing a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect symbol in the third column (middle column) that temporarily stops after the effect symbols in the first and second columns (right column) temporarily stop, is capable of executing a first emphasis effect that emphasizes a change in the temporarily stopped effect symbols, is capable of executing specific notifications regarding effect effects that can be adjusted according to operation, the first and second emphasis effects can include image display and sound output, the third emphasis effect can include image display and not sound output, the third emphasis effect of the effect symbol in the first column can be executed synchronously with the third emphasis effect of the effect symbol in the third column after the first emphasis effect is executed on the effect symbol in the first column and the third emphasis effect of the effect symbol in the third column, the specific notification can include image display and sound output, and it may be possible to restrict the image display of the first to third emphasis effects from affecting the specific notification.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect symbols of the first column (left column) that temporarily stops, can execute a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect symbols of the second column (right column) that temporarily stops after the effect symbols of the first column temporarily stop, can execute a third emphasis effect that emphasizes the change in the effect symbols that have temporarily stopped, can execute a specific notification regarding the effect effect that can be adjusted according to the operation, the first and second emphasis effects can include image display and sound output, the first emphasis effect can include image display and not sound output, the third emphasis effect of the effect symbols of the first column and the third emphasis effect of the effect symbols of the second column can be executed in synchronization after the second emphasis effect is executed on the effect symbols of the second column when the first emphasis effect is executed on the effect symbols of the first column and the third emphasis effect of the effect symbols of the second column are executed, the specific notification can include image display and sound output, and it may be possible to restrict the image display of the first to third emphasis effects from affecting the specific notification.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect symbols of a specific state (reach state) that anticipates the execution of a special game, execute the first emphasis effect in the specific state, and then execute a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect symbols of a combination that notifies the player that a special game will not be executed. It can execute a specific notification regarding the effect effect that can be adjusted according to the operation, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize the effect symbols of the specific state by displaying a specific image across the effect symbols, and can include a sound output, the second emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize the effect symbol that notifies the player that a special game will not be executed by emphasizing the effect symbol that stops last, and can include a sound output different from the first emphasis effect, the specific notification can include an image display and a sound output, and it may be possible to limit the influence of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect symbols of a specific state (reach state) that anticipates the execution of a special game, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect symbols that notify the player that a special game will not be executed without entering a specific state, and a specific notification regarding the effect effect that can be adjusted according to the operation, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize the effect symbols of the specific state by displaying a specific image across the effect symbols, and can include a sound output, the second emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize the effect symbols (that notify the player that a special game will not be executed by emphasizing each of the stopped effect symbols, and can include a sound output different from the first emphasis effect, the specific notification can include an image display and a sound output, and it may be possible to limit the influence of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes an effect symbol that notifies the player that a special game will not be executed after a specific state (reach state) that expects the execution of a special game, can execute a second emphasis effect that emphasizes an effect symbol that notifies the player that a special game will not be executed without entering a specific state, and can execute a specific notification regarding a presentation effect that can be adjusted according to operation. The first emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize the effect symbol that stops last by emphasizing it, and can include a sound output. The second emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize the effect symbol that notifies the player that a special game will not be executed by emphasizing each of the effect symbols that stop, and can include a sound output different from the first emphasis effect. The specific notification can include an image display and a sound output. It is also possible to restrict the image display of the first and second emphasis effects from affecting the specific notification.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes a specific image (such as a performance pattern) related to the change in the performance pattern, and can execute a specific notification (left-hit notification) that notifies the player about the playing method. While the specific notification can be executed while the performance pattern is stopped, the emphasis effect may be restricted.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute a first emphasis effect (for example, an emphasis image that moves in conjunction with the periodic oscillation of the performance pattern) that emphasizes the change in the performance pattern during the temporary stop, can execute a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the operation prompt image, and can execute a specific notification (left hit notification) that notifies the player about the game method. The first emphasis effect can emphasize the performance pattern by repeatedly (periodically) changing the emphasis area, and the second emphasis effect can emphasize the operation prompt image without repeatedly (periodically) changing the emphasis area. While the specific notification can be executed during the fixed stop of the performance pattern, the first emphasis effect may be restricted. The operation prompt image can change periodically (for example, the operation prompt image moves up and down in a first cycle). That is, the first emphasis effect that emphasizes the performance pattern changes periodically, the second emphasis effect that emphasizes the operation prompt image does not change periodically, and the operation prompt image may change periodically.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern that is temporarily stopped, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the operation prompting image, and a specific notification (left hit notification) that notifies the player about the game method. The first emphasis effect can include an action effect that moves at least a part of the effect pattern (such as a character part) and an image effect that displays a predetermined emphasis image, and the second emphasis effect can include an action effect that moves at least a part of the operation prompting image and an image effect that displays a predetermined emphasis image. While the effect pattern is stopped, the specific notification (left hit notification) can be executed, but the first emphasis effect can be restricted.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing a first emphasis effect that emphasizes an operation prompting image, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes a change in a provisionally stopped performance pattern, and a specific notification that notifies the player about a game method, the first emphasis effect can include an action effect that causes at least a portion of the operation prompting image to operate and an image effect that displays a predetermined emphasis image, and the second emphasis effect can include an image effect that displays a specific emphasis image different from the predetermined emphasis image, and while the performance pattern is stopped to be confirmed, the specific notification can be executed, while the second emphasis effect can be restricted.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing a first emphasis effect that emphasizes an operation prompting image, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes a temporarily stopped performance pattern, a third emphasis effect that emphasizes a change in the performance pattern during a temporarily stopped period, and a specific notification that notifies the player about a game method. The first emphasis effect can emphasize at least the outer area of the area in which the operation prompting image is displayed, the second emphasis effect can emphasize at least the outer area of the performance pattern, and the third emphasis effect can emphasize the surface area of the performance pattern. While the performance pattern is stopped in a final state, the specific notification can be executed, but the third emphasis effect can be restricted.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern that is temporarily stopped, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the change in the temporarily stopped effect pattern, and a specific notification that notifies the player about the game method. It is also capable of executing the first emphasis effect in the order in which the effect patterns are temporarily stopped, and then executing the second emphasis effect in synchronization. While the effect patterns are stopped to be confirmed, it may be possible to execute the specific notification, while restricting the second emphasis effect.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern of the first column (left column) that is temporarily stopped, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern of the third column (middle column) that is temporarily stopped after the effect patterns of the first and second columns (right columns) are temporarily stopped, a third emphasis effect that emphasizes a change in the effect patterns that are temporarily stopped, a specific notification that notifies about a game method, and after executing the first emphasis effect on the effect pattern of the first column and then executing the third emphasis effect on the effect pattern of the third column when executing the third emphasis effect, it is possible to execute the third emphasis effect on the effect pattern of the first column and the third emphasis effect on the effect pattern of the third column in synchronization, and while the effect pattern is stopped, a specific notification can be executed, while the third emphasis effect can be restricted.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect symbol of the first column (left column) that is temporarily stopped, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect symbol of the second column (right column) that is temporarily stopped after the effect symbol of the first column is temporarily stopped, a third emphasis effect that emphasizes a change in the effect symbol that is temporarily stopped, a specific notification that notifies about a game method, and after executing the first emphasis effect on the effect symbol of the first column and then executing the third emphasis effect on the effect symbol of the second column when executing the third emphasis effect after executing the first emphasis effect on the effect symbol of the first column, it is possible to execute the third emphasis effect on the effect symbol of the first column and the third emphasis effect on the effect symbol of the second column in synchronization, and while the effect symbol is stopped, a specific notification can be executed, while the third emphasis effect can be restricted.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute a predetermined emphasis effect in a specific presentation means that emphasizes a specific image related to the variable presentation of the presentation pattern, can execute a specific notification that notifies the player of a game method, and can execute a presentation corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect in a specific presentation means different from the specific presentation means. When a specific notification is executed during the execution of a predetermined emphasis effect, the specific presentation means can execute a presentation corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, but may also be able to restrict the execution of a presentation corresponding to the specific notification.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of displaying an operation prompting image that prompts the user to operate the operation means (button) and executing a predetermined emphasis effect that highlights the operation prompting image on the display means, and is capable of executing a specific notification that notifies the user of a game method. The operation means is capable of executing an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, and when the specific notification is executed during the execution of the predetermined emphasis effect, the operation means may be capable of executing an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, but may also be capable of restricting the execution of the effect corresponding to the specific notification.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing a predetermined emphasis effect on the display means, which emphasizes a predetermined image to notify the player of the execution of a special game, and of executing a specific notification to notify the player of a game method, and is capable of executing an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect on the operation means (buttons), and when a specific notification is executed during the execution of the predetermined emphasis effect, the operation means may be capable of executing an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, but may also be capable of restricting the execution of an effect corresponding to the specific notification.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing a predetermined emphasis effect on the display means that emphasizes the effect pattern of a specific state (reach state) that anticipates the execution of a special game, and is capable of executing a specific notification that notifies the player of a game method, and is capable of executing an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect on the operation means (button), and when the specific notification is executed during the execution of the predetermined emphasis effect, the operation means may be capable of executing an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, but may also be capable of restricting the execution of the effect corresponding to the specific notification.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing a predetermined emphasis effect on the display means that highlights a performance pattern that notifies the execution of a special game, and is capable of executing a specific notification that notifies the execution of a game method, and is capable of executing an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect on the operation means (button), and when a specific notification is executed during the execution of the predetermined emphasis effect, the operation means may be capable of executing an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, but may also be capable of restricting the execution of the effect corresponding to the specific notification.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing a predetermined emphasis effect in the display means, which emphasizes a predetermined image to notify the player of the execution of a special game, and is capable of executing a specific notification to notify the player of a game method. The movable role is capable of executing an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, and when a specific notification is executed during the execution of the predetermined emphasis effect, the movable role is capable of executing an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, while being able to restrict the execution of the effect corresponding to the specific notification.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing a predetermined emphasis effect in the display means that emphasizes the effect pattern in a specific state (reach state) that anticipates the execution of a special game, is capable of executing a specific notification that notifies the player of a game method, and is capable of executing an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect in the movable role, and when the specific notification is executed during the execution of the predetermined emphasis effect, the movable role can execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, but can restrict the execution of the effect corresponding to the specific notification.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing a predetermined emphasis effect in the display means that highlights the effect pattern that notifies the execution of a special game, and is capable of executing a specific notification that notifies the game method, and is capable of executing an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect in the movable role, and when the specific notification is executed during the execution of the predetermined emphasis effect, the movable role can execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, but can restrict the execution of the effect corresponding to the specific notification.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the identification image that identifies the presentation mode has a specific portion and an emphasis portion that emphasizes the specific portion. A specific notification regarding the presentation effect can be executed. The display mode of the emphasis portion can be made different between the first mode and the second mode. The notification mode of the specific notification can be made common between the first mode and the second mode.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the specific image related to the game information has a specific portion and an emphasis portion that emphasizes the specific portion. The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image. It is possible to make the display mode of the emphasis portion of the first specific image different between the first mode and the second mode. It is possible to make the display mode of the emphasis portion of the second specific image the same between the first mode and the second mode.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing an emphasis effect that emphasizes a specific effect pattern (e.g., the left pattern) that is stopped and displayed. It is also capable of executing a specific notification regarding the effect of the effect. It is possible to make the presentation manner of the emphasis effect different between the first mode and the second mode. It is also possible to make the notification manner of the specific notification the same between the first mode and the second mode.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of displaying an emphasis effect that emphasizes a specific effect pattern (e.g., the left pattern) that is stopped and displayed. It is also capable of executing a specific notification related to the operation of the operating means. It is possible to make the presentation manner of the emphasis effect different between the first mode and the second mode. It is also possible to make the notification manner of the specific notification the same between the first mode and the second mode.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can stop-display the first performance pattern (left pattern, right pattern) and then stop-display the second performance pattern (middle pattern). It is possible to execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes the first performance pattern after a reach. It is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the performance effect. It is possible to make the performance manner of the emphasis performance different between the first mode and the second mode. It is possible to make the notification manner of the specific notification common between the first mode and the second mode.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can stop-display the first performance symbol (left symbol, right symbol) and then stop-display the second performance symbol (middle symbol). It is possible to execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes the second performance symbol after a reach. It is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the performance effect. It is possible to make the performance manner of the emphasis performance different between the first mode and the second mode. It is possible to make the notification manner of the specific notification common between the first mode and the second mode.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing an emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern when the effect pattern stops. It is also capable of executing a specific notification regarding the effect of the effect. It is possible to make the presentation manner of the emphasis effect when the specific effect pattern stops in the variable presentation different between the first mode and the second mode. It is possible to make the notification manner of the specific notification common between the first mode and the second mode.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing an emphasis effect that emphasizes the stopped effect pattern. The effect patterns displayed in the specific area include a first effect pattern and a second effect pattern. A specific notification regarding the effect of the effect can be executed. In the specific mode, it is possible to make the effect pattern different between the emphasis effect of the first effect pattern and the emphasis effect of the second effect pattern. In the specific mode, it is possible to make the notification mode of the specific notification the same when the first effect pattern is displayed and when the second effect pattern is displayed.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can stop and display the second performance pattern (middle pattern) after stopping the first performance pattern (left pattern). The first performance patterns include specific first performance patterns and predetermined first performance patterns. It is possible to execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes the first performance pattern after a reach. It is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the performance effect. In the specific mode, it is possible to make the presentation mode different between the emphasis performance of the specific first performance pattern and the emphasis performance of the predetermined first performance pattern. In the specific mode, it is possible to make the notification mode of the specific notification common when the first performance pattern is displayed and when the second performance pattern is displayed.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can stop the first performance pattern (left pattern) and then the second performance pattern (middle pattern). An emphasis performance can be executed to emphasize the performance pattern when the performance pattern is stopped. A specific notification regarding the performance effect can be executed. In the specific mode, it is possible to make the performance manner different between the emphasis performance of the first performance pattern and the emphasis performance of the second performance pattern. In the specific mode, it is possible to make the notification manner of the specific notification common when the first performance pattern is displayed and when the second performance pattern is displayed.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of displaying an emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern of a jackpot. The effect patterns displayed in the specific areas (left area, right area) include a first effect pattern and a second effect pattern. A specific notification regarding the effect of the effect can be executed. In the specific mode, it is possible to make the effect pattern different between the emphasis effect of the first effect pattern and the emphasis effect of the second effect pattern. In the specific mode, it is possible to make the notification mode of the specific notification the same when the first effect pattern is displayed and when the second effect pattern is displayed.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of displaying an operation prompting image (button image). Prior to displaying the operation prompting image, an emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize that the operation prompting image is to be displayed. A special effect can be executed in the variable effect. A specific notification regarding the effect can be executed. The presentation mode of the emphasis effect can be made different before the start of the special effect in the variable effect and after the start of the special effect in the variable effect. The notification mode of the specific notification can be made the same before the start of the special effect in the variable effect and after the start of the special effect in the variable effect.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of displaying an operation prompting image for the first operating means. Prior to displaying the operation prompting image, an emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize that the operation prompting image is being displayed. A special effect can be executed in the variable performance. A specific notification regarding the operation of the second operating means can be executed. It is possible to make the presentation mode of the emphasis effect different before the start of the special effect in the variable performance and after the start of the special effect in the variable performance. It is possible to make the notification mode of the specific notification the same before the start of the special effect in the variable performance and after the start of the special effect in the variable performance.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of displaying an operation prompting image. Prior to displaying the operation prompting image, an emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize that the operation prompting image will be displayed. A specific notification regarding the effect of the effect can be executed. The presentation manner of the emphasis effect can be made different between the first mode and the second mode. The notification manner of the specific notification can be made common between the first mode and the second mode.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of displaying an operation prompting image that prompts the user to operate the operating means. The display mode of the operation prompting image can be changed. A special effect can be executed in the variable performance. A specific notification regarding the performance effect can be executed. The change in the display mode of the operation prompting image can be made different before the start of the special effect in the variable performance and after the start of the special effect in the variable performance. The notification mode of the specific notification can be made the same before the start of the special effect in the variable performance and after the start of the special effect in the variable performance.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of displaying an operation prompting image that prompts the player to operate the first operating means. The display mode of the operation prompting image can be changed. A specific notification regarding the operation of the second operating means can be executed. The change in the display mode of the operation prompting image can be made different before the start of the special performance in the variable performance and after the start of the special performance in the variable performance. The notification mode of the specific notification can be made the same before the start of the special performance in the variable performance and after the start of the special performance in the variable performance.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of displaying an operation prompting image that prompts the player to operate the operating means. The display mode of the operation prompting image can be changed. Specific notifications regarding performance effects can be executed. The manner in which the display mode of the operation prompting image is changed can be made different between the first mode and the second mode. The notification mode of the specific notification can be made common between the first mode and the second mode.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing an operation presentation that encourages the operation of the operating means. It is capable of executing an emphasis presentation according to the operation of the operating means. The operation presentation includes a first operation presentation and a second operation presentation. It is capable of executing a specific notification regarding the presentation effect. It is possible to make the presentation mode of the emphasis presentation different between the first operation presentation and the second operation presentation. It is possible to make the notification mode of the specific notification the same when the first operation presentation is being executed and when the second operation presentation is being executed.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing an operation presentation that encourages the operation of the first operation means. It is capable of executing an emphasis presentation in response to the operation of the first operation means. The operation presentation includes a first operation presentation and a second operation presentation. It is capable of executing a specific notification related to the operation of the second operation means. It is possible to make the presentation mode of the emphasis presentation different between the first operation presentation and the second operation presentation. It is possible to make the notification mode of the specific notification the same when the first operation presentation is being executed and when the second operation presentation is being executed.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing a vibration effect that vibrates the effect means (effect button, etc.). When a vibration effect is being executed, an emphasis effect of the effect means can be executed. There are a first vibration effect (short-time vibration) and a second vibration effect (long-time vibration). A specific notification regarding the effect of the effect can be executed. The effect mode of the emphasis effect can be made different between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. The notification mode of the specific notification can be made the same when the first vibration effect is being executed and when the second vibration effect is being executed.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute a predetermined emphasis effect when executing an effect that suggests or notifies that a special game will be executed in a variable effect. A specific notification regarding the effect of the effect can be executed. The presentation manner of the emphasis effect can be made different between the first mode and the second mode. The notification manner of the specific notification can be made common between the first mode and the second mode.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing suggestive effects that suggest the degree of expectation in variable effects. It is capable of executing emphasis effects that emphasize suggestive effects. The presentation modes of suggestive effects include a first mode and a second mode that has a higher expectation than the first mode. It is capable of executing specific notifications regarding presentation effects. It is possible to make the presentation mode of the emphasis effects different between the suggestive effects of the first mode and the suggestive effects of the second mode. It is possible to make the notification mode of the specific notification the same when the suggestive effects of the first mode are being executed and when the suggestive effects of the second mode are being executed.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing a reel effect that activates a reel effect. It is capable of executing an emphasis effect that emphasizes the reel effect. It is capable of executing a special effect in a variable effect. It is capable of executing a specific notification regarding the effect of the effect. It is possible to make the presentation mode of the emphasis effect different before the start of the special effect in the variable effect and after the start of the special effect in the variable effect. It is possible to make the notification mode of the specific notification the same before the start of the special effect in the variable effect and after the start of the special effect in the variable effect.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing suggestive effects that suggest the degree of expectation in variable effects. It is also capable of executing emphasis effects that emphasize suggestive effects. There are first suggestive effects and second suggestive effects. The first suggestive effects have a first mode and a second mode. The second suggestive effects have a third mode and a fourth mode. It is also capable of executing specific notifications regarding the performance effects. It is possible to make the presentation mode of the emphasis effect different between the second mode of the first suggestive effect and the fourth mode of the second suggestive effect. It is also possible to make the presentation mode of the specific notification the same when the first suggestive effect of the second mode is being executed and when the second suggestive effect of the fourth mode is being executed.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of displaying an operation prompting image that prompts the player to operate the operating means. The display mode of the operation prompting image can be changed. In the variable performance, a special performance can be executed. A specific notification regarding the performance effect can be executed. The time for changing the display mode of the operation image can be made different before the start of the special performance in the variable performance and after the start of the special performance in the variable performance. The notification time of the specific notification can be made the same before the start of the special performance in the variable performance and after the start of the special performance in the variable performance.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of displaying an operation prompting image that prompts the player to operate the operating means. The display mode of the operation prompting image can be changed. A specific notification regarding a dramatic effect can be executed. The time at which the display mode of the operation prompting image changes can be made different from the time at which the specific notification is issued.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of displaying an operation prompting image that prompts the player to operate the first operating means. The display mode of the operation prompting image can be changed. A special effect can be executed in the variable performance. A specific notification regarding the operation of the second operating means can be executed. The change time of the display mode of the operation prompting image can be made different before the start of the special effect in the variable performance and after the start of the special effect in the variable performance. The notification time of the specific notification can be the same before the start of the special effect in the variable performance and after the start of the special effect in the variable performance.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of displaying an operation prompting image that prompts the player to operate the first operating means. The display mode of the operation prompting image can be changed. A specific notification regarding the operation of the second operating means can be executed. The time at which the display mode of the operation prompting image changes can be made different from the time at which the specific notification is issued.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing an operation presentation that displays an operation prompting image that prompts the player to operate the operating means. The display mode of the operation prompting image can be changed. There are a first operation presentation and a second operation presentation. A specific notification regarding the presentation effect can be executed. The time for changing the display mode of the operation prompting image can be made different between the first operation presentation and the second operation presentation. The notification time of the specific notification can be made the same when the first operation presentation is being executed and when the second operation presentation is being executed.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing an operation presentation that displays an operation prompting image that prompts the player to operate the first operation means. The display mode of the operation prompting image can be changed. There are a first operation presentation and a second operation presentation. A specific notification regarding the operation of the second operation means can be executed. The time for changing the display mode of the operation prompting image can be made different between the first operation presentation and the second operation presentation. The notification time of the specific notification can be made the same when the first operation presentation is being executed and when the second operation presentation is being executed.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing an operation presentation that displays an operation prompting image that prompts the player to operate the operating means. The display mode of the operation prompting image can be changed. Specific notifications regarding presentation effects can be executed. The time for changing the display mode of the operation prompting image can be made different between the first mode and the second mode. The notification time of the specific notification can be made the same between the first mode and the second mode.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing specific notifications related to the operation of the operating means. It is capable of executing emphasis effects that emphasize the specific notifications. There are first and second specific notifications. It is capable of executing special notifications related to presentation effects. It is possible to make the execution time of the emphasis effects different between the first and second specific notifications. It is possible to make the notification time of the special notification the same when the first and second specific notifications are being executed.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing a specific effect that suggests or notifies the player that a special game will be played. It is capable of executing an emphasis effect of the specific effect. It is capable of executing a specific notification regarding the effect of the effect. It is possible to make the execution time of the emphasis effect different between the first mode and the second mode. It is possible to make the notification time of the specific notification the same between the first mode and the second mode.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing a vibration effect that vibrates a performance object (performance button, etc.). When a vibration effect is being executed, an emphasis effect of the performance object can be executed. A special effect can be executed in a variable performance. A specific notification regarding the performance effect can be executed. The execution time of the emphasis effect can be made different before the start of the special effect in the variable performance and after the start of the special effect in the variable performance. The notification time of the specific notification can be made the same before the start of the special effect in the variable performance and after the start of the special effect in the variable performance.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing a vibration effect that vibrates a performance element (such as a performance button). When a vibration effect is being executed, an emphasis effect on the performance element can be executed. A specific notification regarding the performance effect can be executed. The execution time of the emphasis effect can be made different from the notification time of the specific notification.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing a vibration effect that vibrates the effect body. When the vibration effect is being executed, an emphasis effect on the effect body can be executed. A specific notification regarding the effect of the effect can be executed. The execution time of the emphasis effect can be made different between the first mode and the second mode. The notification time of the specific notification can be made the same between the first mode and the second mode.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing a reel effect that activates a reel effect. When executing a reel effect, an emphasis effect of the reel effect can be executed. A special effect can be executed in a variable effect. A specific notification regarding the effect of the effect can be executed. The execution time of the emphasis effect can be made different before the start of the special effect in the variable effect and after the start of the special effect in the variable effect. The notification time of the specific notification can be made the same before the start of the special effect in the variable effect and after the start of the special effect in the variable effect.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing a special feature effect that activates a special feature. When executing a special feature effect, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect of the special feature effect. It is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the effect of the effect. It is possible to set the execution time of the emphasis effect and the notification time of the specific notification to be different.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing a reel effect that activates a reel effect. When executing a reel effect, an emphasis effect of the reel effect can be executed. A special effect can be executed in a variable effect. A specific notification can be executed regarding the operation of the operation means. It is possible to make the execution time of the emphasis effect different before the start of the special effect in the variable effect and after the start of the special effect in the variable effect. It is possible to make the notification time of the specific notification the same before the start of the special effect in the variable effect and after the start of the special effect in the variable effect.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode. It has a first gaming area and a second gaming area in which the acquisition condition is more likely to be met when the gaming ball is launched in the second mode than in the first mode. It is possible to execute a promotion effect that encourages the launch of the gaming ball into the first gaming area. It is possible to execute an emphasis effect of the promotion effect. It is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the effect of the effect. It is possible to make the execution time of the emphasis effect different from the notification time of the specific notification.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode. It has a first gaming area and a second gaming area in which the acquisition condition is more likely to be met when the gaming ball is launched in the second mode than in the first mode. It is possible to execute a promotion effect that encourages the launch of the gaming ball into the second gaming area. It is possible to execute an emphasis effect of the promotion effect. It is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the effect of the effect. It is possible to make the execution time of the emphasis effect different from the notification time of the specific notification.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing a specific effect in the variable effect that suggests or notifies the player that a special game will be played. It is capable of executing a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the specific effect. It is capable of executing a specific vibration effect that vibrates the operating means when the specific effect is being played. It is capable of executing a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the operating means when the specific vibration effect is being played. It is capable of executing a specific notification regarding the performance effect. The execution time of the first emphasis effect, the execution time of the second emphasis effect, and the notification time of the specific notification can all be made different.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing special effects in variable effects. It is capable of displaying specific notification images relating to effect of the effects. After the start of the special effect, it is capable of displaying a specified emphasis image. The emphasis image covers the effect pattern (is superimposed on the effect pattern) but does not cover the specific notification image (is not superimposed on the specific notification image). In other words, the specific notification image is displayed with priority over the emphasis image.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of displaying an emphasis image that emphasizes the performance pattern. It is also capable of displaying a specific notification image related to the performance effect. The emphasis image covers the performance pattern (is superimposed on the performance pattern) but does not cover the specific notification image (is not superimposed on the specific notification image). In other words, the specific notification image is displayed with priority over the emphasis image.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of displaying a specific performance pattern that suggests or notifies the player that a special game will be played. It is also capable of displaying an emphasis image that emphasizes the specific performance pattern. It is also capable of displaying a specific notification image related to a performance effect. The emphasis image covers the performance pattern, but not the specific notification image.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of displaying an operation prompting image that prompts the player to operate the operating means. It is also capable of displaying an emphasis image that emphasizes that the operation prompting image will be displayed before the operation prompting image is displayed. It is also capable of displaying a specific notification image related to a performance effect. The emphasis image covers the performance symbol, but not the specific notification image.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing an operation presentation that encourages the operation of the presentation means. It is capable of displaying an emphasis image according to the operation of the operation means in the operation presentation. It is capable of displaying a specific notification image related to the presentation effect. The emphasis image covers the presentation pattern, but not the specific notification image.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing a re-change performance in which the performance pattern that has been changed during one change performance is changed again. An emphasis image that emphasizes the re-change performance can be displayed. A specific notification image related to the performance effect can be displayed. The emphasis image covers the performance pattern, but not the specific notification image.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing a specific effect that suggests or notifies the player that a special game will be played. It is capable of displaying an emphasis image that emphasizes the specific effect. It is capable of displaying a specific notification image related to the effect of the effect. The emphasis image covers the effect symbol, but not the specific notification image.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing specific notifications related to the operation of the operating means. It is capable of displaying an emphasis image that emphasizes the specific notification. It is capable of displaying a special notification image related to a performance effect. The emphasis image covers the performance pattern, but does not cover the special notification image.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing specific emphasis effects that emphasize effect patterns. In variable effects, special effects can be executed. In special effects, a specific image can be displayed after displaying an effect pattern that suggests that a special game will not be played. Specific notifications regarding effect effects can be executed. In variable effects, specific emphasis effects are restricted while a specific image is being displayed, but specific notifications can be executed.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a first mode and a second mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first mode. It is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern. It is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the effect of the effect. In the specific variable effect in the second mode, the emphasis effect is restricted, but the specific notification can be executed.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing a specific device effect that suggests or notifies the player that a special game will be executed during the variable effects. It is capable of displaying an emphasis image that emphasizes the specific device effect. It is capable of displaying the performance pattern in a specific manner that is easily visible. It is capable of executing a specific notification regarding the performance effect. When an emphasis image is displayed, the display of the performance pattern in a specific manner is restricted, but a specific notification can be executed.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can also execute specific notifications regarding the presentation effects. It can also execute highlighting of the presentation symbols. When the special symbols stop varying, it is possible to limit both the highlighting and the specific notifications.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute specific notifications regarding the presentation effects. It can execute highlighting of the presentation symbols. When the special symbols stop varying, it is possible to limit the highlighting without limiting the specific notifications.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing a specific effect that suggests or notifies the player that a special game will be played. It is capable of executing an emphasis effect of the specific effect. It has a first adjustment means and a second adjustment means for adjusting the effect of the effect. If the first adjustment means is operated while the emphasis effect is being played, it is capable of executing a specific notification regarding the effect of the effect. If the second adjustment means is operated, it is possible not to execute the specific notification that would be executed if the first adjustment means was operated.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing a specific effect that suggests or notifies the player that a special game will be played. It is capable of executing an emphasis effect of the specific effect. It has a first adjustment means and a second adjustment means for adjusting the effect of the effect. When the first adjustment means is operated, it is possible to execute a first specific notification and a second specific notification regarding the effect of the effect while an emphasis effect is being executed, and when the second adjustment means is operated, it is possible not to execute at least one of the first specific notification and the second specific notification.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing a specific effect that suggests or notifies the player that a special game will be played. It is capable of executing an emphasis effect of the specific effect. It is equipped with a specific adjustment means for adjusting the effect of the effect. When the adjustment means is operated, it is capable of executing a specific notification regarding the effect of the effect. It is possible to make the notification mode of the specific notification when the adjustment means is operated different between when waiting for customers and when an emphasis effect is being played.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing highlighting of the performance symbols. It is equipped with an adjustment means for adjusting the performance effect. When the adjustment means is operated, a specific notification regarding the performance effect can be executed. The adjustment means includes a first adjustment means and a second adjustment means. When the first adjustment means is operated while the highlighting performance is being executed, a specific notification can be executed. It is possible to make the notification mode of the specific notification different between when the first adjustment means is operated and when the second adjustment means is operated while waiting for customers.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is also capable of executing an emphasis image of the performance symbol. It is equipped with an adjustment means for adjusting the performance effect. When the adjustment means is operated, a specific notification regarding the performance effect can be executed. The specific notifications include a first specific notification and a second specific notification. The adjustment means include a first adjustment means and a second adjustment means. The emphasis image reduces the visibility of the performance symbol, but does not reduce the visibility of the first specific notification. When the first adjustment means is operated while the first specific notification is being executed, the second specific notification can be executed and the performance effect can be adjusted. When the second adjustment means is operated while the first specific notification is being executed, the performance effect can be adjusted without executing the second specific notification.

(Configuration of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment and its effects)
As described above, the gaming machine according to the first embodiment may have the following configuration: Note that the text in parentheses indicates a correspondence with the embodiment, and is merely an example.

(Configuration 1)
The gaming machine includes a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player will be performed, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game determination is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game determination, and the presentation control means is capable of notifying the result of the special game determination by varying and displaying a presentation pattern and then stopping the display of the presentation pattern after a predetermined variation time has elapsed based on the result of the special game determination, is capable of executing an emphasis presentation for emphasizing the presentation pattern while the patterns are varying, is capable of executing a specific notification related to an operation of an operating means, is capable of executing the specific notification during the emphasis presentation, is capable of executing a presentation in any one of a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode, is capable of making a sound during the execution of the emphasis presentation different between when the presentation is being performed in the first mode and when the presentation is being performed in the second mode, and is capable of making the notification sound related to the specific notification common between when the presentation is being performed in the first mode and when the presentation is being performed in the second mode.

As described above, by making the sounds of the emphasis effects different between the first and second modes, it is possible to add variety to the effects, while by making the notification sounds for specific notifications common across multiple modes, it is possible to make the specific notifications easier for players to understand.

(Configuration 2)
The gaming machine includes a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player will be performed, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game determination is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game determination, wherein the presentation control means is capable of notifying the result of the special game determination by varying and displaying the presentation pattern and then stopping the presentation pattern after a predetermined variation time has elapsed based on the result of the special game determination, is capable of stopping the presentation pattern in a specific area, is capable of executing an emphasis presentation for highlighting the presentation pattern stopped in the specific area, is capable of executing a specific notification regarding an operation of an operating means, is capable of executing the specific notification during the emphasis presentation, is capable of executing a presentation in any one of a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode, is capable of making a sound during the execution of the emphasis presentation different between when the presentation is being performed in the first mode and when the presentation is being performed in the second mode, and is capable of making the notification sound regarding the specific notification common between when the presentation is being performed in the first mode and when the presentation is being performed in the second mode.

According to the above, by making the sound of the emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern stopped in the specific area different between the first mode and the second mode, it is possible to provide diversity to the effect patterns stopped in the specific area. On the other hand, by making the notification sound common to multiple modes, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

(Configuration 3)
The gaming machine includes a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player will be performed, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game determination is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game determination, and the presentation control means is capable of announcing the result of the special game determination by varying and displaying the presentation patterns and then stopping the display of the presentation patterns after a predetermined variation time has elapsed based on the result of the special game determination, and is capable of executing an emphasis presentation for emphasizing the presentation patterns when the presentation patterns stop, and the presentation patterns include a first presentation pattern and a second presentation pattern, and is capable of executing a specific notification regarding the operation of the operation means, and is capable of executing the specific notification during the emphasis presentation, and although the display mode of the emphasis presentation differs between when the first presentation pattern stops and when the second presentation pattern stops, it is possible to make the sound used during the execution of the emphasis presentation common, and it is possible to make the notification sound related to the specific notification common between when the first presentation pattern stops and when the second presentation pattern stops.

According to the above, the display mode of the emphasis effect can be different when the first effect pattern stops and when the second effect pattern stops, but the sound of the emphasis effect can be made common, which allows for diversity in the effect while also providing uniformity with the common sound. On the other hand, by making the notification sound common when the first effect pattern stops and when the second effect pattern stops, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

(Configuration 4)
The gaming machine includes a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player will be performed, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game judgment is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of announcing the result of the special game judgment by varying and displaying the presentation patterns and then stopping the display of the presentation patterns after a predetermined variation time has elapsed based on the result of the special game judgment, and is capable of executing an emphasis presentation for emphasizing the presentation patterns when the presentation patterns stop, and the presentation patterns include a first presentation pattern and a second presentation pattern, and is capable of executing a specific notification regarding the operation of the operation means, and is capable of executing the specific notification during the emphasis presentation, and is capable of making different sounds during the execution of the emphasis presentation when the first presentation pattern stops and when the second presentation pattern stops, and is capable of making the notification sound regarding the specific notification common when the first presentation pattern stops and when the second presentation pattern stops.

As described above, the sound of the emphasis effect can be made different between the first and second effect symbols, which can add variety to the effects. On the other hand, by making the notification sound the same regardless of which effect symbol stops, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

(Configuration 5)
The gaming machine includes a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player will be performed, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game determination is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game determination, and the presentation control means is capable of announcing the result of the special game determination by displaying presentation patterns in a plurality of regions in a variable manner and then displaying presentation patterns in the plurality of regions in a stopped state after a predetermined variation time has elapsed based on the result of the special game determination, and an emphasis control means for emphasizing the presentation patterns when the presentation patterns are stopped. It is possible to execute an emphasis effect, which includes a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern in a first area and a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern in a second area, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of an operating means, it is possible to execute the specific notification during the first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect, it is possible to differ in display mode between the first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect, but it is possible to make the sound used during the emphasis effect being executed the same, and it is possible to make the notification sound related to the specific notification the same during the execution of the first emphasis effect and the execution of the second emphasis effect.

According to the above, by using different display modes for the highlighting effect for the symbols that stop in the first area and the highlighting effect for the symbols that stop in the second area, it is possible to provide diversity to the effects, and by outputting the same sound for both highlighting effects, it is possible to provide uniformity to the effects. On the other hand, by making the notification sound the same during the execution of both highlighting effects, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

(Configuration 6)
The gaming machine is equipped with a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not to play a special game advantageous to a player, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game judgment is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation in which a presentation pattern is varied and then a presentation pattern that notifies the result of the special game judgment is stopped and displayed based on the result of the special game judgment, and is capable of executing a suggestion presentation that suggests a reach presentation, and in the suggestion presentation, there are a time when a first emphasis presentation that emphasizes a first presentation pattern is executed and a time when a second emphasis presentation that emphasizes a second presentation pattern is executed, and a specific notification regarding the operation of an operating means is executed, and the specific notification is executed during the first emphasis presentation and the second emphasis presentation, and the first emphasis presentation and the second emphasis presentation have different presentation forms, and it is possible to make the notification sound regarding the specific notification common during the execution of the first emphasis presentation and the execution of the second emphasis presentation.

As described above, by emphasizing different presentation modes for the reach suggestion of the first presentation pattern and the reach suggestion of the second presentation pattern, it is possible to add variety to the presentation and increase the anticipation of the reach presentation. On the other hand, by making the notification sound the same for reach teasers using either pattern, it is possible to make the specific notification of the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

(Configuration 7)
The gaming machine comprises a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player will be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game judgment is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game judgment, wherein the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation in which a presentation pattern is variably displayed and then a presentation pattern that notifies the result of the special game judgment is stopped and displayed based on the result of the special game judgment, is capable of executing a first emphasis presentation when a first presentation pattern is displayed in a reach state and is capable of executing a second emphasis presentation when a second presentation pattern is displayed in a reach state, is capable of executing a specific notification related to the operation of an operating means, and is capable of executing the specific notification during the first emphasis presentation and the second emphasis presentation, wherein the first emphasis presentation and the second emphasis presentation have different presentation modes and wherein a common notification sound related to the specific notification is used during the execution of the first emphasis presentation and the execution of the second emphasis presentation.

According to the above, by making the presentation mode of the emphasis effect different when the first presentation symbol stops in a reach state and when the second presentation symbol stops in a reach state, it is possible to add variety to the presentation and increase the interest of the subsequent reach effects. On the other hand, by making the notification sound the same regardless of which emphasis effect is executed, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

(Configuration 8)
The gaming machine includes a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player is to be performed, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game determination is made, and a performance control means for controlling a performance based on a result of the special game determination, and the performance control means is capable of executing a varying performance in which a performance pattern is variably displayed and then a performance pattern for notifying the result of the special game determination is statically displayed based on the result of the special game determination, and is capable of executing an emphasis performance for emphasizing the performance pattern when the performance pattern is displayed in a reach mode, and The accentuation performance can be executed in a first display mode and in a second display mode, a specific notification regarding the operation of an operating means can be executed, the specific notification can be executed during the accentuation performance, the sound played during the accentuation performance can be different when the accentuation performance is executed in the first display mode and when the accentuation performance is executed in the second display mode, and the notification sound related to the specific notification can be the same when the accentuation performance is executed in the first display mode and when the accentuation performance is executed in the second display mode.

According to the above, when the effect symbol stops in a reach state, an emphasis effect is performed, and by varying the effect state of the emphasis effect at that time, it is possible to add variety to the effect and increase the interest of the subsequent reach effects. On the other hand, by making the notification sound the same regardless of the form in which the emphasis effect is performed, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

(Configuration 9)
The gaming machine includes a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player is to be performed, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game determination is made, and a performance control means for controlling a performance based on a result of the special game determination, and the performance control means is capable of executing a varying performance in which a performance pattern is variably displayed and then a performance pattern for notifying the result of the special game determination is statically displayed based on the result of the special game determination, and is capable of executing a reach performance using the performance pattern, and in the reach performance using a first performance pattern, the first performance pattern and the first performance pattern are combined to perform a reach performance. It is possible to execute a predetermined performance using a second performance pattern different from the first performance pattern, it is possible to execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes the performance pattern during the predetermined performance, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding operation of an operating means, it is possible to execute the specific notification during the emphasis performance, and while the display mode is different between the emphasis performance that emphasizes the first performance pattern and the emphasis performance that emphasizes the second performance pattern, it is possible to make the sound that is used during the emphasis performance common, and it is possible to make the notification sound related to the specific notification common between the emphasis performance that emphasizes the first performance pattern and the emphasis performance that emphasizes the second performance pattern during execution.

According to the above, in the reach performance, a predetermined performance using the first and second performance symbols is executed, and by emphasizing each performance symbol in the predetermined performance, it is possible to increase the interest. By making the notification sound common even during the execution of the predetermined performance, it is possible to make the specific notification easier to understand for the player.

(Configuration 10)
The gaming machine includes a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player is to be performed, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game determination is made, and a performance control means for controlling a performance based on the result of the special game determination, and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance in which the performance pattern is variably displayed and then the performance pattern for notifying the result of the special game determination is stopped and displayed based on the result of the special game determination, and is capable of executing a reach performance using the performance pattern, and as the reach performance, there are a time when a first reach performance using a first performance pattern is executed and a time when a second reach performance using a second performance pattern is executed. In the first reach performance, a first emphasis performance can be executed when the first performance pattern is stopped, and in the second reach performance, a second emphasis performance can be executed when the second performance pattern is stopped; a specific notification regarding the operation of an operating means can be executed; the specific notification can be executed during the first emphasis performance and the second emphasis performance; the sound during execution of the emphasis performance can be made different between when the first emphasis performance is performed and when the second emphasis performance is performed; and the notification sound regarding the specific notification can be made the same between when the first emphasis performance is performed and when the second emphasis performance is performed.

According to the above, the first emphasis effect is executed when the first effect symbol stops in the first reach effect using the first effect symbol, and the second emphasis effect is executed when the second effect symbol stops in the second reach effect using the second effect symbol, and the sound of the emphasis effect can be made different for each. This makes it possible to add variety to the effects. Also, by making the notification sound the same regardless of which emphasis effect is performed, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

(Configuration 11)
The gaming machine includes a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player will be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game determination is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game determination, and the presentation control means is capable of notifying the result of the special game determination by varying and displaying a presentation pattern and then stopping the display of the presentation pattern after a predetermined variation time has elapsed based on the result of the special game determination, of executing an emphasis presentation for emphasizing a presentation pattern suggesting that the special game will be played, of executing a specific notification related to an operation of an operating means, of executing the specific notification during the emphasis presentation, of executing a presentation in any one of a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode, of making different sounds during the execution of the emphasis presentation when the presentation is being played in the first mode and when the presentation is being played in the second mode, and of making the notification sound related to the specific notification common when the presentation is being played in the first mode and when the presentation is being played in the second mode.

As described above, the big win symbol can be emphasized by the emphasis effect. By making the sound of the emphasis effect different between the first mode and the second mode, it is possible to add variety to the effect. On the other hand, by making the notification sound common to multiple modes, it is possible to make specific notifications easier for players to understand.

(Configuration 12)
The gaming machine includes a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player will be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game determination is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game determination, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation in which a presentation pattern is variably displayed and then a presentation pattern notifying the result of the special game determination is statically displayed based on the result of the special game determination, and in the variable presentation, a special presentation using a presentation pattern is executed, which is a presentation suggesting the possibility of a special game being played, and the special presentation is , a front stage performance and a rear stage performance which is performed after the front stage performance, in which a first emphasis performance can be executed for a performance pattern, in which a second emphasis performance can be executed for a performance pattern, a specific notification regarding operation of an operating means can be executed, the specific notification can be executed during the first emphasis performance and the second emphasis performance, the performance pattern can be made different between the first emphasis performance and the second emphasis performance, and the pattern of the specific notification can be made common when the first emphasis performance is being executed and when the second emphasis performance is being executed.

According to the above, by making the presentation mode of the emphasis effect on the presentation pattern different between the front and back stages of the special effect, it is possible to add variety to the presentation, while by making the form of the specific notification common before and after the special effect, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

(Configuration 13)
The gaming machine includes a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player is to be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game determination is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game determination, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation in which a presentation pattern is displayed in a variable manner based on the result of the special game determination and then a presentation pattern for notifying the result of the special game determination is displayed stationarily, and in the variable presentation, a special presentation using a presentation pattern is executed, which is a presentation suggesting the possibility of a special game being played, and the special presentation is composed of a front-stage presentation and a back-stage presentation. The present invention includes a later-stage performance performed in a front-stage performance, and is capable of executing specific notifications regarding the operation of the operating means, and is capable of executing a reel performance that operates a reel, and when the reel performance is executed, an emphasis performance that emphasizes the reel can be executed, and the specific notification can be executed during the emphasis performance, and the performance mode of the emphasis performance can be made different between when the reel performance is performed in the front-stage performance and when the reel performance is performed in the rear-stage performance, and the mode of the specific notification can be made common between when the reel performance is performed in the front-stage performance and when the reel performance is performed in the rear-stage performance.

According to the above, the manner of the emphasis effect when the performance device operates can be made different between the front and back performances, which can add variety to the performance. On the other hand, by making the notification sound common between the device performance in the front performance and the device performance in the back performance, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

(Configuration 14)
The gaming machine includes a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player is to be performed, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game determination is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation in which a presentation pattern is variably displayed and then a presentation pattern for notifying the result of the special game determination is statically displayed based on the result of the special game determination, and being capable of executing a presentation in any one of a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode, and being capable of executing a first role presentation for operating a role presentation in the first mode, and being capable of executing a second role presentation for operating a role presentation in the second mode. It is possible to execute a second reel performance that operates the reel, and when the first reel performance is executed, a first emphasis performance that emphasizes the reel can be executed, and when the second reel performance is executed, a second emphasis performance that emphasizes the reel can be executed, a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means can be executed, the specific notification can be executed during the emphasis performance, the sound during the execution of the emphasis performance can be different when the first emphasis performance is executed and when the second emphasis performance is executed, and the notification sound regarding the specific notification can be the same when the first emphasis performance is executed and when the second emphasis performance is executed.

As described above, by making the sounds of the emphasis effects during the role-playing effects different between the first and second modes, it is possible to add variety to the effects. On the other hand, by making the notification sounds common across multiple modes, it is possible to make specific notifications easier for players to understand.

(Configuration 15)
The gaming machine includes a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player will be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game determination is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game determination, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation in which presentation patterns are variably displayed in a plurality of areas based on the result of the special game determination and then a presentation pattern that notifies the result of the special game determination is stationary displayed, and in the variable presentation, a suggestive image that suggests the possibility that a special game will be played can be displayed, and an emphasis image that emphasizes the suggestive image can be displayed, and the emphasis image includes a first emphasis image and a second emphasis image, and a specific notification regarding the operation of the operation means can be executed, and the specific notification can be executed while the emphasis image is being displayed, and a sound during display of the emphasis image can be made different between when the first emphasis image is displayed and when the second emphasis image is displayed, and a notification sound regarding the specific notification can be made common between when the first emphasis image is displayed and when the second emphasis image is displayed.

According to the above, there are two types of emphasis images that emphasize the suggestive image: a first emphasis image and a second emphasis image. By making the sound that each emphasis image produces different while it is displayed, it is possible to add variety to the presentation. By making the notification sound the same regardless of whether the first emphasis image or the second emphasis image is displayed, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

(Configuration 16)
The gaming machine comprises an acquisition means for acquiring judgment information, a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not to play a special game advantageous to a player based on the judgment information, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game judgment is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game judgment, wherein the presentation control means is capable of displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the acquired information, of displaying the corresponding display in any one of a plurality of display modes including a first mode and a second mode, of executing an emphasis presentation for emphasizing the corresponding display, of executing a specific notification related to operation of an operating means, of executing the specific notification during the emphasis presentation, of making different sounds during the execution of the emphasis presentation when the corresponding display is displayed in the first mode and when it is displayed in the second mode, and of making the notification sound related to the specific notification common when the corresponding display is displayed in the first mode and when it is displayed in the second mode.

According to the above, by making the sound of the emphasis effect different when the corresponding display (reserved icon, the icon in question) is displayed in the first mode and when it is displayed in the second mode, it is possible to add variety to the effect. On the other hand, by making the notification sound the same regardless of the mode in which the corresponding display changes, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

(Configuration 17)
The gaming machine is equipped with a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player will be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game judgment is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game judgment, wherein the presentation control means is capable of displaying an operation prompting image for prompting an operation of a first operation means, is capable of executing an emphasis presentation for highlighting the operation prompting image, is capable of executing a specific notification regarding the operation of a second operation means, is capable of executing the specific notification during the emphasis presentation, is capable of executing a presentation in any one of a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode, is capable of making a sound during the execution of the emphasis presentation different between when the presentation is being executed in the first mode and when the presentation is being executed in the second mode, and is capable of making the notification sound related to the specific notification common between when the presentation is being executed in the first mode and when the presentation is being executed in the second mode.

According to the above, an emphasis effect can be executed when executing an operation effect, and by making the sound of the emphasis effect different between the first mode and the second mode, it is possible to add variety to the effect. On the other hand, by making the notification sound common to multiple modes, it is possible to make specific notifications easier for players to understand.

(Configuration 18)
The gaming machine is equipped with a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not to play a special game advantageous to a player, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game judgment is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game judgment, wherein the presentation control means is capable of executing an operation presentation that displays an operation prompting image that prompts an operation of a first operation means based on the result of the special game judgment, and is capable of executing a suggestion presentation that suggests the operation presentation, wherein the suggestion presentation is capable of displaying a suggestion image that suggests the operation prompting image and an emphasis image that highlights the suggestion image, wherein the emphasis images include a first emphasis image and a second emphasis image, wherein a specific notification regarding the operation of a second operation means can be executed, wherein the specific notification can be executed during the emphasis presentation, wherein a sound during display of the emphasis image can be made different between when the first emphasis image and when the second emphasis image are displayed, and wherein the notification sound regarding the specific notification can be made common between when the first emphasis image and when the second emphasis image are displayed.

According to the above, a suggestion performance is executed before an operation performance, and a suggestion image suggesting an operation prompting image and an emphasis image are displayed in the suggestion performance. The emphasis images include a first emphasis image and a second emphasis image, and different sounds can be output for the first emphasis image and the second emphasis image, thereby adding diversity to the performance. On the other hand, by making the notification sound the same regardless of which emphasis image is displayed, it is possible to make the specific notification easier to understand for the player.

(Configuration 19)
The gaming machine is equipped with a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player will be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game judgment is made, and a presentation control means for controlling the presentation based on the result of the special game judgment, wherein the presentation control means is capable of executing an operation presentation for displaying an operation prompting image for prompting an operation of a first operation means based on the result of the special game judgment, and is capable of displaying an emphasis image for highlighting the operation prompting image, wherein the operation presentation includes a first operation presentation for prompting an operation of a first mode and a second operation presentation for prompting an operation of a second mode, and is capable of executing a specific notification regarding the operation of a second operation means, and is capable of executing the specific notification while the emphasis image is being displayed, and wherein a sound during the display of the emphasis image can be made different between when the first operation presentation is executed and when the second operation presentation is executed, and wherein the notification sound regarding the specific notification can be made common between when the first operation presentation is executed and when the second operation presentation is executed.

As described above, by making the sounds of the emphasis effects different between the first and second operation effects, it is possible to add variety to the effects. On the other hand, by making the notification sound common while either operation effect is being performed, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

(Configuration 20)
The gaming machine includes a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player will be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game determination is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a result of the special game determination, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation in which a presentation pattern is variably displayed and then a presentation pattern for notifying the result of the special game determination is stationarily displayed based on the result of the special game determination, and in the variable presentation, a special presentation using a presentation pattern is executed which is a presentation suggesting the possibility of a special game being played, and in the variable presentation, an operation presentation is executed in which an operation prompting image for prompting an operation of a first operation means is executed, an emphasis image for emphasizing the operation prompting image is executed, a specific notification regarding an operation of a second operation means is executed, and the specific notification is executed while the emphasis image is displayed, and a sound during the display of the emphasis image is different between before the special presentation and after the special presentation is started, and a notification sound regarding the specific notification is common between before the special presentation and after the special presentation is started.

According to the above, it is possible to display an emphasis image that emphasizes the operation prompting image, and by making the sound during the display of the emphasis image different before and after the special effect, it is possible to add variety to the effect. On the other hand, by making the notification sound common before and after the special effect, it is possible to make the specific notification easier to understand for the player.

(Configuration 21)
The gaming machine includes a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player will be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game determination is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game determination, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variation presentation in which, based on the result of the special game determination, a presentation pattern is varied and then a presentation pattern notifying the result of the special game determination is stopped and displayed, and in the variation presentation, a special presentation is executed which suggests the possibility of a special game being played, and in the variation presentation, an operation presentation is executed which displays an operation prompting image which prompts an operation on a first operation means, and during the operation presentation, a predetermined It is possible to execute a special effect, to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the specified effect, the operation effects include a first operation effect before the start of the special effect and a second operation effect after the start of the special effect, the first emphasis effect can be executed in response to the operation during the first operation effect, the second emphasis effect can be executed in response to the operation during the second operation effect, a specific notification regarding the operation of a second operation means can be executed, the specific notification can be executed during the emphasis effect, different sounds can be played during the emphasis effect when the first emphasis effect is executed and when the second emphasis effect is executed, and the notification sound regarding the specific notification can be made the same during the execution of the first emphasis effect and the execution of the second emphasis effect.

As described above, the emphasis effects according to the operation can be made different between the operation effects before the start of the special effect and the operation effects after the start of the special effect, which can increase interest. On the other hand, by making the notification sound the same during the execution of any of the emphasis effects, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

(Configuration 22)
The gaming machine includes a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player is to be performed, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game determination is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a result of the special game determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing an operation presentation for displaying an operation prompting image for prompting an operation on a first operation means based on the result of the special game determination, and being capable of executing an emphasis presentation for highlighting the operation prompting image when an operation is performed on the first operation means while the operation prompting image is being displayed, the operation presentation including a first operation prompting an operation of a first mode, The emphasis performance includes a first emphasis performance corresponding to the operation during the first operation performance and a second emphasis performance corresponding to the operation during the second operation performance, and a specific notification regarding the operation of a second operating means can be executed, the specific notification can be executed during the emphasis performance, the sound during which the emphasis performance is executed can be different between when the first emphasis performance and when the second emphasis performance are executed, and the notification sound regarding the specific notification can be the same between when the first emphasis performance and when the second emphasis performance are executed.

According to the above, by making the emphasis sound of the emphasis effect executed in response to the operation different when the first operation effect is performed and when the second operation effect is performed, it is possible to add variety to the effect. On the other hand, by making the notification sound the same regardless of which emphasis effect is executed, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

(Configuration 23)
The gaming machine includes a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player will be performed, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game determination is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game determination, and the presentation control means is capable of notifying the result of the special game determination by varying and displaying a presentation pattern and then stopping the display of the presentation pattern after a predetermined variation time has elapsed based on the result of the special game determination, is capable of executing an emphasis presentation for emphasizing the presentation pattern while the patterns are varying, is capable of executing a specific notification related to an operation of an operating means, is capable of executing the specific notification during the emphasis presentation, is capable of executing a presentation in any one of a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode, is capable of making an output time of a sound during the execution of the emphasis presentation different between when the presentation is being performed in the first mode and when the presentation is being performed in the second mode, and is capable of making the output time of the notification sound related to the specific notification common between when the presentation is being performed in the first mode and when the presentation is being performed in the second mode.

(Configuration 24)
The gaming machine includes a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player is to be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game determination is made, and a performance control means for controlling a performance based on a result of the special game determination, and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance in which performance patterns are variably displayed in a plurality of areas and then a performance pattern that notifies the result of the special game determination is statically displayed based on the result of the special game determination, and in the variable performance, a special performance using performance patterns is executed as a performance that suggests the possibility of a special game being played, and the special performance is a front-stage performance and the front-stage performance and a latter performance which is performed after the former performance, wherein a first emphasis performance can be executed for a performance pattern in the former performance, and a second emphasis performance can be executed for a performance pattern in the latter performance, a specific notification regarding operation of an operating means can be executed, the specific notification can be executed during the first emphasis performance and the second emphasis performance, the output time of the sound during the execution of the emphasis performance can be made different between when the first emphasis performance is executed and when the second emphasis performance is executed, and the output time of the notification sound regarding the specific notification can be made the same between when the first emphasis performance is executed and when the second emphasis performance is executed.

(Configuration 25)
The gaming machine includes a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player will be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game determination is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game determination, and the presentation control means is capable of notifying the result of the special game determination by varying and displaying a presentation pattern and then stopping the display of the presentation pattern after a predetermined variation time has elapsed based on the result of the special game determination, of executing an emphasis presentation for emphasizing a presentation pattern suggesting that the special game will be played, of executing a specific notification related to an operation of an operating means, of executing the specific notification during the emphasis presentation, of executing a presentation in any one of a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode, of making an output time of a sound during the execution of the emphasis presentation different between when the presentation is being played in the first mode and when the presentation is being played in the second mode, and of making the output time of the notification sound related to the specific notification common between when the presentation is being played in the first mode and when the presentation is being played in the second mode.

(Configuration 26)
The gaming machine is equipped with a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player will be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game judgment is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game judgment, wherein the presentation control means is capable of displaying an operation prompting image for prompting an operation of a first operation means, is capable of executing an emphasis presentation for highlighting the operation prompting image, is capable of executing a specific notification regarding the operation of a second operation means, is capable of executing the specific notification during the emphasis presentation, is capable of executing a presentation in any one of a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode, is capable of making the output time of a sound during the execution of the emphasis presentation different between when the presentation is being executed in the first mode and when the presentation is being executed in the second mode, and is capable of making the output time of the notification sound regarding the specific notification the same between when the presentation is being executed in the first mode and when the presentation is being executed in the second mode.

(Configuration 27)
The gaming machine includes a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player is to be performed, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game determination is made, and a performance control means for controlling a performance based on the result of the special game determination, the performance control means being capable of executing a variable performance in which a performance pattern is variably displayed and then a performance pattern for notifying the result of the special game determination is statically displayed based on the result of the special game determination, the performance control means being capable of executing a performance in any one of a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode, and in the first mode being capable of executing a first role performance for operating a role performance, In the second mode, a second reel performance can be executed to operate the reel, and when the first reel performance is executed, a first emphasis performance can be executed to emphasize the reel, and when the second reel performance is executed, a second emphasis performance can be executed to emphasize the reel, a specific notification regarding operation of the operating means can be executed, and the specific notification can be executed during the emphasis performance, the output time of the sound during the execution of the emphasis performance can be made different between the first emphasis performance and the second emphasis performance, and the output time of the notification sound regarding the specific notification can be made the same between the first mode and the second mode.

(Configuration 28)
The gaming machine includes a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player will be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game determination is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game determination, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation in which, based on the result of the special game determination, a presentation pattern is varied and then a presentation pattern that notifies the result of the special game determination is stopped and displayed. In the variable presentation, a suggestive image that suggests the possibility that a special game will be played can be displayed, and an emphasis image that emphasizes the suggestive image can be displayed, and the emphasis image includes a first emphasis image and a second emphasis image. A specific notification regarding the operation of the operation means can be executed, and the specific notification can be executed while the emphasis image is being displayed. The output time of a sound during the display of the emphasis image can be made different between when the first emphasis image is displayed and when the second emphasis image is displayed, and the output time of the notification sound regarding the specific notification can be made common between when the first emphasis image is displayed and when the second emphasis image is displayed.

(Configuration 29)
The gaming machine comprises an acquisition means for acquiring judgment information, a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not to play a special game advantageous to a player based on the judgment information, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game judgment is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game judgment, wherein the presentation control means is capable of displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the acquired information, of displaying the corresponding display in any one of a plurality of display modes including a first mode and a second mode, of executing an emphasis presentation for emphasizing the corresponding display, of executing a specific notification related to operation of an operating means, of executing the specific notification during the emphasis presentation, of making the output time of a sound during the execution of the emphasis presentation different between when the corresponding display is displayed in the first mode and when it is displayed in the second mode, and of making the output time of the notification sound related to the specific notification common between when the corresponding display is displayed in the first mode and when it is displayed in the second mode.

(Configuration 30)
The gaming machine includes a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player will be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game judgment is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation in which a presentation pattern is variably displayed and then a presentation pattern that notifies the result of the special game judgment is statically displayed based on the result of the special game judgment, and in the variable presentation, a special presentation using a presentation pattern is executed which suggests the possibility of a special game being played, and in the special presentation, an emphasis presentation is executed for the presentation pattern, a predetermined sound is output while the presentation pattern is varying, a specific notification regarding the operation of an operating means is executed, the predetermined sound is different before and after the emphasis presentation is executed, and the notification sound regarding the specific notification is the same before and after the emphasis presentation is executed.

As described above, a specific sound is switched depending on the sound output of the emphasis effect, which increases the interest of the emphasis effect and adds variety to the effects that use sound. On the other hand, by using the same notification sound before and after the emphasis effect, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

(Configuration 31)
The gaming machine includes a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player will be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game determination is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game determination, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation in which a presentation pattern is variably displayed and then a presentation pattern notifying the result of the special game determination is statically displayed based on the result of the special game determination, and in the variable presentation, a special presentation using a presentation pattern is executed which suggests the possibility of a special game being played, and the special presentation includes a first special presentation and a second special presentation, and when the first special presentation is executed, a first emphasis presentation is executed for the presentation pattern, and the second special presentation is executed. When executed, a second emphasis performance can be executed for the performance pattern, a predetermined sound can be output while the performance pattern is changing, and a specific notification regarding the operation of an operating means can be executed; when the first emphasis performance is executed, the predetermined sound before the execution of the first emphasis performance can be output even after the execution of the first emphasis performance; when the second emphasis performance is executed, the predetermined sound before the execution of the second emphasis performance can be stopped; when the first emphasis performance is executed, the notification sound regarding the specific notification that is being output before the execution of the first emphasis performance can be output even after the execution of the first emphasis performance; and when the second emphasis performance is executed, the notification sound that is being output before the execution of the second emphasis performance can be output even after the execution of the second emphasis performance.

According to the above, a predetermined sound can be continuously output before and after the first emphasis performance, and the predetermined sound can be stopped before and after the second emphasis performance, thereby improving the interest of the emphasis performance and adding variety to the performance using the emphasis performance and the predetermined sound. In addition, for specific notifications, notification sounds can be continuously output before and after the first emphasis performance and before and after the second emphasis performance.

(Configuration 32)
The gaming machine is equipped with a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player will be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game judgment is made, and a presentation control means for controlling the presentation based on the result of the special game judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of announcing the result of the special game judgment by varying and displaying the presentation pattern and then stopping the display of the presentation pattern after a predetermined variation time has elapsed based on the result of the special game judgment, is capable of executing an emphasis presentation for emphasizing the presentation pattern suggesting that the special game will be played, and is capable of executing a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, and when the emphasis presentation and the specific notification are displayed simultaneously, is capable of displaying the specific notification in priority to the emphasis presentation.

As described above, the emphasis effect is performed while the effect pattern suggesting a jackpot is displayed, which increases the interest, and by giving priority to specific notifications, the player can be allowed to play correctly.

(Configuration 33)
The gaming machine is equipped with a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player will be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game judgment is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of announcing the result of the special game judgment by varying and displaying the presentation pattern and then stopping the presentation pattern after a predetermined variation time has elapsed based on the result of the special game judgment, is capable of executing an emphasis presentation for emphasizing the presentation pattern suggesting that the special game will be played, is capable of executing a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, is capable of executing the specific notification during the emphasis presentation, and is capable of executing the emphasis presentation for a first time and executing the specific notification for a second time longer than the first time.

As described above, by making the specific notification for a relatively long period of time, it is possible to ensure that the specific notification is noticed.

(Configuration 34)
The gaming machine is equipped with a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player will be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game judgment is made, and a presentation control means for controlling the presentation based on the result of the special game judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of notifying the result of the special game judgment by varying and displaying the presentation pattern and then stopping the display of the presentation pattern after a predetermined variation time has elapsed based on the result of the special game judgment, is capable of executing an emphasis presentation for emphasizing the presentation pattern suggesting that the special game will be played, and is capable of executing a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, and when the emphasis presentation and the specific notification are displayed simultaneously, is capable of superimposing a notification image related to the specific notification on at least a portion of the presentation pattern and the emphasis presentation.

According to the above, the specific notification image is superimposed on a part of the effect pattern and the emphasis effect, so that the player can be sure to notice the specific notification even during the emphasis effect. Also, since other parts of the effect pattern and the emphasis effect are not hidden by the specific notification image, the player can recognize the effect pattern and the emphasis effect even during the specific notification, and the interest is not lost.

(Configuration 35)
The gaming machine is equipped with a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player will be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game judgment is made, and a presentation control means for controlling the presentation based on the result of the special game judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of announcing the result of the special game judgment by varying and displaying the presentation pattern and then causing the presentation pattern to be stationary a predetermined variation time after the lapse of the variation time based on the result of the special game judgment, is capable of executing an emphasis presentation for emphasizing the presentation pattern suggesting that the special game will be played, is capable of executing a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means and terminating the specific notification after the lapse of a predetermined time, is capable of executing the specific notification during the emphasis presentation, and is capable of terminating the specific notification if the pattern suggesting that the special game will be played is stationary even before the lapse of the predetermined time.

According to the above, the emphasis effect is performed while the effect pattern suggesting a jackpot is displayed, which increases the interest, and the specific notification is continued for a predetermined period of time, which allows the player to play the game correctly. Furthermore, when the pattern stops, the player can immediately play the game according to the stopped pattern.

(Configuration 36)
The gaming machine is equipped with a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player will be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game judgment is made, and a presentation control means for controlling the presentation based on the result of the special game judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of announcing the result of the special game judgment by varying and displaying the presentation pattern and then causing the presentation pattern to be stationary a predetermined variation time after the result of the special game judgment, is capable of executing an emphasis presentation for emphasizing the presentation pattern suggesting that the special game will be played, is capable of outputting a specific notification sound related to the operation of the operating means for a predetermined period of time, is capable of executing the specific notification during the emphasis presentation, and is capable of terminating the output of the specific notification sound if the pattern suggesting that the special game will be played is stationary even before the predetermined time has elapsed.

According to the above, the emphasis effect is performed while the effect pattern suggesting a jackpot is displayed, which increases the interest, and the specific notification sound is continued for a predetermined period of time, which allows the player to play the game correctly. Furthermore, when the pattern stops, the player can immediately play the game according to the stopped pattern.

(Configuration 37)
The gaming machine is equipped with a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not to play a special game advantageous to the player, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game judgment is made, an operable performance device, and a performance control means for controlling the performance based on the result of the special game judgment, and the performance control means is capable of announcing the result of the special game judgment by varying and displaying the performance pattern and then stopping the display of the performance pattern a predetermined variation time after the elapse of the variation time based on the result of the special game judgment, and is capable of executing a performance device performance that operates the performance device based on the result of the special game judgment, and when the performance device performance is performed, is capable of displaying an emphasis image that emphasizes the performance device, and is capable of executing a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, and when the performance device performance is executed while the specific notification is being executed, is capable of operating the performance device while displaying the specific notification in priority to the emphasis image.

As described above, the emphasis effect is performed during the performance of the device that indicates a big win, which increases the interest, and the specific notification is displayed with priority, which allows the player to play correctly. Even in this case, the device still operates, so the interest is not lost.

(Configuration 38)
The gaming machine is equipped with a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player will be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game judgment is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of announcing the result of the special game judgment by varying and displaying the presentation pattern and then stopping the display of the presentation pattern after a predetermined variation time has elapsed based on the result of the special game judgment, is capable of executing an emphasis presentation for emphasizing the presentation pattern suggesting that the special game will be played, is capable of executing a specific notification related to the operation of the operating means, is capable of executing the specific notification during the emphasis presentation, and is capable of outputting a sound during the execution of the emphasis presentation for a first period of time and outputting a notification sound related to the specific notification for a second period of time longer than the first period of time.

As described above, by making the notification sound for the specific notification longer than the sound for the emphasis effect, it is possible to ensure that the player notices the specific notification.

(Configuration 39)
The gaming machine is equipped with a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player will be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game judgment is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of notifying the result of the special game judgment by varying and displaying the presentation pattern and then stopping the display of the presentation pattern after a predetermined variation time has elapsed based on the result of the special game judgment, is capable of executing an emphasis presentation for emphasizing the presentation pattern suggesting that the special game will be played, is capable of executing a first specific notification regarding the operation of an operating means, is capable of executing the first specific notification during the emphasis presentation, and is capable of executing a second specific notification regarding the operation of an operating means after the emphasis presentation, and is capable of executing the first specific notification for a first time and executing the second specific notification for a second time longer than the first time.

As described above, the highlighting of the symbols that indicate a jackpot can increase interest, and specific notifications can encourage players to play the game correctly.

(Configuration 40)
The gaming machine is equipped with a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player will be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game judgment is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of notifying the result of the special game judgment by varying and displaying the presentation pattern and then stopping the display of the presentation pattern after a predetermined variation time has elapsed based on the result of the special game judgment, is capable of executing an emphasis presentation for emphasizing the presentation pattern suggesting that the special game will be played, and is capable of executing a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, and during the emphasis presentation, the specific notification can be executed if a predetermined notification condition is met, and after the emphasis presentation, the specific notification can be restricted even if the predetermined notification condition is met.

According to the above, the highlighting of the symbols that indicate a big win can increase the interest, and the specific notification can encourage the player to play the game correctly. After the highlighting, the specific notification can be suppressed.

(Configuration 41)
The gaming machine is equipped with a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player will be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game judgment is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of announcing the result of the special game judgment by varying and displaying a presentation pattern and then stopping the display of the presentation pattern after a predetermined variation time has elapsed based on the result of the special game judgment, is capable of executing an emphasis presentation for emphasizing a presentation pattern suggesting that the special game will be played, is capable of executing a first specific notification regarding the operation of an operating means, is capable of executing a second specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, is capable of executing the first specific notification during the emphasis presentation, and causes the first specific notification to be displayed at a predetermined first position, causes the second specific notification to be displayed at a predetermined second position, and then causes the second specific notification to be displayed at a predetermined third position.

According to the above, emphasis is given to the presentation symbols that suggest a jackpot, which increases interest, and the specific notification allows the player to play correctly. After that, the second specific notification can be executed. The first specific notification is displayed in a fixed position, which makes it easy for the player to understand, and the second specific notification changes its display position, which adds variety to the presentation and increases interest.

(Configuration 42)
The gaming machine is equipped with a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not to play a special game advantageous to a player, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game judgment is made, a game state control means capable of controlling a game in any one of a plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state which is more advantageous than the first game state, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a result of the special game judgment, wherein the presentation control means is capable of announcing the result of the special game judgment by varying and displaying a presentation pattern and then stopping the presentation pattern after a predetermined variation time has elapsed based on the result of the special game judgment, and in the second game state, is capable of executing an emphasis presentation on the presentation pattern while the presentation pattern is varying, and in the second game state, is capable of executing a specific notification regarding the operation of an operating means, and when the emphasis presentation is executed during the specific notification, is capable of superimposing the specific notification on a part of the emphasis presentation.

As described above, in the second game state, the specific notification allows the player to play correctly. The specific notification is superimposed on a portion of the emphasis effect, so it is displayed in a prominent position and can be easily understood by the player. Even then, other parts of the emphasis effect are not covered by the specific notification, so the emphasis effect (and effect pattern) can be seen.

(Configuration 43)
The gaming machine includes a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not to play a special game advantageous to a player, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game judgment is made, a game state control means capable of controlling a game in any one of a plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state which is more advantageous than the first game state, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game judgment, wherein the presentation control means is capable of notifying the result of the special game judgment by varying and displaying a presentation pattern and then stopping the presentation pattern after a predetermined variation time has elapsed based on the result of the special game judgment, and is capable of executing a specific notification regarding the operation of an operating means when transitioning from the second game state to the first game state, and is capable of executing an emphasis presentation on the presentation pattern when the presentation pattern stops in the first game state, and is capable of executing the specific notification during the emphasis presentation, and is capable of displaying the specific notification in priority to the emphasis presentation.

According to the above, a specific notification can be given when transitioning from the second game state to the first game state, allowing the player to play correctly. At this time, even if an emphasis effect is given to the effect pattern, the specific notification is displayed with priority over the emphasis effect, so that the specific notification can be reliably viewed.

(Configuration 44)
The gaming machine includes a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player will be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game determination is made, a game state control means for controlling a game in any one of a plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state which is more advantageous than the first game state, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a result of the special game determination, and the presentation control means is capable of notifying the result of the special game determination by varying and displaying a presentation pattern and then stopping the presentation pattern after a predetermined variation time has elapsed based on the result of the special game determination, and is capable of executing a first specific notification regarding the operation of an operating means when a predetermined notification condition is satisfied in the first game state, and is capable of executing a second specific notification regarding the operation of an operating means when a transition is made from the second game state to the first game state, and is capable of issuing a notification of a first mode as the second specific notification, and issuing a notification of the first mode and then a notification of the second mode as the first specific notification.

According to the above, a first specific notification can be made when a predetermined notification condition is satisfied in the first gaming state, and a second specific notification can be made when a transition is made from the second gaming state to the first gaming state. The second specific notification makes a notification of the first mode, whereas the first specific notification makes a notification of the first mode before making a notification of the second mode, so that a specific notification can be reliably made to the player.

(Configuration 45)
The gaming machine is equipped with a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player will be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game judgment is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of announcing the result of the special game judgment by varying and displaying a presentation pattern and then stopping the display of the presentation pattern after a predetermined variation time has elapsed based on the result of the special game judgment, and is capable of performing a re-display presentation in which a first presentation pattern suggesting that the special game will be played is displayed and then a second presentation pattern suggesting that the special game will be played or the first presentation pattern is displayed based on the result of the special game judgment, and in the re-display presentation, an emphasis presentation for emphasizing the presentation pattern can be executed, a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means can be executed, the specific notification can be executed during the emphasis presentation, and the specific notification can be displayed in priority to the emphasis presentation.

As described above, the emphasis effect is performed while the effect pattern suggesting a jackpot is displayed, which increases the interest, and by giving priority to specific notifications, the player can be allowed to play correctly.

(Configuration 46)
The gaming machine is equipped with a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player will be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game judgment is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of announcing the result of the special game judgment by varying and displaying the presentation pattern and then stopping the display of the presentation pattern after a predetermined variation time has elapsed based on the result of the special game judgment, and when it is determined that the special game will be played, is capable of executing a specific variation presentation that displays multiple specific pattern combinations suggesting that the special game will be played, and in the specific variation presentation, is capable of executing an emphasis presentation that emphasizes the presentation pattern, is capable of executing a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, is capable of executing the specific notification during the emphasis presentation, and is capable of displaying the specific notification in priority to the emphasis presentation.

As a result of the above, emphasis is given to the display of a specific symbol combination that suggests a jackpot, which increases interest, and by giving priority to specific notifications, players can be made to play correctly.

(Configuration 47)
The gaming machine is equipped with a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player will be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game judgment is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation in which a presentation pattern is displayed in a variable manner and then a presentation pattern indicating the result of the special game judgment is displayed stationarily based on the result of the special game judgment, and in the variable presentation, a special presentation using the presentation pattern is executed which suggests the possibility that a special game will be played, and an emphasis presentation which emphasizes the presentation pattern is executed in the special presentation, and after displaying a presentation pattern which suggests that the special game will not be played in the special presentation, a specific image is displayed, and a specific notification regarding the operation of the operation means is executed, and while the specific image is displayed, the output of sound during the execution of the emphasis presentation is limited, but a notification sound regarding the specific notification is output.

According to the above, the interest of the special effect using the effect pattern can be increased by executing the emphasis effect, while the specific image is displayed after the result of the special effect is displayed, so that attention can be drawn to the specific image by limiting the sound of the emphasis effect. On the other hand, even while the specific image is being displayed, a notification sound can be output.

(Configuration 48)
The gaming machine is equipped with a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player will be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game judgment is made, and a presentation control means for controlling the presentation based on the result of the special game judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation in which, based on the result of the special game judgment, a presentation pattern is varied and then a presentation pattern that notifies the result of the special game judgment is stopped and displayed, and in the variable presentation, a suggestive image that suggests the possibility that a special game will be played is displayed, an emphasis image that emphasizes the suggestive image is displayed, the presentation effect is adjustable in accordance with an operation on the adjustment means, a specific notification regarding the operation of the operation means is executed, and, in accordance with the operation on the adjustment means, a sound during the display of the emphasis image and the sound of the specific notification are adjustable.

According to the above, it is possible to display an emphasis image that emphasizes the suggested image, thereby improving interest. In addition, the adjustment means can adjust the sound while the emphasis image is being displayed, and can also adjust the sound of the specific notification.

(Configuration 49)
The gaming machine is equipped with a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player will be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game judgment is made, and a presentation control means for controlling the presentation based on the result of the special game judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation in which, based on the result of the special game judgment, the presentation pattern is varied and displayed and then a presentation pattern that notifies the result of the special game judgment is displayed stationary, and in the variable presentation, a suggestive image that suggests the possibility that a special game will be played can be displayed, an emphasis image that emphasizes the suggestive image can be displayed, the presentation effect can be adjusted in accordance with an operation on the adjustment means, a specific notification can be executed regarding the operation of the operation means, and in accordance with the operation on the adjustment means, the sound during the display of the emphasis image can be adjusted, while the adjustment of the sound of the specific notification can be limited.

According to the above, it is possible to display an emphasis image that emphasizes the suggestive image, thereby improving interest. In addition, while the sound during the display of the emphasis image can be adjusted by the adjustment means, the adjustment of the specific notification sound can be limited.

(Configuration 50)
The gaming machine is equipped with a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player will be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game judgment is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game judgment, wherein the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation in which a presentation pattern is variably displayed and then a presentation pattern that notifies the result of the special game judgment is stopped and displayed based on the result of the special game judgment, wherein in the variable presentation, a suggestive image that suggests the possibility that a special game will be played is executed, wherein an emphasis image that emphasizes the suggestive image is displayed, wherein the presentation effect is adjustable in response to an operation on the first adjustment means, wherein the presentation effect is adjustable in response to an operation on the second adjustment means, wherein a predetermined notification is given and a sound while the emphasis image is being displayed is adjusted in response to an operation on the first adjustment means, and wherein the sound while the emphasis image is being displayed is adjusted without giving the predetermined notification in response to an operation on the second adjustment means.

According to the above, the sound of the emphasis effect can be adjusted using the first adjustment means and the second adjustment means. When the first adjustment means is used, a predetermined notification is issued, making it possible to make the operation easier to understand. On the other hand, when the second adjustment means is used, a predetermined notification is not issued, making it possible to make adjustments while concentrating on the emphasis effect or other effects.

(Configuration 51)
The gaming machine is equipped with a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not to play a special game advantageous to a player, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game judgment is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game judgment, wherein the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation in which a presentation pattern is varied and then a presentation pattern that notifies the result of the special game judgment is stopped and displayed based on the result of the special game judgment, is capable of executing an emphasis presentation that emphasizes the presentation pattern in the variable presentation, is capable of adjusting the presentation effect in response to an operation on the first adjustment means, is capable of adjusting the presentation effect of the emphasis presentation while issuing a predetermined notification in response to an operation on the first adjustment means, and is capable of adjusting the presentation effect of the emphasis presentation without issuing the predetermined notification in response to an operation on the second adjustment means.

According to the above, the effect of the emphasis effect can be adjusted using the first adjustment means and the second adjustment means. When the first adjustment means is used, a predetermined notification is issued, making it possible to make the operation easier to understand. On the other hand, when the second adjustment means is used, a predetermined notification is not issued, making it possible to make adjustments while concentrating on the emphasis effect and other effects.

(Configuration 52)
The gaming machine includes a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to a player will be played, a pattern control means for varying a pattern when the special game determination is made, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a result of the special game determination, wherein the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation in which a presentation pattern is variably displayed and then a presentation pattern that notifies the result of the special game determination is stationary displayed based on the result of the special game determination, wherein the presentation control means is capable of executing, in the variable presentation, a suggestive image that suggests the possibility that a special game will be played, and is capable of executing an emphasis presentation that emphasizes the suggestive image, wherein the presentation is executed in any one of a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode, wherein the emphasis presentation is capable of executing the emphasis presentation in the second mode, wherein the presentation effect of the emphasis presentation is changeable from a first state to a second state in response to an operation on an adjustment means, and wherein, when the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped while the gaming machine is in the second mode and in the second state, then when power is supplied to the gaming machine, game play is resumed in the second mode and in the first state.

As described above, the effects of the emphasis effects can be adjusted, and interest can be improved. When the power is turned off in the second mode and then turned back on, the second mode can be started, but the effects that have been set can be reset.

Second Embodiment
Next, a gaming machine 1 according to a second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the low base time-saving state is a state in which it is easier to transition to the high base time-saving state than the normal game state, and is an advantageous state for the player in terms of the ease of transition to the high base time-saving state. In the second embodiment, on the contrary, the normal game state is configured to be a state in which it is easier to transition to the high base time-saving state than the low base time-saving state.

Figure 58 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern determination table of the gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment. Figure 59 is a diagram showing an example of a game flow of the gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment. Figure 60 is a diagram showing an example of a game state after a jackpot game when a special pattern indicating a jackpot stops when the result of the special pattern determination is a jackpot. Figure 61 is a diagram showing an example of a game state after a special pattern indicating a special miss stops when the result of the special pattern determination is a special miss. Below, only the parts that differ from the first embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 58, in the second embodiment, when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot in the first special pattern determination, the following jackpot types are available: 1 type 10R jackpot A (special pattern A), 1 type 2R jackpot B (special pattern B), and 1 type 2R jackpot C (special pattern C). In addition, when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot in the second special pattern determination, the following jackpot types are available: 1 type 10R jackpot D (special pattern D) and 1 type 3R jackpot E.

In addition, small wins Ka to Kc (special patterns Ka to Kc) are prepared as types of small wins when a small win is determined in the second special pattern determination. If a small win Ka is won and the game ball enters the specific area 52 during the small win game, it becomes a type 2 substantial 10R big win Ka, and a 9R big win game is played following the small win game. If a small win Kb is won and the game ball enters the specific area 52 during the small win game, it becomes a type 2 substantial 3R big win Kb, and a 2R big win game is played following the small win game. If a small win Kc is won and the game ball enters the specific area 52 during the small win game, it becomes a type 2 substantial 10R big win Kc, and a 9R big win game is played following the small win game.

In addition, the result of the first special pattern determination is a special miss TH1 to TH4 (special pattern HT1 to TH4).

As shown in FIG. 59, in the second embodiment, if a 1-type 10R jackpot A (special pattern A) is won in the normal game state, the game will transition to the normal game state after the special game. Also, if a 1-type 10R jackpot A (special pattern A) is won in the low base time-saving state or high base time-saving state, the game will transition to the low base time-saving state after the special game. Also, if a 1-type 2R jackpot B (special pattern B) is won in the normal game state, low base time-saving state or high base time-saving state, the game will transition to the normal game state after the special game.

In addition, in the second embodiment, if a 1-type 2R jackpot C (special symbol C) is won in the normal game state, the game will transition to the high base time-saving state after the special game. On the other hand, if a 1-type 2R jackpot C (special symbol C) is won in the low base time-saving state or the high base time-saving state, the game will transition to the low base time-saving state after the special game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 61, if the special symbol TH4 (special miss TH4) is displayed as stopped in the normal game state, a transition to a high base time-saving state occurs. On the other hand, if the special symbol TH4 (special miss TH4) is displayed as stopped in the low base time-saving state or the high base time-saving state, the game state is maintained. Also, in the second embodiment, if the special symbols TH1 to TH3 (special miss TH1 to TH3) are displayed as stopped in the normal game state, a transition to a low base time-saving state occurs. Also, if the special symbols TH1 to TH3 (special miss TH1 to TH3) are displayed as stopped in the low base time-saving state or the high base time-saving state, the game state is maintained.

As is clear from the figure, in the second embodiment, in the low base time-saving state, even if the first special pattern judgment determines that there is a jackpot or a special miss, there is no transition to the high base time-saving state, which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, in the normal game state, if the first special pattern judgment results in a 1-type 2R jackpot C or if the special pattern TH4 is displayed in a stopped state, the state transitions to the high base time-saving state. For this reason, the normal game state is a state in which it is easier to transition to the high base time-saving state than the low base time-saving state, and can be said to be an advantageous state for the player.

Under these assumptions, in the second embodiment, contrary to the first embodiment, the above-mentioned special mode is set in the normal game state, and the above-mentioned normal mode is set in the low base time-saving state. In the normal mode (low base time-saving state), a background image for the normal mode (e.g., the day mode background) is displayed. Also, in the special mode (normal game state), a background image for the special mode (e.g., the evening mode background) is displayed. In the time-saving mode, a background image for the time-saving mode (e.g., the night mode background) is displayed.

(Mode setting after power-on in the second embodiment)
Next, a description will be given of the mode setting after power-on in the second embodiment. Fig. 62 is a diagram for explaining the mode setting after power-on in the second embodiment.

Immediately after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the performance control device 130A (e.g., the performance control unit 130) causes the first image display device 70 to display the background image of the evening background, which is the background of the normal gaming state, as a performance image common to the normal gaming state and the low base time-saving state, regardless of whether the gaming machine 1 is powered on in the normal gaming state or in the low base time-saving state.

To explain in more detail, as shown in FIG. 62(a), when the gaming state immediately after the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on is the normal gaming state, the performance control unit 130 selects the evening background, which is the original background of the normal gaming state, and causes the first image display device 70 to display the background image of the evening background (special mode). After that, the performance control unit 130 maintains the display of the background image of the evening background until it receives a gaming state designation command for the low base time-saving state, and when it receives the gaming state designation command for the low base time-saving state, it changes the background to a daytime background in accordance with the gaming state designation command.

As shown in FIG. 62(b), when the game state immediately after the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on is the low base time-saving state, the performance control unit 130 selects the evening background, which is the same background as the normal game state, and displays the background image of the evening background. After that, as a predetermined condition for returning to the original background, even if a game state designation command for the low base time-saving state is received while the same background image as the normal game state is displayed until the special pattern has changed 30 times, the performance control unit 130 ignores the game state designation command for the display of the background image and maintains the display of the background image of the evening background (special mode). In addition, not only the background image but also the display of the performance pattern in the special mode is maintained. When the predetermined condition is met by the end of the special pattern changing 30 times, the background is returned to the original one. In addition, not only the background image but also the display of the performance pattern corresponding to the original mode is returned to. When a game state designation command for the normal game state is received, a background image of an evening background, which corresponds to the normal game state, is displayed, and when a game state designation command for the low base time-saving state is received, a background image of a daytime background, which corresponds to the low base time-saving state, is displayed.

In addition, after the end of the special game related to the first jackpot, 1 type 10R jackpot A or 1 type 2R jackpot C, and after the end of the special game related to the second jackpot, 1 type 2R jackpot B, the effect control unit 130 may display on the display device a background image of an evening background, which is the background of the normal game state, as an effect image common to the normal game state and the low base time-saving state. The same applies to the effect patterns, reserved pedestals, etc. other than the background image.

Figure 63 is a diagram explaining the setting of the game state and background after a jackpot game in the second embodiment. To explain in more detail, as shown in Figure 63 (a), in the case where a 1 type 10R jackpot A or a 1 type 2R jackpot C is won in a high base time-saving state and the game state after the special game becomes a normal game state, the performance control unit 130 selects the evening background, which is the original background of the normal game state, when it receives a game state designation command for the normal game state with the end of the special game, and displays the background image of the evening background. After that, the performance control unit 130 maintains the display of the background image of the evening background until it receives a game state designation command for the low base time-saving state, and when it receives a game state designation command for the low base time-saving state, it changes the background to a daytime background according to the game state designation command. The same applies to the performance patterns, reserved pedestals, etc. other than the background image.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 63(b), in the case where a type 1 2R jackpot B is won in the high base time-saving state and the game state after the special game becomes the low base time-saving state, when the game state designation command for the low base time-saving state is received with the end of the special game, the performance control unit 130 selects the evening background, which is the same background as the normal game state, and displays the background image of the evening background on the display device. After that, the performance control unit 130 sets the winning of the next jackpot as a predetermined condition for returning to the original background, and until the next jackpot pattern stops, even if a game state designation command for the low base time-saving state is received while the same background image as the normal game state is being displayed, the performance control unit 130 may ignore the game state designation command and maintain the display of the background image of the evening background. When the jackpot symbol stops and a special game is executed, thereby satisfying a predetermined condition, the performance control unit 130 may return the background to the original one, and when a game state designation command for the normal game state is received, a background image of an evening background, which is a background corresponding to the normal game state, may be displayed, and when a game state designation command for the low base time-saving state is received, a background image of a daytime background, which is a background corresponding to the low base time-saving state. The same applies to the performance symbols, reserved pedestals, etc. other than the background image.

(Modification of the second embodiment)
64 is a diagram for explaining the mode setting after power-on in the modified example of the second embodiment. In the modified example 1 of the second embodiment, when the power is restored in the low base time-saving state, the normal game state and the low base time-saving state are associated with a daytime background, and the high base time-saving state is associated with a nighttime background. Immediately after the power is turned on for the gaming machine 1, the performance control unit 130 causes the first image display device 70 to display a background image of the daytime background, which is the background of the low base time-saving state, as a performance image common to the normal game state and the low base time-saving state, regardless of whether the power is restored in the normal game state or the low base time-saving state.

Specifically, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64(a), when the gaming state immediately after the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on is the normal gaming state, the performance control unit 130 selects a daytime background, which is the same background as the low base time-saving state, and causes the first image display device 70 to display the background image of the daytime background. After that, as a predetermined condition for returning to the original background, even if a gaming state designation command for the normal gaming state is received while the same background image as the low base time-saving state is being displayed until the 30 fluctuations of the special pattern are completed, the performance control unit 130 may ignore the gaming state designation command and maintain the display of the background image of the daytime background. Moreover, this is not limited to the background image, but also applies to the display of the performance patterns, reserved pedestals, etc. in the normal mode. When the 30 fluctuations of the special symbol are completed and a predetermined condition is met, the performance control unit 130 returns the background to the original one, and when a game state designation command for a low base time-saving state is received, the performance control unit 130 displays a background image of a daytime background, which is a background corresponding to the low base time-saving state, and when a game state designation command for a normal game state is received, the performance control unit 130 displays a background image of an evening background, which is a background corresponding to the normal game state. The same applies to the display of performance symbols, reserved pedestals, etc.

Also, as shown in FIG. 64(b), when the gaming state immediately after the gaming machine 1 is powered on is the low base time-saving state, the performance control unit 130 selects the daytime background, which is the original background of the low base time-saving state, and displays the background image of the daytime background. After that, the performance control unit 130 maintains the display of the background image of the daytime background until it receives a gaming state designation command for the normal gaming state, and when it receives the gaming state designation command for the normal gaming state, it changes the background to an evening background in accordance with the gaming state designation command.

In addition, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 130 may display on the display device a background image of a daytime background, which is the background of the low base time-saving state, as a presentation image common to the normal game state and the low base time-saving state, after the end of the special play of the first jackpot, which is a type 10R jackpot A, and the type 2R jackpot C, and after the end of the special play of the second jackpot, which is a type 1 2R jackpot B.

Figure 65 is a diagram explaining the setting of the game state and background after a jackpot game in a modified example of the second embodiment. In more detail, as shown in Figure 65 (a), in the high base time-saving state, when a 1 type 10R jackpot A or a 1 type 2R jackpot C is won and the game state after the special game becomes a normal game state, the performance control unit 130 may select a daytime background, which is the same background as the low base time-saving state, and display a background image of the daytime background when a game state designation command for the normal game state is received with the end of the special game. After that, the performance control unit 130 sets the next jackpot win as a predetermined condition for returning to the original background, and until the next jackpot pattern stops, when a game state designation command for the normal game state is received while the same background image as the low base time-saving state is being displayed, the game state designation command is ignored for the display of the background image, and the display of the background image of the daytime background is maintained. When the jackpot symbol stops, a special game is executed, and a predetermined condition is satisfied, the performance control unit 130 returns the background to the original one, and when a game state designation command for a low base time-saving state is received, a background image of a daytime background, which is a background corresponding to the low base time-saving state, is displayed, and when a game state designation command for a normal game state is received, a background image of an evening background, which is a background corresponding to the normal game state, is displayed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 65(b), when a Type 1 2R jackpot B is won in a high base time-saving state and the game state after the special play becomes a low base time-saving state, the performance control unit 130 selects the daytime background, which is the original background of the low base time-saving state, and displays the background image of the daytime background when it receives a game state designation command for the low base time-saving state following the end of the special play, and then displays the background image of the daytime background. After that, the performance control unit 130 maintains the display of the background image of the daytime background until it receives a game state designation command for the normal game state, and when it receives a game state designation command for the normal game state, it changes the background to an evening background in accordance with the game state designation command.

Third Embodiment
Next, a third embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment is a gaming machine of a type called a type 1 probability variable machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment has the following gaming states: normal gaming state, low base time-saving state, high probability no time-saving state, high base time-saving state, and high probability time-saving state. In the normal gaming state, low base time-saving state, and high probability no time-saving state, gaming is performed by hitting with the left hand. In the high base time-saving state and high probability time-saving state, gaming is performed by hitting with the right hand.

The high probability time-saving state is a gaming state in which the probability of a jackpot is higher than in the normal gaming state, and a high base time-saving state is also provided. Specifically, in the normal gaming state, the probability of a jackpot is set to, for example, 1/300, whereas in the high probability time-saving state, it is set to 1/30, which is a higher probability than in the normal gaming state. Also, in the high probability time-saving state, the normal pattern variation time and the opening time of the second start port 47 are the same as in the high base time-saving state, and are set to be more favorable to the player than in the normal gaming state. Also, the probability of a normal pattern being judged as a hit is higher than in the normal gaming state.

In addition, in the high probability no time-saving state, the probability of a jackpot is set to 1/30, which is a higher probability than in the normal game state, but no time-saving is applied, and the normal pattern change time, the opening time of the second start hole 47, and the probability of a hit being determined in the normal pattern determination are the same as in the normal game state.

The gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment has a day mode (normal mode) that indicates a low base time-saving state, an evening mode (special mode) that indicates a normal game state, a night mode (time-saving mode) that indicates a high base time-saving state, a labyrinth mode (probability mode) that indicates a high probability of time-saving state, and a morning mode (latent mode) that indicates a high probability of no time-saving state.

In the gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the jackpot game, which is conditional on passing through the specific area 52 during the small jackpot game described above, is not played, but is played when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot in the first special pattern determination or the second special pattern determination.

Figure 66 is a diagram showing an example of the game flow of the third embodiment. As shown in Figure 66, in the gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, there are jackpots A to I as jackpots. In Figure 66, "Special 1" means the first special symbol determination, for example, "Special 1 (10R) jackpot A" is jackpot A based on the result of the first special symbol determination, and indicates that a 10R jackpot game will be played. Also, "Special 2" means the second special symbol determination, for example, "Special 2 (10R) jackpot F" is jackpot F based on the result of the second special symbol determination, and indicates that a 10R jackpot game will be played. Also, "J" indicates the number of time-saving times in the high base time-saving state, and "B" indicates the number of time-saving times in the low base time-saving state.

As is clear from the figure, in the gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, in the normal game state, if jackpot A to C is won, the game transitions to a high probability time-saving state, and if jackpot D or E is won, the game transitions to a high base time-saving state. On the other hand, in the low base time-saving state, if jackpot C is won, the game transitions to a high probability time-saving state. For this reason, it is easier to transition to the high base time-saving state in the normal game state than in the low base time-saving state, and in this respect, the normal game state can be said to be a more advantageous state than the low base time-saving state. Therefore, in the third embodiment, the day mode (normal mode) is set in the low base time-saving state, and the evening mode (special mode) is set in the normal game state.

Under these assumptions, in the third embodiment, immediately after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the performance control unit 130 may cause the first image display device 70 to display the background image of the evening background (background image of the special mode), which is the background of the normal gaming state, as a performance image common to the normal gaming state and the low base time-saving state, regardless of whether the gaming machine 1 is powered on in the normal gaming state or in the low base time-saving state. The same applies to the performance patterns, the display of reserved pedestals, etc. other than the background image.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 130 may display, on the first image display device 70, a background image of an evening background (background image of a special mode), which is the background of the normal game state, as an effect image common to the normal game state and the low base time-saving state, after the end of the special game of the first jackpot, the special jackpot E (2R), and after the end of the special game of the second jackpot, the special jackpot D (2R). The same applies to the effect patterns other than the background image, the display of reserved pedestals, etc.

In addition, immediately after the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the presentation control unit 130 may cause the first image display device 70 to display a background image of a daytime background (background image of normal mode), which is the background of the low base time-saving state, as a presentation image common to the normal gaming state and the low base time-saving state, regardless of whether the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is restored in the normal gaming state or in the low base time-saving state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 130 may cause the first image display device 70 to display a background image of a daytime background, which is the background of the low base time-saving state, as a presentation image common to the normal game state and the low base time-saving state, after the end of the special game of the first jackpot, Special 1 (2R) jackpot E, and after the end of the special game of the second jackpot, Special 1 (2R) jackpot D.

Fourth Embodiment
In the fourth embodiment, the gaming machine is a type called a type 1 probability variable machine, as in the third embodiment. The fourth embodiment also has five game states, as in the third embodiment, but in the gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, in the low base time-saving state, if the jackpot A to C is won, the state transitions to a high probability time-saving state, and if the jackpot D or E is won, the state transitions to a high base time-saving state. On the other hand, in the normal game state, if the jackpot C is won, the state transitions to a high probability time-saving state. For this reason, it is easier to transition to a high base time-saving state in the low base time-saving state than in the normal game state, and in this respect, the low base time-saving state can be said to be a more advantageous state than the normal game state. Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the day mode (normal mode) is set in the normal game state, and the evening mode (special mode) is set in the low base time-saving state.

Under these conditions, immediately after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the performance control unit 130 causes the first image display device 70 to display a background image of an evening background, which is the background of the low base time-saving state, as a performance image common to the normal gaming state and the low base time-saving state, regardless of whether the gaming machine 1 is powered on in the normal gaming state or in the low base time-saving state. The same applies to the performance patterns, reserved pedestal display, etc. other than the background image.

In addition, after the end of the special game of the first jackpot, Special 1 (2R) jackpot D, and after the end of the special game of the second jackpot, Special 1 (2R) jackpot E, the presentation control unit 130 may cause the first image display device 70 to display a background image of an evening background, which is the background of the normal game state, as a presentation image common to the normal game state and the low base time-saving state.

In addition, immediately after the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the performance control unit 130 may cause the first image display device 70 to display a background image of a daytime background, which is the background of the normal gaming state, as a performance image common to the normal gaming state and the low base time-saving state, regardless of whether the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is restored in the normal gaming state or in the low base time-saving state. The same applies to the performance patterns, the display of reserved pedestals, etc. other than the background image.

In addition, after the end of the special game of the first jackpot, Special 1 (2R) jackpot D, and after the end of the special game of the second jackpot, Special 1 (2R) jackpot E, the performance control unit 130 may cause the first image display device 70 to display a background image of a daytime background, which is the background of the low base time-saving state, as a performance image common to the normal game state and the low base time-saving state.

In the first to fourth embodiments, immediately after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the presentation control unit 130 may cause the first image display device 70 to display an image of a background different from either the evening background, which is the original background of the normal gaming state, or the daytime background, which is the original background of the low base time-saving state, as a presentation image common to the normal gaming state and the low base time-saving state.

Fifth embodiment
Next, a gaming machine 1 according to a fifth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment is a so-called type 1/2 mixed gaming machine having a normal gaming state and a high base time-saving state.

(Explanation of game state)
In the fifth embodiment, the high base time-saving state set after a big win is called the "first time-saving game state," and the high base time-saving state set when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a specified number (for example, 500 times) is called the "second time-saving game state." Also, the low base time-saving state is called the "third time-saving game state."

(Example of a jackpot determination table)
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table in the fifth embodiment.

In the gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the probability of a jackpot being determined in the jackpot determination varies depending on the setting change. The setting values of the gaming machine 1 range from setting 1 to setting 6, for example. Here, only setting 1 and setting 2 are illustrated. Note that in gaming machines according to other embodiments, there may be only one type of setting value.

The jackpot determination table stores random number values that are determined to be jackpots, minor wins, and misses in the jackpot determination. A random number value for jackpot determination is obtained in response to a game ball entering each starting hole, and if the obtained random number value for jackpot determination is one of the values shown in FIG. 67, the determination result will be according to the respective value.

For example, in setting 1, when a jackpot determination is made for the first special symbol in response to a game ball entering the first starting hole 45, a jackpot is determined to have a probability of 1/200. If a jackpot is determined to have occurred, one of A11 to A13 is displayed as a stopped symbol (jackpot symbol) on the first special symbol display 60 after a predetermined variation time has elapsed. Note that when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the probability of a minor jackpot being determined is "0". If a jackpot determination for the first special symbol does not determine a jackpot, it is determined to have been a miss. If a jackpot determination for the first special symbol determines a miss, a miss symbol H1 is displayed as a stopped symbol on the first special symbol display 60 after a predetermined variation time has elapsed.

In addition, in setting 1, when a jackpot determination is made for the second special symbol in response to a game ball entering the second starting hole 47, a jackpot is determined to have occurred with a probability of 1/200. If a jackpot is determined to have occurred, after a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, one of A21 to A22 is displayed as a stopped symbol (jackpot symbol) on the second special symbol display 61.

In addition, when a big win determination is made for the second special symbol, a small win is determined with a probability of, for example, about 1/68. At this time, after a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, one of K21 to K23 is displayed as a stopped symbol (small win symbol) on the second special symbol display 61.

In addition, the jackpot determination for the first special symbol may also result in a small jackpot, and in this case the probability of a small jackpot may be the same as that for the jackpot determination for the second special symbol, or it may be different.

In addition, in setting 2, the probability of a big win being determined is higher than in setting 1. For example, in setting 2, the probability of a big win being determined in a big win determination related to the first special pattern or the second special pattern is approximately 1/194. The probability of a small win being determined is the same as in setting 1. Note that the probability of a small win being determined may differ between setting 1 and setting 2.

Figure 68 shows an example of a pattern determination table in the fifth embodiment. Figure 68(a) shows an example of a big win pattern determination table for determining a big win pattern, and Figure 68(b) shows an example of a small win pattern determination table for determining a small win pattern.

As shown in FIG. 68(a), when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol, for example, the jackpot symbol A11 is displayed as a still image with a probability of 15%, the jackpot symbol A12 is displayed as a still image with a probability of 35%, and the jackpot symbol A13 is displayed as a still image with a probability of 50%. When the jackpot symbol A11 is displayed as a still image, a first jackpot game is played in which the second large prize winning opening 56 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds, and this round game is repeated 10 times (10 rounds (written as "R")). When the jackpot symbol A12 is displayed as a still image, a second jackpot game is played in which the above-mentioned round game is played three times (3R). When the jackpot symbol A13 is displayed as a still image, a third jackpot game is played in which the above-mentioned round game is played three times (3R).

In addition, if a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol, there is a 15% probability that the jackpot symbol A21 will be displayed as a still image, and there is an 85% probability that the jackpot symbol A22 will be displayed as a still image. When the jackpot symbol A21 is displayed as a still image, a fourth jackpot game will be played in which the above-mentioned round game is played 10 times (10R). In addition, when the jackpot symbol A22 is displayed as a still image, a fifth jackpot game will be played in which the above-mentioned round game is played 10 times (10R).

Also, as shown in FIG. 68(b), if a small win is determined in the big win determination related to the second special symbol, there is a 15% probability that the small win symbol K21 will be displayed, a 35% probability that the small win symbol K22 will be displayed, and a 50% probability that the small win symbol K23 will be displayed.

When the small win symbol K21 stops, the first small win game is played and the first large winning opening 50 opens, and when the game ball passes through a specific area 52 provided within the first large winning opening 50, the first V large winning game is played. In the first V large winning game, the second large winning opening 56 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds in a round game, for example, 10 times (10R).

When the small win symbol K22 stops, a second small win game is played and the first large winning opening 50 opens, and when the game ball passes through a specific area 52 provided within the first large winning opening 50, a second V large winning game is played. In the second V large winning game, the above round game is played, for example, three times (3R).

When the small win symbol K23 stops, the third small win game is played and the first large winning opening 50 opens, and if the game ball passes through a specific area 52 provided within the first large winning opening 50, the third V large winning game is played. In the third V large winning game, the above round game is played, for example, three times (3R).

(Change pattern table switching scenario)
Next, the switching of the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol will be described. In the gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, a plurality of variation pattern tables are prepared in advance. Each variation pattern table stores one or more variation patterns, and in the jackpot determination, one of the variation patterns is determined from one or more variation patterns included in the set variation pattern table, and the special symbol is displayed variably based on the determined variation pattern. For example, when a jackpot game is played, a variation pattern table to be used in each period is set. As a result, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined using the set variation pattern table according to the number of times the special symbol changes after the jackpot game.

Figure 69 is a diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern table set in each period. Figure 69(a) is a diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern table in each period after an RWM clear operation or a setting change operation is performed. Figure 69(b) is a diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern table in each period after a jackpot game is played.

69(a) illustrates the game state and the setting of the variation pattern table when a jackpot is not determined in each period after the RWM clear operation or the setting change operation is performed. In FIG. 69(a), "N" indicates the number of times the special symbol changes after the RWM clear operation or the setting change operation is performed. Also, "n" is the remaining number of times the special symbol changes until the second time-saving game state, and may be written as "number of activations n" here. "n" is set to an initial value (e.g., "500") when the RWM clear operation or the setting change operation is performed, and is decremented (subtracted by 1) every time the special symbol changes. The "number of activations n" is stored in the main RAM 100c of the main control unit 100, and is maintained even if the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off as long as the data in the main RAM 100c is not lost by the backup power source. The number of activations n may be initially set to 0, and incremented (added by 1) every time the special symbol changes.

As shown in FIG. 69(a), after the RWM clear operation or the setting change operation is performed, the normal game state is set until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 500. During this time, the normal "change pattern table Tn" is set as the change pattern table for the special symbol. When the change pattern table Tn is set, the presentation mode is set to the "normal mode."

Here, the presentation mode refers to the presentation manner of the presentation displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, the presentation controlled by the lamp control unit 150, and the presentation using the sound output from the audio output device 9. For example, depending on the presentation mode, the presentation pattern displayed on the first image display device 70, the background image, the hold icon, the hold pedestal image forming the display area of the hold icon, the image indicating the presentation mode, the BGM (Background Music) output while the special pattern is changing, the light emission manner of the frame lighting device 10 and/or the board lighting device 74, etc. differ.

After the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed, when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 500 (when the 500th change ends), the machine is set to the second time-saving game state. The second time-saving game state continues until the special symbol changes 750 times or until a jackpot game is played. While the gaming machine 1 is set to the second time-saving game state, a "change pattern table Tb" is set as the change pattern table for the special symbol. When the change pattern table Tb is set, the presentation mode is set to "time-saving mode B". Time-saving mode B is a presentation mode that indicates the second time-saving game state, and is a presentation mode that actually suggests that the next jackpot will be played.

Note that multiple fluctuation pattern tables Tb are prepared, such as Tb1, Tb2, etc. For example, the first fluctuation of the special symbol after the second time-saving game state is set, fluctuation pattern table Tb1 is set, and the second and subsequent fluctuations of the special symbol are set, fluctuation pattern table Tb2. Furthermore, a fluctuation pattern table Tb for the second time-saving game state may be prepared in addition to these.

When the special symbol changes for the first time after the second time-saving game state is set, a time-saving introduction effect (described later) indicating the start of the second time-saving game state is executed based on the change pattern contained in the change pattern table Tb1. After the time-saving introduction effect is executed, the game is set to time-saving mode B.

If the special symbol changes 750 times in the second time-saving game state without a jackpot game being played (i.e., if the special symbol changes 1250 times after the RWM clear operation or the setting change operation is performed), the gaming machine 1 returns to the normal game state. In the normal game state, the "change pattern table Tn" is set, and the presentation mode is also set to the "normal mode". If the special symbol changes 750 times in the second time-saving game state without a jackpot game being played and the game returns to the normal game state, the game machine will not be set to the second time-saving game state until the RWM clear operation or the setting change operation is performed or a jackpot game is played. Note that the change of the special symbol 750 times in the second time-saving game state without a jackpot game being played and the game machine returns to the normal game state is called "passing the second time-saving game". Note that even if a small jackpot game is played in the second time-saving game state, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 52, the small jackpot game ends without a jackpot game being played. In this case, the remaining number of small wins, which will be described later, is subtracted, and if the remaining number of small wins becomes "0", the game will transition to the normal game state before the special symbols change 750 times in the second time-saving game state. This can also be considered as a skip of the second time-saving game.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 69(b), for example, if a jackpot is determined to have occurred in the jackpot determination in the normal game state and a jackpot game is played, the first time-saving game state is set at the end of the jackpot game. In the first time-saving game state, "variation pattern table Ta" is set as the variation pattern table for the special symbol. In the first time-saving game state, the presentation mode is set to "time-saving mode A". Time-saving mode A is a presentation mode that indicates the first time-saving game state, and multiple time-saving modes are prepared, such as time-saving modes A1 and A2.

Note that multiple fluctuation pattern tables Ta are prepared, such as Ta1, Ta2, Ta3, etc. Different time-saving modes A are set according to the fluctuation pattern table Ta.

For example, if a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination for the first special symbol during normal gameplay, the time-saving count may be set to seven times after the jackpot play. In this case, the presentation mode is set to time-saving mode A1, and fluctuation pattern table Ta1 is set. In fluctuation pattern table Ta1, the average fluctuation time is different for the first to seventh fluctuations after the jackpot play and the eighth to eleventh fluctuations (fluctuations related to the four reserved second special symbols at the end of the seventh fluctuation).

In addition, if a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination for the first special symbol in the normal game state, 55 time-saving cycles may be set after the jackpot play. In this case, time-saving mode A2 is set, and fluctuation pattern table Ta2 is set. In fluctuation pattern table Ta2, the fluctuation time is controlled to differ depending on the number of subsequent fluctuations. For example, the average fluctuation time differs between the 1st to 44th fluctuations after the jackpot play, the 45th to 54th fluctuations, and the 55th fluctuation (the last fluctuation in the first time-saving play state).

For example, the 45th to 54th fluctuations have a longer fluctuation time when it is determined to be a miss than the 1st to 44th fluctuations after a jackpot game. As a result, while the 1st to 44th fluctuations are relatively short, the 45th to 54th fluctuations are relatively long. During the 45th to 54th fluctuations, a countdown effect is performed to indicate the number of remaining fluctuations in the first time-saving game state. This can give the player anxiety that the first time-saving game state may end, and by lengthening the fluctuation time, it is possible to increase the expectation of a jackpot game. Also, the 55th fluctuation has the longest fluctuation time when it is determined to be a miss. During the 55th fluctuation (the last fluctuation), a result effect is performed. During the result effect, the cumulative number of winning balls from the jackpot (first hit) to the present in the normal game state, the number of jackpot games, etc. are displayed.

In the first time-saving game state, when the special symbol has changed the set number of times for time-saving, the game state transitions to the normal game state. In the normal game state, the "change pattern table Tn" is set, and the presentation mode is set to the "normal mode". Specifically, the "change pattern table Tn" is set until the number of changes since the end of the jackpot game reaches 450 (number of operations n = 50). For the 451st change since the end of the jackpot game, the "change pattern table Tnx0" is set. Also, for the 452nd to 500th changes since the end of the jackpot game, the "change pattern table Tnx1" is set. The change pattern table Tnx0 has a longer average change time than the change pattern tables Tn and Tnx1. Also, the change pattern table Tnx1 has a longer average change time than the change pattern table Tn. Note that in other embodiments, the relationship of the length of the change time in each period may be reversed.

At the 451st fluctuation, an effect is produced indicating a transition to pre-introduction mode, and a transition to pre-introduction mode occurs. At the 452nd to 500th fluctuations, an effect is produced in pre-introduction mode. In the pre-introduction mode, for example, a pre-introduction countdown effect (described later) is produced that displays the number of remaining fluctuations until the second time-saving play state is reached, and a suggestion effect is produced that suggests that the second time-saving play state will be set.

And, when the 500th variation of the special symbol has ended without another jackpot game being played since the end of the jackpot game, the second time-saving game state is set. In the 501st variation (the first variation of the second time-saving game state), a variation pattern table Tb11 different from the variation pattern table Tb1 is set, and in the 501st variation, a time-saving introduction effect is performed that suggests that the second time-saving game state will start. In the variation pattern table Tb11, a variation pattern dedicated to the time-saving introduction effect is prepared, and the dedicated variation pattern is selected. Even if the 501st variation is determined to be a miss, a variation pattern with a longer variation time is selected than when the 502nd or later variation is determined to be a miss. In other words, in the first variation of the second time-saving game state, a dedicated time-saving introduction effect is executed that suggests that the second time-saving game state will start, so the variation time is set longer than the second or later variation of the second time-saving game state.

In this way, the 501st change after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed sets the change pattern table Tb1, and the 501st change after the jackpot game is played sets the change pattern table Tb11. The change pattern table Tb11 is more likely to select a change pattern with a longer change time than the change pattern table Tb1. This makes it possible to execute a relatively short time-saving introduction effect when entering the second time-saving game state when there is no history of jackpot gameplay, and execute a relatively long time-saving introduction effect when entering the second time-saving game state when there is a history of jackpot gameplay. Here, "there is a history of jackpot gameplay" means that a jackpot game has been played in the past, and that no RWM clear operation or setting change operation has been performed after the jackpot game.

In addition, regardless of whether or not there is a history of jackpot play, the same fluctuation pattern table may be set for the first fluctuation after the specified number of times is reached (the first fluctuation in which the second time-saving play state is set). Also, conversely to the above, the fluctuation pattern table Tb11 may be such that a fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than the fluctuation pattern table Tb1.

For the 502nd and subsequent fluctuations from the end of the jackpot game (the second and subsequent fluctuations in the second time-saving game state), the fluctuation pattern table Tb12 is set. The fluctuation pattern table Tb12 includes fluctuation patterns with shorter fluctuation times than the fluctuation pattern table Tb11. For this reason, for the 502nd and subsequent fluctuations, if the second special symbol fluctuates, the fluctuation time is relatively short. For example, the fluctuation time is 2 seconds when the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is a miss. The same fluctuation pattern table may be used for the 501st and subsequent fluctuations from the end of the jackpot game. In this case, the above-mentioned time-saving introduction performance may be executed for the 501st fluctuation.

At the 501st change after a jackpot game is played, the presentation mode is switched to "Time-saving mode B." The presentation mode B set here is the same as the presentation mode set at the 501st change after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed.

If the special symbols change 750 times without a jackpot being played after the second time-saving game state is set, the game returns to the normal game state (skipping the second time-saving game). In this case, the change pattern table Tn is set and the presentation mode returns to the normal mode. After the second time-saving game is skipped, the game does not return to the second time-saving game state and the normal game state is maintained until an RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed or a jackpot game is played.

(Game flow)
Next, a game flow of the gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment will be described. Fig. 70 is a diagram showing an example of a game flow of the gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment.

In the initial state, the gaming machine 1 is set to a normal gaming state, and the player shoots the gaming ball into the left gaming area in the normal gaming state and plays a normal game. Here, shooting the gaming ball into the left gaming area is called "left shot". In normal gaming, the gaming ball does not enter the second starting hole 47, but enters the first starting hole 45. Based on the entry into the first starting hole 45, a jackpot determination is made for the first special symbol. If a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination for the first special symbol, a jackpot game is played, and after the jackpot game, the time-saving mode A1 or the time-saving mode A2 is entered. If a jackpot is announced with a combination of specific performance symbols (for example, a "7" pattern alignment where three "7" symbols are aligned), the time-saving mode A2 is entered, and if a jackpot is announced with a combination other than the specific performance symbols, the time-saving mode A1 is entered.

In time-saving mode A1, the game is played in the first time-saving game state, in which the number of time-saving times is set to 7. Time-saving mode A1 is a mode that aims to transition to a more advantageous state, and the probability of transitioning to a more advantageous state is, for example, about 20%. If a specific combination of performance patterns (specific patterns) is displayed during time-saving mode A1, a jackpot game is played, and then the game transitions to time-saving mode A3 or B. On the other hand, if a combination other than the specific performance patterns (non-specific patterns) is displayed during time-saving mode A1 and a jackpot game is played, the game transitions to time-saving mode A2.

Time-saving mode A2 is more advantageous than time-saving mode A1, but less advantageous than time-saving mode A3/B. When switching to time-saving mode A2, there is a 74% probability that this state will continue. If a specific combination of effect patterns (specific patterns) is displayed during time-saving mode A2, a jackpot game is played, and then a transition to time-saving mode A3 or B occurs. On the other hand, if a combination other than the specific combination of effect patterns (non-specific patterns) is displayed during time-saving mode A2 and a jackpot game is played, a transition to time-saving mode A2 occurs.

Time-saving mode A3 or B is the most advantageous state for the player, and once entered, there is a 90% probability that this state will continue. Specifically, time-saving mode A3 is a mode that indicates a time-saving game state in which the number of time-saving times is set to 95, and the continuation rate is approximately 86%. Time-saving mode B is a mode that indicates that there is an extremely high probability (e.g., 99% or more) that the time-saving game state will continue until the next jackpot is hit, and the number of time-saving times is set to 496 or 750.

The probability that a specific combination of effect symbols (specific symbols) will be displayed during time-saving mode A1 or time-saving mode A2, resulting in a jackpot game, is, for example, approximately 25%. If this 25% jackpot is won, the game will transition to the most advantageous time-saving mode B, after which time-saving mode A3 or B will continue with a 90% probability.

In addition, if the special symbols change 500 times without a jackpot being played in the normal game state, the game will transition to time-saving mode B (second time-saving game state).

In this way, the gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment has three states with different continuation rates, which can increase interest. Also, if the special symbols change 500 times without a jackpot game being played, a transition to the second time-saving game state (time-saving mode B) is made. This can create an advantageous state for the player, which can increase interest. Also, in the fifth embodiment, a transition to time-saving mode B can occur even after a jackpot game has been played. Therefore, even if the special symbols do not change 500 times in the normal game state, the player can see the effects of time-saving mode B, which can satisfy the player.

(Example of performance)
Next, an example of the performance performed in the gaming machine 1 will be described. While the special symbols are changing in the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61, a variable performance is performed in the first image display device 70. The variable performance is a performance performed during the variable display of the special symbols, for example, a performance in which the performance symbols change. Below, an image displayed in the first image display device 70 where the main performance is performed will be described.

Figure 71 shows an example of an image displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 in normal mode, which is set during normal game play.

As shown in FIG. 71, in the normal game mode, a normal background image is displayed as a background image on the screen of the first image display device 70 (hereinafter referred to as the "main screen"). The background image is an image that serves as the background for each image displayed on the screen (performance pattern 701, small pattern 702, first reserved icon HA, icon TI, first reserved number SHA, second reserved number SHB, and other preview images displayed during variable performance, etc.), and is an image with a lower display priority than each image. The images displayed on the screen are managed by multiple layers, and the background image is drawn on the innermost layer (the layer with the lowest display priority). Note that multiple normal background images may be prepared. For example, there may be multiple stages in normal mode, and the normal background image may be different for each stage.

In the central area of the main screen, a performance pattern 701 corresponding to the special pattern is displayed. The performance pattern 701 is displayed in front of the background image (taking priority over the background image). The performance pattern 701 is made up of three performance patterns 701. From the left, the three performance patterns 701 are called left pattern 701L, middle pattern 701C, and right pattern 701R. The performance patterns 701 include, for example, number images showing numbers from "1" to "9" and character images corresponding to the number images. A performance pattern including number images and character images is called a "normal mode" performance pattern. Note that a pattern showing alphabets such as "A" to "F" may also be used as the performance pattern 701.

In response to the start of the changing display of the special pattern, the multiple performance patterns 701 start to change, and in response to the stop of the changing display of the special pattern, the multiple performance patterns 701 stop to display.

The performance symbols 701 are displayed in a stopped state (miss state, jackpot state) that notifies the result of the jackpot determination according to the display of the stopped special symbols. The jackpot state is a combination of the same performance symbols 701, such as "777" or "555". The miss states include a normal miss state in which three different performance symbols 701 stop without a reach effect, and a reach miss state that is displayed after a reach effect and includes two of the same type of performance symbols 701 and a different performance symbol 701.

The performance pattern 701 performs a start-up action performance in response to the start of the special pattern change. In the start-up action performance, the three performance patterns 701 start to move simultaneously or in sequence, for example, starting to move downward. There may be multiple modes of the start-up action performance. After the start-up action performance, the performance pattern 701 performs a change display performance (scroll change) at high speed in a specified direction (for example, from top to bottom, or it may be left to right). After performing the change display performance, the performance pattern 701 performs a pre-stop action performance. In the pre-stop action performance, the three performance patterns 701 operate and temporarily stop at their respective positions. There may be multiple modes of the pre-stop action performance. After the pre-stop action performance, the performance pattern 701 displays a stop in response to the stop of the special pattern.

In addition, in the variable presentation, in addition to the presentation pattern 701, various presentation images such as background images and characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 depending on the result of the jackpot determination, thereby increasing the player's anticipation for the execution of the jackpot game (special game).

In addition, a small pattern 702 is displayed in the lower left area of the screen. The small pattern 702 is a type of performance pattern corresponding to the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern), and is composed of three small patterns 702 (left pattern, middle pattern, right pattern). The small pattern 702 is a pattern smaller than the performance pattern 701, and is composed of number images showing numbers from "1" to "9" like the performance pattern 701, but does not include character images like the performance pattern 701. The small pattern 702 changes and displays according to the changing display of the special pattern, and stops and displays according to the stopping display of the special pattern. The display mode of the small pattern 702 is the same in any performance mode. The display mode of the small pattern 702 may differ depending on the game state (performance mode).

In addition, a first reserved icon display area 703A is provided in the lower area on the left side of the screen. In the first reserved icon display area 703A, the number of first reserved icons HA corresponding to the first reserved number (U1) of the first special pattern is displayed. The first reserved icon display area 703A is divided into four areas. The first reserved icon display area 703A is composed of a first area for displaying the rightmost first reserved icon HA1, a second area for displaying the second from the right first reserved icon HA2, a third area for displaying the third from the right first reserved icon HA3, and a fourth area for displaying the fourth from the right first reserved icon HA4. In addition, an image (reserved base image; dashed line shown in the figure) for forming these first to fourth areas is displayed. The reserved base image is an image that serves as a base for displaying each first reserved icon HA, and is displayed even when the first reserved icon HA is not displayed. Depending on the number of reserved first special symbols, the first reserved icon HA is displayed in each area formed by the reserved base image.

The icon display area 704 is provided to the right of the first hold icon display area 703A. The icon TI corresponding to the changing special pattern is displayed in the icon display area 704. The icon TI has the same display form (similar shape) as the first hold icon HA, but the icon TI is a larger image than the first hold icon HA. The icon TI is also displayed on top of the hold base image. In other words, the hold base image also forms the icon display area 704.

Each first reserved icon HA is an image indicating the reservation of the right to display the change of the first special pattern (judging a jackpot based on winning at the first starting hole 45). The icon TI is an image corresponding to the current change of the special pattern (also called the "change in question"). The first reserved icons HA are consumed in order starting from the side closest to the icon display area 704. Specifically, when the change of the current special pattern ends, the first reserved icon HA1 displayed in the first area of the first reserved icon display area 703A moves to the icon display area 704 and is displayed as the icon TI. At the same time that the first reserved icon HA1 moves to the icon display area 704, the first reserved icons HA2 to HA4 shift one area to the right, respectively, and are displayed as the first reserved icons HA1 to HA3.

The first hold icon HA and the icon TI may be displayed in different display forms depending on the presentation mode and stage. The hold pedestal image may also be displayed in different display forms depending on the presentation mode and stage.

The first hold icon HA and the icon TI can change from a normal state (white), which does not indicate the likelihood of a jackpot, to a special state (blue, red, gold, rainbow) that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot. The special state indicates a higher likelihood of a jackpot than the normal state, with blue, red, gold, and rainbow indicating increasing likelihood in that order. Specifically, the first hold icon HA is changed based on the results of a pre-determination. Also, the icon TI is changed based on the results of the pre-determination and the jackpot determination.

In addition, the lower right area of the main screen displays the first reserved number SHA, which is a numerical representation of the first reserved number (U1) indicating the reserved number of the first special symbol, and the second reserved number SHB, which is a numerical representation of the second reserved number (U2) indicating the reserved number of the second special symbol.

In normal game play, the second reserve icon HB corresponding to winning in the second start hole 47 is not displayed. Note that even in normal game play, if a game ball wins in the second start hole 47, the second reserve icon HB indicating the reservation of the second special pattern may be displayed in an area different from the first reserve icon display area 703A (for example, the area to the right of the icon display area 704).

In addition, a fourth pattern 705a corresponding to the first special pattern and a fourth pattern 705b corresponding to the second special pattern are displayed in the upper right area of the main screen. The fourth pattern 705a changes (blinks) in response to the changing display of the first special pattern, and is stationary in response to the stationary display of the first special pattern. In addition, the fourth pattern 705b changes (blinks) in response to the changing display of the second special pattern, and is stationary in response to the stationary display of the second special pattern.

In the fifth embodiment, the first image display device 70 displays the changes in the performance pattern 701, but the first image display device 70 and/or the second image display device 71 may display the changes in the performance pattern 701. Also, the first image display device 70 may display the changes in the performance pattern 701, and the second image display device 71 may display the changes in the small pattern 702. Also, the first image display device 70 may display the changes in the performance pattern 701 and the small pattern 702, and the second image display device 71 may display the first hold icon HA, the second hold icon HB, and the hold icon TI.

In addition, a game count display image GC is displayed in the lower right area of the main screen. The game count display image GC includes a number indicating the number of times the special symbol has changed since the gaming machine 1 was powered on. For example, the number indicated by the game count display image GC is incremented (increased by 1) at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The number of times the special symbol has changed since the power was turned on is stored in the RAM of the presentation control device 130A (for example, the sub-RAM 130c or the control RAM 141c). The game count display image GC changes according to this stored number. When the gaming machine 1 is powered off, the information stored in the RAM of the presentation control device 130A is cleared. Therefore, when the gaming machine 1 is powered off, the number indicated by the game count display image GC is reset to the initial value ("0").

On the other hand, the number of activations n, which counts the number of times the special symbol changes from when the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed until the transition to the second time-saving gaming state, is stored in the main RAM 100c of the main control unit 100. The data in the RAM of the main control unit 100 is maintained even when the power is turned off. Therefore, if the gaming machine is turned off and then power is restored, the number of times the special symbol changes, indicated by the number of activations n, will no longer match the number indicated by the game count display image GC.

The number shown in the game count display image GC is reset to "0" when a jackpot is played. Also, the number of activations n is reset to an initial value (e.g., 500) when a jackpot is played.

The game count display image GC is basically always displayed while the special symbols are changing and while the player is waiting for customers. However, the game count display image GC may be hidden during the waiting for customers effect in the waiting for customers effect. Also, while the special symbols are changing and during a specific effect with a high expectation of a jackpot (for example, during an SP reach or an SPSP reach), the game count display image GC may be hidden.

Even when the gaming machine 1 transitions to the second time-saving gaming state, the game number display image GC continues to be displayed, and is incremented each time the special symbol changes. When the gaming machine 1 transitions to the second time-saving gaming state and returns to the normal gaming state without a jackpot being played (i.e., when the second time-saving is skipped), the number indicated by the game number display image GC becomes greater than the specified number of times (500 times). Specifically, when the second time-saving is skipped, the number indicated by the game number display image GC becomes 1250 times or more, which is the specified number of times plus the number of times the second time-saving gaming state changes. Therefore, when the game number display image GC exceeds 1250 times, it indicates that the second time-saving has been skipped. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off after the second time-saving is skipped and then turned on again, the game number display image GC becomes a specific display (for example, "???") other than "0". Furthermore, even if the game is continued without turning off the power of the gaming machine 1 after the second time reduction is skipped, the game count display image GC may display the above-mentioned specific display. This notifies the player that the second time reduction has been skipped. In this case, the fact that the second time reduction has been skipped is also notified by the performance of the lamp control unit 150 (the light emission mode of the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74), as described below.

The game count display image GC may not be displayed all the time, but may be displayed only for a predetermined period of time. For example, the game count display image GC may be displayed only when a predetermined period of time has elapsed before the second time-shortened play state is set. Also, the game count display image GC may be displayed in the normal play state, but not in the second time-shortened play state. Also, the game count display image GC may not be displayed in the first time-shortened play state. Also, the game count display image GC may be displayed in the first time-shortened play state (and also in the third time-shortened play state described below).

In addition, for example, a second time-saving count display image NC is displayed in the lower right area of the main screen. The second time-saving count display image NC includes a number indicating the remaining number of times the special pattern will change before transitioning to the second time-saving game state. When the number indicated by this second time-saving count display image NC becomes "0", transitioning to the second time-saving game state occurs.

The second time-saving count display image NC may or may not be displayed while the special symbol is changing and while waiting for customers. For example, the second time-saving count display image NC is not displayed until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 100 after the RWM clear operation or the setting change operation is performed, and is displayed at the 101st change. Also, if the power is turned on without the RWM clear operation or the setting change operation being performed (i.e., when the machine is in a fixed state with the RWM not cleared), the second time-saving count display image NC is displayed at the specified number of changes (e.g., 51st, 101st) after the power is turned on. In this case, the second time-saving count display image NC may be displayed together with an image suggesting that the RWM clear operation or the setting change operation has not been performed (the machine is in a fixed state).

The second time-saving count display image NC is hidden and re-displayed at a predetermined timing. For example, the second time-saving count display image NC may start to be displayed a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 times) before the second time-saving play state is set, and may be hidden when the second time-saving play state is entered. Also, for example, the second time-saving count display image NC may be hidden when the reserved pedestal image is hidden (e.g., when an SP reach develops), and may be re-displayed when the reserved pedestal image is re-displayed (e.g., when the normal screen is restored after a reach miss). Also, the second time-saving count display image NC is hidden when a jackpot is hit.

(An example of the second time-saving introduction performance)
Next, an example of the time-saving introduction presentation when transitioning from the normal gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state will be described.

(If the first special symbol is reserved at the end of the specified number of fluctuations)
Fig. 72 is an example of a timing chart showing the flow of the presentation when the game transitions to the second time-saving game state based on the specified number of changes being made after the RWM clear operation or the setting change operation is performed. Figs. 73 to 76 are diagrams showing examples of images displayed on the main screen at each timing shown in Fig. 72.

As shown in FIG. 72, at time t0, the first special symbol starts to change. This special symbol changes for the 499th time since the RWM clear operation or the setting change operation was performed. As shown in FIG. 73(a), on the main screen, at time t0, the three normal performance symbols 701 perform a start operation performance, and an icon movement performance in which the first reserved icon HA1 moves to the icon display area 704 is performed. Also, the small symbol 702 displays a change without performing a start operation performance. Also, the fourth symbol 705a displays a change without performing a start operation performance. Also, at the start of the special symbol change, the number indicated by the game count display image GC is "498", and the number indicated by the second time-saving count display image NC is "2". In this case, the number of operations n stored in the main control unit 100 is "2".

After the first special symbol starts to change at time t0, the first special symbol continues to change for a predetermined change time. During this time, as shown in FIG. 73(b), the main screen displays a change display in which the performance symbol 701 moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705a also change. In addition, the icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 704.

As shown in Figure 73 (c), the three performance symbols 701 stop in sequence. For example, the left symbol 701L decelerates and temporarily stops in the left-hand central area of the main screen, then the right symbol 701R decelerates and temporarily stops in the right-hand central area of the main screen. Then, the middle symbol 701C decelerates and temporarily stops in the central area of the main screen, and the three performance symbols 701 temporarily stop (Figure 73 (d)). In this state, the three performance symbols 701 do not stop completely, and for example move slightly in the vertical direction.

If the result of the jackpot determination is a miss, the first special symbol (miss symbol H1) is displayed as stopped at time t1 after a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed. In response to the stop display of the first special symbol, the performance symbol 701 is displayed as stopped (main stop) (Figure 73 (e)). In addition, at time t1, the small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705a are displayed as stopped. The small symbol 702 is displayed as the same number combination as the performance symbol 701.

The first special symbol remains in a stopped state for a predetermined fixed period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) from time t1. At time t2, when the fixed period has elapsed from time t1, the number of activations n is decremented by 1. At time t2, the game count display image GC is updated to "499", and the second time-saving count display image NC is updated to "1" remaining. The decrement of the number of activations n may be performed at time t1, when the first special symbol is stopped. The game count display image GC and the second time-saving count display image NC may be updated at time t1.

If there are no pending jackpots at time t2 when the determination period has elapsed (i.e., the first pending number and the second pending number are 0), the gaming machine 1 enters a customer waiting state. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the transition to the customer waiting state, a customer waiting presentation is performed on the main screen.

If a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 at the next time t3, the first special symbol will start to change (the 500th change of the special symbol). In response to this, a change effect (the effect of changing the effect symbol 701, the small symbol 702, and the fourth symbol 705a) will be performed on the main screen (Fig. 74(a)-(b)). During this 500th change, for example, if two game balls enter the first starting hole 45, the first reserved number will become "2", the first reserved icons HA1 and HA2 will be additionally displayed, and the first number reserved SHA will become "2" (Fig. 74(b)).

After that, at time t4, the first special symbol (missing symbol H1) is displayed as stopped. In response, the performance symbol 701, the small symbol 702, and the fourth symbol 705a are displayed as stopped (Figure 74 (c)).

At time t5, when a predetermined fixed period has elapsed from time t4, the number of activations n is updated to "0" and the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the second time-saving gaming state, and the 501st variation of the special symbol is started based on the result of the jackpot determination related to the reserved first special symbol (FIG. 74(d)). Note that at time t4, when the variation of the special symbol has ended 500 times, the number of activations n may be set to "0" and the normal gaming state may be changed to the second time-saving gaming state.

As described above, when the second time-saving game state is set, the fluctuation pattern table Tb is set. For example, the fluctuation pattern table Tb1 is set for the 501st special symbol fluctuation after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed. A fluctuation effect including a time-saving introduction effect is performed based on the fluctuation pattern contained in the fluctuation pattern table Tb1.

Specifically, at time t5, the effect symbol 701, small symbol 702, and fourth symbol 705a start to change (Figure 74 (d)). Also, the first pending icons HA1 and HA2 move to the right due to the icon movement effect. At time t5, the number shown in the game count display image GC is "500", and the number shown in the second time-saving count display image NC is "0".

Next, at time t6, a start image SG indicating the start of the second time-saving game state and a right-hit notification image MH1 encouraging the player to hit to the right are displayed on the main screen (Figure 74 (e)). Also, at this timing, the second time-saving count display image NC is erased.

Next, at time t7, the shielding image 920 appears on the main screen (Figure 74 (f)). Specifically, the left and right shielding images 920L and 920R appear from the left and right of the screen and move to the right and left, respectively, so as to shield the performance pattern 701 being displayed in a variable manner. The shielding image 920 is, for example, an image imitating a door. The shielding image 920 appears over a first predetermined time period from time t7 to t8, and covers the entire main screen. The performance pattern 701, the background image (normal background image), the first hold icon HA, and the icon TI are shielded by the shielding image 920. The right hit notification image MH1 is also shielded. Between time t7 and t8, the shielding image 920 and the performance pattern 701 may be displayed simultaneously. In other words, between time t7 and t8, there are areas that are shielded by the shielding image 920 and areas that are not shielded. In the area not covered by the shielding image 920, at least a portion of the performance pattern 701, at least a portion of the background image (normal background image), and at least a portion of the first hold icon HA and the icon TI are displayed.

On the other hand, the small pattern 702 and the fourth pattern 705a are not obscured by the obscuring image 920. In other words, the small pattern 702 and the fourth pattern 705a are preferentially displayed in front of the obscuring image 920. In addition, the first reserved number SHA and the second reserved number SHB are not obscured by the obscuring image 920. Note that the right hit notification image MH1 does not have to be obscured by the obscuring image 920.

The occlusion image 920 may appear semi-transparently on a layer in front of the performance pattern 701, covering the entire main screen, and become opaque over a first predetermined period of time, thereby occluding the performance pattern 701, etc.

At time t8, the entire main screen is covered by the shielding image 920 (Figure 75 (a)). At this time, the small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705a are not covered by the shielding image 920, and continue to change while the performance symbol 701 is covered. The first number reserved SHA and the second number reserved SHB are also not covered by the shielding image 920. While the shielding image 920 is displayed on the entire screen, the right hit notification image MH2 is displayed superimposed on the shielding image 920 (in front of the shielding image 920). The right hit notification image MH2 is an image that encourages the player to hit to the right, and is a different image from the right hit notification image MH1. The right hit notification image MH2 may be the same image as the right hit notification image MH1.

In addition, while the occlusion image 920 is displayed on the entire screen, the lamp control unit 150 controls the lamps in a dedicated manner, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit light in a dedicated lighting pattern.

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the shielding image 920 was displayed on the entire screen, the shielding image 920 gradually fades out. Specifically, the left and right shielding images 920L and 920R move left and right, respectively, as if a door is opening (Figure 75 (b)). During this time, the small pattern 702, the fourth pattern 705a, the first reserved number SHA, the second reserved number SHB, and the right hit notification image MH2 continue to be displayed superimposed on the shielding image 920. Meanwhile, the performance pattern 701, the background image, the first reserved icon HA, and the icon TI remain hidden. In the areas other than the left and right shielding images 920L and 920R, a reaching performance is displayed indicating that the number of times the special pattern has changed has reached a specified number.

Then, at time t9, the occlusion image 920 becomes completely hidden, and the reach effect is displayed on the entire screen (Figure 75 (c)). Even at this time, the effect pattern 701, background image, first reserved icon HA, and icon TI remain hidden. Also, the small pattern 702, fourth pattern 705a, first reserved number SHA, second reserved number SHB, and right hit notification image MH2 continue to be displayed.

Next, a second time-saving transition effect is performed, indicating a transition to the second time-saving gaming state (Figure 75 (d)). In addition, a relatively large right-hit notification image MH3 is displayed near the center of the main screen.

After that, at time t10, the effect pattern 701 fades in (Figure 75 (e)). Specifically, as shown in Figure 75 (e), for example, in the central area of the screen, an image area (the oval area in the figure; hereafter referred to as the "time-saving screen area") containing the effect pattern 701 and the time-saving background image appears. Note that at this point, the game is in the second time-saving game state, and the game ball can easily enter the second start hole 47 by the player hitting to the right. At time t10, if two game balls enter the second start hole 47, the second number reserve SHB changes to "2" as shown in Figure 75 (e).

The time-saving screen area, which includes the performance symbol 701 and the time-saving background image, expands over a predetermined period of time (Fig. 75(f)). For example, in Fig. 75(e), the middle symbol 701C and part of the surrounding background image (the time-saving background image that is then displayed on the full screen) are displayed, but as the time-saving screen area expands, in Fig. 75(f), the left symbol 701L, the right symbol 701R, and the middle symbol 701C and part of the time-saving background image are displayed. During this time, the first number reserved SHA, the second number reserved SHB, and the right hit notification image MH3 continue to be displayed, and the small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705a continue to change display.

Then, at time t11, the time-saving screen area expands to cover the entire main screen, and as the fade-in of the performance pattern 701 is completed, the background image is completely switched to the time-saving background image (Figure 76 (a)). This switches the performance mode from normal mode to time-saving mode B. Also, a right-hit notification image MH4 is displayed. Also, a second time-saving activation image JH is displayed in the upper left area of the main screen, indicating that the game is in the second time-saving game state.

The display mode of the effect pattern 701 that reappears at time t11 is different from the display mode of the effect pattern 701 at the start of the 501st fluctuation (time t5). Specifically, at the start of this fluctuation, the effect pattern 701 is in a normal mode including numbers and characters (Fig. 74 (d)), but at time t11, the effect pattern 701 is in a time-saving mode consisting of numbers only (Figs. 76 (a) and (b)). Note that the effect pattern 701 may be in a display mode exclusive to time-saving mode B, or may be in a display mode common to time-saving mode A and time-saving mode B.

Also, at time t11, the second reserve icon HB reappears together with the performance symbol 701. The second reserve icon HB that reappears here is the reserve icon that corresponds to the reservation of the second special symbol that was won at time t10. In other words, because the reserve icon is hidden between time t8 and t11, even if two game balls are won in the second starting hole 47 at time t10, the second reserve icon HB is not additionally displayed at that time. However, at time t11, two second reserve icons HB appear together with the performance symbol 701.

The second hold icon HB that appears here has a different display mode (shape) from the first hold icon HA in the normal game state and at the start of the 501st fluctuation. For example, the first hold icon HA in the normal game state and at the start of the 501st fluctuation is a diamond, and the second hold icon HB that appears at time t11 is a vertically long oval, and in the second time-saving game state, the second hold icon HB of this shape is displayed according to the number of reserved second special symbols. This difference in the shape of the hold icon does not indicate the expectation of a jackpot, like the color of the hold icon described above (blue, red, etc.). The color of the second hold icon HB can also change to a specific color (blue, green, red, gold, etc.) depending on the expectation of a jackpot.

Even if there is a hold related to the first special pattern at the start of this 501st fluctuation (fluctuation of the first special pattern), at time t11, the first hold icon HA corresponding to the first special pattern will not be displayed, and the second hold icon HB corresponding to the second special pattern will be displayed.

In addition, at time t11, the icon TI also reappears. The icon TI that reappears here is the icon corresponding to the first special symbol. That is, in the 501st variation, the icon T1 corresponding to the same first special symbol is displayed before and after the appearance of the shielding image 920. The display mode (shape) of the icon T1 changes before and after the appearance of the shielding image 920.

In addition, from time t11 onwards, the reserved pedestal image forming the area for displaying the second reserved icon HB and said icon TI differs from the reserved pedestal image in normal game mode and at the start of the 501st fluctuation. For example, before being covered by the shielding image 920, the area for displaying the first reserved icon HA and said icon TI is formed by the reserved pedestal image during normal play. After the performance pattern 701 is covered by the shielding image 920 and reappears, the area for displaying the second reserved icon HB and said icon TI is formed by the reserved pedestal image during the second time reduction.

In addition, after the performance pattern 701 is obscured by the obscuring image 920 and reappears, only the second reserve icon HB and the icon TI may be displayed, and the reserved base image may not be displayed. Also, after the performance pattern 701 is obscured by the obscuring image 920 and reappears, the second reserve icon HB may be displayed, and the icon TI may not be displayed. In other words, in the second time-saving play state, the icon TI may be hidden.

After time t11, the three effect symbols 701 stop in sequence (or simultaneously), and just before time t12, the three effect symbols 701 temporarily stop in a losing state (for example, "621") (Figure 76 (b)). Then, at time t12, the 501st special symbol fluctuation ends, and the effect symbols 701 are displayed as stopped (full stop) (Figure 76 (c)). In addition, the small symbol 702 is displayed as stopped, and the fourth symbol 705a is displayed as stopped.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, at time t13, the next special symbol starts to change (Fig. 76(d)). At time t13, a jackpot determination is made for the second special symbol that was reserved in response to the game ball entering the second starting hole 47 at time t10, and the second special symbol starts to change based on the result of the jackpot determination. As shown in Fig. 76(d), the time-saving performance symbol 701 starts, and the small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705b change. Then, the performance symbol 701 changes (Fig. 76(e)), and then, in response to the stop display of the second special symbol, the performance symbol 701, the small symbol 702, and the fourth symbol 705b are stopped (Fig. 76(f)).

In this way, at the 501st change in the special pattern after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed, a shielding effect is performed in which the performance pattern 701 is shielded (Fig. 74 (f) to Fig. 75 (b)), a reach effect is performed (Fig. 75 (c)), and a second time-saving transition effect is performed (Fig. 75 (d)). During this time, the performance pattern 701 is not displayed. Then, a fade-in effect is performed in which the performance pattern 701 reappears over a predetermined period of time (Fig. 75 (e) to (f)). The performance pattern 701 that reappears here is the performance pattern for the time-saving mode. The series of effects from when the performance pattern 701 is shielded to when it reappears is referred to here as the "time-saving introduction effect" of the second time-saving mode.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the second time-saving game state is started, a shielding effect (shielding effect when entering time-saving) that shields the effect pattern 701 is performed. In the shielding effect, an appearance effect (gradual fade-in effect) in which the shielding image 920 appears is performed, and a disappearance effect (gradual fade-out effect) in which the effect pattern 701 is no longer displayed is performed. This makes it possible to appeal to the player that the second time-saving game state is starting. In other words, by shielding the variable effect using the effect pattern 701 and performing a shielding effect that covers the entire screen, it is possible to effectively appeal to the player that a favorable state is being entered. In addition, since the shielding image 920 gradually appears while the effect pattern 701 gradually disappears, the screen can be switched smoothly without any sense of incongruity.

In addition, because the performance pattern 701 is covered and reappears after a predetermined time, it is possible to smoothly switch to the time-saving mode B, which indicates the second time-saving play state. In the normal play state, the variable performance is performed using the normal mode performance pattern 701, and in the second time-saving play state, the variable performance is performed using the time-saving mode performance pattern 701. The normal mode performance pattern 701 is covered by the blocking image 920, and when the performance pattern 701 reappears, the time-saving mode performance pattern 701 is displayed (variable display), so the performance pattern can be switched during the variable without any awkwardness.

In addition, by blocking the effect pattern 701 while it is being displayed in a changing manner, it is possible to create an unexpected effect, which can build up anticipation in the player.

In the above embodiment, a performance example in which the blocking image 920 appears while the performance pattern 701 is being changed is shown, but in other performance examples, the blocking image 920 may be made to appear when the performance pattern 701 is performing a start operation performance, blocking the performance pattern 701. Also, the blocking image 920 may be made to appear while the performance pattern 701 is temporarily stopped, blocking the performance pattern 701. Even in this case, the small pattern 702 and the fourth pattern 705 are not blocked.

In addition, while the performance pattern 701 is displayed in a stopped state (main stop), a blocking image 920 may be made to appear to block the performance pattern 701.

After transitioning to the second time-saving game state, a predetermined warning display may be performed for the player, for example, on the screen of the second image display device 71 (referred to as the "sub-screen"). The predetermined warning display is a display that calls the player's attention, for example, a warning display to prevent the player from forgetting to take the IC card for lending game balls or from becoming addicted to the game. The predetermined warning display may be performed during the second or subsequent fluctuations of the special pattern after the time-saving introduction display is performed. By performing the predetermined warning display after the time-saving introduction display, it is possible to draw the player's attention not only to the time-saving introduction display, but also to the predetermined warning display.

For example, it is possible to carry out a predetermined warning effect immediately after the second time-saving game state is set (for example, a predetermined period of time immediately after time t5), and then carry out a time-saving introduction effect after that or during that time. In this case, however, the player may be so focused on the time-saving introduction effect that he or she may not notice or pay attention to the predetermined warning effect. Even if the player notices the predetermined warning effect, if the predetermined warning effect is carried out before or during the execution of the time-saving introduction effect, the player may not be able to concentrate on the time-saving introduction effect, which may reduce the interest of the game. In the fifth embodiment, such inconveniences can be prevented by carrying out a predetermined warning effect after the time-saving introduction effect.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the specified warning display is not performed on the main screen but on the sub-screen, so that the player can focus on the display of the second time-saving game state performed on the main screen.

In addition, after the above-mentioned time-saving introduction effect, a specified warning effect may be performed on the main screen. For example, during a variable effect using effect pattern 701, a specified warning effect may be performed in a partial area of the main screen. Furthermore, when the second time-saving game state is set, such a specified warning effect may not be performed at all on either the main screen or the sub-screen.

Next, we will explain the time-saving introduction effect that occurs when the first special symbol is not reserved when the specified number of changes have occurred after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation has been performed.

Figure 77 is an example of a timing chart showing the flow of the time-saving introduction performance when the first special symbol is not reserved when a specified number of fluctuations have occurred after the RWM clear operation or the setting change operation has been performed. Figure 78 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main screen at each timing shown in Figure 77. Here, we will explain the case where the first special symbol is not reserved when the 500th special symbol fluctuation has ended after the RWM clear operation or the setting change operation has been performed, and the special symbol related to the 501st fluctuation is the second special symbol.

As shown in Figure 77, the 500th change in the special pattern after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation ends at time t4, and the fixed period ends at time t4-2 (Figure 78 (a)). At time t4-2 when the fixed period for the 500th change in the special pattern ends, the gaming machine 1 enters the second time-saving gaming state. At this point, if there is no reserved first special pattern, the gaming machine 1 enters a customer waiting state. In this case, as shown in Figure 78 (b), a start image SG indicating the start of the second time-saving gaming state and a right-hit notification image MH1 encouraging the player to hit right are displayed on the main screen. That is, as shown in FIG. 74(e), if the first special symbol is reserved at time t4-2 when the 500th special symbol change ends, the start image SG and notification image MH1 are displayed during the 501st special symbol change, but if the first special symbol is not reserved at this point, the start image SG and notification image MH1 are displayed at time t4-2 when the 500th special symbol change ends. Also, at this time t4-2, the second time-saving count display image NC has "0" remaining.

The start image SG is displayed on the main screen with priority over the performance pattern 701. In other words, the start image SG is displayed closer to the player than the performance pattern 701. Also, the right hit notification image MH1 is displayed farther back than the performance pattern 701 on the main screen. At least one of the start image SG and the right hit notification image MH1 may be displayed on the sub screen. Also, at least one of the start image SG and the right hit notification image MH1 may be displayed closer to the player than the performance pattern 701 or farther back.

After that, when the player hits the right side and the game ball enters the second starting hole 47, the second special symbol starts to change for the 501st change (time t5). As the second special symbol starts to change, the effect symbol 701 (normal mode) starts to change, and the small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705b also change (Figure 78 (c)). In this way, even if the special symbol related to the first change in the second time-saving play state is the second special symbol, the effect symbol 701 in the normal mode is displayed at the start of the change. Also, the icon TI and background image are the icon TI and background image in the normal play state.

Then, at time t6, the blocking image 920 appears (Fig. 78(d)), and at time t7, the effect pattern 701 is completely blocked (Fig. 78(e)). After that, in the same manner as shown in Fig. 75, the arrival effect and the second time-saving transition effect are performed, and the effect pattern 701 fades in. The effect pattern 701 that reappears here is the effect pattern for the time-saving mode.

In this way, if the first special symbol is not reserved at the time when the specified number of times of special symbol fluctuations have ended after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation has been performed, a right hit notification is issued to encourage the player to hit right at the time when the specified number of times of fluctuations have ended. This makes it possible to encourage the player to hit right before the occlusion image 920 notifies the player of the transition to the second time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if the first special symbol is reserved when the special symbol has finished changing the specified number of times, the next first special symbol will immediately start changing. If a right-hit notification was given at this point to encourage the player to hit right, the right-hit notification would be given suddenly, creating an unnatural effect. For this reason, if the first special symbol is reserved when the special symbol has finished changing the specified number of times, the right-hit notification will be given after the next first special symbol has started changing.

(Pre-installation mode when there is a jackpot history)
Next, the pre-introduction mode that is entered after a jackpot game is played and before a specified number of times is reached will be described, and the flow of the presentation when the time-saving introduction presentation is performed via the pre-introduction mode will be described.

The pre-introduction mode is a special presentation mode that is performed during a specified period of time before transitioning to the second time-saving play state when there is a history of jackpot play, and is performed in the normal play state. Specifically, the pre-introduction mode is performed after a jackpot play is played, from the 50th change before the second time-saving play state is set, until the change that is set to the second time-saving play state. In other words, if the special symbol changes 450 times after a jackpot play is played, the pre-introduction mode is started. Then, if the special symbol changes a specified number of times (500 times) after a jackpot play is played, the pre-introduction mode ends and transitions to time-saving mode B occurs.

Figure 79 is an example of a timing chart showing the flow of effects when entering pre-introduction mode. Figures 80 to 81 are diagrams showing examples of images displayed on the main screen at each timing shown in Figure 79.

As shown in FIG. 79, at time t0, the 450th fluctuation of the special symbol after the big win game is played ends. After a predetermined fixed period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, at time t1, the 451st fluctuation of the special symbol begins. This fluctuation is performed based on the fluctuation patterns contained in the fluctuation pattern table Tnx0. The fluctuation pattern table Tnx0 contains fluctuation patterns for executing the pre-introduction mode transition performance when transitioning to the pre-introduction mode.

As the special pattern starts to change, the normal mode performance pattern 701 starts to change, the first reserved icons HA1 and HA2 each shift to the right and start to move into the display area of the icon TI and the first reserved icon HA1, and the small pattern 702 and the fourth pattern 705a start to change (Figure 80 (a)-(b)).

While the performance pattern 701 is being displayed in a variable manner, at time t2, a pre-introduction mode transition performance is started. In the pre-introduction mode transition performance, a pre-introduction shielding image 930 appears and a shielding performance (pre-introduction shielding performance) is performed to shield the performance pattern 701. Specifically, like a door closing, a pre-introduction shielding image 930L appears from the left side of the main screen and moves to the right, and a pre-introduction shielding image 930R appears from the right side of the screen and moves to the left. The pre-introduction shielding image 930 is an image that suggests a transition to the pre-introduction mode. The pre-introduction shielding image 930 is displayed so as to cover the entire main screen over a predetermined period of time (times t2 to t3, Figure 80 (c) to (d)). Between times t2 and t3, the pre-introduction shielding image 930 and the performance pattern 701 may be displayed at the same time. In other words, during this time, there are areas that are shielded by the pre-introduction shielding image 930 and areas that are not shielded. In the area not covered by the pre-introduction shielding image 930, at least a portion of the performance pattern 701, at least a portion of the background image (normal background image), and at least a portion of the first hold icon HA and the icon TI are displayed. At time t3, the pre-introduction shielding image 930 covers the entire main screen, and the performance pattern 701, the normal background image, the first hold icon HA, and the icon TI are shielded.

On the other hand, the small pattern 702 and the fourth pattern 705a are not obscured by the pre-introduction obscuring image 930. In other words, the small pattern 702 and the fourth pattern 705a are preferentially displayed on the near side of the screen compared to the pre-introduction obscuring image 930. In addition, the first number reserved SHA and the second number reserved SHB are not obscured by the pre-introduction obscuring image 930 either.

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the pre-introduction shielding image 930 was displayed on the entire screen, the shielding image 920 gradually fades out (time t4, FIG. 80(e)). Specifically, the left and right pre-introduction shielding images 930L and 930R move left and right, respectively, as if a door is opening. During this time, the small pattern 702, the fourth pattern 705a, the first number reserved SHA, the second number reserved SHB, and the right-hit notification image MH2 continue to be displayed superimposed on the pre-introduction shielding image 930. Meanwhile, in the area where the pre-introduction shielding image 930 is not displayed, at least a part of the performance pattern 701, the pre-introduction background image, and the first reserved icon HA displayed in the pre-introduction mode are displayed.

Then, at time t5, the pre-introduction shielding image 930 becomes completely invisible, and the effect pattern 701 reappears (Figure 80 (f)). This causes a transition from normal mode to pre-introduction mode.

In the pre-introduction mode, a special (pre-introduction) performance pattern 701 including only numbers is displayed. Also, in the pre-introduction mode, a pre-introduction background image is displayed as the background image, and the display mode of the first hold icon HA1 is also different from that in the normal mode. Also, in the pre-introduction mode, the lamp control unit 150 controls the lamps in a special mode. For example, during the period in the pre-introduction mode when no reach performance is performed, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are controlled to emit light in a special lighting pattern.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80(f), the icon TI is hidden in the pre-installation mode, but the icon TI may be displayed in the pre-installation mode.

In FIG. 80(f), the three performance patterns 701 are temporarily stopped at time t5 when the pre-introduction shielding image 930 becomes completely hidden, but at this point, the performance patterns 701 may be performing a variable display performance.

Then, at the next time t6, the three effect symbols 701 are displayed as still symbols in response to the end of the special symbol variation (Fig. 81(a)). At this time, the small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705a are also displayed as still symbols. At the subsequent time t7, the 452nd special symbol variation begins (Fig. 81(b)), and the variation performance in the pre-introduction mode begins (Fig. 81(c)). For the 452nd and subsequent special symbol variations, a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table Tnx1.

As shown in FIG. 81, in the pre-introduction mode, a pre-introduction mode image DMG indicating that the mode is pre-introduction mode is displayed on the main screen (or sub-screen). In addition, a pre-introduction countdown effect is performed on the main screen (or sub-screen) using a countdown image CDG indicating the remaining number of times the special symbol will change until the second time-saving gaming state is set. The pre-introduction countdown effect is an effect in which the number indicated by the countdown image CDG decreases with each change of the special symbol. As shown in FIG. 80(f), in the 451st change, the number indicated by the countdown image CDG is "50", but as shown in FIG. 81(b), in the 452nd change, the number indicated by the countdown image CDG decreases to "49".

The countdown image CDG is always displayed when switching to the pre-introduction mode. The countdown image CDG may be temporarily hidden while the special symbols are changing in the pre-introduction mode. For example, if a jackpot change pattern or a reach change pattern is selected in the pre-introduction mode, the countdown image CDG may be hidden while the special symbols are changing.

The countdown image CDG may be updated (the numbers may be decreased) at time t6 when the special symbol stops, or at time t7 when a predetermined fixed period of time has elapsed since the special symbol stopped. The countdown image CDG may also be updated when the next special symbol starts to change.

In the pre-introduction mode, a performance is performed that makes the player expect to transition to the second time-saving game state. For example, a character on the player's side is displayed on the screen, and a performance is displayed in which the character aims to achieve a predetermined mission. For example, a scene in which the character on the player's side and an enemy character fight is displayed, and a performance in which the characters attack each other each time the special symbol changes may be displayed. If the number of remaining changes of the special symbol until the second time-saving game state is set decreases, that is, if the result of the jackpot determination is a miss, the pre-introduction mode continues. In this case, in the change performance, for example, a performance in which the character on the player's side evades or withstands an attack from an enemy character is performed, and the continuation of the pre-introduction mode is notified, and the result of the jackpot determination is notified. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the number of remaining changes of the special symbol until the second time-saving game state is set is reset, and the end of the pre-introduction mode is notified in the change performance based on the result of the jackpot determination. Then, when the change of the special symbol ends, the jackpot game is performed.

The game count display image GC is also displayed in the pre-introduction mode. Note that the game count display image GC may be hidden in the pre-introduction mode.

In this way, if there is a history of jackpot play, the pre-introduction mode is set for a predetermined period before the second time-saving play state is set, and the countdown image CDG notifies the player of the number of remaining changes until the second time-saving play state is set. This can heighten the player's expectations for the second time-saving play state, improving interest.

In addition, in the predetermined number of changes (451 times) after a jackpot play is played, a shading effect (pre-introduction shading effect) is performed in which the pre-introduction shading image 930 is used to shading the performance pattern 701 while the change of the performance pattern 701 is being displayed (or it may be during the starting operation). This makes it possible to emphasize that the pre-introduction mode is starting rather than a change effect using the performance pattern 701. In the predetermined number of changes after a jackpot play, a special change pattern table Tnx0 is set, so that the above-mentioned effect can be performed to transition to the pre-introduction mode in the predetermined number of changes.

In addition, during the period from when the pre-introduction mode is set to when the game transitions to the second time-saving game state, a special variation pattern table Tnx1 is set. This allows for sufficient variation time to execute the special effects using the above-mentioned characters during each variation of the special symbols.

Next, we will explain the flow of the presentation when the time-saving introduction presentation is performed via the pre-introduction mode.

Figure 82 is an example of a timing chart showing the flow of the presentation when the time-saving introduction presentation is performed via the pre-introduction mode. Figure 83 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main screen at each timing shown in Figure 82.

As shown in FIG. 82, at time t0, the 500th variation of the special symbols after the jackpot game is played ends (FIG. 83(a)). Here, three performance symbols 701 are displayed frozen, indicating that the jackpot determination result was a miss. At this time, the countdown image CDG is "1".

Next, when a fixed period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, at time t1, the second time-saving game state is set and the 501st change related to the reservation of the first special symbol is started (Fig. 83 (b)). Also, at time t1, the countdown image CDG is updated to "0". Also, in response to the start of the change of the special symbol, the performance symbol 701 starts to change, the first reservation icon HA1 is erased, and the small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705a display changes (Fig. 83 (b)-(c)).

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the first special symbol started to change, an achievement effect is performed at time t2 (Fig. 83 (d)). The achievement effect is an effect indicating a transition to the second time-saving game state (time-saving mode B). The achievement effect is performed only if a specified number of changes have occurred since a jackpot game was played, and is not performed if a specified number of changes have occurred since an RWM clear operation or setting change operation was performed. In addition, the above-mentioned time-saving entry blocking effect is performed before or after the achievement effect. Note that if the pre-introduction mode is used, the achievement effect may be performed without the above-mentioned time-saving entry blocking effect being performed.

While the achievement performance is in progress, the performance symbol 701, background image, reserved icon, and the icon TI are obscured. On the other hand, the small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705a continue to be displayed and continue to change even while the achievement performance is in progress. In addition, the first number reserved SHA and the second number reserved SHB also continue to be displayed.

The achievement performance is advantageous to the player and is performed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10-15 seconds). For example, in the achievement performance, a moving image is displayed on the main screen indicating that the player's character has accomplished a mission. In addition, in the achievement performance, a performance using the performance parts (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) may be performed. In addition, in the achievement performance, a performance is performed by the lamp control unit 150 (a performance in which the frame lighting device 10, the movable performance device 73, the board lighting device 74, etc. are illuminated in a specific manner).

After the achievement effect, a reach effect is performed at time t3 (FIG. 83(e)). The reach effect performed here is the same as the reach effect (FIG. 75(c)) that is performed when a specified number of changes have occurred since the RWM clear operation or setting change operation was performed. After that, a second time-saving transition effect similar to that of FIG. 75(d) is performed.

Then, at time t4, the effect pattern 701 fades in as in Figures 75(e)-(f), and the transition from the pre-introduction mode to time-saving mode B is completed (Figure 83(f)). The effect in time-saving mode B is as described above.

In Figures 82 and 83, in the pre-introduction mode, the 501st change is based on the reservation of the first special symbol, but if there is no reservation of the first special symbol when the 500th change (the specified number of changes) is completed, the machine will transition to a customer waiting state and the same performance as in Figure 78 (b) will be performed.

Figure 84 shows an example of a presentation that occurs when the first special symbol is not reserved at the end of the specified number of fluctuations in the pre-introduction mode.

As shown in Figure 84, if there is no reserved first special symbol at time t0 when the 500th fluctuation is completed, the state transitions to a customer waiting state. In the customer waiting state, as shown in Figure 84 (b), a start image SG indicating the start of the second time-saving game state and a right-hit notification image MH1 encouraging the player to hit to the right are displayed.

Then, when the player hits the right side and the game ball enters the second starting hole 47, the second special symbol starts to change (time t1, FIG. 84(c)). After that, as in FIG. 83, an achievement effect is performed at time t2, and a reach effect is performed at time t3 (FIG. 84(d)-(e)). Then, at time t4, the effect symbol 701 fades in, and the transition to time-saving mode B is completed (FIG. 84(f)).

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, if the special symbol changes a prescribed number of times after a jackpot game is played, the time-saving introduction effect is performed via the pre-introduction mode. If the time-saving introduction effect is performed via the pre-introduction mode, a dedicated achievement effect is performed. By performing the achievement effect from the pre-introduction mode, the player is drawn to the attention of whether or not the character will achieve the mission, and the player can be satisfied by the achievement of the mission. This can increase the interest of the effect when transitioning to the second time-saving game state.

The blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode is only executed when the player is in the second time-saving mode. Specifically, it is executed the first time the special symbol changes after the player transitions to the second time-saving mode. The pre-introduction mode is only executed when the player is in the normal mode.

The time-saving entry shielding effect may be executed in the normal game state. For example, the time-saving entry shielding effect may be performed in the change of the special symbol before the transition to the second time-saving game state. For example, the time-saving entry shielding effect may be performed in the change of the special symbol one time before the transition to the second time-saving game state, and the effect symbol 701 may be shielded, and the effect symbol 701 may appear in the previous change and transition to time-saving mode B. Also, the time-saving entry shielding effect may be performed in the change of the special symbol one time before the transition to the second time-saving game state, and the previous change may end when the effect symbol 701 is shielded, and the effect symbol 701 may appear in the next or subsequent change (the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) and transition to time-saving mode B. In this case, the small symbol 702 may be displayed even while the effect symbol 701 is shielded, and the small symbol 702 may be used to indicate that the special symbol has stopped displaying and started to change.

(An example of reach effects in normal gaming mode)
Next, the reach effect performed in the normal game state other than the introduction mode will be explained. The reach effect is an effect using the effect pattern 701, and is an effect that makes the player expect a big win. Specifically, the reach effect is an effect in which the same kind of effect pattern 701 is temporarily stopped on the left and right, and the effect pattern 701 fluctuates in the middle area, and is an effect that makes the player expect that the same kind of effect pattern 701 as the effect pattern 701 temporarily stopped on the left and right will stop in the middle area.

In the fifth embodiment, the reach effects include a normal reach effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "N reach"), an SP reach effect, and an SPSP reach effect. The N reach effect is the effect with the lowest possibility of a subsequent jackpot (also called jackpot expectation or reliability) among multiple reach effects. For example, the jackpot expectation of an N reach effect is 1% or less. Note that there may be multiple N reach effects with different (or the same) performance times and/or jackpot expectation.

The SP reach performance is a performance with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the N reach performance, and is a reach performance with a longer performance time than the N reach performance. For example, the expectation of a jackpot for the SP reach performance is 5 to 10%. Note that there may be multiple SP reach performances as SP reach performances. The expectation of a jackpot differs depending on each SP reach performance, and the performance time may also differ. It may be configured so that the longer the performance time of the SP reach performance, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

The SPSP reach performance is a performance with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the SP reach performance, and a longer performance time than the SP reach performance. For example, the expectation of a jackpot for the SPSP reach performance is 30-50%. Note that there may be multiple SPSP reach performances as the SPSP reach performance. The expectation of a jackpot differs depending on each SPSP reach performance, and the performance time may also differ. It may be configured so that the longer the performance time of the SPSP reach performance, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

(Example of SPSP reach performance)
Hereinafter, an example of the SPSP reach effect performed in a normal gaming state other than the introduction mode will be described. An example of the SPSP reach effect when a miss is notified and when a big win is notified will be described.

(Example of SPSP reach effect when the result of the jackpot judgment is a miss)
Fig. 85 is a timing chart showing an example of the presentation when the SPSP reach presentation is performed when the result of the big win judgment performed in the normal game state other than the introduction mode is a miss. Figs. 86 to 88 are diagrams showing an example of the presentation at each timing of Fig. 85.

In a normal game state, for example, when the 101st special pattern starts to change from a big win game (time t1), the three stop-displayed performance patterns 701 start to change, and the performance patterns 701, small patterns 702, and fourth patterns 705 are displayed in a changing manner (Fig. 86 (a) to (b)). At time t3 during the display of the performance patterns 701, a notice performance may be performed (Fig. 86 (c)). The notice performance is a performance that suggests the possibility of a big win, and the expectation of a big win is suggested depending on the mode of the notice performance. The type of reach performance (SP reach, SPSP reach) and the content (which of the multiple SPSP reaches it is) that will be performed later may be suggested depending on the mode of the notice performance. In addition, a pseudo-changing performance using multiple performance patterns 701 may be performed once or multiple times. The pseudo-variation effect is an effect in which one of the multiple performance symbols 701 temporarily stops and then changes again, and the more times the performance symbol 701 pseudo-varies, the higher the chance of a big win. Note that even when the performance symbol 701 pseudo-stops in this pseudo-variation effect, the small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705 continue to display the variation without pseudo-stopping.

When a predetermined time (e.g., 5 to 20 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the left symbol (e.g., the "6" symbol) temporarily stops (Fig. 86(d)). Furthermore, after a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds) has elapsed, the right symbol of the same type as the left symbol temporarily stops, and a reach is established (time t4, Fig. 86(e)). When a reach is established, a reach notification is issued to indicate that a reach has been established. For example, an image spanning the left and right symbols may be displayed, or the sound "reach" may be output.

After the reach is established at time t4, the N reach performance is performed from time t4 to time t5 (Figure 86 (f)). During the N reach performance, the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped, and the middle symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The N reach performance is performed for a predetermined time (e.g., 8 to 10 seconds). This allows the player to expect that the middle symbol of the same type as the left and right symbols will stop. During this time, the normal background image is displayed, and the first hold icon HA and the icon TI are displayed. Also, during the N reach performance, the performance symbol 701 is displayed in a normal form including characters and numbers, and its size is the same as when the variation started. Note that the size of the performance symbol 701 may change during the N reach performance. For example, as the middle symbol approaches the central area from the top of the screen, the normal middle symbol may be displayed larger (or smaller) than the left and right symbols. During the N-reach performance, the lamp control unit 150 causes the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 to emit light in a lighting pattern that indicates the possibility of a jackpot.

Next, an SP development performance is performed, which suggests that the N reach performance will progress to the SP reach performance (Fig. 87(a)). In the SP development performance, a display is made to indicate that the SP reach performance will start. For example, a title display is made to suggest the type of SP reach performance to be performed. For example, one of a plurality of title displays, including a first title display corresponding to the first SP reach performance and a second title display corresponding to the second SP reach performance, is displayed. The expectation of a big win differs depending on the type of these title displays and the display mode (for example, the color of the characters and background). Also, as shown in Fig. 87(a), the left and right patterns are displayed as they shrink and move to the left and right areas above the main screen. In addition, in the N reach performance, a middle pattern of a type different from the left and right patterns may temporarily stop, a reach miss may be temporarily notified, and then the SP development performance may be performed. In this case, after the reach miss, the SP development performance is performed without displaying the after-reach blocking image described later.

Next, at time t5, the SP reach performance begins (Figure 87 (b)). During the SP reach performance, the performance symbols in the SP reach mode are temporarily stopped on the left and right of the screen, and a performance in which the center symbol changes is performed. The performance symbols in the SP reach mode are performance symbols that include number images but do not include characters, and are smaller than the performance symbols in the normal mode. In addition, the central area of the main screen displays, for example, a scene in which the player's character and an enemy character fight. In addition, a background image for the SP reach performance is displayed as the background image.

In addition, during the SP reach performance, the icon TI is displayed, but the first hold icon HA is hidden. Note that in other embodiments, the first hold icon HA may be displayed during the SP reach performance.

On the other hand, the small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705 are displayed even during the SP Reach performance, and their positions and display modes do not change. Also, the first number reserve SHA and the second number reserve SHB are displayed even during the SP Reach performance, and their positions and display modes do not change. Also, during the SP Reach performance, the lamp control unit 150 causes the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 to emit light in a lighting pattern that indicates the possibility of a jackpot.

The SP Reach performance lasts for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 20 seconds). If a jackpot is announced as a result of the SP Reach performance, the player's character wins and the same type of middle symbol as the left and right stops. On the other hand, if a loss is announced as a result of the SP Reach performance, the player's character loses and a different middle symbol from the left and right stops.

As a result of the SP reach performance, a big win or miss is not announced, and immediately before time t6, an SPSP development performance is performed, suggesting that the SP reach performance will progress to an SPSP reach performance (Figure 87 (c)). Note that as a result of the SP reach performance, a center pattern different from the left and right may temporarily stop, temporarily announcing a reach miss, and then an SPSP development performance may be performed. In this case, after the reach miss, the SPSP development performance is performed without displaying the post-reach blocking image described below.

In the SPSP development performance, a display is made to indicate that the SPSP reach performance will start. For example, a title is displayed to suggest the type of SPSP reach performance that will be executed. The probability of winning varies depending on the type of title display and the display mode (for example, the color of the text and background).

Next, at time t6, the SPSP reach performance starts (Figure 87 (d)). During the SPSP reach performance, for example, a fighting scene following the SP reach performance is displayed. During the SPSP reach performance, the performance symbols of the SPSP reach mode are temporarily stopped on the left and right of the screen, and a performance in which the middle symbol changes is performed. The performance symbols of the SPSP reach mode are performance symbols that include number images and do not include characters, and are smaller than the performance symbols of the normal mode. In addition, a background image for the SPSP reach performance is displayed as a background image. In addition, during the SPSP reach performance, the icon TI and the first reserved icon HA are hidden. The small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705 are displayed during the SPSP reach performance, and their positions and display modes do not change. In addition, the first number reserved SHA and the second number reserved SHB are displayed during the SPSP reach performance, and their positions and display modes do not change. During the SPSP reach performance, the lamp control unit 150 causes the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 to emit light in a lighting pattern that indicates the possibility of a jackpot.

The SPSP reach performance is performed for a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds). At time t7, which is the end of the SPSP reach performance, the result of the SPSP reach performance is displayed (FIG. 87(e)). Here, since the jackpot determination at the start of the current special pattern fluctuation has determined that the jackpot has been lost, at time t7, a middle pattern of a type different from the left and right patterns is temporarily stopped. This notifies the player that the reach has been lost. In addition, just before the result of the SPSP reach performance is displayed, an operation performance may be performed to prompt the player to operate the performance button device 16. Then, the player may be notified that the reach has been lost in response to the operation of the performance button device 16. In addition, when a reach loss is displayed, the lamp control unit 150 causes the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 to emit light in a lighting pattern that indicates a reach loss.

After the reach miss is notified, at time t8, the post-reach shielding image 940 appears on the main screen (FIG. 87(f)). For example, the post-reach shielding image 940 appears in the central area of the main screen and shields the middle symbol. The post-reach shielding image 940 is enlarged over a predetermined time (FIG. 88(a)) and covers the entire main screen (FIG. 88(b)). While the post-reach shielding image 940 is displayed on the entire screen, the lamp control unit 150 controls the lamps in a specific mode, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit light in a specific light emission pattern. The light emission patterns of the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 may be the same or different when the reach miss is not reached and when the post-reach shielding image 940 is being displayed.

The post-reach shielding image 940 is an image that shields the performance pattern 701, background image, first hold icon HA, and the icon TI, and is displayed in front of these images. Therefore, while the post-reach shielding image 940 is displayed full screen, these images are not displayed. The post-reach shielding image 940 is enlarged and displayed over the entire screen over a predetermined period of time. Therefore, between the time when the post-reach shielding image 940 appears and the time when it is displayed full screen, the post-reach shielding image 940 and the performance pattern 701 may be displayed simultaneously.

Note that the post-reach shielding image 940 may change from a transparent state to an opaque state over a predetermined period of time, so that the post-reach shielding image 940 shields the performance symbol 701 and the background image over a predetermined period of time. Even in this case, the post-reach shielding image 940 and the performance symbol 701 may be displayed simultaneously from the time the post-reach shielding image 940 appears until it is displayed on the full screen.

On the other hand, the small symbol 702, the fourth symbol 705, the first reserved number SHA, and the second reserved number SHB are not blocked by the post-reach blocking image 940. In other words, even while the post-reach blocking image 940 is displayed full screen, the small symbol 702, the fourth symbol 705, the first reserved number SHA, and the second reserved number SHB continue to be displayed. Specifically, these images are placed in front of the post-reach blocking image 940 and are displayed preferentially.

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the post-reach shielding image 940 was displayed on the entire screen, the post-reach shielding image 940 fades out and the performance pattern 701 fades in (time t9). For example, as shown in FIG. 88(c), an elliptical area is formed in the center of the post-reach shielding image 940, and an image including a part of the temporarily stopped performance pattern 701 and a part of the background image (normal background image) is displayed in the elliptical area. The elliptical area expands over a predetermined time (FIG. 88(d)). As the elliptical area expands, the normal screen (the normal background image, the performance pattern 701, the first hold icon HA, and an image including the icon TI) at the back of the post-reach shielding image 940 is displayed so that it gradually reappears.

Then, just before time t10, the post-reach occlusion image 940 becomes invisible, and the reappearance of the performance pattern 701 is completed (Figure 88 (e)). Here, the temporarily stopped performance pattern 701 reappears. In addition, the normal background image is displayed, and the first hold icon HA and the icon TI are also displayed. Note that when the performance pattern 701 reappears, the background image for the SPSP reach performance may be displayed instead of the normal background image.

Then, at time t10, in response to the stopped display of the special symbol, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 701 is stopped and the small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705 are stopped (Figure 88 (f)).

Here, the performance pattern 701 that reappears after the post-reach shielding image 940 is displayed is a normal performance pattern including a character image and a number image. On the other hand, before the post-reach shielding image 940 is displayed, the performance pattern 701 is an SPSP reach-type performance pattern that includes only number images. In other words, the display mode of the performance pattern 701 is different before and after the post-reach shielding image 940 is displayed.

Also, before the post-reach shielding image 940 is displayed, the background image for the SPSP reach effect is displayed, but after the post-reach shielding image 940 is displayed, the normal background image is displayed.

In addition, before the post-reach shielding image 940 is displayed, the first hold icon HA and the icon TI are hidden, but after the post-reach shielding image 940 is displayed, the first hold icon HA and the icon TI are displayed.

As described above, after the SPSP reach performance is performed and the reach is missed, a shading performance (post-reach shading performance) is performed in which the post-reach shading image 940 is used to shading the performance pattern 701. This shading performance can give hope to the player even when a reach miss is announced as a result of the SPSP reach performance with a high expectation of a jackpot. In other words, even if the reach is missed in which a center pattern different from the left and right patterns is stopped, the shading of the performance pattern 701 can give hope that a jackpot may occur later (three patterns will line up).

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, after a reach miss occurs, the post-reach shielding image 940 appears in a small size, and as it expands, the performance pattern 701 gradually becomes more difficult to see. This allows the player to gradually regain their sense of expectation and increase their interest, even if they are disappointed by a reach miss.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, after the post-reach shielding image 940 is displayed, the post-reach shielding image 940 is gradually hidden, and the temporarily stopped performance pattern 701 gradually reappears. As a result, the temporarily stopped performance pattern 701 gradually becomes visible from a difficult-to-see state, which creates expectations and anxiety in the player, thereby increasing the interest.

Note that the post-reach shielding image 940 is not necessarily displayed when an SPSP reach performance is performed; it may or may not be displayed depending on the variation pattern of the special symbol or based on the lottery results using a performance random number based on the variation pattern.

For example, when a first SPSP reach performance is performed in which the expectation level of the multiple SPSP reach performances is a first value (e.g., the probability of a jackpot being 40% or more), the post-reach shielding image 940 may be displayed after a missed reach with a first probability. Also, when a second SPSP reach performance is performed in which the expectation level of the multiple SPSP reach performances is a second value (e.g., the probability of a jackpot being 20% to 30%), the post-reach shielding image 940 may be displayed after a missed reach with a second probability that is lower (or higher) than the first probability.

The displayed post-reach shielding image 940 may be different or the same when the first SPSP reach performance is performed and when the second SPSP reach performance is performed. The display time of the post-reach shielding image 940 may be different or the same when the first SPSP reach performance is performed and when the second SPSP reach performance is performed.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the hold icon and the icon are hidden during the SPSP reach performance, and the hold icon and the icon are also hidden while the post-reach shielding image 940 is displayed. In other embodiments, the hold icon and/or the icon may be displayed during the SPSP reach performance, and the hold icon and/or the icon may be displayed while the post-reach shielding image 940 is displayed.

In the above example, a miss is announced after the post-reach shielding image 940 is displayed, but in other examples, a jackpot may be announced after a miss and then the post-reach shielding image 940 is displayed. For example, a jackpot may be announced by the appearance of the performance pattern 701 in a temporarily stopped state (a pattern alignment state in which three performance patterns 701 are aligned) that indicates a jackpot after the post-reach shielding image 940 is displayed.

In addition, in the case of a jackpot, the same post-reach shielding image 940 as in the case of a miss may be displayed, or a different type of post-reach shielding image 940 may be displayed. For example, if a red post-reach shielding image 940 is displayed after a miss, the possibility of a jackpot may be higher than when a blue post-reach shielding image 940 is displayed. In addition, the possibility of a jackpot may differ depending on the type of post-reach shielding image 940 displayed after a miss. In addition, if a specific image is included in the post-reach shielding image 940 displayed after a miss, a jackpot may be confirmed. In addition, the display time of the post-reach shielding image 940 may be longer (or shorter) in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss. In addition, the longer the display time of the post-reach shielding image 940, the higher (or lower) the possibility of a jackpot may be than when the display time is short.

In addition, after a missed reach is provisionally notified in the SP reach performance, a post-reach shielding image 940 may be displayed, after which the above-mentioned SPSP development performance may be performed.

The probability of a jackpot occurring after the post-reach shielding image 940 is displayed is relatively low. For example, it is set to a lower probability than the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination (e.g., 1/200). This increases the rarity of the presentation pattern that results in a jackpot from the post-reach shielding image 940, and increases the player's satisfaction when that presentation occurs. The probability of a jackpot occurring after the post-reach shielding image 940 is displayed may be set to be higher than the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination.

In the fifth embodiment, in addition to the presentation pattern in which the presentation pattern 701 reappears in a pattern-matching state after the shielding presentation using the post-reach shielding image 940, there is also a presentation pattern in which a revival presentation is performed in which the presentation pattern 701 changes again and then a jackpot is announced after a reach miss is announced in the SPSP reach presentation. In the revival presentation, a jackpot may be announced by the appearance of a performance device. Before this revival presentation, the post-reach shielding image 940 does not have to be displayed. Also, the post-reach shielding image 940 may be displayed before the revival presentation.

Although the above effects are performed in the normal game state other than the introduction mode, a series of effects including the above SPSP reach effect may also be executed in the pre-introduction mode. For example, a series of effects including the above SPSP reach effect may be performed in the change to transition to the pre-introduction mode. In this case, after the special pattern starts to change, a pre-introduction occlusion effect is performed and transition is made to the pre-introduction mode, after which an N reach, SP reach, and SPSP reach may be performed as described above, and a post-reach occlusion image may be displayed. Conversely, a series of effects including the above SPSP reach effect may not be performed in the pre-introduction mode.

The series of effects including the SPSP reach effect may also be performed during the first change after the specified number of times is reached (the first change in the second time-saving game state). In this case, after the special symbol starts changing, a blocking effect is performed when entering the time-saving game state, and then an N reach, SP reach, and SPSP reach may be performed in that order, and a blocking image after the reach may be displayed. The series of effects including the SPSP reach effect may also be performed during the second or subsequent changes after the specified number of times is reached. Conversely, the series of effects including the SPSP reach effect may not be performed in the second time-saving game state after the specified number of times is reached.

Note that even if the variable performance ends with the SP reach performance without progressing to the SPSP reach performance, the post-reach shielding image is displayed in the same manner as above. In other words, after a miss is announced as a result of the SP reach performance (after a reach miss), the post-reach shielding image is displayed in the same manner as above.

Specifically, after the SP reach performance in FIG. 87(b) is performed, instead of executing the SPSP development performance in FIG. 87(c), the center symbol indicating a miss (for example, a "5" symbol different from the left and right) temporarily stops and a reach miss is displayed. After the reach miss, as shown in FIG. 87(f) to FIG. 88(b), a post-reach blocking image appears and blocks the missing performance pattern 701 over a predetermined period of time. Then, as shown in FIG. 88(e), after the post-reach blocking image is displayed for a predetermined period of time, the temporarily stopped performance pattern 701 appears.

The post-reach shielding image displayed after the SP reach performance may be the same as the post-reach shielding image displayed after the SPSP reach performance, or it may be different. Also, the display time of the post-reach shielding image after the SP reach performance may be the same as the display time of the post-reach shielding image after the SPSP reach performance, or it may be shorter or longer.

In addition, if the variable performance ends with the N reach performance without progressing to the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance, the post-reach shielding image will not be displayed. In other words, if a reach miss is notified as a result of the N reach performance, the post-reach shielding image will not be displayed after the reach miss.

Specifically, after the N reach effect is performed in FIG. 86(f), instead of executing the SP development effect in FIG. 87(a), the middle symbol indicating a miss stops and a reach miss effect is performed. After the reach miss effect, the post-reach blocking image is not displayed, and the effect symbol 701 of the provisionally stopped miss mode is displayed.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, in a reach effect (SPSP reach effect, SP reach effect) in which the expectation of a jackpot is relatively high, if the effect pattern 701 is displayed in a manner indicating a miss, a blocking effect (post-reach blocking effect) is performed in which the effect pattern 701 in a manner indicating a miss is blocked using a post-reach blocking image. After the post-reach blocking image is displayed for a predetermined period of time, the effect pattern 701 in a temporarily stopped state reappears, and then the effect pattern 701 is displayed stopped.

This reduces the disappointment felt by the player when the reach effect builds up high hopes and the player ends up missing the chance, and keeps the player's hopes up even after the reach effect has failed. Also, even if the reach effect fails, the player can have hope that the next change or later will result in a big win.

On the other hand, when a reach effect (N reach effect) in which the expectation of a jackpot is relatively low is performed, the effect pattern 701 is displayed in a manner indicating a miss, and then the post-reach blocking image does not appear, and the effect pattern 701 is displayed stationary in a manner indicating a miss. This makes it possible to prevent the post-reach blocking image from appearing too frequently, and to increase the value of the post-reach blocking image.

The post-reach shielding effect may be executed only in the normal game state. The post-reach shielding effect may also be executed not only in the normal game state but also in the time-saving game state. In this case, the post-reach shielding effect may be executed more easily in the normal game state than in the time-saving game state. Conversely, the post-reach shielding effect may be executed more easily in the time-saving game state than in the normal game state.

(Example of a performance when a jackpot is announced as a result of the SPSP reach performance)
Next, an example of a presentation in which a jackpot is announced as a result of the SPSP reach presentation when the result of the jackpot determination performed in a normal game state other than the introduction mode is a jackpot will be described.

Figure 89 is a timing chart showing an example of a presentation in which a reach hit is announced in the SPSP reach presentation when the result of the jackpot determination performed in a normal game state other than the introduction mode is a jackpot. Figures 90 to 91 are diagrams showing examples of presentations at each timing in Figure 89.

As shown in Figures 89 and 90, from time t1 to just before t7, the same effects as those shown in Figures 86 to 87 (d) are performed. At time t7, as a result of the SPSP reach effect, the same type of effect pattern 701 as the left and right effect patterns 701 temporarily stops as a center pattern, thereby announcing a reach hit (Figure 90 (b)).

Next, at time t8, a jackpot notification effect is performed (Figure 90 (c)). In the jackpot notification effect, three identical effect patterns 701 are enlarged and displayed on the main screen, and the effect patterns 701 are highlighted. Also, at this time, a jackpot background image is displayed to suggest that a jackpot has been generated.

Next, at time t9, three of the same type of performance patterns 701 are temporarily stopped at normal size (Figure 90 (d)). Here, the performance pattern 701 in the normal mode including a character image and a number image may be temporarily stopped. Also, the performance pattern 701 of a number image that does not include a character image (a performance pattern in a reach mode) may be temporarily stopped. Also, at time t9, the first hold icon HA and the icon TI are also displayed. Note that the first hold icon HA and the icon TI may remain hidden at time t9.

Then, in response to the special symbol being stopped at time t10, the effect symbol 701 is stopped (Figure 90(e)). In response to the special symbol being stopped, the small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705 are stopped in the form of a jackpot.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the special symbol was stopped and displayed, the opening performance begins (Figure 90 (f)). In the opening performance, a performance is performed to indicate that a jackpot game is about to start, and a right-hit notification performance is performed to encourage the player to hit the right.

Next, the jackpot game is started, and the jackpot game presentation for the first round in the jackpot game is started (FIG. 91(a)). In the jackpot game presentation, a round number display image 780 indicating the number of remaining rounds is displayed. In addition, the number of prize balls acquired by the player is displayed as a jackpot game presentation. For example, the total number of prize balls acquired in the current jackpot game may be added up and displayed, or the number of prize balls associated with each entry of a game ball into a jackpot entry port may be displayed. In addition, in the jackpot game presentation, a character on the player's side may be displayed.

When the jackpot game progresses and the final round of the jackpot game ends, an ending performance is performed (Figure 91 (b)). In the ending performance, a performance is performed that suggests entering time-saving mode A (any of time-saving modes A1 to A3), and, for example, a right-hit notification image is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen to encourage the player to hit right.

In addition, in the ending presentation, a predetermined warning presentation is displayed on the main screen to alert the player (Figure 91 (c)). For example, the predetermined warning presentation may be a presentation to alert the player not to forget to remove the IC card, or a warning to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game.

Then, when the ending performance ends, at time t11, if there is a reserved first special symbol, the display changes to the reserved first special symbol, and if there is no reserved first special symbol, the display changes to the second special symbol in response to a win in the second starting hole 47 (Figure 91 (d)). Here, time-saving mode A is set, and a right-hit notification performance is performed to encourage the player to hit right.

In time-saving mode A, a variable effect is performed using a time-saving effect pattern 701 that includes a number image but does not include a character image. In addition, a time-saving background image is displayed as a background image. Here, time-saving background images JA1 to JA3 corresponding to the time-saving modes A1 to A3, respectively, may be prepared. In addition, the time-saving background image JA1 corresponding to the time-saving mode A1 and the time-saving background image JA2 corresponding to the time-saving mode A2 may be different from the time-saving background image corresponding to the time-saving mode B, and the time-saving background image JA3 corresponding to the time-saving mode A3 may be the same as the time-saving background image corresponding to the time-saving mode B.

In addition, in time-saving mode A, the second reserved icon HB is displayed according to the number of reserved changes in the second special pattern, and the icon TI corresponding to the special pattern that is changing is displayed. The shapes of the second reserved icon HB and the icon TI in time-saving mode A may be the same as or different from the shapes of the second reserved icon HB and the icon TI in time-saving mode B. In addition, the shapes of the second reserved icon HB and the icon TI may be different between the time-saving mode A1 and the time-saving modes A2 and A3.

In addition, in time-saving mode A, only the second hold icon HB may be displayed, and the icon TI may be hidden. In addition, in time-saving mode A, a remaining time-saving number display (remaining N times) indicating the remaining number of time-saving times, which is not displayed in time-saving mode B, may be displayed. Note that the remaining time-saving number display may also be displayed in time-saving mode B.

In this way, when a jackpot is announced by a reach hit as a result of the SPSP reach performance, the three performance patterns 701 are temporarily stopped in a jackpot mode without the above-mentioned post-reach shielding image 940 being displayed. This allows the jackpot to be announced from the SPSP reach performance, and the game to proceed smoothly to the jackpot game. Note that the post-reach shielding image may also be displayed after a reach hit is displayed as a result of the SPSP reach performance.

In addition, if a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination performed in the normal game mode other than the introduction mode, the three performance symbols 701 stop in the jackpot mode before the variable display of the special symbols ends, and then the game transitions to the time-saving game state via the jackpot game, so it takes a relatively long time from when the three performance symbols 701 stop in the jackpot mode until the game transitions to the time-saving game state. In contrast, if a jackpot is determined to be a miss in the jackpot determination immediately after the specified number of times is reached, the introduction shielding image is displayed before the variable display of the special symbols ends, and the game transitions to the time-saving game state at the timing when the special symbols stop after a relatively short time has passed. This allows the time until the game transitions to the time-saving game state to be different when an advantageous event (display of the introduction shielding image, display of an image indicating a jackpot) is performed by the player, allowing a variety of games to be played, and the game transitions to the time-saving game state in a relatively short time when the introduction shielding image is displayed.

Note that Figures 89 to 91 show the case where a jackpot is announced in the SPSP reach performance, but when a jackpot is announced as a result of the SP reach performance, the same type of center pattern as the left and right will temporarily stop to announce the reach hit, and then, as with the above, no post-reach blocking image will be displayed.

In addition, in Figures 89 to 91, the effects when a jackpot is determined to have occurred in a normal game state other than the introduction mode are described, but for example, even if a jackpot is determined to have occurred during the pre-introduction mode, effects similar to those in Figures 89 to 91 may be performed. Note that, conversely, if a jackpot is determined to have occurred during the pre-introduction mode, a special effect different from the above may be performed.

(Example of non-reach performance)
Hereinafter, an example of the presentation in the case where the reach presentation is not performed when the result of the jackpot determination performed in the normal game state other than the introduction mode is a miss will be described. Fig. 92 is a timing chart showing an example of the presentation in the case where the reach presentation is not performed when the result of the jackpot determination performed in the normal game state other than the introduction mode is a miss. Figs. 93 to 94 are diagrams showing an example of the presentation at each timing in Fig. 92.

In normal game mode, for example, when the special symbol starts changing for the 101st time from the big win game (time t1), the three display symbols 701 that were stopped start changing, and the display symbols 701, small symbols 702, and fourth symbols 705 change (Fig. 93(a)). After the display symbols 701 start changing, the display symbols 701 perform a changing display display (time t2, Fig. 93(b)).

Next, at time t3, a changing shielding image 950 appears, shielding the changing display of the performance pattern 701 (Figure 93 (c)). For example, the changing shielding image 950 appears from the right edge of the main screen and gradually expands. As shown in Figure 93 (c), while the changing shielding image 950 is expanding, the performance pattern 701 and part of the background image remain displayed. At time t4, a predetermined time after the appearance of the changing shielding image 950, the changing shielding image 950 is displayed across the entire main screen (Figure 93 (d)).

When the in-flight shielding image 950 is displayed across the entire main screen, the performance symbol 701, background image, and game count display image GC are shielded by the in-flight shielding image 950. Also, while the in-flight shielding image 950 is displayed across the entire screen, the lamp control unit 150 controls the lamps in a special mode, and the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 74 are controlled to emit light in a specified light emission pattern.

On the other hand, the first reserved icon HA1 and the icon TI are not obscured by the changing obscuring image 950. In addition, the small symbol 702, the fourth symbol 705, the first reserved number SHA, and the second reserved number SHB are not obscured by the changing obscuring image 950. In other words, these images continue to be displayed even while the changing obscuring image 950 is displayed. Note that the game count display image GC may continue to be displayed without being obscured by the changing obscuring image 950.

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the entirety of the performance pattern 701 is covered by the changing occlusion image 950, the changing occlusion image 950 fades out and the performance pattern 701 fades in (Figure 93 (e)). Specifically, a part of the changing occlusion image 950 becomes invisible, and an image including the normal background image and the performance pattern 701 is displayed in the hidden area.

Then, the display area of the changing shielding image 950 gradually shrinks, while the area including the normal background image and the effect pattern 701 expands, and at time t5, the reappearance of the effect pattern 701 is completed (Figure 93 (f)). At this time t5, the effect pattern 701 in a temporarily stopped losing state is displayed. Also, at this time, the small pattern 702 and the fourth pattern 705 continue to be displayed changing. Then, in response to the stopped display of the special pattern, the effect pattern 701 is displayed as stopped (time t6). Also, in response to the stopped display of the special pattern, the small pattern 702 and the fourth pattern 705 are also displayed as stopped.

Figure 94 shows an example of a presentation in which three presentation symbols 701 stop in a predetermined order without the changing obscuring image 950 being displayed when the result of the jackpot determination is a miss.

As shown in Figure 94, in response to the start of the special pattern fluctuation, the three performance patterns 701 start to fluctuate (Figure 94(a)), and a fluctuating display performance is performed for a predetermined time (Figure 94(b)). After that, the left pattern 701L temporarily stops, then the right pattern 701R of a different type from the left pattern 701L temporarily stops, and then the center pattern 701C temporarily stops (Figures 94(c)-(e)). Then, in response to the stopped display of the special pattern, the three performance patterns 701 are displayed stopped (Figure 94(f)).

In this way, when the result of the jackpot determination is a miss, the three performance symbols 701 usually stop in a predetermined order without the variable shielding image 950 appearing. Note that the order in which the three performance symbols 701 stop is not limited to this. Also, there may be multiple orders in which the three performance symbols 701 stop. For example, the three performance symbols 701 may stop in a first order (e.g., left, right, center) or in a second order (e.g., right, left, center). In this case, the expectation of a jackpot may differ depending on the order in which the three performance symbols 701 stop. For example, the second order may have a higher expectation than the first order.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, while the display of the changing performance pattern 701 is in progress, a blocking effect (blocking effect during change) may be performed in which the changing blocking image 950 is used to block the performance pattern 701. In the blocking effect, an appearance effect is performed in which the changing blocking image 950 gradually appears, and a disappearance effect is performed in which the performance pattern 701 gradually becomes invisible. Because the performance pattern 701 is blocked while the display of the changing performance pattern 701 is in progress, an unexpected effect can be performed, raising the player's expectations.

In addition, the changing occlusion image 950 appears gradually, so when part of it is displayed, it can pique the player's interest in what will happen next.

In addition, the changing obscured image 950 gradually fades out, and the effect pattern 701 in the temporarily stopped state gradually fades in. Therefore, when a part of the effect pattern 701 appears, the player can have hope that the effect pattern 701 in the jackpot mode may appear.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the first hold icon HA and the icon TI continue to be displayed even while the performance pattern 701 is being blocked by the changing blocking image 950. This allows the player to easily recognize that the special pattern is continuing to change, even if the performance pattern 701 being displayed while changing is suddenly blocked.

In addition, when the changing occlusion image 950 is not displayed, the three performance patterns 701 stop in a predetermined order, and when the changing occlusion image 950 is displayed, the three performance patterns 701 do not stop in a predetermined order. This makes it possible to diversify the actions taken when stopping the performance patterns 701, thereby improving the entertainment value.

The timing at which the changing occluding image 950 appears is not limited to when the performance pattern 701 is changing. For example, the changing occluding image 950 may appear during the start operation of the performance pattern 701. The changing occluding image 950 may also appear while the performance pattern 701 is temporarily stopped.

In addition, in the above, when the performance pattern 701 reappears after the changing obscuring image 950 is displayed, it appears in a temporarily stopped state, but when the performance pattern 701 reappears, some of the three performance patterns 701 may be in a changing display and some of them may be temporarily stopped, or all three performance patterns 701 may be in a changing display.

In addition, FIG. 93 shows an example in which the changing obscuring image 950 is displayed and then the performance pattern 701 appears in a losing mode, but in other performance examples, the changing obscuring image 950 may be displayed and then the performance pattern 701 in a winning mode may appear.

Also, after the changing shielding image 950 is displayed, the changing display pattern 701 may reappear, and then, as shown in Figures 86 to 88, a reach may be established, and the display may progress to an N reach display, an SP reach display, and an SPSP reach display, in that order of increasing expectations. In this case, the reach may be missed and a post-reach shielding image may be displayed, or the reach may be a hit. Also, after the changing shielding image 950 is displayed, the changing display pattern 701 may appear, and then a reach may be established, and an N reach display may be performed, resulting in a reach miss. In this case, the display pattern 701 may stop being displayed without a post-reach shielding image being displayed.

In addition, after the changing shielding image 950 is displayed, the performance pattern 701 may appear with a reach being established, and then an N reach performance or the like may be performed. In this case, there may be a case where the reach is hit after that, or the reach is missed and a shielding image is displayed after the reach, or the reach is missed and the display remains stationary.

In addition, when the changing shielding image 950 is displayed, it may be easier or harder for the performance to progress to a reach performance than when the changing shielding image 950 is not displayed.

In addition, the changing shielding image 950 may be displayed, and as the changing shielding image 950 becomes invisible, an image may appear suggesting that a specific presentation with a high expectation of a jackpot (for example, the above-mentioned SPSP reach presentation or another presentation) will develop, and the specific presentation may develop. In addition, after the changing shielding image 950 is displayed, an image may appear suggesting that there is a possibility that the specific presentation will develop, and after the image is displayed, the specific presentation may or may not develop.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the time for which the changing shielding image 950 is displayed varies depending on the changing pattern of the special symbol. Sometimes the changing shielding image 950 is displayed for a relatively long time, and sometimes it is displayed for a short time. That is, the display time of the changing shielding image 950 is variable. For example, the display time of the changing shielding image 950 may vary between 1 second and 20 seconds. The longer the display time of the changing shielding image 950, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

The obscuration effect during fluctuation may be executed only in the normal game state. The obscuration effect during fluctuation may be executed not only in the normal game state but also in the time-saving game state. In this case, the obscuration effect during fluctuation may be executed more easily in the normal game state than in the time-saving game state. Conversely, the obscuration effect during fluctuation may be executed more easily in the time-saving game state than in the normal game state. The obscuration effect during fluctuation may be executable in the first time-saving game state and not executable in the second time-saving game state, or vice versa.

(Characteristics of each obscuration effect)
As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the game is shifted to the second time-saving game state, a shielding effect (shielding effect at the time of entering the time-saving game) is performed in which the shielding image 920 is used to shield the performance symbol 701. In addition, during a predetermined period before the variation of the special symbol reaches a specified number of times after the big win game is played, a pre-introduction mode is set, which suggests a shift to the second time-saving game state. When the pre-introduction mode is set, a shielding effect (pre-introduction shielding effect) is performed in which the performance symbol 701 and the like are shielded using the pre-introduction shielding image 930. In addition, after a reach miss occurs in the reach performance, a shielding effect (post-reach shielding effect) may be performed in which the performance symbol 701 is shielded using the post-reach shielding image 940. In addition, even if the reach performance is not performed (even before the reach is established), a shielding effect (shielding effect during variation) may be performed in which the performance symbol 701 is shielded using the variable shielding image 950. Below, the characteristics of each of these shielding effects will be described with reference to FIG. 95.

Figure 95 shows an example of the characteristics of each obscuration effect.

(Blocking effect when entering time-saving mode)
As shown in FIG. 95, the obscuring effect when entering the time-saving mode is executed when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches a specified number after a jackpot game has been played, or after an RWM clear operation or setting change operation has been performed.

The execution timing of the blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode is a fixed timing during the first change of the special symbol after the specified number of times has been reached. For example, the execution timing may be during the start operation of the effect symbol 701, during the changing display effect, or during a temporary stop. Also, the execution timing of the blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode differs depending on whether or not there is a jackpot history. In other words, the execution timing of the blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode differs after the specified number of times has been reached after a jackpot game has been played and after the specified logarithm has been reached after an RWM clear operation or a setting change operation has been performed.

In other embodiments, the timing of the blocking effect when the time-saving feature is entered may be when the fluctuation stops a specified number of times. Also, the timing of the blocking effect when the time-saving feature is entered may be variable depending on the fluctuation pattern. In other words, the timing at which the blocking effect when the time-saving feature is entered starts in the fluctuation may be set depending on the fluctuation pattern.

The pre-introduction mode is also executed as a suggestive effect that indicates the blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode. The pre-introduction mode is executed over the variation of multiple special symbols, and indicates the number of variations remaining until the blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode is executed. The pre-introduction mode actively (directly) indicates that the blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode will be executed. When the pre-introduction mode is entered, the blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode will always be executed unless a jackpot is played during that time.

The execution time of the blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode (the time the effect pattern 701 is blocked) is fixed regardless of whether the change time of the special pattern is long or short. For example, the execution time of the blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode is fixed whether the first change of the special pattern after reaching the specified number of times results in a normal miss effect without a reach effect (when a miss change pattern is selected) or a reach effect (when a reach change pattern is selected).

There are cases where the blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode is executed without going through the pre-introduction mode, and cases where the blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode is executed through the pre-introduction mode, and the execution time of the blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode differs between the two cases. In other words, the execution time of the blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode differs depending on whether or not there is a jackpot history. Specifically, the execution time of the blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode is longer when the blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode is executed through the pre-introduction mode than when the blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode is executed without going through the pre-introduction mode.

In other embodiments, the execution time of the blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode may be shorter when the blocking effect is executed via the pre-introduction mode. The execution time of the blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode may be the same whether the blocking effect is executed via the pre-introduction mode or not. In other embodiments, the execution time of the blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode may be variable depending on the fluctuation pattern. For example, the execution time of the blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode may be longer in a jackpot fluctuation pattern or a reach fluctuation pattern, and shorter in a miss fluctuation pattern.

In addition, while the time-saving feature is in progress, the reserved icon and the icon in question will be hidden. The background image will also be hidden.

In addition, after the time-saving entry blocking effect is executed, the display mode of the effect pattern 701 will be different from that before the blocking effect is executed. For example, when the time-saving entry blocking effect is executed in normal mode, the normal mode effect pattern 701 including character images and number images is displayed before the time-saving entry blocking effect is executed, and the time-saving mode effect pattern 701 including only number images is displayed after the time-saving entry blocking effect is executed. In addition, when the time-saving entry blocking effect is executed in pre-introduction mode, the pre-introduction mode effect pattern 701 consisting of number images is displayed before the time-saving entry blocking effect is executed, and the time-saving mode effect pattern 701 is displayed after the time-saving entry blocking effect is executed.

Furthermore, after the time-saving entry blocking effect is executed, the reserved icon and the icon are displayed, and the display mode of these changes. Specifically, the shapes of the reserved icon and the icon change before and after the time-saving entry blocking effect is executed. The color of the reserved icon indicating the expected jackpot does not change before and after the time-saving entry blocking effect is executed. Note that the color of the reserved icon indicating the expected jackpot may change before and after the time-saving entry blocking effect is executed. For example, the reserved icon may be displayed in a color indicating the expected jackpot before the time-saving entry blocking effect is executed, and may be displayed in a normal color after the time-saving entry blocking effect is executed. Furthermore, the reserved icon may be displayed in a color having a first expected jackpot (e.g., blue) before the time-saving entry blocking effect is executed, and in a color having a second expected jackpot higher than the first expected jackpot (e.g., red) after the time-saving entry blocking effect is executed.

In addition, after the time-saving blocking effect is activated, the background image changes. For example, the normal background image is displayed before the time-saving blocking effect is activated, and the time-saving background image is displayed after the time-saving blocking effect is activated.

In other words, the presentation mode will change before and after the blocking effect is performed when the time-saving feature is activated. Specifically, it will switch from normal mode or pre-installation mode to time-saving mode B.

(Pre-installation shielding effect)
The pre-introduction shielding effect is executed when the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times before the specified number of times after a jackpot game is played. Specifically, the pre-introduction shielding effect is executed at the 451st change after a jackpot game is played.

The execution timing of the pre-introduction shielding effect is a fixed timing during the 451st change of the special pattern. For example, the execution timing is during the start operation performance of the performance pattern 701 or during the change display performance.

In other embodiments, the timing of the execution of the pre-introduction occlusion effect may be when the fluctuation stops for a predetermined number of times. Also, the timing of the execution of the pre-introduction occlusion effect may be variable depending on the fluctuation pattern.

In addition, a suggestive effect that suggests a pre-introduction shielding effect is not executed. Since the game count display image GC indicates the number of times the special symbol has changed since the gaming machine 1 was powered on, the player can understand to some extent the timing when the pre-introduction shielding effect will be executed by the game count display image GC. However, since the game count display image GC is reset when the gaming machine 1 is powered off, it does not accurately display the number of times the special symbol has changed after a jackpot game has been played. For this reason, it can be said that the game count display image GC does not actively (directly) suggest a pre-introduction shielding effect. In addition, there may be a suggestive effect that suggests a pre-introduction shielding effect. A suggestive effect that suggests a pre-introduction shielding effect may always be executed a specified period before the pre-introduction shielding effect is executed, or may be executed with a specified probability.

The execution time of the pre-introduction occlusion effect (the time that the effect pattern 701 is occluded) is fixed whether the fluctuation time of the special pattern is long or short. The execution time of the pre-introduction occlusion effect is fixed whether a normal miss effect is performed without a reach effect, or whether a reach effect is performed. Note that the execution time of the pre-introduction occlusion effect may be variable depending on the fluctuation pattern.

In addition, while the pre-installation occlusion effect is in progress, the hold icon and the icon in question will be hidden. The background image will also be hidden.

In addition, after the pre-introduction shielding effect is executed, the display mode of the effect pattern 701 changes. Specifically, before the pre-introduction shielding effect is executed, the normal mode effect pattern 701 including the character image and the number image is displayed, but after the pre-introduction shielding effect is executed, the pre-introduction mode effect pattern 701 including only the number image is displayed.

After the pre-introduction occlusion performance is executed, the reserved icon is displayed, but the icon is not displayed. After the pre-introduction occlusion performance is executed, the display mode of the reserved icon changes. Specifically, the shape of the reserved icon changes before and after the pre-introduction occlusion performance is executed. The color of the reserved icon indicating the expected probability of a jackpot does not change before and after the pre-introduction occlusion performance is executed. In other words, the color of the reserved icon indicating the expected probability of a jackpot is maintained before and after the pre-introduction occlusion performance is executed. The color of the reserved icon indicating the expected probability of a jackpot may change before and after the pre-introduction occlusion performance is executed.

After the pre-introduction occlusion performance is performed, the icon may be displayed. In this case, the display mode (shape) of the icon may change.

In addition, after the pre-introduction occlusion performance is performed, the background image changes. Specifically, the normal background image is displayed before the pre-introduction occlusion performance is performed, and the pre-introduction background image is displayed after the pre-introduction occlusion performance is performed.

In other words, the presentation mode will change before and after the pre-introduction occlusion presentation is performed. Specifically, it will switch from normal mode to pre-introduction mode.

(After-reach cover effect)
The after-reach shielding effect is executed according to the change pattern selected at the start of the special symbol change, regardless of the number of times the special symbol changes. Specifically, the after-reach shielding effect is executed when the change pattern corresponding to the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is selected.

The timing of the post-reach blocking effect is variable from the start of the special symbol fluctuation, and is determined according to the fluctuation pattern. The timing of the post-reach blocking effect is the timing after a reach miss occurs in a reach effect where the expectation of a jackpot is relatively high, and is the timing when a relatively long time has passed since the special symbol began to fluctuate. In contrast, the blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode is executed a relatively short time after the special symbol began to fluctuate. The pre-introduction blocking effect is also executed a relatively short time after the special symbol began to fluctuate.

Also, a suggestive effect suggesting a post-reach blocking effect is not executed. In other embodiments, a suggestive effect suggesting a post-reach blocking effect may be executed. In this case, whether or not to execute a suggestive effect suggesting a post-reach blocking effect is determined by lottery. Even if it is determined that a post-reach blocking effect will be executed, the suggestive effect will not necessarily be executed. In this case, the rate at which a suggestive effect of a post-reach blocking effect is executed is relatively low, and is lower than the rate at which a pre-introduction mode suggesting a blocking effect at the time of entering a time-saving mode is executed. The pre-introduction mode suggesting a blocking effect at the time of entering a time-saving mode is not executed by lottery, but is always executed after a predetermined number of fluctuations after a jackpot game. A suggestive effect suggesting a post-reach blocking effect may be present. Even if a suggestive effect suggesting a post-reach blocking effect is executed, the post-reach blocking effect may not necessarily be executed afterwards, and there may be cases where the post-reach blocking effect is executed and cases where it is not executed. When a suggestive effect that suggests a post-reach occlusion effect is executed, the post-reach occlusion effect may be more likely to be executed than when the suggestive effect is not executed.

The execution time of the post-reach blocking effect (the time the effect pattern 701 is blocked) is fixed. The execution time of the post-reach blocking effect is shorter than the execution time of the blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode. The execution time of the post-reach blocking effect is also shorter than the execution time of the pre-introduction blocking effect. Note that the execution time of the post-reach blocking effect may be longer than the execution time of the blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode and/or the pre-introduction blocking effect. The execution time of the post-reach blocking effect may also differ depending on the fluctuation pattern. In other words, the execution time of the post-reach blocking effect may be variable. In this case, the expectation of a jackpot may differ depending on the length of the execution time of the post-reach blocking effect.

In addition, while the post-reach shielding effect is being performed, the reserved icon and the icon in question will be hidden. The background image will also be hidden.

After the post-reach shielding effect is executed, the display mode of the effect pattern 701 changes from before the post-reach shielding effect is executed. Specifically, before the post-reach shielding effect is executed, the effect pattern 701 in the reach mode composed of number images is displayed, but after the post-reach shielding effect is executed, the effect pattern 701 in the normal mode is displayed. Note that when comparing before the reach is established and during the N-reach effect with after the post-reach shielding effect is executed, the display mode of the effect pattern 701 does not change before and after the post-reach shielding effect is executed.

In addition, after the post-reach blocking effect is executed, the reserved icon and the icon in question are displayed. After the post-reach blocking effect is executed, the display mode of the reserved icon and the icon in question is the same as the display mode of the reserved icon and the icon in question when they were displayed before the post-reach blocking effect is executed. In other words, the shape of the reserved icon and the icon in question after the post-reach blocking effect is executed is the same as the shape of the reserved icon and the icon in question before they were hidden by the reach effect.

The reserved icon and the color of the icon indicating the likelihood of a jackpot are the same before it is hidden by the reach performance and after the post-reach blocking performance is executed. Note that the reserved icon and the color of the icon indicating the likelihood of a jackpot may be different before it is hidden by the reach performance and after the post-reach blocking performance is executed. Also, while the color of the reserved icon is the same before it is hidden by the reach performance and after the post-reach blocking performance is executed, the color of the icon may be different before it is hidden by the reach performance and after the post-reach blocking performance is executed. Also, while the color of the reserved icon may be different before it is hidden by the reach performance and after the post-reach blocking performance is executed, the color of the icon may be the same before it is hidden by the reach performance and after the post-reach blocking performance is executed.

The background image also changes before and after the post-reach shielding effect is executed. Specifically, before the post-reach shielding effect is executed, it is a reach background image, and after the post-reach shielding effect is executed, it is a normal background image. Note that when comparing the background image before the reach is established and during N reach with the background image after the post-reach shielding effect is executed, the background image does not change before and after the post-reach shielding effect is executed.

In addition, the presentation mode will not change before or after the post-reach occlusion presentation is performed.

(Occluded effect during change)
The blocking effect during the change is executed according to the change pattern of the special symbol, regardless of the number of times the special symbol changes. The blocking effect during the change may be executed when a change pattern corresponding to the reach effect is selected, when a miss change pattern is selected, or when a big win change pattern is selected.

The timing of the blocking effect during change is variable from the start of the special symbol change. That is, the blocking effect during change may be executed at a first timing from the start of the special symbol change, or at a second timing. The blocking effect during change is executed a relatively short time after the special symbol starts changing, and is executed during the changing display effect of the effect symbol 701. The blocking effect during change may also be executed during the start operation effect of the effect symbol 701.

In addition, a suggestive effect that suggests a blocking effect during a change is not executed. The blocking effect during a change may be executed continuously over the change of multiple special symbols based on the result of a prior determination. In this case, the first blocking effect during a change can be said to be an effect that suggests a second blocking effect during a change of the next special symbol, but it is not a dedicated effect that directly (actively) suggests the second blocking effect during a change. In other words, when the blocking effect during a change is executed continuously over the change of multiple special symbols, each blocking effect during a change is an independent effect in itself and does not directly suggest a blocking effect during a change in another change. In addition, there may be a suggestive effect that suggests a blocking effect during a change. Even if a suggestive effect that suggests a blocking effect during a change is executed, it is not necessary that a blocking effect during a change is executed afterwards, and there may be cases where a blocking effect during a change is executed and cases where a blocking effect during a change is not executed afterwards. When a suggestive effect that suggests a blocking effect during a change is executed, it may be easier for a blocking effect during a change to be executed than when the suggestive effect is not executed.

When a blocking effect during fluctuation is executed, a suggestive effect suggesting a blocking effect during fluctuation may be executed. In this case, the rate at which a suggestive effect suggesting a blocking effect during fluctuation is executed is lower than the rate at which a suggestive effect suggesting a blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode (pre-introduction mode) is executed. In other words, a suggestive effect suggesting a blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode is more likely to be executed than a suggestive effect suggesting a blocking effect during fluctuation.

The execution time of the obscuring effect during fluctuation (the time during which the effect pattern 701 is obscured) is variable depending on the fluctuation pattern. For example, the execution time of the obscuring effect during fluctuation may vary between 1 and 20 seconds. The expectation of a jackpot may differ depending on the execution time of the obscuring effect during fluctuation. In other words, one of multiple obscuring effects during fluctuation, including a first obscuring effect during fluctuation having a first execution time and a second obscuring effect during fluctuation having a second execution time, may be selected and executed based on the fluctuation pattern. For example, the longer the execution time of the obscuring effect during fluctuation, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. Conversely, the longer the execution time of the obscuring effect during fluctuation, the lower the expectation.

The execution time of the first blocking effect during fluctuation may be shorter than the execution time of the blocking effect at the time-saving entry, the pre-introduction blocking effect, and the post-reach blocking effect, and the execution time of the second blocking effect during fluctuation may be longer than the execution time of the blocking effect at the time-saving entry, the pre-introduction blocking effect, and the post-reach blocking effect. For example, by making the execution time of the first blocking effect during fluctuation (the display time of the blocking image during fluctuation) shorter than the execution time of the post-reach blocking effect (the display time of the blocking image after reach), the blocking effect during fluctuation can momentarily raise expectations, while also raising expectations when the reach is missed. Furthermore, by making the execution time of the second blocking effect longer than the execution time of the post-reach blocking effect, the blocking effect during fluctuation can suddenly raise expectations and maintain those expectations for a certain period of time, and also raise expectations for a moment when the reach is missed.

The pending icon and the icon in question will also be displayed while the variable obscuration effect is in progress.

In addition, the display mode of the performance pattern 701 is the same before and after the execution of the occlusion performance during change.In addition, the display mode (shape) of the pending icon and the icon is the same before and after the execution of the occlusion performance during change.

In addition, while the variable obscuration effect is being performed, the reserved icon indicating the likelihood of a jackpot and the color of the icon may be able to change.

In addition, the background image does not change before and after the execution of the occlusion effect during change. In other words, the normal background image is maintained after the execution of the occlusion effect during change. Note that after the occlusion effect during change is executed, the normal background image may be displayed, and then it may progress to a specific effect and change to the background image corresponding to the specific effect.

In addition, the presentation mode will not change before or after the variable obscuration presentation is performed.

As described above, each obscuring effect has different triggers, execution timing, the presence or absence of suggestive effects, execution time, performance mode, changes to other images before and after execution, etc., but also have commonalities. The commonality is that they all obscure the performance pattern 701. By having such obscuring effects that obscure the performance pattern 701 occur at various times and for various reasons, it is possible to greatly increase the sense of excitement of moving to an advantageous state, greatly increase expectations, reduce disappointment and provide a slight sense of hope, or provide an element of surprise, thereby improving the interest of the gaming machine as a whole.

In addition to the above-mentioned effects, other blocking effects may be performed. For example, a zone effect (one example of a pre-determination effect) involving the variation of one or more special symbols may be performed based on the first pre-determination process executed in response to winning at the first starting port 45, and a blocking effect that blocks the effect pattern 701 may be performed when entering the zone effect. After the blocking effect is performed, a background image dedicated to the zone effect is displayed, and a display is made indicating that the zone effect is in progress. Also, the effect pattern 701 dedicated to the zone effect may be displayed. Also, when a reserved icon or an effect in which the icon changes is executed, an effect that blocks the effect pattern, reserved icon, etc. may be performed.

In the above embodiment, the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is displayed as stopped after the time-saving entry blocking effect, but the special symbol (second special symbol) may change and stop multiple times during the time-saving entry blocking effect. In this case, the change and stop of the special symbol is notified by the change and stop of the small symbol. Also, if there is no jackpot history, the second special symbol may change and stop multiple times during the time-saving entry blocking effect, and if there is a jackpot history, the time-saving entry blocking effect may be performed during one change of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol).

In addition, in the above embodiment, the blocking effect is executed when the time-saving mode is entered during the first change after the specified number of times has been reached, but this effect may also be executed during the specified number of changes (the change immediately before the second time-saving mode is set).

In addition, the blocking effect at the time of entering the time-saving mode may be executed from the specified number of fluctuations (the fluctuation immediately before the second time-saving mode is set) to one or more fluctuations after the second time-saving mode is set. In other words, the blocking effect at the time of entering the time-saving mode may be executed across the end of the specified number of fluctuations.

The performance control unit 130 executes the above-mentioned time-saving entry shielding performance in response to a command (fluctuation start command) from the main control unit 100 during the first fluctuation after the specified number of times has been reached. If the performance control unit 130 does not normally receive the fluctuation start command during the first fluctuation after the specified number of times has been reached, the time-saving entry shielding performance is not performed and the game transitions to the second time-saving game state. For example, if the fluctuation start command for the first fluctuation after the specified number of times has been reached is not received, the first fluctuation ends without the time-saving entry shielding performance being performed, and if the fluctuation start command for the second (or third or later) fluctuation is received, the game transitions to time-saving mode B without the time-saving entry shielding performance being performed.

(Lamp control after skipping the second time reduction)
Next, lamp control in the case where a transition is made to the normal gaming state without a jackpot being played in the second time-saving gaming state will be described.

Figure 96 shows an example of lamp control when the second time-saving game state transitions to the normal game state without a jackpot being played.

As shown in FIG. 96, when the RWM clear operation or the setting change operation is performed when the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the normal game state is set. In this case, the lamp control by the lamp control unit 150 is in the normal mode according to the normal mode. In the normal mode lamp control, the frame lighting device 10, the movable performance device 73, the board lighting device 74, the performance button light-emitting LED 17c, etc. are controlled according to the execution status of the variable performance during the fluctuation of the special pattern. For example, before the reach performance in the variable performance, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit light in a white mode that does not indicate the expectation level. During the reach performance in the variable performance, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit light in a mode that indicates the expectation level according to the type of reach performance. For example, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit light in a red color or a blue color according to the expectation level during the reach performance. The light color and light pattern of the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 may change depending on the type of reach performance being executed (N reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance). Also, when a jackpot is announced (when the performance patterns 701 are aligned), the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 will emit light in a jackpot light pattern, and the movable performance device 73 will operate. Also, during a jackpot game, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 will emit light in a jackpot light pattern. Also, during the post-reach shielding performance and the variable shielding performance, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 will emit light in the predetermined light pattern set for each.

If the power is cut off at time t1 shown in FIG. 96 without a jackpot being played following the RWM clear operation or setting change operation, and the power is then restored, a recovery process is performed. This recovery process restores the number of operations n to the value before the power was cut off. During the recovery process, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are controlled in a recovery mode. For example, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are controlled to flash in a specific pattern indicating that a recovery process is in progress. When the recovery process is completed normally and play is possible, the lamp control returns to the normal mode.

After that, when 500 fluctuations have occurred since the RWM clear operation or setting change operation, the above-mentioned time-saving entry occlusion effect is performed. During the time-saving entry occlusion effect, etc., lamp control is performed in a specific manner. After that, the second time-saving game state is set. During the second time-saving game state, lamp control is performed in the time-saving mode.

If the special symbols change the number of times set for the time-saving feature in the second time-saving game state, the gaming machine 1 transitions to the normal game state. As a result, the lamp control returns to the normal mode.

After that, if the power is cut at time t2 without a jackpot being played and the power is restored, a recovery process is performed. During the recovery process, the lamp control goes into the recovery mode described above. In this recovery process, the value of the number of activations n is restored to the state before the power was cut (set to "0"). Also, the value of the second time-saving history flag, which indicates that the second time-saving game state has been executed, is restored to the state before the power was cut. Here, since the second time-saving game state had already been executed and the game had returned to the normal game state before the power was cut, the second time-saving history flag is set to "ON".

When the recovery process is complete, the player is able to play, the game is played in normal game mode, and the presentation mode is normal. However, the lamp control goes into warning mode. Specifically, when the power is restored, the main control unit 100 sends the value of the number of activations n and the value of the second time-saving history flag to the presentation control unit 130. Based on this, the lamp control unit 150 controls the lamp in warning mode after the recovery process.

In the warning mode, for example, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit light in a special light emission pattern indicating that the second time-saving mode has been skipped. For example, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 flash red at a shorter cycle than in the normal mode. This lamp control in the warning mode continues, for example, until a jackpot is determined to have occurred in the jackpot determination and the jackpot pattern stops. Furthermore, the lamp control in the warning mode may continue until the jackpot game starts or ends. Furthermore, the lamp control in the warning mode may continue until the first time-saving game state after the jackpot game is set.

This lamp control in warning mode continues even when the special symbol is stopped or changing. For example, lamp control in warning mode is performed even when the special symbol is changing and a reach effect is being displayed in the changing effect. In other words, the light emission pattern corresponding to the lamp control in warning mode takes precedence over the light emission pattern corresponding to the reach effect in the normal mode, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit light.

By controlling the lamp in a warning mode in this way, it is possible to inform the player or the arcade staff that the second time-saving game state has been skipped. This allows the staff to reset the gaming machine 1 (RWM clear) and make it possible for the second time-saving game state to occur. Although skipping the second time-saving game does not occur frequently, it does not occur due to fraud or a malfunction of the gaming machine. For this reason, if the skipping of the second time-saving game is notified using, for example, an image or sound, the player or the staff may mistakenly think that an abnormality has occurred, which may confuse the player or the staff. For this reason, in the fifth embodiment, the skipping of the second time-saving game state is notified by the lamp control unit 150 causing the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 to emit light.

When a specific performance is executed, lamp control corresponding to the specific performance may be prioritized over lamp control in the warning mode. For example, when a specific error is detected, lamp control corresponding to the specific error may be prioritized over lamp control in the warning mode. The specific error may occur, for example, when an abnormal winning is detected (e.g., winning into a large winning slot when neither a big win nor a small win is being played), when an open door is detected, when magnetism is detected, etc. Note that the above-mentioned lamp control in the warning mode may be prioritized over lamp control corresponding to the detection of a specific error. Also, during the execution of a specific reach performance (e.g., SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance), lamp control corresponding to the specific reach performance may be prioritized over lamp control in the warning mode.

In addition, the lamp control in the warning mode is not limited to control of the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 to emit light in a special light emission pattern, but may also be control of emitting light from a performance button or from a light-emitting means provided on a handle.

In addition, lamp control in the warning mode may be performed only for a predetermined period of time after power is restored. For example, it may be performed until the special pattern changes a predetermined number of times. In addition, lamp control in the warning mode may be terminated depending on the time that has elapsed since power was restored.

(Third time shortened game state due to special losing symbol)
In the gaming machine according to the above embodiment, the jackpot determination for the first special symbol or the second special symbol determines whether the game is a jackpot, a small jackpot, or a miss. In the gaming machine according to the modified example, the jackpot determination for the special symbol may result in a special miss in which time reduction is granted in addition to a jackpot, a small jackpot, or a miss. The special miss (special miss symbol) will be described below.

Specifically, the jackpot determination table used in jackpot determination includes random number values that are determined to be jackpots, random number values that are determined to be small wins, random number values that are determined to be misses, and random number values that are determined to be special misses. For example, when a jackpot determination is made for the first special symbol, a special miss may be determined with a probability of 1/500. When a special miss is determined in the jackpot determination, after a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, a special miss symbol C, for example, is displayed stationary on the first special symbol display 60.

Even if the special losing symbol C stops, no big win game will be played. In other words, the special losing symbol C indicates that the result of the big win determination is a loss. When the special losing symbol stops, the game is set to a time-saving game state. Here, the time-saving game state that is set in response to the special losing symbol stopping is called the "third time-saving game state."

The third time-saving game state may be configured to have the same time-saving performance (the time for changing the normal symbols and the time for opening the second start hole 47) as the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state. In other words, the third time-saving game state may be configured to be a state in which it is easy to win the second start hole 47, just like the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state.

The third time-saving game state may be configured to have different time-saving performance from the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state. The third time-saving game state may be a state in which it is more difficult to win at the second start hole 47 than in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, or may be a state in which it is practically impossible to win at the second start hole 47.

In addition, multiple special losing symbols may be prepared, and a transition may be made to a third time-saving game state having different time-saving performance (the change time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the second start port 47) depending on the special losing symbol. Also, the number of time-saving times in the third time-saving game state may differ depending on the special losing symbol.

Here, in the gaming machine according to the first modified example, the third time-saving gaming state is a state in which it is more difficult to win at the second starting hole 47 than the first time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state. The gaming machine according to the first modified example will be described below.

(First Modification)
In the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, the variation time of the normal symbol is sufficiently short (e.g., 1 second), and the opening time of the second start hole 47 when the normal symbol judgment determines that a win has been made is sufficiently long (e.g., 5 seconds). Therefore, when the player hits to the right, the game ball is likely to enter the second start hole 47, and the game ball enters the second start hole 47 in a relatively short time.

On the other hand, in the first modified example, in the third time-saving game state, the opening time of the second start hole 47 is only slightly longer than in the normal game state. For example, the opening time of the second start hole 47 is "0.05 seconds" in the normal game state, but is set to "0.051 seconds" in the third time-saving game state. Alternatively, in the third time-saving game state, the change time of the normal symbol may be slightly shorter than in the normal game state. For example, the change time of the normal symbol may be "30 seconds" in the normal game state, but may be set to "29.5 seconds" in the third time-saving game state.

For this reason, in the third time-saving game state, it is slightly easier for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 47 than in the normal game state, but the game ball does not enter the second starting hole 47 as easily as in the first and second time-saving game states. The ease of entering the second starting hole 47 in the third time-saving game state is substantially the same as in the normal game state. Here, the time-saving game state in which the ease of entering the second starting hole 47 is substantially the same as in the normal game state is referred to as the "slight time-saving state."

In the gaming machine according to this first modified example, a normal gate is also provided in the left play area. In the micro-time-saving state, play is performed by hitting from the left, just like in the normal play state. The same variation pattern table is used in the micro-time-saving state and the normal play state.

In addition, in the normal game state, when a win is determined in the normal pattern determination, the opening time of the second start hole 47 is set to 0.05 seconds at a rate of 100%, and in the micro-time-saving state, the opening time of the second start hole 47 may be set to 0.05 seconds at a rate of 499/500, or 3 seconds at a rate of 1/500. Even in such a configuration, in the micro-time-saving state, it is slightly easier for the game ball to enter the second start hole 47 than in the normal game state, but it is more difficult to enter the second start hole 47 than in the first time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state, and the ease of entering the second start hole 47 in the micro-time-saving state is substantially the same as in the normal game state. If the opening time of the second starting hole 47 is short (0.05 seconds), the right hit notification will not be given while the second starting hole 47 is open, and if the opening time of the second starting hole 47 is long (3 seconds), the right hit notification may be given while the second starting hole 47 is open.

Referring to Figure 97, the game flow of the gaming machine according to the first modified example having a micro-time-saving state will be described. Figure 97 is a diagram showing an example of the game flow of the gaming machine according to the first modified example.

As shown in FIG. 97, the gaming machine is initially set to the normal gaming state. In the normal gaming state, a jackpot determination is made for the first special symbol, and the first special symbol is displayed to change. When a jackpot is determined in the normal gaming state, for example, the jackpot symbol A stops with a probability of 1/2, and after the jackpot game is played, the game moves to the first time-saving gaming state with 5 time-saving times. Also, when a jackpot is determined in the normal gaming state, the jackpot symbol B stops with a probability of 1/2, and after the jackpot game is played, the game moves to the first time-saving gaming state with 50 time-saving times. In the first time-saving gaming state, the normal symbol changes over a short period of time (e.g., 1 second), and the second start hole 47 opens over a long period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) when a jackpot is determined, so that the game ball is more likely to enter the second start hole 47.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination in the normal game state is a special miss, the special miss symbol stops and the game transitions to a third time-saving game state (micro-time-saving state). The micro-time-saving state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 or 200 times). Note that the number of times the special symbol changes (time-saving number) during which the micro-time-saving state continues may differ depending on the type of special miss symbol.

When jackpot pattern A stops during the micro-time-saving state, after the jackpot game is played, the game transitions to the first time-saving game state with 50 time-saving cycles. Also, when jackpot pattern B stops during the micro-time-saving state, after the jackpot game is played, the game transitions to the first time-saving game state with 100 time-saving cycles.

In this way, in the gaming machine according to the first modified example, in addition to the normal gaming state and the first time-saving gaming state that is advantageous for players who can easily win a prize in the second starting hole 47, there is also a micro-time-saving state. The ease with which a gaming ball can win a prize in the second starting hole 47 is roughly the same in the micro-time-saving state and the normal gaming state. However, the number of time-saving times that is set differs between the micro-time-saving state and the normal gaming state even when the same jackpot symbol is won. Specifically, if a jackpot is won in the micro-time-saving state, a larger number of time-saving times is more likely to be set, and it is easier to transition to an advantageous state, compared to if a jackpot is won in the normal gaming state.

In the micro-time-saving state, the effects are almost the same as in the normal game state. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the current game state is the normal game state or the micro-time-saving state. As a result, when a special losing symbol stops, there is no visible difference, but internally it is possible to transition to a micro-time-saving state that is more advantageous than the normal game state, thereby increasing interest. Since no jackpot game is played even when a special losing symbol stops, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that they have transitioned to the micro-time-saving state.

If the current game state is a micro-time-saving state, a presentation mode suggesting the micro-time-saving state may be set. This makes it possible to suggest the micro-time-saving state and to raise the player's expectations. There may also be a presentation mode C1 that suggests there is a possibility of a micro-time-saving state, a presentation mode C2 that suggests that the possibility of the micro-time-saving state is higher than presentation mode C1, and a presentation mode C3 that notifies the player that the micro-time-saving state has been confirmed.

When the number of times the special symbols change reaches a specified number in the normal game state, a transition to the second time-saving game state occurs. When transitioning from the normal game state to the second time-saving game state, the above-mentioned blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode may be performed, or a pre-introduction mode effect may be performed before that. Also, in the micro time-saving mode, when the number of times the special symbols change reaches a specified number, a transition to the second time-saving game state occurs. In this case as well, the above-mentioned blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode may be performed, or a pre-introduction mode effect may be performed before that.

Here, when a jackpot is hit in the micro-time-saving state, a larger number of time-saving times are set than in the normal game state. In another embodiment, in a gaming machine that can change between a low-probability state in which the probability of a jackpot being determined to be a jackpot in a jackpot determination is low and a high-probability state in which the probability of a jackpot being determined to be a jackpot is high, the machine may be configured so that when a jackpot is hit in the micro-time-saving state, it is easier to transition to the high-probability state than when a jackpot is hit in the normal game state. Also, the machine may be configured so that when a jackpot is hit in the micro-time-saving state, it is easier for the player to win a jackpot that has a larger number of prize balls that can be acquired when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot than in the normal game state. This makes the micro-time-saving state more advantageous for the player than the normal game state.

(Second Modification)
Next, a gaming machine according to a second modified example using the minute time-saving state will be described. Fig. 98 is a diagram showing an example of a game flow of the gaming machine according to the second modified example.

As shown in FIG. 98, the gaming machine is initially set to the normal gaming state. If a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination in the normal gaming state, after the jackpot game is played, the machine transitions to a rush state or challenge mode that is advantageous to the player. For example, if a jackpot is determined in the normal gaming state, there is a 1/3 probability that jackpot symbol A will stop and the machine will transition to challenge mode, there is a 1/3 probability that jackpot symbol B will stop and the machine will transition to challenge mode, and there is the remaining 1/3 probability that jackpot symbol C will stop and the machine will transition to the rush state.

The challenge mode is the first time-saving game state in which the game ball is likely to enter the second start hole, and for example, the number of time-saving times is set to 5. The rush state is the first time-saving game state in which the game ball is likely to enter the second start hole, and for example, the number of time-saving times is set to 50 or 100. In the challenge mode or rush state, play is performed by hitting the right, and a jackpot determination is made for the second special pattern. When the game transitions to the rush state, there is an 80% probability of the next jackpot, and after a jackpot game, the game always (or there is a high probability) transitions to the rush state.

When the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times) in the rush state, the rush state ends and the game transitions to the micro-time-saving state. Also, when the special symbol changes five times in the challenge mode, the challenge mode ends and the game transitions to the micro-time-saving state.

In the micro-time-saving state, play is performed by hitting from the left as in the normal game state, and the first special symbol changes depending on whether the game ball enters the first starting hole 45. If a jackpot is hit in the micro-time-saving state, the probability of transitioning to the rush state is higher than in the normal game state.

Specifically, in the micro-time-saving state, if a jackpot is hit, there is a 1/3 probability that jackpot symbol A will stop and transition to challenge mode, a 1/3 probability that jackpot symbol B will stop and transition to rush state, and the remaining 1/3 probability that jackpot symbol C will stop and transition to rush state. That is, in the normal game state, when jackpot symbol B stops, the number of time-saving times is set to 5, but in the micro-time-saving state, when jackpot symbol B stops, the number of time-saving times is set to, for example, 100. As a result, in the micro-time-saving state, the probability of transitioning to rush state in the event of a jackpot is higher than in the normal game state.

More specifically, if the jackpot determination for the second special symbol is determined to be a miss, the special miss symbol is configured to stop with a predetermined probability. The predetermined probability is 100% here. In addition, multiple special miss symbols are prepared. For example, a special miss symbol C1 and a special miss symbol C2 are prepared.

In the first time-saving game state, if the jackpot determination for the second special symbol is determined to be a miss, the special miss symbol C1 or C2 will stop, but the game will not transition to the micro-time-saving game state in response to the special miss symbol stopping. In other words, the first time-saving game state takes precedence over the micro-time-saving state (third time-saving game state) in response to the special miss symbol stopping. If the special miss symbol stops in the first time-saving game state, the number of remaining time-saving times in the first time-saving game state is reduced by one, and if the number of remaining time-saving times is one or more, the first time-saving game state will continue.

When the final variation in the rush state or challenge mode ends, the remaining number of time-saving times becomes "0", the first time-saving game state ends, and the game transitions to the normal game state. If the second special symbol is reserved at the time this final variation ends, the reserved second special symbol will vary in the normal game state. In the normal game state, when the special losing symbol stops, the game transitions to the micro-time-saving state. For example, when the special losing symbol C1 stops, the game transitions to the micro-time-saving state with 15 time-saving times, and when the special losing symbol C2 stops, the game transitions to the micro-time-saving state with 30 time-saving times. Therefore, if the second special symbol is reserved at the time the final variation in the rush state or challenge mode ends, if the second special symbol related to the first reserved symbol is judged to be a miss in the jackpot judgment, the game will always transition to the micro-time-saving state when the variation of the second special symbol ends.

In this way, when the rush state ends, the player transitions to a micro-time-saving state in which the probability of transitioning to the rush state in the event of a jackpot win is higher than in the normal game state. This allows the player to play in an advantageous state for a specified period of time (until the number of times has changed by 15 or 30) even after the rush state ends.

In the micro-time-saving state, the same effects as in the normal game state may be performed. Also, in the micro-time-saving state, effects may be performed in a specific mode that suggests that the state is advantageous to the player.

With the above configuration, in the second modified example, it is possible to always transition to a micro-time-saving state after the rush state ends, and the predetermined period after the rush state ends can be made advantageous for the player. This can increase the interest. Note that if the jackpot determination for the second special symbol is determined to be a miss, the special miss symbol may be configured to stop with a predetermined probability lower than 100%.

(Third Modification)
Next, a gaming machine according to a third modified example using the minute time-saving state will be described with reference to Fig. 99 and Fig. 100. Fig. 99 is a diagram showing an example of a game flow of the gaming machine according to the third modified example.

As shown in FIG. 99, the gaming machine is initially set to the normal gaming state. In the jackpot determination in the normal gaming state, the probability of a jackpot being determined is, for example, 1/319. If a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, the jackpot game is played, and then the machine transitions to a rush state that is advantageous to the player. For example, if jackpot pattern A stops, the machine transitions to the first rush state after the jackpot game, and if jackpot pattern B stops, the machine transitions to the second rush state after the jackpot game.

The second rush state is the first time-saving game state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 47, and the number of time-saving times is set to, for example, 25.

The first rush state is the most advantageous state for the player, and is the first time-saving game state in which the number of time-saving plays is set to, for example, 200. When a player transitions to a rush state (first rush state or second rush state), there is, for example, an 80% chance of hitting the next jackpot, and the player will always transition to the rush state after a jackpot play.

The condition for transitioning from the normal game state to the rush state is that the jackpot determination for the first special symbol determines that there is a jackpot (the jackpot symbol stops). Therefore, the probability of transitioning from the normal game state to the rush state is 1/319. If a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, a jackpot is announced by a pattern alignment in which three performance symbols 701 line up in the variable performance using the performance symbols 701 during the variation of the special symbols.

On the other hand, if the first special symbol is judged to be a special miss in the jackpot determination in the normal game state and the special miss symbol stops, the game will transition to the third time-saving game state (micro-time-saving state) without going through the jackpot game. Even if the special miss symbol stops in the normal game state, the game will not transition to the rush state. Specifically, in the jackpot determination for the first special symbol, multiple special miss symbols C1 and C2 are prepared which are special symbols indicating a miss and transition to the third time-saving game state.

For example, in normal game mode, when the first special symbol changes and the special losing symbol C1 appears stopped on the first special symbol display 60, the game transitions to a micro time-saving state with 20 times of time-saving. Also, in normal game mode, when the special losing symbol C2 appears stopped, the game transitions to a micro time-saving state with 1000 times of time-saving. In the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol, the probability that the special losing symbol C1 or C2 will be selected as the stopping symbol may be, for example, 1/530 or 1/300.

Figure 100 is a diagram showing the setting of the third time-saving game state according to the special failure symbol in the gaming machine according to the third modified example. As shown in Figure 100, when the special failure symbol C1 stops in the normal game state, the third time-saving game state (micro time-saving state) having the first time-saving performance (fluctuation time of the normal symbol = 29.5 seconds, opening time of the second start hole 47 = 0.051 seconds) is set, and the number of time-saving times is set to 20. Also, when the special failure symbol C1 stops in the normal game state, the third time-saving game state (micro time-saving state) having the first time-saving performance (fluctuation time of the normal symbol = 29.5 seconds, opening time of the second start hole 47 = 0.051 seconds) is set, and the number of time-saving times is set to 1000. In the micro time-saving state, it is difficult or practically impossible for the game ball to enter the second start hole 47, and the game is played by hitting with the left hand.

As shown in FIG. 99, even if the jackpot is judged to be a miss in the short time-saving state, if the special miss pattern C3 or C4 stops, the game ball transitions to a rush state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the second start hole 47. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100, if the special miss pattern C3 or C4 stops in the short time-saving state, a third time-saving game state having the second time-saving performance (normal pattern fluctuation time = 1 second, second start hole 47 opening time = 5 seconds) is newly set. In addition, if either of the special miss patterns C3 and C4 stops in the short time-saving state, the number of time-saving times is set to 200. In addition, if the special miss pattern C3 stops during the short time-saving state, the number of time-saving times may be set to 20 times, and if the special miss pattern C4 stops during the short time-saving state, the number of time-saving times may be set to 200 times.

In addition, if a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination for the first special symbol in the micro-time-saving state, the jackpot game will be played and then the rush state will begin. If either jackpot symbol A or B stops in the micro-time-saving state, the number of time-saving times will be set to 200.

In the micro-time-saving state, the conditions for transitioning to the rush state are either a jackpot in the jackpot determination, or the special miss symbol C3 or C4 stopping. The probability of transitioning from the micro-time-saving state to the rush state is the sum of the probability that the jackpot symbol stops (1/319) and the probability that the special miss symbol C3 or C4 stops (1/530). Therefore, the total probability of transitioning from the micro-time-saving state to the rush state is approximately 1/199.

In addition, in the micro-time saving state, when the special symbol changes and the special losing symbol stops, a symbol alignment effect is produced in which three performance symbols 701 line up, creating an effect that makes it seem as if a jackpot has been won.

On the other hand, when the special failure symbol C3 or C4 stops in the normal game state, as shown in FIG. 100, the time-saving performance does not change compared to when the special failure symbol C3 or C4 stops during the micro-time-saving state, but the number of time-saving times is set to 1, and when the special symbol changes once, the game returns to the normal game state. In other words, when the special failure symbol C3 or C4 stops in the normal game state, the game does not transition to the rush state. In addition, when the special failure symbol C3 or C4 stops in the normal game state, the number of time-saving times may be set to 0. In this case, even if the special failure symbol C3 or C4 stops, the game does not transition to the time-saving game state and remains in the normal game state. In other words, when the special failure symbol C3 or C4 stops in the normal game state, the game does not transition to the time-saving game state according to the special failure symbol C3 or C4.

For this reason, in normal game mode, the game will not transition to the rush state unless a jackpot is determined to have occurred during the jackpot determination process.

In this way, the micro-time-saving state is an advantageous state in which the probability of transitioning to the rush state is higher than in the normal game state. In the micro-time-saving state, when the special miss pattern C3 or C4 stops, a presentation is given that a jackpot has been achieved by matching the patterns, making it appear as though the jackpot probability is higher than in the normal game state. This satisfies the player. Also, in the micro-time-saving state, when a jackpot pattern or the special miss pattern C3 or C4 stops, the game always transitions to the first rush state. For this reason, the micro-time-saving state can raise the player's expectations.

If the special losing symbol C1 or C2 stops during the rush state, the game will transition to a micro-time-saving state. Note that if the special losing symbol C1 or C2 stops during the rush state, the time-saving game state corresponding to the special losing symbol C1 or C2 is not set, and the rush state may continue.

In addition, if the special failure pattern C1 or C2 stops during the micro-time-saving state, a new micro-time-saving state may be set according to the stopped special failure pattern C1 or C2. For example, if the special failure pattern C1 stops during the micro-time-saving state, a new time-saving count of 20 times may be added and the micro-time-saving state may be entered.

In addition, if the special failure pattern C1 or C2 stops during the micro-time-saving state, a new micro-time-saving state corresponding to the stopped special failure pattern C1 or C2 does not have to be set. In this case, the number of time-saving times is reduced by 1 when the special failure pattern C1 or C2 stops, and if the number of time-saving times after the reduction is 1 or more, the micro-time-saving state continues.

In the micro-time-saving state, play is performed by hitting the reel from the left, just as in the normal game state. In the micro-time-saving state, the same presentation mode as in the normal game state may be set, so that it is difficult for the player to distinguish this from the normal game state. Also, in the micro-time-saving state, a presentation mode different from that in the normal game state may be set. For example, in the micro-time-saving state, a transition may be made to a presentation mode suggesting the micro-time-saving state, and a notification may be given that the state is more likely to result in a jackpot than in the normal game state. Also, in the micro-time-saving state, a presentation may be performed in a presentation mode suggesting that there is a high possibility of the micro-time-saving state.

In addition, even in the gaming machine according to the third modified example, when the special symbol changes a specified number of times, the machine may transition to a second time-saving gaming state in which it is easier to win at the second starting hole 47. Specifically, if the special symbol changes a specified number of times after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed, or after a jackpot game is played, the machine transitions to the second time-saving gaming state whether in the normal gaming state or the slight time-saving gaming state. Even in such a gaming machine, the above-mentioned time-saving entry blocking effect may be performed when transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state.

(Fourth Modification)
Next, a gaming machine according to a fourth modified example using the above-mentioned micro-time-saving state will be described. In the fourth modified example, the normal gaming state is more advantageous than the micro-time-saving state. Hereinafter, the fourth modified example will be described with reference to Figs. 101 and 102. Fig. 101 is a diagram showing an example of a game flow of the gaming machine according to the fourth modified example.

In the fourth variant, the game flow is basically the same as in the third variant, except that the advantageous state is the opposite of that in the third variant.

As shown in FIG. 101, when the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed, or when the rush state ends, the game transitions to the normal game state. This normal game state is more advantageous than the micro-time-saving state.

Specifically, in the normal game state, for example, when the special losing pattern C0 stops with a probability of 1/530, the game transitions to a rush state (third time-saving game state) with a second time-saving performance (normal pattern fluctuation time = 1 second, second starting hole 47 opening time = 5 seconds) in which it is easy to win the second starting hole 47. Also, the number of time-saving times is set to, for example, 200 times. That is, when the special losing pattern C0 stops in the normal game state, the game transitions to the first rush state. Also, in the normal game state, for example, when a jackpot is hit with a probability of 1/319, after the jackpot game, the game transitions to the first time-saving game state with a second time-saving performance (normal pattern fluctuation time = 1 second, second starting hole 47 opening time = 5 seconds), and the number of time-saving times is set to 200 times. That is, when a jackpot pattern stops in the normal game state, the game transitions to the first rush state. In addition, if the special losing symbol C0 stops during normal gameplay, the game may transition to a second rush state with 25 time-saving cycles. Also, if the big win symbol stops during normal gameplay, the game may transition to the second rush state.

In this way, in the fourth variant, when the jackpot symbol or the special miss symbol C0 stops in the normal game state, the game transitions to the rush state. The probability of transitioning from the normal game state to the rush state is approximately 1/199.

Meanwhile, in the normal game state, one of the special losing symbols C1 to C3 will stop with a predetermined probability. When the special losing symbols C1 to C3 stop, the game transitions to a micro-time-saving state. Specifically, when the special losing symbol C1 stops, the game transitions to a micro-time-saving state with 100 times of time saving, when the special losing symbol C2 stops, the game transitions to a micro-time-saving state with 200 times of time saving, and when the special losing symbol C3 stops, the game transitions to a micro-time-saving state with 300 times of time saving.

In the micro-time-saving state, the above-mentioned special failure symbol C0, which would cause a transition to the rush state in the normal game state, is invalid. Specifically, even if the special failure symbol C0 stops in the micro-time-saving state, the game does not transition to the rush state. For example, if the special failure symbol C0 stops in the micro-time-saving state, the third time-saving game state based on the newly stopped special failure symbol C0 is not set. If the special failure symbol C0 stops in the micro-time-saving state, the remaining number of time-saving times in the micro-time-saving state is subtracted by 1, and if the remaining number of time-saving times after the subtraction is 1 or more, the micro-time-saving state continues. The same applies if the special failure symbols C1 to C3 stop in the micro-time-saving state, and the third time-saving game state based on the newly stopped special failure symbol is not set. Note that it is also possible to prevent the special failure symbol from stopping in the micro-time-saving state.

In the micro time-saving state, if a jackpot occurs with a probability of 1/319, after the jackpot play, the game transitions to the first time-saving play state with the second time-saving performance (normal symbol fluctuation time = 1 second, second start hole 47 opening time = 5 seconds). In this case, the number of time-saving times is set to 25 or 200 times depending on the jackpot symbol.

In this way, in the fourth variant, the special losing symbols are invalidated in the micro-time saving state, so the probability of moving from the micro-time saving state to the rush state is 1/319, the same as the probability of a big win.

As described above, in the fourth modified example, the normal game state is an advantageous state that makes it easy to transition to the rush state. In this advantageous state, a specific mode is performed to indicate that the state is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the micro-time-saving state is not an advantageous state, and the performance mode is set to the normal mode. For example, by increasing the probability that the special losing symbols C1 to C3 stop in the normal game state, the period of time spent in the micro-time-saving state is extended. For example, if a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol or the special losing symbol C0 stops in the normal game state, the special losing symbols C1 to C3 are set to stop. As a result, the player usually plays in the micro-time-saving state (normal mode).

The duration of the micro-time-saving state (normal mode) is determined according to the special losing symbols C1 to C3 that stopped in the advantageous state (specific mode). In the micro-time-saving state (normal mode), when the special symbols change a number of times according to the special losing symbols C1 to C3, the system transitions to the advantageous state (specific mode). This allows the system to transition to the advantageous state (specific mode) periodically.

Figure 102 shows an example of mode transitions according to the number of times the special symbol changes in the fourth modified example.

As shown in FIG. 102, when the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed, or when the rush state ends, a special mode (advantageous state) is initially set. This special mode is the normal game state as described above. In the special mode (advantageous state), the special symbols change, and if the jackpot symbol or special losing symbol C0 does not stop, one of the special losing symbols C1 to C3 will stop.

For example, when the special losing symbol C1 stops, the game will transition to a micro-time-saving state (normal mode) with the time-saving count set to 100 times. When the special symbol changes 100 times in normal mode, the game will transition to the normal game state and then to a specific mode (advantageous state). As a result, when the special symbol changes 100 times in normal mode, a jackpot determination is made in the advantageous state. As long as the special losing symbol C1 stops in the specific mode, the game will transition to the advantageous state (specific mode) every 100 times.

In addition, in the specific mode, one of the special losing symbols C1 to C3 is selected with a predetermined probability, so that, for example, after switching to the normal mode, the 100th fluctuation has a 10% probability of switching to the specific mode, the 200th fluctuation has a 10% probability of switching to the specific mode, and the 300th fluctuation has a 100% probability of switching to the specific mode.

In this way, in the fourth modified example, there is a possibility of periodically transitioning to a favorable state, and the player can be periodically excited. In addition, in the fourth modified example, by providing a second time-saving game state, when a specified number of times is reached, a transition to the second time-saving game state may be made. For example, assume that the specified number of times is set to 600 times. In this case, as shown in FIG. 102, there is a possibility of transitioning to the specific mode every 100 times, and the specific mode will always be transitioned to on the 300th time. Even if the rush state is not transitioned to in the specific mode, when 600 fluctuations are made, the second time-saving game state will always be transitioned to. Even in such a gaming machine, when transitioning to the second time-saving game state, the above-mentioned time-saving entry shielding effect may be performed.

In the fourth variant, the normal game state is more advantageous to the player than the micro-time-saving state. Another example of making such a normal game state more advantageous to the player is the fifth variant, as shown below.

For example, in the fifth variant, there is a normal game state and a high probability state in which the probability of a jackpot is higher than in the normal game state. For example, the probability of a jackpot in the normal game state is 1/30, and the probability of a jackpot in the high probability state is set to a value (for example, 1/29) that is slightly higher than in the normal game state but appears to be almost the same to the player. The high probability state includes a high probability time-saving state in which a time-saving game state is set, and a high probability non-time-saving state (sometimes called a latent probability change) in which a time-saving game state is not set. In the high probability state, the high probability state is maintained until, for example, 10 jackpot games are played, and when 10 jackpot games are played, the state transitions to the normal game state. When a jackpot is determined in the normal game state, after the jackpot game, for example, there is a 2/3 probability of transitioning to a high probability non-time-saving state (latent probability change). In the high probability non-time-shortening state, it is difficult or impossible to enter the second starting hole 47, and a jackpot determination is made based on the entry into the first starting hole 45. Even if a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination based on the entry into the first starting hole 45, the time during which the jackpot entry hole is opened during the jackpot game is short (for example, 0.1 seconds), and almost no game balls enter the jackpot entry hole. Therefore, even if the state transitions to the high probability non-time-shortening state, the player is unable to obtain many prize balls, and the game continues in the high probability non-time-shortening state until 10 jackpot games are played. On the other hand, in the normal game state, if a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, the state transitions to the high probability time-shortening state with a probability of 1/3 after the jackpot game. In the high probability time-shortening state, the game ball is easily allowed to enter the second starting hole 47, and the game is played by hitting the right hand. If a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination based on an entry into the second starting port 47, the jackpot entry port is open for a long time (for example, up to 29.5 seconds) during the jackpot game, making it easier for a ball to enter the jackpot entry port. This allows the player to win many prize balls. In this way, if a jackpot is determined in the normal game state, there is a 1/3 probability of transitioning to an advantageous state, but in the high-probability non-time-saving state, even if a jackpot is determined, there is no transition to an advantageous state. Therefore, it can be said that the normal game state is a more advantageous state than the high-probability non-time-saving state.

As described above, in the first to fourth modified examples, the special losing symbols are used to transition to the micro-time-saving state, and in the micro-time-saving state, the player can play with a different advantage than in the normal game state, which makes for a highly entertaining game.

In addition, in a gaming machine having a first time-saving gaming state that is set after the above-mentioned jackpot game, a second time-saving gaming state that is set after a specified number of times have changed, and a third time-saving gaming state that is set in response to the stopping of a special losing symbol, if an event that transitions to each time-saving gaming state occurs during each gaming state, the following control may be performed. Figure 103 is a diagram showing an example of the control of the gaming state when an opportunity to activate each time-saving gaming state occurs during each gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 103, for example, when the game state is the normal game state, if a jackpot game is played that triggers the first time-saving game state (referred to as "first time-saving"), the game will transition to the first time-saving game state. If a jackpot game is played during the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state (referred to as "second time-saving"), or the third time-saving game state (referred to as "third time-saving"), the game will transition to the first time-saving game state.

In addition, in a case where there is a low probability state and a high probability state, if a jackpot is determined during the high probability state and a jackpot game is played, a transition to the first time-saving state will occur. Also, the second time-saving state cannot be activated during the high probability state. In other words, during the high probability state, the number of activations n is not updated, and the fluctuation of the special pattern in the low probability state does not reach the specified number of times, so there is no opportunity to activate the second time-saving state. For this reason, the second time-saving state cannot be activated during the high probability state. Also, during the high probability state, the third time-saving state cannot be activated. In other words, during the high probability state, the special losing pattern will not stop, or even if the special losing pattern stops, the transition to the third time-saving state will be suppressed.

In addition, if the number of times the special symbols change during the third time-saving game state reaches a specified number of times, the game may be transitioned to the second time-saving game state. In other words, the second time-saving game state takes precedence over the third time-saving game state, and if an opportunity to activate the second time-saving game state occurs during the third time-saving game state, the game may be switched to the second time-saving game state.

The above-mentioned blocking effect at the time of entering the time-saving mode may also be performed when transitioning from the third time-saving mode to the second time-saving mode. For example, when transitioning from the third time-saving mode to the second time-saving mode, a blocking image 920 appears and blocks the normal background image and the effect pattern 701 from the state in which the normal background image and the effect pattern 701 are displayed. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the time-saving background image and the effect pattern 701 for the time-saving mode appear.

In addition, the blocking effect at the time of entering the time-saving mode when transitioning from the third time-saving play state to the second time-saving play state and the blocking effect at the time of entering the time-saving mode when transitioning from the normal play state to the second time-saving play state may have different presentation modes. For example, when transitioning from the third time-saving play state to the second time-saving play state, a blocking image 920 may appear to block the dedicated background image and the dedicated presentation pattern 701 suggesting the third time-saving play state from a state in which the dedicated background image and the presentation pattern 701 are displayed. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the time-saving background image and the presentation pattern 701 of the time-saving mode may appear. In addition, different blocking images 920 may be used when transitioning from the third time-saving play state to the second time-saving play state and when transitioning from the normal play state to the second time-saving play state.

In addition, when transitioning from the third time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state, the pre-introduction mode is set before the specified period of the specified number of times. Note that when transitioning from the third time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state, the pre-introduction mode may not be set and the game may transition from the third time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state.

When transitioning from the third time-saving play state to the second time-saving play state, the above-mentioned blocking effect at the time of entering the time-saving play state may not be performed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 103, if a special losing symbol stops during the third time-saving game state, a third time-saving game state may be newly set according to the stopped special losing symbol. That is, if a new third time-saving activation trigger occurs during the third time-saving game state, the game may switch to a new third time-saving game state. In this case, the number of time-saving times is newly set according to the stopped special losing symbol. For example, if a first special losing symbol, for which the number of time-saving times is set to "20 times," stops and transitions to the third time-saving game state, and the special symbol fluctuates 10 times, the remaining number of time-saving times will be "10 times." At this time, if a second special losing symbol, for which the number of time-saving times is set to "50 times," stops, the number of time-saving times is set to "50 times," and a new third time-saving game state is set.

In addition, if a special losing symbol stops during the third time-saving game state, a new third time-saving game state corresponding to the stopped special losing symbol may not be set, and the current third time-saving game state may continue. In other words, if a new trigger for the third time-saving operation occurs during the third time-saving operation, the new third time-saving operation may not be activated. For example, if a first special losing symbol, which is set to "20 times" as the number of time-saving operations, stops and the game transitions to the third time-saving game state, and the special symbol changes 10 times, the remaining number of time-saving operations will be "10 times." In this case, if a second special losing symbol, which is set to "50 times" as the number of time-saving operations, stops, the remaining number of time-saving operations will be reduced by "1" to "9 times."

Also, as shown in FIG. 103, if a special losing symbol stops during the second time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state corresponding to the stopped special losing symbol is not set, and the second time-saving game state continues. In other words, the second time-saving is prioritized over the third time-saving, and even if an opportunity to activate the third time-saving occurs during the second time-saving, the third time-saving will not be activated. Note that if an opportunity to activate the third time-saving occurs during the second time-saving, the third time-saving may be activated.

In addition, if a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot judgment during the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, or the third time-saving game state, or if a jackpot is determined to be a small jackpot and a jackpot game is played, the first time-saving game state will be set after the jackpot game.

In addition, when the first time-saving game state is set, a value equal to or greater than the specified number may be set as the number of time-saving times. In this case, the number of times the special pattern changes may reach the specified number during the first time-saving game state. When the specified number of times is reached during the first time-saving game state, the game may be transitioned to the second time-saving game state. That is, when an opportunity to activate the second time-saving occurs during the first time-saving game state, the game may be switched to the second time-saving game state. In this case, the number of time-saving times corresponding to the second time-saving game state is newly set. In this case, the above-mentioned blocking effect at the time-saving entry is also performed. When transitioning from the first time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state, the blocking effect at the time-saving entry is performed without passing through the above-mentioned pre-introduction mode. Specifically, when transitioning from the first time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state, a blocking image 920 appears from a state in which the time-saving background image and the time-saving mode performance pattern 701 are displayed, and the blocking image 920 blocks the time-saving background image and the performance pattern 701. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the time-saving background image and the time-saving mode effect pattern 701 will reappear.

Note that when transitioning to the second time-saving game state during the first time-saving game state, the above-mentioned blocking effect at the time of entering the time-saving game state does not have to be executed.

In addition, if a special losing symbol stops during the first time-saving game state, a third time-saving game state may be set according to the stopped special losing symbol. In other words, if an opportunity to activate the third time-saving occurs during the first time-saving state, a switch to the third time-saving state may be made. In this case, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second start port 47, and the number of time-saving times are newly set according to the stopped special losing symbol.

In addition, if a special losing symbol stops during the first time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state corresponding to the stopped special losing symbol may not be set, and the first time-saving game state may continue. In other words, if an opportunity to activate the third time-saving occurs during the first time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state may not be activated. If a special losing symbol stops during the first time-saving game state, the number of remaining time-saving times in the first time-saving game state is decremented by "1", and if the number of remaining time-saving times after the decrement is 1 or more, the first time-saving game state continues.

In addition, if an opportunity to activate another time-saving feature occurs during a certain time-saving feature, the time-saving feature being executed and the new time-saving feature may overlap. In other words, if an opportunity to activate another time-saving feature occurs during a certain time-saving feature, the time-saving feature being executed and the new time-saving feature may be activated simultaneously. For example, a first time-saving flag indicating that the first time-saving feature is in progress, a second time-saving flag indicating that the second time-saving feature is in progress, and a third time-saving flag indicating that the third time-saving feature is in progress are prepared, and when the first time-saving flag is ON, an opportunity to activate the third time-saving feature occurs, the third time-saving flag may be turned ON while the first time-saving flag is ON. In this case, the first time-saving feature and the third time-saving feature are activated simultaneously, and the number of times each time the special pattern changes is subtracted. In addition, when the first time-saving flag is ON, if an opportunity to activate the second time-saving feature occurs, the second time-saving flag may be turned ON while the first time-saving flag is ON. Also, for example, if an opportunity to activate the second time-saving feature occurs when the third time-saving flag is ON, the second time-saving flag may be turned ON while the third time-saving flag remains ON.

In addition, for example, if a special losing symbol that will cause a third time-shortened game state to occur stops during a first time-shortened game state, the first time-shortened game state may be continued, and after the first time-shortened game state ends, a third time-shortened game state may be generated in response to the stopping of the special losing symbol. In addition, if a second time-shortened game state occurs during a first time-shortened game state, the first time-shortened game state may be continued, and after the first time-shortened game state ends, a second time-shortened game state may be generated. In addition, if a second time-shortened game state occurs during a third time-shortened game state, the third time-shortened game state may be continued, and after the third time-shortened game state ends, a second time-shortened game state may be generated. In addition, if a special miss symbol Cx that will cause a new third time-shortened game state B to occur during the third time-shortened game state A stops, the third time-shortened game state A may be continued, and after the third time-shortened game state A ends, the third time-shortened game state B may be generated in response to the stop of the special miss symbol Cx. In addition, if a special miss symbol that will cause a third time-shortened game state to occur stops during the second time-shortened game state, the second time-shortened game state may be continued, and after the second time-shortened game state ends, the third time-shortened game state may be generated in response to the stop of the special miss symbol.

(Switching of variable pattern table according to stopping symbol and game state)
As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the normal game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state are set as a trigger to set a variation pattern table corresponding to each game state. In addition, when a jackpot game is played, the variation pattern table (variation pattern group) for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol after the jackpot game can be switched according to the number of variations of the special symbol after the jackpot game. Depending on the combination of the stop symbol and the game state, the variation pattern table may be set as follows.

For example, in a gaming machine that can change between a low probability state where the probability of a jackpot being determined in a jackpot determination is low, and a high probability state where the probability of a jackpot being determined in a jackpot determination is high, a first variation pattern table may be set according to the type of jackpot symbol that stops in the low probability state, and a second variation pattern table may be set according to the type of jackpot symbol that stops in the high probability state. Also, a third variation pattern table may be set according to the type of small jackpot symbol that stops in the low probability state, and a fourth variation pattern table may be set according to the type of small jackpot symbol that stops in the high probability state. Using each of the set variation pattern tables, a variation pattern is determined based on the number of times the special symbol changes after a jackpot game and the result of the jackpot determination.

In addition, a dedicated fluctuation pattern table different from the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the first time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state may be set upon the setting of the second time-saving game state.

In addition, a different variation pattern table may be set as the variation pattern table during the second time-shortened game state depending on the game state when the second time-shortened game state is set. For example, if the game state is normal when the second time-shortened game state is set, the first variation pattern table may be set during the second time-shortened game state, and if the game state is time-shortened when the second time-shortened game state is set, the second variation pattern table may be set during the second time-shortened game state.

Also, the setting of the second time-saving game state may be used as a trigger to set a variation pattern table according to the number of times the special symbol changes from the setting. Also, the variation pattern table may be set according to the game state when the second time-saving game state is set, according to the number of times the special symbol changes from the setting. For example, when the normal game state is set when the second time-saving game state is set, the first variation pattern table may be set when the number of times the second time-saving game state has changed is between 1 and 100, and the second variation pattern table may be set from 101 times onwards, and when the time-saving game state is set when the second time-saving game state is set, the third variation pattern table may be set when the number of times the second time-saving game state has changed is between 1 and 100, and the fourth variation pattern table may be set from 101 times onwards.

In addition, a dedicated variation pattern table different from the variation pattern table corresponding to the first time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state may be set upon the setting of the third time-saving game state.

In addition, a different variation pattern table may be set depending on the special losing symbol that sets the third time-saving gaming state.

Also, depending on the special losing symbol and the game state, different variation pattern tables may be set as the variation pattern table during the third time-saving game state. For example, if the special losing symbol C1 stops during the normal game state, a first variation pattern table may be set, if the special losing symbol C2 stops during the normal game state, a second variation pattern table may be set, if the special losing symbol C1 stops during the time-saving game state, a third variation pattern table may be set, and if the special losing symbol C2 stops during the time-saving game state, a fourth variation pattern table may be set.

Also, the setting of the third time-saving game state may be used as a trigger to set a variation pattern table according to the number of times the special symbol changes from the setting. Also, when the third time-saving game state is set, a variation pattern table may be set based on the special miss symbol and the game state. For example, when the third time-saving game state is set in a normal game state and the special miss symbol C1 stops, the first variation pattern table may be set when the number of times the third time-saving game state changes is between 1 and 100, and the second variation pattern table may be set from 101 times onwards. Also, when the third time-saving game state is set in a normal game state and the special miss symbol C2 stops, the third variation pattern table may be set when the number of times the third time-saving game state changes is between 1 and 100, and the fourth variation pattern table may be set from 101 times onwards. In the case where the time-saving game state is in effect when the third time-saving game state is set and the special losing symbol C1 stops, the fifth variation pattern table may be set if the number of variations from the setting of the third time-saving game state is between 1 and 100, and the sixth variation pattern table may be set from 101 times onwards. In addition, in the case where the time-saving game state is in effect when the third time-saving game state is set and the special losing symbol C2 stops, the seventh variation pattern table may be set if the number of variations from the setting of the third time-saving game state is between 1 and 100, and the eighth variation pattern table may be set from 101 times onwards.

As described above, the variation pattern table may be switched depending on each game state and each stopped symbol, and the variation pattern table may also be switched depending on the number of variations.

(An example of a fluctuation pattern table)
Next, an example of the variation pattern table in the fifth embodiment will be described. Fig. 104 is a diagram showing an example of the normal variation pattern table Tn used in the normal mode in the normal game state in the fifth embodiment. The variation pattern table shown in Fig. 104 is a variation pattern table used in the normal period other than the predetermined period before entering the second time-saving game state in the normal game state.

Figure 104(a) is a jackpot fluctuation pattern table used when a jackpot is determined, Figure 104(b) is a reach fluctuation pattern table used when a miss occurs and the random number value for reach determination is within a predetermined range, and Figure 104(c) is a miss fluctuation pattern table used when a miss occurs and the random number value for reach determination is outside the predetermined range.

For example, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 104(a) includes a fluctuation pattern OP1 in which a jackpot is notified after an N reach performance is executed, a fluctuation pattern OP2 in which a jackpot is notified after an SP reach performance is executed, and a fluctuation pattern OP3 in which a jackpot is notified after an SPSP reach performance is executed.

The reach fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 104(b) includes a fluctuation pattern RP1 in which a miss is notified after an N reach performance is executed, a fluctuation pattern RP2 in which a miss is notified after an SP reach performance is executed, and a fluctuation pattern RP3 in which a miss is notified after an SPSP reach performance is executed.

The miss variation pattern shown in FIG. 104(c) includes a variation pattern HP1 that executes a normal miss presentation 1 that notifies a miss in a normal miss mode without performing a reach presentation, and a variation pattern HP2 that executes a normal miss presentation 2 that notifies a miss in a normal miss mode without performing a reach presentation.

Depending on the selected fluctuation pattern, various effects are performed by the performance control unit 130. For example, if fluctuation pattern RP3 is selected, the SPSP reach effect is performed, and then the above-mentioned post-reach occlusion effect may be performed. For example, if fluctuation pattern HP1 is selected, the above-mentioned during-fluctuation occlusion effect may be performed by lottery by the performance control unit 130.

In addition to these, there are various other variation patterns.

Figure 105 is a diagram showing an example of a pre-introduction fluctuation pattern table Tnx used in the pre-introduction mode. The fluctuation pattern table shown in Figure 105 is a fluctuation pattern table used after a jackpot game has been played, that is, when there is a jackpot history, during a predetermined period before entering the second time-saving gaming state (451st to 500th fluctuations since the jackpot game). When a jackpot game is played, a fluctuation pattern table according to the number of fluctuations is set. When the number of fluctuations since the jackpot game reaches 451, it is switched to the fluctuation pattern table Tnx. Note that during the above-mentioned predetermined period when there is no jackpot history, the normal fluctuation pattern table Tn shown in Figure 104 is used.

Figure 105 (a-1) is a pre-introduction fluctuation pattern table Tnx0 used in the first fluctuation of the pre-introduction mode, and is a jackpot fluctuation pattern table used when a jackpot is determined. Figure 105 (a-2) is a pre-introduction fluctuation pattern table Tnx1 used in the second and subsequent fluctuations of the pre-introduction mode, and is a jackpot fluctuation pattern table used when a jackpot is determined. Figure 105 (b-1) is a pre-introduction fluctuation pattern table Tnx0 used in the first fluctuation of the pre-introduction mode, and is a reach fluctuation pattern table used when there is a miss and the random number value for reach determination is within a predetermined range. Figure 105 (b-2) is a pre-introduction fluctuation pattern table Tnx1 used in the second and subsequent fluctuations of the pre-introduction mode, and is a reach fluctuation pattern table used when there is a miss and the random number value for reach determination is within a predetermined range. FIG. 105(c-1) is the pre-introduction fluctuation pattern table Tnx0 used in the first fluctuation of the pre-introduction mode, and is a miss fluctuation pattern table used when there is a miss and the random number value for reach determination is outside the specified range. FIG. 105(c-2) is the pre-introduction fluctuation pattern table Tnx1 used in the second and subsequent fluctuations of the pre-introduction mode, and is a miss fluctuation pattern table used when there is a miss and the random number value for reach determination is outside the specified range.

For example, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 105 (a-1) includes a fluctuation pattern OPx1 in which a pre-introduction blocking effect is executed, followed by execution of special effect 1 to end the pre-introduction mode and notify of a jackpot, and a fluctuation pattern OPx2 in which a pre-introduction blocking effect is executed, followed by execution of special effect 2 to end the pre-introduction mode and notify of a jackpot. For example, in special effects 1 and 2, the player's character and the enemy character fight, and the player's character is attacked by the enemy character and falls down.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 105(a-2) includes a fluctuation pattern OPx3 that ends the pre-introduction mode and notifies a jackpot by executing a pre-introduction special effect 1, and a fluctuation pattern OPx4 that ends the pre-introduction mode and notifies a jackpot by executing a pre-introduction special effect 2. In pre-introduction special effects 1 and 2, an effect is performed in which the player's character is attacked by an enemy character and falls down.

The reach variation pattern table shown in FIG. 105(b-1) includes a variation pattern RPx1 which notifies the continuation of the pre-introduction mode by executing special effect 3 after executing a pre-introduction blocking effect, and a variation pattern RPx2 which notifies the continuation of the pre-introduction mode by executing special effect 4 after executing a pre-introduction blocking effect. For example, in special effects 3 and 4, the player's character and the enemy character fight, and the player's character is attacked by the enemy character and withstands the attack, resulting in an effect in which the pre-introduction mode continues.

The reach variation pattern table shown in FIG. 105(b-2) includes a variation pattern RPx1 that notifies the player that the pre-introduction mode will continue by executing a pre-introduction special effect 3, and a variation pattern RPx2 that notifies the player that the pre-introduction mode will continue by executing a pre-introduction special effect 4. In pre-introduction special effects 3 and 4, the player's character endures an attack from an enemy character, resulting in an effect in which the pre-introduction mode continues.

The failure variation pattern table shown in FIG. 105(c-1) includes a variation pattern HPx0 that executes a pre-introduction occlusion effect, then starts the pre-introduction mode and notifies the player of a failure. The failure variation pattern table shown in FIG. 105(c-2) includes a variation pattern HPx1 that executes a pre-introduction effect in which the player's character evades an attack from an enemy character and notifies the player of a failure.

Figure 106 is a diagram showing an example of the second time-saving fluctuation pattern table Tb1 used in the first fluctuation in the second time-saving game state. The fluctuation pattern table shown in Figure 106 is a fluctuation pattern table used in the first special symbol fluctuation (i.e., the 501st fluctuation since the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed) when the second time-saving game state is set when there is no jackpot history.

Figure 106(a) is a big hit fluctuation pattern table used when a big hit is determined, Figure 106(b) is a small hit fluctuation pattern table used when a small hit is determined, Figure 106(c) is a reach fluctuation pattern table used when there is a miss and the random number value for reach determination is within a specified range, and Figure 106(d) is a miss fluctuation pattern table used when there is a miss and the random number value for reach determination is outside the specified range.

For example, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 106(a) includes a fluctuation pattern OPb1 that executes an exceptional performance when the time-saving mode is entered and executes a pattern alignment performance (a performance in which three performance patterns are aligned) that notifies the player that a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player will be played. In the exceptional performance when the time-saving mode is entered, for example, after the performance pattern 701 starts to vary, a time-saving mode shielding performance is performed, and when the performance pattern 701 shielded by the shielding performance appears, the performance pattern (pattern alignment) of the jackpot mode appears in a temporarily stopped state, thereby notifying the player of a jackpot. In the exceptional performance when the time-saving mode is entered, the time-saving mode shielding performance may not be performed, and the game may suddenly transition to the time-saving mode B, and then a pattern alignment performance may be performed. In other words, the performance mode when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot is different between the first fluctuation in the second time-saving mode (the first fluctuation after the specified number of times is reached) and the fluctuation before the specified number of times is reached. In this way, by making the presentation different when a jackpot is determined to have occurred before the set number of times has been reached compared to when the jackpot has been reached, it is possible to diversify the presentation and increase interest.

In addition, in other embodiments, if a big win (or a small win) is determined in the first fluctuation in the second time-saving game state (the first fluctuation after the specified number of times is reached), a presentation similar to that of the fluctuation before the specified number of times is reached may be performed. That is, based on the normal fluctuation patterns (OP1 to OP3) included in the fluctuation pattern table Tn, the SP reach or SPSP reach presentation may be performed without the above-mentioned time-saving entry shielding presentation, and a big win may be announced. Also, if a big win (or a small win) is determined in the first fluctuation in the second time-saving game state, based on the normal fluctuation patterns (OP1 to OP3) included in the fluctuation pattern table Tn, the above-mentioned time-saving entry shielding presentation may be performed, and then the SP reach or SPSP reach presentation may be performed, and a big win may be announced.

In another embodiment, in the first change in the second time-saving game state (the first change after the specified number of times is reached), if a big win (or small win) is determined, the above-mentioned time-saving entry blocking effect is performed, but the type of effect may be different from the time-saving entry blocking effect when a miss is determined. In other words, in the first change in the second time-saving game state, if a big win (or small win) is determined, the time-saving entry blocking effect of the first type of effect may be performed, and if a miss is determined, the time-saving entry blocking effect of the second type of effect may be performed. In this way, by making the type of the time-saving entry blocking effect different when a big win (or small win) is determined and when a miss is determined when the specified number of times is reached, the effects can be diversified and the interest can be improved.

The small win fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 106(b) includes a fluctuation pattern KPb1 that executes an exceptional effect when entering the time-saving mode and executes a symbol alignment effect that notifies the player that a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player will be played. If a small win is determined in the first fluctuation in the second time-saving mode state, a normal fluctuation pattern (OP1 to OP3) included in the fluctuation pattern table Tn may be selected. In this case, the above-mentioned time-saving mode entry shielding effect may be performed before an SP reach or SPSP reach effect is performed to notify the player of a jackpot, or the above-mentioned time-saving mode entry shielding effect may not be performed before an SP reach or SPSP reach effect is performed to notify the player of a jackpot.

In addition, when there is no history of a jackpot and the first change in the special pattern that sets the second time-saving game state is determined to be a jackpot or a small jackpot, a reach effect similar to that when the change pattern table Tn is used (for example, an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect) may be executed to execute a pattern alignment effect that notifies the player that a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player will be played. In this case, the reach effect may be executed after the blocking effect at the time-saving entry is executed. Also, the reach effect may be executed without executing the blocking effect at the time-saving entry.

The reach fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 106(c) also includes a fluctuation pattern RPb1 that executes a blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode and also performs an effect to notify of a miss. The reach fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 106(c) may also include the normal reach fluctuation patterns (RP1 to RP3) included in the fluctuation pattern table Tn. In this case, for example, if reach fluctuation pattern RP3 is selected, an N reach effect is performed after a blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode, and then this develops into an SP reach effect, and then an SPSP reach effect is performed, resulting in a reach miss. After the reach miss, a post-reach blocking effect may also be performed as described above.

The miss variation pattern table shown in FIG. 106(d) also includes variation pattern HPb1, which performs a blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode and also performs an effect to notify of a miss.

Figure 107 is a diagram showing an example of the second time-saving fluctuation pattern table Tb2 used for the second and subsequent fluctuations in the second time-saving game state. The fluctuation pattern table shown in Figure 107 is a fluctuation pattern table used for the second and subsequent special symbol fluctuations (i.e., 502nd and subsequent fluctuations after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation) when the second time-saving game state is set when there is no jackpot history.

Figure 107(a) is a big hit fluctuation pattern table used when a big hit is determined, Figure 107(b) is a small hit fluctuation pattern table used when a small hit is determined, Figure 107(c) is a reach fluctuation pattern table used when there is a miss and the random number value for reach determination is within a specified range, and Figure 107(d) is a miss fluctuation pattern table used when there is a miss and the random number value for reach determination is outside the specified range.

For example, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 107(a) includes a fluctuation pattern OPb3 that executes a battle presentation 1 and a victory presentation, and a fluctuation pattern OPb4 that executes a battle presentation 2 and a victory presentation. In the victory presentation, a symbol matching presentation is performed, and the player is notified that a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player will be played.

The small win variation pattern table shown in FIG. 107(b) also includes a variation pattern KPb3 that executes battle performance 1 and also executes a victory performance, and a variation pattern KPb4 that executes battle performance 2 and also executes a victory performance.

The reach variation pattern table shown in FIG. 107(c) includes a variation pattern RPb3 that executes battle presentation 1 and a defeat presentation that suggests that the player's character will be defeated, and a variation pattern RPb4 that executes battle presentation 2 and a defeat presentation. In the defeat presentation, no symbol matching presentation is performed, and a miss is announced.

The miss variation pattern table shown in FIG. 107(d) includes a variation pattern HPb3 that executes normal miss performance 1, in which the performance pattern 701 stops in a miss mode, and a variation pattern HPb4 that executes normal miss performance 2.

Figure 108 is a diagram showing an example of the second time-saving fluctuation pattern table Tb11 (with jackpot history) used in the first fluctuation in the second time-saving game state. The fluctuation pattern table shown in Figure 108 is a fluctuation pattern table used in the first special symbol fluctuation (i.e., the 501st fluctuation since a jackpot game was played) that sets the second time-saving game state when there is a jackpot history.

The fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 108 includes fluctuation patterns that perform effects similar to those of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 88 (the fluctuation pattern table selected in the first fluctuation of the second time-saving game state when there is no jackpot history), but the fluctuation time is longer than that of each fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 88. For example, the fluctuation time of the miss fluctuation pattern HPb11 included in the fluctuation pattern table Tb11 shown in FIG. 108 is longer than that of the miss fluctuation pattern HPb1 included in the fluctuation pattern table Tb1 shown in FIG. 88. As a result, in the 501st fluctuation after the jackpot game is played, a time-saving introduction effect including a blocking effect at the time of entering the time-saving mode and an achievement effect can be executed. The fluctuation patterns included in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 108 are almost the same as those included in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 88, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Figure 109 is a diagram showing an example of the second time-saving fluctuation pattern table Tb12 (with jackpot history) used for the second and subsequent fluctuations in the second time-saving game state. The fluctuation pattern table shown in Figure 109 is a fluctuation pattern table used for the second and subsequent special symbol fluctuations (i.e., fluctuations from 502nd time onwards after a jackpot game is played) that set the second time-saving game state when there is a jackpot history.

The fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 109 is the same as the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 106 (the fluctuation pattern table selected for the second or subsequent fluctuations in the second time-saving gaming state when there is no history of a jackpot), so a description thereof will be omitted. Note that the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 109 may have fluctuation patterns different from the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 106.

Next, an example of a fluctuation pattern table used in the first time-saving game state will be described. As described above, there are multiple fluctuation pattern tables used in the first time-saving game state, and they are set according to the jackpot symbol. Here, an example of a fluctuation pattern table Ta2 will be described.

Figure 110 shows an example of a variation pattern table Ta2 used in the first time-saving gaming state.

Figure 110(a) is a big hit fluctuation pattern table used when a big hit is determined, Figure 110(b) is a small hit fluctuation pattern table used when a small hit is determined, Figure 110(c) is a reach fluctuation pattern table used when there is a miss and the random number value for reach determination is within a specified range, and Figure 110(d) is a miss fluctuation pattern table used when there is a miss and the random number value for reach determination is outside the specified range.

For example, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 110(a), different fluctuation patterns are set for the fluctuation times 1 to 44, 45 to 54, and 55. As is clear from the figure, the fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of 1 to 44, 45 to 54, and 55. Specifically, the fluctuation patterns corresponding to the fluctuation times 1 to 44 include a fluctuation pattern OPa1 in which a battle performance 1 is executed and a victory performance is executed, and a fluctuation pattern OPa2 in which a battle performance 2 is executed and a victory performance is executed. In the victory performance, a symbol matching performance is executed, and a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is notified. In addition, the fluctuation patterns corresponding to the fluctuation times 45 to 54 include a fluctuation pattern OPa3 in which a battle performance 3 is executed and a victory performance is executed, and a fluctuation pattern OPa4 in which a battle performance 4 is executed and a victory performance is executed. In addition, the fluctuation patterns corresponding to the fluctuation times 55 include a fluctuation pattern OPa5 in which a battle performance 5 is executed and a victory performance is executed.

Similarly, in the small win fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 110(b), different fluctuation patterns are set for fluctuations of 1 to 44, 45 to 54, and 55. Each fluctuation pattern is the same as in FIG. 110(b).

Also, in the reach fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 110(c), different fluctuation patterns are set for the fluctuation times 1 to 44, 45 to 54, and 55. As is clear from the figure, the fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of 1 to 44, 45 to 54, and 55. Specifically, the fluctuation patterns corresponding to the fluctuation times 1 to 44 include a fluctuation pattern RPa1 in which a battle performance 1 is executed and a defeat performance is executed, and a fluctuation pattern RPa2 in which a battle performance 2 is executed and a defeat performance is executed. In the defeat performance, the character on the player's side is defeated, and the reach is lost and the loss is notified. Also, the fluctuation patterns corresponding to the fluctuation times 45 to 54 include a fluctuation pattern RPa3 in which a battle performance 3 is executed and a defeat performance is executed, and a fluctuation pattern RPa4 in which a battle performance 4 is executed and a defeat performance is executed. Also, the fluctuation patterns corresponding to the fluctuation times 55 include a fluctuation pattern RPa5 in which a battle performance 5 is executed and a defeat performance is executed, and a result performance is executed.

Also, in the miss fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 110(d), different fluctuation patterns are set for the number of fluctuations of 1 to 44, 45 to 54, and 55. As is clear from the figure, the fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of 1 to 44, 45 to 54, and 55. Specifically, as fluctuation patterns corresponding to the number of fluctuations of 1 to 44, there are included a fluctuation pattern HPa1 in which a normal miss performance 1 is executed in which three different performance patterns 701 stop without a reach performance and a miss is notified, and a fluctuation pattern HPa2 in which a performance longer than the normal miss performance 1 is executed and then three different performance patterns 701 stop and a miss is notified. Also, as fluctuation patterns corresponding to the number of fluctuations of 45 to 54, there is included a fluctuation pattern HPa3 in which a reach is encouraged and then a miss is notified. In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the number of variations of 55 includes variation pattern HPa4, which executes normal miss effect 3 and then executes a result effect.

Note that the fluctuation pattern tables shown in Figures 104 to 110 are merely examples, and each fluctuation pattern table may include various fluctuation patterns other than those described above.

(Flowchart of the main control unit)
The processing in the main control unit in the fifth embodiment is almost the same as that in the first embodiment, but there are some differences. The main differences will be described below.

(Special symbol variation processing of the main control unit)
The special symbol variation process in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 111. Fig. 111 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process in the fifth embodiment.

First, in step S3301, the main CPU 100a determines whether the change time set in the change pattern determination process described above has elapsed. If the change time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3302, and if the change time has not elapsed, the current special symbol change process is terminated.

In step S3302, the main CPU 100a stops the display of the special symbol that was set in the jackpot determination process described above. Here, the main CPU 100a sets a fixed period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) during which the special symbol is stopped. The fixed period may be set in a specified area of the main RAM 110c depending on the game situation (e.g., the stopped symbol or game state).

Next, in step S3303, the main CPU 100a decrements (subtracts "1") the number of activations n. Here, the number of activations n is an integer equal to or greater than 0. This update process of step S3303 is performed each time the special symbol changes, whether in the normal game state or when the time-saving game state (first to third time-saving game states) is set. This update process of step S3303 is performed even when n=0, but n is never set to a value smaller than 0. Note that in a gaming machine that can be set to a high probability state and a low probability state, the process of step S3303 is performed only when the state is the low probability state. Note that the update process of n may be performed when the special symbol starts to change. The update process of n may also be performed when a predetermined determination period has elapsed since the special symbol stopped.

In step S3304, the main CPU 100a determines whether the time-saving flag stored in the main RAM 100c is ON. If the time-saving flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S3305 to update the remaining number of time-saving times, and if the time-saving flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S3311 to not update the remaining number of time-saving times.

In step S3305, the main CPU 100a decrements (subtracts "1") the first time-saving count (J1), which is the number of time-saving times for the first special symbol, or the second time-saving count (J2), which is the number of time-saving times for the second special symbol, stored in the main RAM 100c. Specifically, if the special symbol related to the current variable display is the first special symbol, J1 is decremented, and if it is the second special symbol, J2 is decremented. In addition, the main CPU 100a decrements the third time-saving count (J3), which is the combined number of time-saving times for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In step S3306, the main CPU 100a determines whether any one of the first time-saving count (J1), the second time-saving count (J2), and the third time-saving count (J3) has become "0." If it has become "0," the process proceeds to step S3310 to end the time-saving game state, and if it has not become "0," the process proceeds to step S3307.

In step S3307, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not a small win symbol has stopped and been displayed. If it is not a small win symbol, the process proceeds to step S3311. If it is a small win symbol, the process decrements (subtracts 1) the number of remaining small wins (Z) until the time-saving game state is terminated, which is stored in the main RAM 100c, in step S3308.

In step S3309, the main CPU 100a determines whether the number of remaining small wins has reached "0." If the number of remaining small wins has reached "0," the process moves to step S3310 to end the time-saving game state, and if the number of remaining small wins has not reached "0," the process moves to step S3311.

In step S3310, the main CPU 100a resets the time-saving flag and the various time-saving counts (J1, J2, J3) stored in the main RAM 100c to their initial values (OFF and "0"), and ends the time-saving game state.

In step S3311, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not a jackpot symbol has stopped and been displayed. If it is not a jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to step S3313. If it is a jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to step S3312, where the time-saving flag and the various time-saving counts (J1, J2, J3) are reset to end the time-saving game state (start the normal game state). Next, the main CPU 100a proceeds to step S3316.

In step S3313, the main CPU 100a determines whether the number of activations n stored in the main RAM 100c is "0" and the second time-saving history flag is OFF. Here, it is determined whether the number of times the special symbol has changed has reached a specified number (500 times). If the number of times the special symbol has changed has reached the specified number (if the number of activations n is "0" and the second time-saving game state has not yet been executed), the second time-saving history flag is set to ON (step S3314) and the process proceeds to step S3315 to start the second time-saving game state. If the number of times the special symbol has changed has not reached the specified number, the process proceeds to step S3317.

In step S3315, the main CPU 100a sets the number of time-saving times (J1=750, J2=750, J3=750) and the number of remaining small wins (Z=2) for the second time-saving game state, and turns on the time-saving flag to transition to the second time-saving game state.

In the next step S3316, the main CPU 100a sets a time-saving count designation command corresponding to each time-saving count (J1, J2, J3) in the main RAM 100c. This causes the time-saving count designation command to be sent to the performance control unit 130, which notifies the user of the remaining time-saving count.

In step S3317, the main CPU 100a sets the special symbol special power status data to "2". Then, in step S3318, the main CPU 100a sets a variation stop command indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed. The variation stop command includes a symbol determination command indicating the special symbol that has been stopped and displayed, and a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state (game state determined from the presence or absence of the time-saving flag). When the variation stop command is sent to the performance control unit 130, the variation performance ends (the performance symbol is stopped and displayed), and processing according to the game state is performed. When the main CPU 100a executes the processing of step S3318, it ends the current special symbol variation processing.

In this way, when a small win symbol is displayed (small win game is executed) during the time-saving game state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 47, even if there are remaining time-saving times (J1, J2, J3), the time-saving game state ends when the remaining number of small wins (Z) becomes "0". Therefore, even if the player tries to play advantageously by referring to the pre-reading effects or the combination of the effect patterns 701 displayed, (whether to aim for an advantageous big win by passing the game ball through the specific area 52 in a small win game), it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage depending on the play method during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, even if there are remaining small wins (Z), the time-saving game state ends when the time-saving count (J1, J2, or J3) becomes "0." This prevents the time-saving game state from continuing until the small win symbol is stopped and displayed, giving the player an excessive advantage, and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, when the number of times the special symbol changes display, which is executed after a certain condition is met (executing RWM clear, initializing the number of operations n based on the end of a jackpot game), reaches a specified number of times, a second time-saving game state is generated, so the player can be surprised that the time-saving state occurs without going through a jackpot game, making the game more interesting.

In addition, the number of times (500) at which the second time-saving game state occurs is greater than the maximum number of times (496) set in the first time-saving game state, so the second time-saving game state will not occur during the first time-saving game state. This prevents players from becoming confused about the progress of the game, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, the number of fluctuations (500 times) at which the second time-saving play state occurs is greater than the maximum number of time-saving plays set in the first time-saving play state (496 times) by the upper limit of the second reserved number (4 pieces). Therefore, when the maximum number of time-saving plays (496 times) is set in the first time-saving play state, it can be felt as if the first time-saving play state has been directly transitioned to the second time-saving play state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the second time-saving game state occurs, the number of times of operation n stored in the main RAM 100c is not initialized, and the second time-saving history flag is turned ON. Therefore, the second time-saving game state will not occur again until the number of times of operation n and the second time-saving history flag are initialized (specifically, until a jackpot game is played, or an RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed), which ensures a balance of benefits between the gaming facility and the player, and also makes it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, rather than setting the maximum number of time-saving times in the first time-saving game state (496 times) to a number less than the number of fluctuations at which the second time-saving game state occurs (500 times), the maximum number of time-saving times in the first time-saving game state and the number of fluctuations at which the second time-saving game state occurs may be set to the same number. In this way, the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state are seamlessly connected, making it feel as if the first time-saving game state has been extended, and making it possible to increase interest in the game.

(Jackpot game end processing of the main control unit)
The big win game end process in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 112. Fig. 112 is a flow chart showing the big win game end process in the fifth embodiment.

First, in step S3701, the main CPU 100a refers to the special stop symbol data stored in the main RAM 100c to determine whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped. If the jackpot symbol is stopped, the process proceeds to step S3702. If the jackpot symbol is not stopped (if the small win symbol is stopped), the process proceeds to step S3704.

In step S3702, the main CPU 100a acquires the game state information at the time of the jackpot determination stored in the main RAM 100c, and in the following step S3703, sets a post-jackpot game state setting table (see FIG. 113(a)) for setting the game state after the jackpot game based on the game state information at the time of the jackpot winning. Details of the post-jackpot game state setting table will be described later.

In step S3704, the main CPU 100a acquires the game state information at the time of passing the specific area stored in the main RAM 100c, and in the following step S3705, sets a V jackpot post-play state setting table (see FIG. 113(b)) for setting the game state after the jackpot play based on the game state information at the time of passing the specific area. Details of the V jackpot post-play state setting table will be described later.

After processing step S3703 or step S3705, in step S3706, the main CPU 100a refers to the set state setting table to set the game state after the big win. Specifically, in step S3706, the main CPU 100a sets the time-saving flag, the number of time-saving times (J1 to J3), and the remaining number of small wins (Z) in the main RAM 100c.

Next, in step S3707, the main CPU 100a resets the number of activations n to its initial value (500) and resets the second time-saving history flag to OFF.

In step S3708, the main CPU 100a sets a game state designation command indicating the game state. This causes the game state designation command to be sent to the performance control unit 130, which then performs processing to update the game state.

In step S3709, the main CPU 100a sets the special symbol special power status data to "0" to move processing to the special symbol determination process, and ends the current jackpot game end process.

In this way, at the end of a big win game that is executed when the game ball passes through the specific area 52 during a small win game, it is possible to perform a predetermined process (specifically, a process of determining the game conditions after the big win game (game state, number of time-saving times, number of remaining small wins) and setting the determined game conditions in the main RAM 100c) based on the game state when the game ball passed through the specific area during the small win game.

In addition, at the end of a big win game that does not go through a small win game, it is possible to perform a predetermined process (specifically, a process of determining the game conditions after the big win game (game state, number of time-saving times, number of remaining small wins) and setting the determined game conditions in the main RAM 100c) based on the game state when it was determined that there was a big win. Therefore, it is possible to make the gameplay different depending on whether it is a big win game that goes through a small win game or a big win game that does not go through a small win game, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, at the end of a big win game that does not go through a small win game, a predetermined process may be performed based on the game state when the big win symbol is displayed stopped, rather than performing a predetermined process based on the game state when a big win is determined.

(Post-jackpot game state setting table)
Fig. 113 is a diagram showing an example of a post-jackpot game state setting table used to set the game state after a jackpot game is played. Fig. 113(a) is a diagram showing a post-jackpot game state setting table for setting the game state after the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small win, and Fig. 113(b) is a diagram showing a V post-jackpot game state setting table for setting the game state after the end of a jackpot game that goes through a small win game.

As shown in FIG. 113(a), the post-jackpot play state setting table associates the play state at the time of jackpot determination, the stopped pattern (jackpot pattern), the first time-saving number of times (J1) which is the number of times the first special pattern changes to end the time-saving play state, the second time-saving number of times (J2) which is the number of times the second special pattern changes to end the time-saving play state, the third time-saving number of times (J3) which is the number of times the combined first special pattern and second special pattern changes to end the time-saving play state, and the remaining number of small wins (Z) which is the number of times the small win pattern stops to end the time-saving play state.

As shown in FIG. 113(b), the V jackpot post-play state setting table associates the play state when the game ball passes through the specific area 52, the stopped pattern (small win pattern), the first time-saving number of times (J1) which is the number of times the first special pattern changes to end the time-saving play state, the second time-saving number of times (J2) which is the number of times the second special pattern changes to end the time-saving play state, the third time-saving number of times (J3) which is the number of times the combined first special pattern and second special pattern change to end the time-saving play state, and the remaining number of small wins (Z) which is the number of times the small win pattern stops to end the time-saving play state.

The first feature of the post-jackpot game state setting table shown in FIG. 113 is that there are jackpot games (first jackpot game, third jackpot game) in which the second time-saving number of times (J2) set when executed in the time-saving game state is greater than the second time-saving number of times (J2) set when executed in the normal game state. By doing this, the second time-saving number of times (J2) set can be made different depending on the type of jackpot game, improving playability and making the game more interesting.

The second feature is that there are jackpot games (second jackpot game, fourth jackpot game, fifth jackpot game) in which the second time-saving number of times (J2) set when executed in the normal game state is the same as the second time-saving number of times (J2) set when executed in the time-saving game state, and the second time-saving number of times (J2) of these jackpot games is greater than the second time-saving number of times (J2) of the other jackpot games (first jackpot game, third jackpot game). In this way, the value of the jackpot game can be differentiated by the number of time-saving times, rather than by the difference in the prize balls that can be acquired during the jackpot game, making it possible to improve the playability and increase the interest in the game.

The third feature is that there are jackpot games (first jackpot game, second jackpot game, third jackpot game) in which the number of remaining small wins (Z) set when played in the time-saving game mode is greater than the number of remaining small wins (Z) set when played in the normal game mode. By doing this, the number of remaining small wins (Z) set depending on the type of jackpot game can be made different, improving playability and making the game more interesting.

The fourth feature is that there are jackpot games (fourth jackpot game, fifth jackpot game) in which the remaining number of small wins (Z) set when played in the normal game mode is the same as the remaining number of small wins (Z) set when played in the time-saving game mode, and in the normal game mode, the remaining number of small wins (Z) of that jackpot game is greater than the remaining number of small wins (Z) of the other jackpot games (first jackpot game, second jackpot game, third jackpot game). In this way, the value of the jackpot game can be differentiated by the remaining number of small wins, rather than by the difference in the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the jackpot game, making it possible to improve the playability and increase the interest in the game.

The fifth feature is that there are jackpot games (first V jackpot game, third V jackpot game) in which the second time-saving number of times (J2) set when executed in the time-saving game state is greater than the second time-saving number of times (J2) set when executed in the normal game state, among jackpot games executed via small jackpot games. In this way, the second time-saving number of times (J2) set can be made different depending on the type of jackpot game that is executed via small jackpot game, which improves the playability and makes the game more interesting.

The sixth feature is that the number of remaining small wins (Z) set for a jackpot game that is executed via a small win game in a time-saving game state is greater than the number of remaining small wins (Z) set for a jackpot game in a normal game state. This makes it possible to vary the value of a jackpot game that goes via a small win game depending on the game state, improving gameplay and making the game more interesting.

As a seventh feature, when the jackpot patterns A11 to A13 stop during normal play and a jackpot play is performed, the remaining number of small jackpots Z is set to 1. In this case, when the small jackpot pattern stops, the remaining number of small jackpots becomes "0", and if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 52 during the small jackpot play, the game transitions to the normal play state without a jackpot play being performed. If the small jackpot pattern stops after the jackpot patterns A11 to A13 stop and a jackpot play is performed, the game will fall back to the normal play state unless the game ball passes through the specific area 52, so the player can be encouraged to actively shoot the game ball toward the specific area 52.

As an eighth feature, the remaining number of small wins Z is set to 2 even when the big win pattern A21 or A22 stops in the normal game state and a big win game is played, and when the big win pattern A21 or A22 stops in the time-saving game state and a big win game is played. Also, when a big win game is played in the time-saving game state, the remaining number of small wins Z is set to 2. When the remaining number of small wins is set to 2, even if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 52 during the small win game, the remaining number of small wins does not become "0", so the time-saving game state continues. Therefore, even if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 52 during the first small win game, it is possible to play in the time-saving game state without transitioning to the normal game state. Furthermore, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 52 during the second small win game, the game will transition to the normal game state without playing a big win game as described above.

In addition, in another embodiment, the remaining number of small wins may be greater than the value shown in the table of FIG. 113. For example, the remaining number of small wins may be the same as the number of time-saving times or greater than the number of time-saving times. In this case, even if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 52 during a small win game, the remaining number of small wins will not become "0", so the time-saving game state can be continued.

(Game state referenced at the end of a big win game without going through a small win game)
Figure 114 is a diagram showing the game state referenced at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small jackpot game, where Figure 114(a) is a timing chart when a jackpot change display (change display of a special pattern determined to be a jackpot in a jackpot judgment) is executed in a normal game state, Figure 114(b) is a timing chart when a jackpot change display is executed in a time-saving game state (before the final change), and Figure 114(c) is a timing chart when a jackpot change display is executed in a time-saving game state (final change).

The game state referenced for setting the game conditions (game state, number of time-saving times, number of remaining small wins) at the end of a big win game that does not involve a small win game is the timing when a big win is determined to have occurred (when the big win is won).

As shown in FIG. 114(a), when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the normal game state, at the end of the jackpot game of T4, the game conditions (game state, number of various time-saving times, number of remaining small wins) are set by referring to the game state at the start of the jackpot fluctuation display of T1, that is, at the time when the jackpot was won. In this case, the timing of T1 is the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 114(b), when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the time-saving game state (before the final fluctuation), at the end of the jackpot game of T4, the game conditions (game state, number of various time-saving times, number of remaining small wins) are set by referring to the game state at the start of the jackpot fluctuation display of T1, that is, at the time when the jackpot was won. In this case, the timing of T1 is the time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 114(c), when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the time-saving game state (final fluctuation), at the end of the jackpot game of T4, the game conditions (game state, number of various time-saving times, number of remaining small wins) are set by referring to the game state at the start of the jackpot fluctuation display of T1, that is, at the time when the jackpot was won. In this case, the timing of T1 is the time-saving game state.

(Game state referenced at the end of a big win game via a small win game)
Figure 115 is a diagram showing the game state referenced at the end of a big win game that goes through a small win game, where Figure 115(a) is a timing chart when a small win variable display is executed in a normal game state, Figure 115(b) is a timing chart when a small win variable display that does not satisfy the time-saving end condition is executed in a time-saving game state, and Figure 114(c) is a timing chart when a small win variable display that satisfies the time-saving end condition is executed in a time-saving game state.

The game state that is referenced to set the game conditions (game state, number of time-saving times, number of remaining small wins) at the end of a big win game that has passed through a small win game is the timing when the game ball passes through the specific area 52 during a small win game (when transitioning to a big win game).

As shown in FIG. 115(a), when the small win variable display is executed in the normal game state, at the end of the big win game of T6, the game state when the game ball passed through the specific area 52 during the small win game of T4 is referenced and the game conditions (game state, number of various time-saving times, number of remaining small wins) are set. In this case, since the normal game state has been in place since the start of the small win variable display, the timing of T4 is the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 115(b), when a small win variable display that does not satisfy the time-saving end condition is executed in the time-saving game state, the game state when the game ball passed through the specific area 52 during the small win game of T4 is referenced at the end of the big win game of T6, and the game conditions (game state, various time-saving number of times, remaining number of small wins) are set. In this case, when the small win variable display of T2 is stopped, the various time-saving number of times and the remaining number of small wins are not "0" and the time-saving game state is maintained, so the timing of T4 is the time-saving game state. Note that when the game ball passes through the specific area 52 at the timing of T4, the big win game starts and the game transitions to the normal game state, but the time of passing through the specific area 52 is considered to be the time-saving game state before transitioning to the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 115(c), when a small win variable display that satisfies the time-saving end condition is executed in the time-saving game state, at the end of the big win game of T6, the game state when the game ball passed through the specific area 52 during the small win game of T4 is referenced and the game conditions (game state, various time-saving number of times, remaining number of small wins) are set. In this case, when the small win variable display of T2 stops, one of the numbers becomes "0", the time-saving game state ends and transitions to the normal game state, so the timing of T4 is the normal game state.

As shown in Figures 114 and 115, the sampling timing (acquisition timing) of the game state referenced to set the game conditions (game state, various time-saving counts, remaining number of small wins) at the end of a jackpot game differs between when a jackpot variation display is executed and a jackpot game is played, and when a small win variation display is executed and a jackpot game is played. Therefore, the gameplay can be made different depending on whether it is a jackpot or a small win, making the game more interesting.

The gaming machine of the fifth embodiment is not limited to the above, and various other modifications may be made. For example, it may be configured as follows.

For example, in the above embodiment, the blocking image 920 appears immediately after the performance pattern 701 starts to change, blocking the performance pattern 701, but the blocking image 920 may also appear when the performance pattern 701 starts to change. This allows a blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode to be performed even if the change time is short. Also, the blocking image 920 may appear just before or when the performance pattern 701 stops, blocking the performance pattern 701. This allows the player to be more impressed with the blocking effect when entering the time-saving mode than with the change effect.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the first time from the start of the special symbol change to the appearance of the shielding image 920 is shorter than the second time from the start of the special symbol change to the appearance of the post-reach shielding image 940. In other words, the shielding image 920 is displayed after the first time has elapsed from the start of the change, and the post-reach shielding image 940 is displayed after the second time has elapsed, which is longer than the first time. In other embodiments, the first time from the start of the special symbol change to the appearance of the shielding image 920 may be longer than the second time from the start of the special symbol change to the appearance of the post-reach shielding image 940.

The first time from when the special symbol starts to change until the shielding image 920 appears may be shorter than the second time from when the special symbol starts to change until the shielding image 950 appears. In this case, the shielding effect at the time of entering the time-saving mode can be executed earlier to transition to time-saving mode B. The first time may be longer than the second time. In this case, the entry into the second time-saving game state can be emphasized.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the presentation mode when the jackpot judgment determines that a jackpot has occurred is different depending on whether the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a specified number of times or not. In other words, when a jackpot is determined to have occurred in the first change after the specified number of times is reached (the first change after the second time-saving game state is set), a special time-saving entry exception presentation is executed that is different from when a jackpot is determined to have occurred in any other change. In other embodiments, the same presentation mode may be used for the first change after the specified number of times is reached and for any other change.

In the above embodiment, when the number of times the special symbols change reaches a specified number of times without a jackpot being played, the normal game state is transitioned to the second time-saving game state. The specified number of times may be variable. For example, there may be a time-saving game state that is granted when the number of times the special symbols change reaches a first number, and a time-saving game state that is granted when the number of times the special symbols change reaches a second number. In this case, the number of time-saving times granted may differ depending on the number of times the special symbols change, and the number of time-saving times may be set to be greater (or less) the greater the number of times the symbols change.

The gaming machine of the fifth embodiment may also be configured as follows:

For example, in the case of a specific jackpot (jackpot patterns A21, A22), the number of times the special pattern changes to end the advantageous game state (time-saving game state, high probability state) that is controlled after the jackpot ends is the same regardless of the game state, whereas in the case of a jackpot via a small jackpot, the number of times the special pattern changes to end the advantageous game state that is controlled after the jackpot ends may differ depending on the game state.

The advantageous game state (time-saving game state, high probability state) that is controlled after a big win may be terminated (transition to the normal game state) when the number of fluctuations reaches a specified number, or when the number of small wins reaches a specified number (including one).

The favorable play state that is controlled after a big win can be ended when any of a number of ending conditions (number of remaining special 1 time-saving turns (J1), number of remaining special 2 time-saving turns (J2), total number of time-saving turns (J3), number of remaining small wins) is met, and although the specified ending condition (number of small wins) in the favorable play state is not announced, the specified ending condition may be suggested by mode presentation (background image, remaining number of time-saving turns display "N turns remaining", etc.).

The favorable game state that is controlled after a big win can be ended (transitioned to the normal game state) when the first ending condition (remaining number of special 2 time-saving plays) is met, or when the second ending condition (remaining number of small wins, remaining number of special 1 time-saving plays, total number of time-saving plays) is met, and while information related to the first ending condition (remaining number of special 2 time-saving plays) can be announced during the favorable game state, information related to the second ending condition (remaining number of small wins, remaining number of special 1 time-saving plays, total number of time-saving plays) does not have to be announced.

The advantageous game state that is controlled after a big win game can be ended when the number of small wins reaches a specified number, and if the gaming medium does not pass through a specific area during a small win game that is executed after the specified number of small wins, a screen suggesting the end of the advantageous game state is displayed, and the display period of the screen suggesting the end may change depending on whether or not the second special pattern is reserved when the small win game ends.

A second time-saving suggestion effect (pre-introduction mode, countdown display, game number display, etc.) that suggests a time when the second time-saving game state may occur can be executed, and during a specified miss variation effect (miss without reach), there is an execution period during which the second time-saving suggestion effect is executed, but there is no non-execution period during which the second time-saving suggestion effect is not executed, and during a jackpot variation effect, there may be an execution period during which the second time-saving suggestion effect is executed (before the SP reach) and a non-execution period during which the second time-saving suggestion effect is not executed (during the SP/SPSP reach).

A second time-saving suggestion effect (countdown display, game number display, etc.) can be executed, which indicates a time when a second time-saving game state may occur, and during a first reach variation effect (N reach), there is an execution period during which the second time-saving suggestion effect is executed, but there is no non-execution period during which the second time-saving suggestion effect is not executed, and during a second reach variation effect (SP/SPSP reach) which has a higher expectation level than the first reach variation effect, there may be an execution period (before the SP reach) during which the second time-saving suggestion effect is executed and a non-execution period (during the SP/SPSP reach) during which the second time-saving suggestion effect is not executed.

A second time-saving suggestion effect (countdown display, game number display, etc.) can be executed to indicate when the second time-saving game state may occur, and during the variable effect executed in the normal game state, there is an execution period (before the SP reach) during which the second time-saving suggestion effect is executed and a non-execution period (during the SP/SPSP reach, etc.) during which the second time-saving suggestion effect is not executed, and during the variable effect executed in a specific game state (first time-saving game state, high probability state, etc.), there is no execution period during which the second time-saving suggestion effect is executed, but there may be a non-execution period during which the second time-saving suggestion effect is not executed.

It is possible to execute a second time-saving suggestive effect (countdown display, game number display, etc.) that suggests when the second time-saving play state may occur, and in the event of a jackpot, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect (pre-reading effect, jackpot advance notice effect) that determines in advance that a jackpot will occur, while in the event of a second time-saving play state, it is also possible not to execute a suggestive effect (pre-reading effect) that determines in advance (two or more fluctuations before) that the second time-saving play state will occur.

There is a first time-saving game state that goes through a jackpot game, and a second time-saving game state that does not go through a jackpot game. If the display shows a miss a predetermined number of times after the first condition is met (RWM cleared), and if the display shows a miss a predetermined number of times after the second condition is met (jackpot game ends), the game will be controlled to the second time-saving game state for a predetermined period of time.

There is a first time-saving game state that goes through a jackpot game, and a third time-saving game state that does not go through a jackpot game, and when a second miss special pattern different from the first miss special pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display, the game may be controlled to the third time-saving game state for a predetermined period different from the first time-saving game state.

It is possible to control the time-saving game state (second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state) for a predetermined period of time without going through a jackpot game, and to execute a break-in effect (an effect that notifies the player of a transition to the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state), and may be configured so that if the first change in the time-saving game state is a miss, the break-in effect is executed upon that change, and if the first change in the time-saving game state is a jackpot, the break-in effect is not executed upon that change.

It is possible to control the time-saving game state (second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state) for a predetermined period of time without going through a jackpot game, and it is also possible to execute an entry effect, and if the first change in the time-saving game state is a miss, the entry effect is executed in a first mode during that change, and if the first change in the time-saving game state is a jackpot, the entry effect is executed in a second mode that is less appealing than the first mode (shorter time, fewer effects displayed) during that change.

The special chart fluctuation pattern may be determined using different special chart fluctuation pattern tables during the first time-saving play state (or a high probability state that continues up to a predetermined number of times) and during the second time-saving play state, and the special chart fluctuation pattern may be determined using different special chart fluctuation pattern tables during a predetermined period after the end of the first time-saving play state (the fluctuation period of the remaining reserved amount of the second special pattern) and during a predetermined period after the end of the second time-saving play state (the fluctuation period of the remaining reserved amount of the second special pattern).

The special chart fluctuation pattern may be determined using different special chart fluctuation pattern tables during the first time-saving play state (or a high probability state that continues up to a predetermined number of times) and during the second time-saving play state, and the special chart fluctuation pattern may be determined using the same special chart fluctuation pattern table during a predetermined period after the end of the first time-saving play state (the fluctuation period of the remaining reserved amount of the second special pattern) and during a predetermined period after the end of the second time-saving play state (the fluctuation period of the remaining reserved amount of the second special pattern).

During the first time-saving game state (or a high-probability state that continues up to a predetermined number of times) and during the second time-saving game state, the special game pattern may be determined using different special game pattern tables, and during the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, the regular game pattern may be determined using different regular game pattern tables.

During the first time-saving game state (or a high probability state that continues until a predetermined number of times) and during the second time-saving game state, the special game pattern may be determined using different special game pattern tables, and during the first time-saving game state (or a high probability state that continues until a predetermined number of times) and during the second time-saving game state, the regular game pattern may be determined using the same regular game pattern table.

During the first time-saving game state (or the high probability state that continues up to a predetermined number of times) and during the second time-saving game state, the special symbol change pattern can be determined using different special symbol change pattern tables, and even if the same winning normal symbol is stopped and displayed during the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, the second starting hole can be opened with different opening patterns (opening time, opening number of times, opening interval).

During the first time-saving play state and the second time-saving play state, the special symbol variation pattern can be determined using different special symbol variation pattern tables, and even if the same winning normal symbol is stopped and displayed during the first time-saving play state and the second time-saving play state, the second starting hole can be opened with the same opening pattern (opening time, number of openings, opening interval).

If a jackpot game is executed during the advantageous state (second time-saving game state) that began when the second time-saving condition regarding the number of times the special pattern changes is met (for example, when a specified number of times is reached) and the advantageous state ends, the result display may not be executed, but if a jackpot game is executed during the advantageous state that began when the second time-saving condition is met and the advantageous state ends after the jackpot game ends, the result display may be executed.

When the first end condition (number of time-saving plays) or the second end condition (number of small wins) is met during the advantageous state, it is possible to end the advantageous state, and if the advantageous state (first time-saving play state, second time-saving play state, etc.) ends due to the first end condition being met (the number of time-saving plays being consumed), a result display is executed, and if the advantageous state ends due to the second end condition being met (the number of small wins being consumed), the result display may not be executed.

It is possible to display an end suggestion screen (result display, display indicating the end of the advantageous state) during the execution of the final variable effect in the advantageous state, and to continue displaying the end suggestion screen until a predetermined number of variable effects (the number of remaining reserved second special symbols) have been executed after the advantageous state ends, and it may be possible to make the variable effect variable time performed while the end suggestion screen continues to be displayed shorter than the symbol stop time of the final variable effect in the advantageous state.

It may be possible to set multiple presentation modes, and the presentation mode set based on the end of the first time-saving play state may be different from the presentation mode set based on the end of the second time-saving play state.

When the first advantageous state (e.g., the second time-saving game state) ends, a predetermined left hit notification (image instructing left hit, sound instructing left hit) can be executed after a predetermined period has elapsed since the advantageous state ended (remaining reserved second special symbols are consumed), and when the second advantageous state (e.g., the first time-saving game state) ends, a predetermined left hit notification can be executed before a predetermined period has elapsed since the advantageous state ended (remaining reserved second special symbols are consumed). Also, when the first advantageous state (e.g., the second time-saving game state) ends, a predetermined left hit notification (image instructing left hit, sound instructing left hit) can be executed before a predetermined period has elapsed since the advantageous state ended (remaining reserved second special symbols are consumed), and when the second advantageous state (e.g., the first time-saving game state) ends, a predetermined left hit notification can be executed after a predetermined period has elapsed since the advantageous state ended (remaining reserved second special symbols are consumed).

When the first advantageous state (e.g., the second time-saving game state) ends, a predetermined left hit notification can be executed at any one of a plurality of timings (timing corresponding to the remaining reserved second special symbol), and when the second advantageous state (e.g., the first time-saving game state) ends, a predetermined left hit notification can be executed at one timing (immediately after the stop time has elapsed). Also, when the second advantageous state (e.g., the first time-saving game state) ends, a predetermined left hit notification can be executed at any one of a plurality of timings (timing corresponding to the remaining reserved second special symbol), and when the first advantageous state (e.g., the second time-saving game state) ends, a predetermined left hit notification can be executed at one timing (immediately after the stop time has elapsed).

When the time-saving game state (for example, the second time-saving game state) ends, a predetermined left-hit notification can be executed after a predetermined period of time has passed since the end of the time-saving game state (after the remaining reserved second special symbols have been consumed), and the execution of a predetermined preview effect (preview preview effect, jackpot preview effect) corresponding to the normal game state may be restricted during the period from the end of the time-saving game state until the execution of the predetermined left-hit notification.

It can be set to multiple presentation modes, and when the time-saving game state (for example, the second time-saving game state) ends, a predetermined left-hit notification can be executed after a predetermined period of time has passed since the end of the time-saving game state (after the remaining reserved second special symbols have been consumed), and setting a predetermined presentation mode (initial mode, look-ahead mode) may be restricted during the period from the end of the time-saving game state until the execution of the predetermined left-hit notification.

The second time-saving game state can be executed only once between jackpot games, and if the power is restored from a power outage during normal game mode after the second time-saving game state ends, a specific notification (a display using an image (e.g., a display in a specific manner related to the number of games played, lighting of a lamp in a specific manner, etc.) can be executed to indicate that the second time-saving game state has been executed.

The second time-saving game state can be executed only once between jackpot games, and when power is restored from a power outage during normal game mode after the second time-saving game state ends, a first notification can be executed to notify the player that power has been restored, and a second notification can be executed to suggest that the second time-saving game state has been executed (a display using an image (e.g., a display in a specific manner regarding the number of games played, or a lamp illuminating in a specific manner, etc.).

When power is restored from a power outage during normal game play after the end of the first advantageous state (first time-saving game play state), a specific notification regarding whether or not the RWM has been cleared (an effect suggesting that the RWM clear operation or setting change operation has not been performed) can be executed, and when power is restored from a power outage during normal game play after the end of the second advantageous state (second time-saving game play state), a specific notification regarding whether or not the RWM has been cleared may not be executed.

When power is restored from a power outage in the second presentation mode after the end of the first advantageous state (first time-shortened play state), even if control is returned to the first presentation mode (initial mode) after recovery, a specific notification regarding whether or not the RWM has been cleared can be executed, and when power is restored from a power outage in the second presentation mode after the end of the second advantageous state (second time-shortened play state), even if control is returned to the first presentation mode (initial mode) after recovery, a specific notification regarding whether or not the RWM has been cleared may not be executed.

Priority is given to the change of the second special symbol, and during normal game play while the first special symbol's pre-reading effect is being executed, if a starting winning of the second special symbol occurs, the first special symbol's pre-reading effect may be terminated.

When a start win occurs, the hold icon may be displayed in a first size, and then in a second size. In the second time-saving play state before the time-saving introduction effect is executed, specific images (a customer waiting image, a menu image for setting the effect, a menu image for setting the volume, a menu image for setting the light intensity, and a right-hit image) may be able to be displayed. If a win occurs when a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving play state before the time-saving introduction effect is executed, the hold icon may not be displayed in the first size, and a time-saving introduction effect may be executed to notify that the second time-saving play state will be executed.

When a start win occurs, the reserved icon may perform a first action when it starts to be displayed, and a second action after it shifts to that icon. In the second time-saving play state before the time-saving introduction performance is executed, specific images (a customer waiting image, a menu image for setting the performance, a menu image for setting the volume, a menu image for setting the light intensity, and a right-hit image) may be able to be displayed. If a start win occurs when a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving play state before the time-saving introduction performance is executed, the reserved icon may not perform the first action, and the time-saving introduction performance may be able to be executed.

When a start win is made, the hold icon may be displayed in the first shape and an animation action may be performed. In the second time-saving play state before the time-saving introduction performance is executed, specific images (a customer waiting image, a menu image for setting the performance, a menu image for setting the volume, a menu image for setting the light intensity, and a right-hit image) may be able to be displayed. If a start win is made when a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving play state before the time-saving introduction performance is executed, the hold icon may not be displayed in the first shape and the time-saving introduction performance may be able to be executed.

When a start win occurs, the hold icon may be displayed with a first transparency (high transparency) and then with a second transparency (low transparency). In the second time-saving play state before the time-saving introduction performance is executed, specific images (customer waiting image, menu image for setting the performance, menu image for setting the volume, menu image for setting the light intensity, right-hit image) may be able to be displayed. If a win occurs when a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving play state before the time-saving introduction performance is executed, the hold icon may not be displayed with the first transparency and the time-saving introduction performance may be able to be executed.

When a start win occurs, the icon (reserved icon, the icon in question) may be displayed in the first position (position before the slide) and then in the second position (position after the slide). In the second time-saving play state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect, specific images (customer waiting image, menu image for setting the effect, menu image for setting the volume, menu image for setting the light intensity, right-hit image) may be able to be displayed. If a start win occurs when a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving play state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect, the icon may not be displayed in the first position and the time-saving introduction effect may be able to be executed.

When a specific image (customer waiting image, menu image for setting the effects, menu image for setting the volume, menu image for setting the light intensity, right-hit image) is displayed in the second time-saving play state before the time-saving introduction effect is executed, it may be possible to control the effect sound to the first mode. If a start win occurs when a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving play state before the time-saving introduction effect is executed, it may be possible to control the effect sound from the first mode to the second mode (outputting a winning sound, variable effect sound, or notification sound of the second time-saving play state) before the icon (reserved icon, that icon) is displayed.

When a specific image (a customer waiting image, a menu image for setting the effects, a menu image for setting the volume, a menu image for setting the light intensity, a right-hit image) is displayed in the second time-saving game state before the time-saving introduction effect is executed, it may be possible to control the frame lighting device 10 (frame lamp) to the first mode (light-emitting mode for waiting for customers, off). If a start win occurs when a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving game state before the time-saving introduction effect is executed, it may be possible to change the frame lamp from the first mode to the second mode (light-emitting mode corresponding to the variable effect or the time-saving introduction effect) before the hold icon is displayed. If an error occurs when the frame lamp is in the first mode, it may be possible to change the frame lamp from the first mode to the third mode (error notification mode).

When a specific image (a customer waiting image, a menu image for setting the effects, a menu image for setting the volume, a menu image for setting the light intensity, a right-hit image) is displayed in the second time-saving game state before the time-saving introduction effect is executed, it may be possible to change the board lighting device 74 (board lamp) to the first mode (light-emitting mode for waiting for customers, off). If a start win occurs when a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving game state before the time-saving introduction effect is executed, it may be possible to change the board lamp from the first mode to the second mode (light-emitting mode corresponding to the variable effect or the time-saving introduction effect) before the hold icon is displayed. If an error occurs when the board lamp is in the first mode, it may be possible to control the board lamp from the first mode to the third mode (error notification mode).

When a specific image (customer waiting image, menu image for setting the effects, menu image for setting the volume, menu image for setting the light intensity, right-hit image) is displayed in the second time-saving play state before the time-saving introduction effect is executed, it may be possible to set the effect body (effect device, effect button, etc.) to the first mode (light-emitting mode for waiting for customers, off). If a start win occurs when a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving play state before the time-saving introduction effect is executed, it may be possible to control the effect body from the first mode to the second mode (light-emitting mode corresponding to the variable effect or the time-saving introduction effect) before the hold icon is displayed. If an error occurs when the effect body is in the first mode, it may be possible to control the effect body from the first mode to the third mode (error notification mode).

In the second time-saving play state before the time-saving introduction effect is executed, specific images (customer waiting image, menu image for setting the effect, menu image for setting the volume, menu image for setting the light intensity, right-hit image) can be displayed, and if a start win occurs when a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving play state before the time-saving introduction effect is executed, the effect pattern may be displayed before the icon (reserved icon, the icon in question) is displayed while the specific image is fading out (during the disappearance effect).

When a start win occurs, the hold icon is displayed in a first size and then in a second size, and if a start win occurs when there is no hold and the fluctuation is stopped in the second time-saving game state before the time-saving introduction effect is executed, the hold icon may not be displayed in the first size and the time-saving introduction effect may be executed.

When a start winning occurs, the reserved icon performs a first action when it starts to be displayed, and a second action (animation action) after shifting to that icon, and if a start winning occurs when there is no reserved ball and the fluctuation is stopped in the second time-saving game state before the time-saving introduction performance is executed, the first action of the reserved icon may not be executed and the time-saving introduction performance may be executed.

When a start win occurs, the hold icon is displayed in the first shape, then in the second shape, and an animation runs. If a start win occurs when there is no hold and the fluctuation is stopped in the second time-saving game state before the time-saving introduction performance is executed, the hold icon may not be displayed in the first shape, and the time-saving introduction performance may be executed.

When a start win occurs, the hold icon is displayed at a first transparency (high transparency), and then at a second transparency (low transparency). If a start win occurs when there is no hold and the fluctuation is stopped in the second time-saving game state before the time-saving introduction performance is executed, the hold icon may not be displayed at the first transparency and the time-saving introduction performance may be executed.

When a start win occurs, the icon (reserved icon, the icon in question) is displayed in the first position (position before the slide) and then in the second position (position after the slide), and if a start win occurs when the variable is stopped and there is no reserve in the second time-saving game state before the time-saving introduction performance is executed, the icon may not be displayed in the first position and the time-saving introduction performance may be executed.

When a start win occurs, the hold icon is displayed in the first size, and then in the second size. In normal mode or pre-introduction mode, if a start win occurs after the right-hit notification has begun and the fluctuation has stopped, the hold icon may not be displayed in the first size, and the mode may transition to a specific mode (time-saving mode).

When a start winning occurs, the reserved icon performs a first action (such as a rotation action) when it starts to be displayed, and a second action after it shifts to that icon; in normal mode or pre-introduction mode, if a start winning occurs after the right-hit notification has begun and the fluctuation has stopped, the first action of the reserved icon may not be performed, and a transition to a specific mode (time-saving mode) may occur.

When a start win occurs, the hold icon is displayed in the first shape, then in the second shape, and an animation action is performed. In normal mode or pre-introduction mode, if a start win occurs after the right-hit notification has begun and the fluctuation has stopped, the hold icon may not be displayed in the first shape, and the mode may transition to a specific mode (time-saving mode).

When a start win occurs, the hold icon is displayed at the first transparency (high transparency), and then at the second transparency (low transparency). In normal mode or pre-introduction mode, if a start win occurs after the right-hit notification has begun and the fluctuation has stopped, the hold icon may not be displayed at the first transparency and the mode may transition to a specific mode (time-saving mode).

When a start winning occurs, the icon (reserved icon, the icon in question) is displayed in the first position (position before the slide) and then in the second position (position after the slide), and in normal mode or pre-introduction mode, if a start winning occurs after the right-hit notification has begun and the fluctuation has stopped, the reserved icon may not be displayed in the first position and a transition may be made to a specific mode (time-saving mode).

When the reserved icon is operable in the normal game state, and the second time-saving game state is entered while there is a reserved ball, in the first change in the second time-saving game state, the movement of the performance symbol and the reserved icon becomes difficult or impossible to see, and then the movement (change) of the performance symbol becomes easily visible, but the movement of the reserved icon does not have to become easily visible.

When the reserved icon is operable in the normal game state and the second time-saving game state is entered while there is a reserved ball, the small symbol may start to change after the reserved icon's movement becomes difficult or impossible to see, but before the reserved icon's movement becomes easily visible.

If the second time-saving play state is entered while there is a reserved ball, the performance symbol will be hidden and then redisplayed during the first change in the second time-saving play state, but the reserved icon does not have to be hidden and then redisplayed.

When the second time-saving play state is entered while there is a reserved ball, the small symbols will not be hidden, but the reserved icon may be hidden.

In a variation that develops into a specific reach (SP reach) when multiple reserved icons are displayed, the multiple reserved icons are made invisible when the specific reach begins, the missed reach is temporarily stopped, a post-reach occlusion image is displayed, and then as the post-reach occlusion image fades out (gradually shrinks or slides, etc.), the reserved icons that were hidden by the post-reach occlusion image gradually become easier to see. If the power is turned off when multiple reserved icons are displayed and then restored, the multiple reserved icons are made invisible before the start of the next variation, and then all of the multiple reserved icons are displayed. In a variation that enters a second time-saving game state when multiple reserved icons are displayed, the multiple reserved icons may be made invisible and then occluded by an occlusion image, and then the multiple reserved icons that were displayed before the occlusion are not displayed again.

In a variation that develops into a specific reach (SP reach) when multiple icons are displayed, the multiple icons (the reserved icon and the icon in question) may be hidden when the specific reach begins, and after the reach, an obscuring image is displayed and then the multiple icons are redisplayed. If the power is turned off and then restored while multiple icons are displayed, before the start of the next variation, some of the multiple icons are hidden and then displayed, while the other some (the icons in question) are not redisplayed. In a variation that enters a second time-saving game state when multiple icons are displayed, the multiple icons may be hidden and then none of the multiple icons are redisplayed.

In the second time-saving game state before the time-saving introduction effect is executed, it may be possible not to output the effect sound. When a start winning occurs in the second time-saving game state before the time-saving introduction effect is executed, a specific effect sound (winning sound, second time-saving game state notification sound) may be output before the display of the reserved icon is completed. When the power is restored after a power outage while the reserved icon is displayed, the display of the reserved icon may be completed before the effect sound is output.

It may be possible not to output sound effects when specific images (customer waiting image, menu image for setting effects, menu image for setting volume, menu image for setting light intensity, right-hit image) are displayed in the second time-saving game state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect. If a start win occurs when a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving game state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect, the output of specific sound effects (winning sound, second time-saving game state notification sound) begins before the specific image has finished fading out. When power is restored after a power outage, the output of sound effects may begin after the recovery image has finished fading out.

It may be possible not to output the effect sound when a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving game state before the time-saving introduction effect is executed. If a start win occurs when a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving game state before the time-saving introduction effect is executed, the output of the specific effect sound (winning sound, second time-saving game state notification sound) begins before the effect pattern is completely displayed. When the power is restored after a power outage, the output of the effect sound may begin after the effect pattern is completely displayed.

It may be possible not to output a sound effect when a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving game state before the time-saving introduction effect is executed. If a start win occurs when a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving game state before the time-saving introduction effect is executed, the output of a specific sound effect (a winning sound, a sound notifying the second time-saving game state) begins before the small symbol (which may be the fourth symbol) is completely displayed. When the power is restored after a power outage, the output of the sound effect may begin after the small symbol (fourth symbol) is completely displayed.

When a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving play state before the time-saving introduction effect is executed, it is possible to set the frame lamp to the first state without outputting the effect sound. If a start win occurs when a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving play state before the time-saving introduction effect is executed, (the frame lamp and the effect sound are controlled at the same timing) the output of the effect sound may start before the frame lamp changes from the first state to the second state (the light-emitting state according to the variable effect or the second time-saving play state). When the power is restored after a power outage, the output of the sound may start after the frame lamp lights up.

When a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving game state before the time-saving introduction effect is executed, it is possible to set the board lamp to the first mode (light-emitting mode for waiting for customers, off) without outputting the effect sound. If a start win occurs when a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving game state before the time-saving introduction effect is executed, the board lamp and sound are controlled at the same timing, but the output of the effect sound may start before the board lamp changes from the first mode to the second mode (light-emitting mode corresponding to the variable effect or the second time-saving game state). When the power is restored after a power outage, the output of the sound may start after the board lamp lights up.

When a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving play state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect, it is possible to set the effect body (gimmick, effect button, etc.) to the first mode (light-emitting mode for waiting for customers, off) without outputting the effect sound. If a start win occurs when a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving play state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect, the effect body and sound are controlled at the same timing, but the output of the effect sound begins before the effect body changes from the first mode to the second mode (light-emitting mode corresponding to the variable effect or the second time-saving play state). When the power is restored after a power outage, the output of the sound may begin after the effect body starts operating.

(Configuration of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment and its effects)
As described above, the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment may have the following configuration: Note that the text in parentheses indicates a correspondence with the embodiments, and is merely an example.

The gaming machine according to configuration 1 is provided with a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a start condition, a pattern control means for notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a pattern in a variable manner and then stopping the display of the pattern after a predetermined variation time has elapsed based on the result of the special game determination, a game state control means capable of controlling a first game state and a second game state (time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on the result of the special game determination, and the presentation control means is capable of notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a presentation pattern in a variable manner corresponding to the variable display of the pattern and displaying the presentation pattern in a stopped manner corresponding to the stopped display of the pattern, and When a predetermined condition regarding the number of times is satisfied, a first performance can be executed based on the result of the special game judgment, in which after the performance pattern starts to change, a first predetermined image (obstructed image 920) is displayed and the performance pattern is hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed. When the predetermined condition is not satisfied, a second performance can be executed based on the result of the special game judgment, in which a second predetermined image (obstructed image 950) different from the first predetermined image is displayed during the display of the changing performance pattern and the performance pattern is hidden, and after a second predetermined time has elapsed, the second predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed. When the first performance is executed, the game is controlled to the second game state.

According to the above configuration, when a predetermined condition regarding the number of times a special game judgment is performed is met (when the predetermined number of times is reached), the first predetermined image is displayed to cover the performance pattern, making the player look forward to a transition to a special state and increasing interest. In addition, even if the predetermined number of times is not reached, a different second predetermined image is displayed to hide the performance pattern, making the player look forward to a special performance. Suddenly hiding the performance pattern creates an element of surprise and makes the player excited. This makes it possible to diversify the variety of performances and increase interest.

The gaming machine according to configuration 2 includes a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a start condition, a pattern control means for notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a pattern in a variable manner and then stopping the display of the pattern after a predetermined variable time has elapsed based on the result of the special game determination, a game state control means capable of controlling the game between a first game state and a second game state (time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a presentation control means for controlling the game based on the result of the special game determination. and a performance control means, which is capable of informing the result of the special game determination by variably displaying a first performance pattern (performance pattern 701) in response to the variably display of the pattern and by stationarily displaying the first performance pattern in response to the stationary display of the pattern, and by variably displaying a second performance pattern (small pattern 702) different from the first performance pattern in response to the variably display of the pattern and by stationarily displaying the second performance pattern in response to the stationary display of the pattern, It is possible to notify the result, and when a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special game judgment is executed is satisfied, a first performance can be executed in which, after the first performance pattern starts to vary, a first predetermined image (obstructed image 920) is displayed and the first performance pattern is hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the first performance pattern is displayed, based on the result of the special game judgment, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, a second performance can be executed in which, during the varying display of the first performance pattern, a second predetermined image (obstructed image 950) different from the first predetermined image is displayed and the first performance pattern is hidden, and after a second predetermined time has elapsed, the second predetermined image is hidden and the first performance pattern is displayed, based on the result of the special game judgment, when the first performance is executed, it is controlled to the second game state, and the second performance pattern can be displayed even when the first performance pattern is hidden by the first performance or the second performance.

According to the above configuration, even when the first performance symbol is not displayed, the second performance symbol is displayed, allowing the player to check the changing state of the special symbol.

The gaming machine according to configuration 3 is equipped with a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a start condition, a pattern control means for notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a pattern in a variable manner and then stopping the display of the pattern after a predetermined variation time has elapsed based on the result of the special game determination, a game state control means capable of controlling a first game state and a second game state (time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a performance control means for controlling a performance based on the result of the special game determination, and the performance control means is capable of notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a performance pattern in a variable manner corresponding to the variable display of the pattern and displaying the performance pattern in a stopped manner corresponding to the stopped display of the pattern, and when a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special game determination is performed is established, In this case, based on the result of the special game judgment, after the performance pattern starts to change, a first performance can be executed in which a first predetermined image (obstructed image 920) is displayed and the performance pattern is hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed. If the specified condition is not met, based on the result of the special game judgment, a second performance can be executed in which a second predetermined image (obstructed image 950) different from the first predetermined image is displayed during the display of the performance pattern change and the performance pattern is hidden, and after a second predetermined time has elapsed, the second predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed. When the first performance is executed, the game state is controlled to the second game state, and the display time of the first predetermined image and the display time of the second predetermined image are different.

According to the above configuration, for example, by lengthening the display time of the first predetermined image, it is possible to impress a special effect when entering the second game state, and to heighten the player's expectations. In addition, by shortening the display time of the second predetermined image, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations.

The gaming machine according to configuration 4 is equipped with a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a start condition, a pattern control means for notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying the pattern in a variable manner and then stopping the display of the pattern after a predetermined variation time has elapsed based on the result of the special game determination, a game state control means capable of controlling a first game state and a second game state (time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a performance control means for controlling a performance based on the result of the special game determination, and the performance control means is capable of performing a variation start operation of the performance pattern when the pattern starts to vary, performing a variation display of the performance pattern after the variation start operation, performing a variation stop operation of the performance pattern before the stop display of the pattern, and stopping the display of the performance pattern in response to the stop display of the pattern, and when a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special game determination is performed is established, In this case, based on the result of the special game judgment, after the performance pattern starts to change, a first performance can be executed in which a first predetermined image (obstructed image 920) is displayed and the performance pattern is hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed. When the specified condition is not satisfied, based on the result of the special game judgment, a second performance can be executed in which a second predetermined image (obstructed image 950) different from the first predetermined image is displayed during the display of the changing performance pattern and the performance pattern is hidden, and after a second predetermined time has elapsed, the second predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed. When the first performance is executed, the game is controlled to the second game state, and the first predetermined image can be displayed when the performance pattern starts to change or stops changing, and the second predetermined image can be displayed during the display of the changing performance pattern.

According to the above configuration, by making the first predetermined image appear when the first performance pattern starts to change, it is possible to ensure sufficient time to display the first predetermined image even if the change time is short. In addition, by making the second predetermined image appear while the first performance pattern is changing, it is possible to increase the interest during the changing display.

The gaming machine according to configuration 5 includes an acquisition means for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not to play a special game based on the judgment information, a pattern control means for notifying the result of the special game judgment by displaying the patterns in a variable manner and then stopping the display of the patterns after a predetermined variation time has elapsed based on the result of the special game judgment, a holding means for holding the judgment information up to a predetermined number, a game state control means for controlling the first game state and a second game state (time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a performance control means for controlling a performance based on the result of the special game judgment, and the performance control means is capable of displaying a specific image (hold icon) corresponding to the judgment information, and notifies the result of the special game judgment by displaying the performance patterns in a variable manner in response to the variable display of the patterns and displaying the performance patterns in a stopped manner in response to the stopped display of the patterns. When a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special game judgment is executed is satisfied, a first performance can be executed in which, after the performance pattern starts to change, a first predetermined image (obstructed image 920) is displayed and the performance pattern is hidden based on the result of the special game judgment, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed. When the predetermined condition is not satisfied, a second performance can be executed in which, during the display of the changing performance pattern, a second predetermined image (obstructed image 950) different from the first predetermined image is displayed and the performance pattern is hidden, and after a second predetermined time has elapsed, the second predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed. When the first performance is executed, the second game state is set, and the specific image is hidden while the first predetermined image is displayed, and the specific image is displayed while the second predetermined image is displayed.

According to the above configuration, both the performance symbols and the specific image are hidden while the first predetermined image is displayed, so that the player can pay more attention to the first predetermined image. In addition, since a transition in game state is involved, by hiding the specific image, it is possible to smoothly switch to another image (an icon corresponding to the reservation of the second special symbol) as the transition to a different game state occurs. While the second predetermined image is displayed, the performance symbols are hidden but the specific image is displayed, so that the player can recognize the current state (whether it is changing, how many reserved symbols are present, etc.).

The gaming machine according to configuration 6 is provided with a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a start condition, a pattern control means for notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a pattern in a variable manner and then stopping the display of the pattern after a predetermined variation time has elapsed based on the result of the special game determination, a game state control means capable of controlling a first game state and a second game state (time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game determination, and the presentation control means is capable of notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a presentation pattern in a variable manner corresponding to the display of the pattern and displaying the presentation pattern in a stopped manner corresponding to the display of the pattern, and when a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special game determination is performed is established, the presentation control means starts to vary the presentation pattern based on the result of the special game determination, and then displays a first predetermined image (obstructed image 920) and displays the presentation pattern. and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, a second performance can be executed in which a second predetermined image (obstructed image 950) different from the first predetermined image is displayed during the variable display of the performance pattern and the performance pattern is hidden, and when a second predetermined time has elapsed, the second predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed. Any of a plurality of performance modes including a first performance mode in which a first background image (normal background) is displayed as a background image and a second performance mode in which a second background image (time-saving background) is displayed can be set. When the first performance is executed, the second game state is set, and when the second performance is performed, the first performance mode is not changed to the second performance mode, but when the first performance is performed, the first performance mode is changed to the second performance mode.

According to the above configuration, the background image (presentation mode) is changed by executing the first performance, which gives special value to the first performance and increases interest. In addition, the background image (presentation mode) can be changed smoothly by executing the first performance.

The gaming machine according to configuration 7 is provided with a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game is to be played based on the establishment of a start condition, a pattern control means for notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a pattern in a variable manner and then stopping the display of the pattern after a predetermined period of time has elapsed based on the result of the special game determination, a game state control means capable of controlling a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on the result of the special game determination, the presentation control means being capable of notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a presentation pattern in a variable manner in response to the display of the pattern in a variable manner and displaying the presentation pattern in a stopped manner in response to the display of the stopped pattern, and when a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special game determination is performed is established, the result of the special game determination is notified. Based on the result of the special game judgment, a first performance can be executed in which, after the performance pattern starts to change, a first predetermined image is displayed and the performance pattern is hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed. If the predetermined condition is not met, a second performance can be executed in which, based on the result of the special game judgment, a second predetermined image different from the first predetermined image is displayed during the display of the changing performance pattern and the performance pattern is hidden, and after a second predetermined time has elapsed, the second predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed. When the first performance is executed, the second game state is set and a notification performance can be executed to encourage the player to play. When the second performance is executed, the notification performance is not executed, and when the first performance is executed, the notification performance is executed.

According to the above configuration, a predetermined notification effect is performed when the first effect is executed, which encourages the player to play appropriately, and when the second effect is executed, such a notification effect is not executed, which reduces annoyance.

The gaming machine according to configuration 8 is provided with a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game is to be played based on the establishment of a start condition, a pattern control means for notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a pattern in a variable manner and then stopping the display of the pattern after a predetermined period of time has elapsed based on the result of the special game determination, a game state control means capable of controlling a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game determination, the presentation control means being capable of notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a presentation pattern in a variable manner in response to the display of the pattern in a variable manner and displaying the presentation pattern in a stopped manner in response to the display of the pattern in a stopped manner, and when a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special game determination is performed is established, the presentation control means displays a first predetermined image after starting to vary the presentation pattern based on the result of the special game determination. A first performance can be executed in which a first predetermined image is displayed and the performance pattern is hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed. If the predetermined condition is not met, a second performance can be executed in which a second predetermined image different from the first predetermined image is displayed and the performance pattern is hidden, and after a second predetermined time has elapsed, the second predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed. When the first performance is executed, the second game state is set, and when a first appearance performance is performed in the first performance to make the first predetermined image appear, a disappearance performance can be performed in which the performance pattern is hidden. In the second performance, when a second appearance performance is performed in which the second predetermined image appears, a disappearance performance can be performed in which the performance pattern is hidden.

With the above configuration, the appearance of the specified image and the disappearance of the effect pattern are performed at the same time, so the screen can be switched smoothly and without any sense of discomfort.

The gaming machine according to configuration 9 is equipped with a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a start condition, a pattern control means for notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a pattern in a variable manner and then stopping the display of the pattern after a predetermined period of time has elapsed based on the result of the special game determination, a game state control means capable of controlling a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a performance control means for controlling a performance based on the result of the special game determination, and the performance control means is capable of notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a performance pattern in a variable manner in response to the display of the pattern in a variable manner and displaying the performance pattern in a stopped manner in response to the display of the stopped pattern, and when a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special game determination is performed is established, In this case, based on the result of the special game judgment, after the variation of the performance symbols is started, a first performance can be executed in which a first predetermined image is displayed and the performance symbol is hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the performance symbol is displayed. When the predetermined condition is not established, based on the result of the special game judgment, a second performance can be executed in which a second predetermined image different from the first predetermined image is displayed and the performance symbol is hidden during the variation of the performance symbols, and after a second predetermined time has elapsed, the second predetermined image is hidden and the performance symbol is displayed. When the first performance is executed, the second game state is set, and the execution rate of the second performance is higher in the first game state than in the second game state.

According to the above configuration, the second effect is executed with a relatively high probability in the first game state, so the player does not become bored. On the other hand, the second effect is executed with a low probability in the second game state, so the game can proceed without unnecessary effects.

The gaming machine according to configuration 10 is equipped with a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a start condition, a pattern control means for notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a pattern in a variable manner and then stopping the display of the pattern after a predetermined period of time has elapsed based on the result of the special game determination, a game state control means capable of controlling a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game determination, the presentation control means being capable of notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a presentation pattern in a variable manner corresponding to the display of the pattern in a variable manner and displaying the presentation pattern in a stopped manner corresponding to the display of the pattern in a stopped manner, and when a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special game determination is performed is established, Based on the result of the special game judgment, after the performance pattern starts to change, a first performance can be executed in which a first predetermined image is displayed and the performance pattern is hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed. If the predetermined condition is not met, a second performance can be executed in which a second predetermined image different from the first predetermined image is displayed and the performance pattern is hidden, and after a second predetermined time has elapsed, the second predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed. When the first performance is executed, the second game state is set, and a suggestive performance suggesting the performance is more likely to be executed when the first performance is executed than when the second performance is executed.

According to the above configuration, when the first performance is executed, a suggestive performance (pre-introduction mode) that suggests the first performance is executed, but when the second performance is executed, a suggestive performance that suggests the second performance is not executed or is difficult to execute. Therefore, when the first performance is executed, it is possible to increase expectations for the first performance, and when the second performance is executed, it is possible to prevent excessive excitement and to prevent excessive expectations from being created.

The gaming machine according to configuration 11 is provided with a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game is to be played based on the establishment of a start condition, a pattern control means for notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a pattern in a variable manner and then stopping the display of the pattern after a predetermined period of time has elapsed based on the result of the special game determination, a game state control means capable of controlling a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game determination, the presentation control means being capable of notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a presentation pattern in a variable manner in response to the display of the pattern in a variable manner and displaying the presentation pattern in a stopped manner in response to the display of the stopped pattern, and the special game determination is performed when a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special game determination is performed is established. Based on the result of the determination, a first effect can be executed in which the effect symbols start to vary, a first predetermined image (obstructed image 920) is displayed and the effect symbols are hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the effect symbols are displayed. If the predetermined condition is not met, a second effect can be executed in which the effect symbols start to vary, a second predetermined image (obstructed image 940) different from the first predetermined image is displayed and the effect symbols are hidden, and after a second predetermined time has elapsed, the second predetermined image is hidden and the effect symbols are displayed. The execution rate of the second effect is higher in the first game state than in the second game state.

According to the above configuration, when a predetermined condition regarding the number of times a special game judgment is executed is met, the first predetermined image is displayed and the performance pattern is hidden, so that the player can expect a transition to a special state and the interest can be improved. Furthermore, when the above predetermined condition is not met and a performance pattern suggesting that a special game will not be played is displayed, the second predetermined image is displayed and the performance pattern is hidden, so that the player's disappointment can be reduced. Furthermore, the execution rate of the second performance is set high in the first game state. Therefore, even if a situation in which a performance pattern suggesting that a special game will not be played continues to be displayed in the first game state, the player can be prevented from becoming bored, and in the second game state, the game can be progressed quickly to direct the player's attention to the next game.

The gaming machine according to configuration 12 is provided with a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a start condition, a pattern control means for notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a pattern in a variable manner and then stopping the display of the pattern after a predetermined period of time has elapsed based on the result of the special game determination, a game state control means capable of controlling a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on the result of the special game determination, and the presentation control means is capable of notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a presentation pattern in a variable manner in response to the display of the pattern in a variable manner and displaying the presentation pattern in a stopped manner in response to the display of the stopped pattern, and when a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special game determination is performed is established, the special game determination is performed. Based on the result of the separate game judgment, a first performance can be executed in which the performance symbols start to vary, a first predetermined image (obstructed image 920) is displayed, the performance symbols are hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the performance symbols are displayed. If the predetermined condition is not met, a second performance can be executed in which the performance symbols start to vary, based on the result of the special game judgment, the performance symbols suggesting that the special game will not be played are displayed (missed reach), a second predetermined image (obstructed image 940) different from the first predetermined image is displayed, the performance symbols are hidden, and after a second predetermined time has elapsed, the second predetermined image is hidden and the performance symbols are displayed. Even if the predetermined condition is met, the second predetermined image can be displayed.

According to the above configuration, even if the above-mentioned predetermined condition is met, when the second performance is executed, the second predetermined image is displayed, thereby reducing the player's disappointment.

The gaming machine according to configuration 13 includes a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a start condition, a pattern control means for notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a pattern in a variable manner and then stopping the display of the pattern after a predetermined variable time has elapsed based on the result of the special game determination, a game state control means capable of controlling a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on the result of the special game determination, the presentation control means being: The result of the special game judgment can be notified by varying and displaying the performance symbols in response to the varying display of the symbols, and by stopping and displaying the performance symbols in response to the stopping display of the symbols. When a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special game judgment is performed is established, the performance symbols are started to vary based on the result of the special game judgment, and then a first predetermined image (a shielding image 920) is displayed and the performance symbols are hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the performance symbols are displayed. A first effect can be executed in which the effect symbol is changed to indicate that the special game will not be played, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, a second effect can be executed in which a second predetermined image (obstructed image 940) different from the first predetermined image is displayed and the effect symbol is hidden, and after a second predetermined time has elapsed, the second predetermined image is hidden and the effect symbol is displayed. Based on the result of the special game determination, a specific effect (reach effect) can be executed that indicates the possibility of a special game being played. When it is determined in the special game determination that the special game will not be played, the specific effect can be executed, and the second predetermined image can be displayed and the effect symbol suggesting that the special game will not be played can be displayed in a static manner. When it is determined in the special game determination that the special game will be played, the specific effect can be executed, and the second predetermined image can be not displayed and the effect symbol suggesting that the special game will be played can be displayed in a static manner.

According to the above configuration, if it is determined that a special game will be played, a performance pattern suggesting that a special game will be played after the specific performance is executed is displayed to satisfy the player, and if it is determined that a special game will not be played, a second predetermined image is displayed to reduce the player's disappointment and to create hope that a different performance may develop.

The gaming machine according to configuration 14 includes an acquisition means for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not to play a special game based on the judgment information, a pattern control means for notifying the result of the special game judgment by displaying the pattern in a variable manner and then displaying the pattern in a stopped state after a predetermined variation time has elapsed based on the result of the special game judgment, a holding means for holding the judgment information up to a predetermined number, a game state control means for controlling a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a performance control means for controlling a performance based on the result of the special game judgment, and the performance control means is capable of displaying a specific image (hold icon) corresponding to the judgment information, and is capable of notifying the result of the special game judgment by displaying a performance pattern in a variable manner in response to the display of the pattern in a variable manner and displaying the performance pattern in a stopped state in response to the display of the pattern in a stopped state. When a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special game judgment is performed is satisfied, a first performance can be executed in which, after the performance pattern starts to vary based on the result of the special game judgment, a first predetermined image (obstructed image 920) is displayed and the performance pattern is hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed. When the predetermined condition is not satisfied, a second performance can be executed in which, after the performance pattern starts to vary based on the result of the special game judgment, the performance pattern suggesting that the special game will not be played is displayed (reach miss), a second predetermined image (obstructed image 940) different from the first predetermined image is displayed and the performance pattern is hidden, and after a second predetermined time has elapsed, the second predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed. The specific image is hidden while the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image are displayed.

According to the above configuration, both the performance symbol and the specific image are hidden while the first predetermined image is displayed, so that the first predetermined image can draw attention to it. Furthermore, when a transition in game state is involved, hiding the specific image allows for a smooth switch to another image (an icon corresponding to the second special symbol) in a different game state. By hiding the specific image even while the second predetermined image is displayed, a performance symbol suggesting that no special game will be played can be displayed, and then a smooth switch to the next screen can be made.

The gaming machine according to configuration 15 is equipped with a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a start condition, a pattern control means for notifying the result of the special game judgment by displaying a pattern in a variable manner and then stopping the display of the pattern after a predetermined variation time has elapsed based on the result of the special game judgment, a game state control means capable of controlling a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of notifying the result of the special game judgment by displaying a presentation pattern in a variable manner corresponding to the display of the pattern in a variable manner and displaying the presentation pattern in a stopped manner corresponding to the display of the pattern in a stopped manner, and when a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special game judgment is performed is established, the presentation control means starts to vary the presentation pattern based on the result of the special game judgment, and then displays a first predetermined image ( It is possible to execute a first performance in which a first predetermined image (obstructing image 920) is displayed and the performance pattern is hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed. If the predetermined condition is not met, based on the result of the special game determination, the performance pattern is started to vary, and then the performance pattern suggesting that the special game will not be played is displayed (missed reach), and a second predetermined image (obstructing image 940) different from the first predetermined image is displayed and the performance pattern is hidden, and after a second predetermined time has elapsed, the second predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed. When the first predetermined image is displayed, the light emitting means is made to emit light in a first manner, when the second predetermined image is displayed, the light emitting means is made to emit light in a second manner, and when the second game state is in the second game state, the light emitting means is made to emit light in a third manner.

With the above configuration, the light emission mode of the light-emitting means can indicate the change in game mode and the game state.

The gaming machine according to configuration 16 includes a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a start condition, a pattern control means for notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a pattern in a variable manner and then stopping the display of the pattern after a predetermined variation time has elapsed based on the result of the special game determination, a game state control means capable of controlling a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game determination, and the presentation control means is capable of notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a presentation pattern in a variable manner corresponding to the display of the pattern in a variable manner and displaying the presentation pattern in a stopped manner corresponding to the display of the pattern in a stopped manner, and when a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special game determination is performed is established, the presentation control means starts to vary the presentation pattern based on the result of the special game determination. Then, a first performance can be executed in which a first predetermined image (obstructing image 920) is displayed and the performance pattern is hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed. If the predetermined condition is not met, based on the result of the special game judgment, the performance pattern is started to change, and then the performance pattern suggesting that the special game will not be played is displayed (missed reach), and a second performance can be executed in which a second predetermined image (obstructing image 940) different from the first predetermined image is displayed and the performance pattern is hidden, and after a second predetermined time has elapsed, the second predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed. The first predetermined image is displayed after a first period has elapsed from the start of the display of the varying performance pattern, and the second predetermined image is displayed after a second period longer than the first period has elapsed from the start of the display of the varying performance pattern.

With the above configuration, when a predetermined condition regarding the number of times a special game judgment is performed is met, the first predetermined image can be made to appear early from the start of the fluctuation, and the first predetermined image can be made to appear reliably even if the fluctuation time is short.

The gaming machine according to configuration 17 is provided with a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game is to be played based on the establishment of a start condition, a pattern control means for notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a pattern in a variable manner and then stopping the display of the pattern after a predetermined period of time has elapsed based on the result of the special game determination, a game state control means capable of controlling a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on the result of the special game determination, the presentation control means being capable of notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a presentation pattern in a variable manner in response to the display of the pattern in a variable manner and displaying the presentation pattern in a stopped manner in response to the display of the stopped pattern, and when a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special game determination is performed is established, , based on the result of the special game judgment, a first performance can be executed in which the performance symbols start to vary, a first predetermined image (obstructed image 920) is displayed, the performance symbols are hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the performance symbols are displayed. If it is determined in the special game judgment that a special game will be played, a second performance can be executed in which the performance symbols start to vary, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the performance symbols (pattern alignment) suggesting that the special game will be played are displayed. Whether the first performance is executed or the second performance is executed, the second game state is controlled, and the performance mode of the second performance when it is determined in the special game judgment that a special game will be played differs between when the predetermined condition is met and when the predetermined condition is not met.

According to the above configuration, when a predetermined condition regarding the number of times a special game judgment is made is met, the first predetermined image is displayed and the performance pattern is hidden, making the player anticipate a transition to the second game state, and improving interest. Also, when a performance pattern suggesting that a special game will be played is displayed even when the predetermined condition is not met, a transition to the second game state occurs. By differentiating the performance mode when it is determined that a special game will be played between when the predetermined condition is met and when the predetermined condition is not met, it is possible to diversify the performance and improve interest.

The gaming machine according to configuration 18 is provided with a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game is to be played based on the establishment of a start condition, a pattern control means for notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a pattern in a variable manner and then stopping the display of the pattern after a predetermined period of time has elapsed based on the result of the special game determination, a game state control means capable of controlling a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on the result of the special game determination, and the presentation control means is capable of notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a presentation pattern in a variable manner in response to the display of the pattern in a variable manner and displaying the presentation pattern in a stopped manner in response to the display of the stopped pattern, and when a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special game determination is performed is established, the special game determination is performed. Based on the result of the separate game judgment, a first performance can be executed in which the performance symbols start to vary, a first predetermined image (obstructed image 920) is displayed, the performance symbols are hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the performance symbols are displayed. If it is judged in the special game judgment that a special game will be played, a second performance can be executed in which the performance symbols start to vary, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the performance symbols (pattern alignment) suggesting that the special game will be played can be displayed. Whether the first performance is executed or the second performance is executed, the game is controlled to the second game state. If the predetermined condition is met, the performance mode of the first performance differs between when it is judged in the special game judgment that a special game will be played and when it is judged that a special game will not be played.

According to the above configuration, when a predetermined condition regarding the number of times a special game judgment is performed is met, the presentation mode of the first presentation can be varied to diversify the presentation and increase interest.

The gaming machine according to configuration 19 is provided with a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game is to be played based on the establishment of a start condition, a pattern control means for notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a pattern in a variable manner and then stopping the display of the pattern after a predetermined period of time has elapsed based on the result of the special game determination, a game state control means capable of controlling a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on the result of the special game determination, the presentation control means being capable of notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a presentation pattern in a variable manner in response to the display of the pattern in a variable manner and displaying the presentation pattern in a stopped manner in response to the display of the stopped pattern, and a determination means for determining whether or not a special game is to be played based on the result of the special game determination when a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special game determination is performed is established. Based on the result, a first effect can be executed in which the effect pattern starts to change, a first predetermined image (obstructed image 920) is displayed, the effect pattern is hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the effect pattern is displayed. If it is determined in the special game determination that a special game will be played, a second effect can be executed in which the effect pattern starts to change, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the effect pattern (pattern alignment) suggesting that the special game will be played can be displayed. Whether the first effect is executed or the second effect is executed, the game is controlled to the second game state, and a notification effect can be executed to encourage the player to play. The notification effect when the first effect is executed (FIG. 75(f)) and the notification effect when the second effect is executed (FIG. 91(b)) have different presentation modes.

According to the above configuration, by making the presentation mode of the notification presentation different when the first presentation is performed and when the second presentation is performed, it is possible to make the appearance different even when transitioning to the same second game state, and for example, it is possible to make the transition to the second game state via the first presentation special.

The gaming machine according to configuration 20 is provided with a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a start condition, a pattern control means for notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a pattern in a variable manner and then stopping the display of the pattern after a predetermined variation time has elapsed based on the result of the special game determination, a game state control means capable of controlling a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a performance control means for controlling a performance based on the result of the special game determination, and the performance control means is capable of notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a performance pattern in a variable manner corresponding to the variable display of the pattern and displaying the performance pattern in a stopped manner corresponding to the stopped display of the pattern, and when a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special game determination is performed is established, after starting to vary the performance pattern based on the result of the special game determination, a first predetermined image (a masking image) is displayed. A first effect can be executed in which a hidden image 920 is displayed and the effect pattern is hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the effect pattern is displayed. If it is determined in the special game determination that a special game will be played, a second effect can be executed in which the effect pattern starts to vary and then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the effect pattern (pattern alignment) suggesting that the special game will be played can be displayed. In the second game state, an effect in a specific mode (time-saving mode) can be executed. Whether the first effect is executed or the second effect is executed, the game is controlled to the second game state. When the second effect is executed, a predetermined notification image (FIG. 91(c)) that alerts the player is displayed, and then the game is switched to the specific mode. When the first effect is executed, the game is switched to the specific mode without displaying the predetermined notification image (FIGS. 75(a) to 76(a)).

With the above configuration, the player can be alerted when transitioning to the second game state via the second presentation. On the other hand, when transitioning to the second game state via the first presentation, the player can be made to immediately transition to a specific mode.

The gaming machine according to configuration 21 includes a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game is to be played based on the establishment of a start condition, a pattern control means for notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a pattern in a variable manner and then stopping the display of the pattern after a predetermined period of time has elapsed based on the result of the special game determination, a game state control means capable of controlling the game state to a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, an update means (S3303) for performing an update process for updating the number of times the special game determination is performed, which indicates the number of times the special game determination is performed, each time the special game determination is performed, and a performance control means for controlling a performance based on the result of the special game determination, and the performance control means is capable of notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a performance pattern in a variable manner in response to the display of the pattern in a variable manner and displaying the performance pattern in a stopped manner in response to the display of the pattern in a stopped manner. When a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special game judgment is executed is satisfied, a first performance can be executed based on the result of the special game judgment, in which the performance pattern starts to vary, a first predetermined image (obstructed image 920) is displayed, the performance pattern is hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed. If it is determined in the special game judgment that a special game will be executed, a second performance can be executed in which the performance pattern (pattern alignment) suggesting that the special game will be executed after a predetermined time has elapsed after the performance pattern starts to vary. Whether the first performance is executed or the second performance is executed, the second game state is controlled, and when the first performance is executed, the number of times of operation is not reset, and when the second performance is executed, the number of times of operation is reset.

With the above configuration, even when the first performance is performed, the number of activations can be updated without being reset, and since there is no need to switch processing before and after the first performance, the processing load can be reduced.

The gaming machine according to configuration 22 is provided with a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game is to be played based on the establishment of a start condition, a pattern control means for notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a pattern in a variable manner and then stopping the display of the pattern after a predetermined period of time has elapsed based on the result of the special game determination, a game state control means capable of controlling a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on the result of the special game determination, the presentation control means being capable of notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying a presentation pattern in a variable manner in response to the display of the pattern in a variable manner and displaying the presentation pattern in a stopped manner in response to the display of the stopped pattern, and when a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special game determination is performed is established, based on the result of the special game determination, After the effect pattern starts to vary, a first effect can be executed in which a first predetermined image (obstructed image 920) is displayed and the effect pattern is hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the effect pattern is displayed. If it is determined in the special game determination that a special game will be played, a second effect can be executed in which the effect pattern starts to vary and the effect pattern (pattern alignment) suggesting that the special game will be played after a predetermined time has elapsed. Whether the first effect is executed or the second effect is executed, the game is controlled to the second game state, and if it is determined in the special game determination that a special game will not be played, the first time from when the first predetermined image is displayed to when the game state transitions to the second game state is shorter than the second time from when the second predetermined image is displayed to when the game state transitions to the second game state.

With the above configuration, when the first predetermined image is displayed, the game can be transitioned to the second game state in a relatively short time, improving the game's interest.

The gaming machine according to configuration 23 is provided with a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a start condition, a change time determination means for determining a pattern change time based on the result of the special game determination, a pattern control means for displaying the pattern in a changeable manner and then displaying the pattern stationary after the change time has elapsed when the special game determination is made, and a performance control means for controlling a performance based on the result of the special game determination, the performance control means being capable of displaying a performance pattern in a changeable manner in response to the display of the pattern change, and displaying the performance pattern stationary in response to the display of the pattern stationary, and suggesting that the special game will not be played after starting to change the performance pattern based on the result of the special game determination. It is possible to execute a first effect in which the effect pattern is displayed (missed reach), a first predetermined image (obstructed image 940) is displayed and the effect pattern is hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the effect pattern is displayed. It is possible to execute a second effect in which, based on the result of the special game determination, a second predetermined image (obstructed image 950) different from the first predetermined image is displayed while the effect pattern is changing and the effect pattern is hidden, and after a second predetermined time has elapsed, the second predetermined image is hidden and the effect pattern suggesting that the special game will not be played is displayed, and the change time of the pattern is longer when the first effect is performed than when the second effect is performed.

According to the above configuration, in the first performance, the performance symbol is displayed in a losing mode and then hidden by the first predetermined image, making the player hopeful that the temporary loss may develop into some kind of performance. Also, in the second performance, the performance symbol is hidden while it is being displayed in a changing manner, creating an element of surprise and making the player excited. Since the predetermined image appears and the performance symbol is hidden at various times, the variation in the performance can be diversified, and the interest can be increased.

The gaming machine according to configuration 24 is provided with a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a start condition, a fluctuation time determination means for determining a pattern fluctuation time based on the result of the special game determination, a pattern control means for, when the special game determination is made, displaying the pattern in a variable manner and then stopping the pattern after the fluctuation time has elapsed, and a performance control means for controlling a performance based on the result of the special game determination, the performance control means being capable of displaying a first performance pattern in a variable manner in response to the display of the pattern in a variable manner and displaying the first performance pattern in a stopped manner in response to the display of the stopped pattern, displaying a second performance pattern different from the first performance pattern in a variable manner in response to the display of the pattern in a variable manner and displaying the second performance pattern in a stopped manner in response to the display of the stopped pattern, and based on the result of the special game determination, Based on this, after the first performance pattern starts to vary, a first performance can be executed in which the first performance pattern suggesting that the special game will not be played is displayed (missed reach), a first predetermined image (obstructed image 940) is displayed and the first performance pattern is hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the first performance pattern is displayed. Based on the result of the special game determination, a second performance can be executed in which a second predetermined image (obstructed image 950) different from the first predetermined image is displayed during the varying display of the first performance pattern and the first performance pattern is hidden, and after a second predetermined time has elapsed, the second predetermined image is hidden and the first performance pattern is displayed. Even when the first performance pattern is hidden by the first performance or the second performance, the second performance pattern can be displayed.

According to the above configuration, even when the first performance symbol is not displayed, the second performance symbol is displayed, allowing the player to check the changing state of the special symbol.

The gaming machine according to configuration 25 is provided with a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a start condition, a fluctuation time determination means for determining a pattern fluctuation time based on the result of the special game determination, a pattern control means for, when the special game determination is made, displaying the pattern in a variable manner and then displaying the pattern in a stationary manner after the fluctuation time has elapsed, and a performance control means for controlling a performance based on the result of the special game determination, the performance control means being capable of displaying a performance pattern in a variable manner in response to the display of the pattern in a variable manner and displaying the performance pattern in a stationary manner in response to the display of the pattern in a stationary manner, and after starting to vary the performance pattern based on the result of the special game determination, the special game control means is capable of displaying the special game pattern in a variable manner in response to the display of the pattern in a stationary manner, and after starting to vary the performance pattern based on the result of the special game determination, It is possible to execute a first effect in which the effect symbol suggesting that another game will not be played (missed reach), a first predetermined image (obstructing image 940) is displayed while the effect symbol is hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden while the effect symbol is displayed; and based on the result of the special game determination, it is possible to execute a second effect in which a second predetermined image (obstructing image 950) different from the first predetermined image is displayed while the effect symbol is being changed and the effect symbol is hidden, and after a second predetermined time has elapsed, the second predetermined image is hidden while the effect symbol is displayed; and the display time of the first predetermined image is different from the display time of the second predetermined image.

According to the above configuration, for example, by shortening the display time of the first predetermined image, it is possible to momentarily raise the player's expectations in the event of a missed reach, and by lengthening the display time of the second predetermined image, it is possible to momentarily raise the player's expectations and maintain them for a certain period of time.

The gaming machine according to configuration 26 includes an acquisition means for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means for making a special game judgment as to whether or not to play a special game based on the judgment information, a hold means capable of holding a predetermined number of judgment information, a fluctuation time determination means for determining a pattern fluctuation time based on the result of the special game judgment, a pattern control means for, when the special game judgment is made, displaying the pattern in a variable manner and then displaying the pattern in a stationary manner after the lapse of the fluctuation time, and a performance control means for controlling a performance based on the result of the special game judgment, the performance control means being capable of displaying a specific image (hold icon) corresponding to the judgment information, displaying a performance pattern in a variable manner corresponding to the display of the pattern in a variable manner, and displaying the performance pattern in a stationary manner corresponding to the display of the pattern in a stationary manner, and the special Based on the result of the separate game judgment, after the variation of the performance symbols is started, the performance symbols suggesting that the special game will not be played are displayed (reach miss), a first predetermined image (obstructed image 940) is displayed and the performance symbols are hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the performance symbols are displayed. A first performance can be executed, and based on the result of the special game judgment, a second predetermined image (obstructed image 950) different from the first predetermined image is displayed during the variation of the performance symbols, the performance symbols are hidden, and after a second predetermined time has elapsed, the second predetermined image is hidden and the performance symbols are displayed. The specific image is hidden while the first predetermined image is displayed, and the specific image is displayed while the second predetermined image is displayed.

According to the above configuration, while the first predetermined image is being displayed, both the performance symbols and the specific image are hidden, so that the first predetermined image can draw attention to it. While the second predetermined image is being displayed, the performance symbols are hidden but the specific image is displayed, so that the player can recognize the current status (whether it is changing, how many reserved numbers are there, etc.).

The gaming machine according to configuration 27 is provided with a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a start condition, a change time determination means for determining a pattern change time based on the result of the special game determination, a pattern control means for displaying the pattern in a changeable manner and then displaying the pattern stationary after the change time has elapsed when the special game determination is made, and a performance control means for controlling a performance based on the result of the special game determination, the performance control means being capable of displaying a performance pattern in a changeable manner in response to the display of the pattern change and displaying the performance pattern stationary in response to the display of the pattern stop, and displaying the performance pattern suggesting that the special game will not be played after starting to change the performance pattern based on the result of the special game determination (reach miss), and displaying a first predetermined screen. A first effect can be executed in which an image (obstructing image 940) is displayed and the effect pattern is hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the effect pattern is displayed. Based on the result of the special game determination, a second effect can be executed in which a second predetermined image (obstructing image 950) different from the first predetermined image is displayed during the variable display of the effect pattern and the effect pattern is hidden, and after a second predetermined time has elapsed, the second predetermined image is hidden and the effect pattern is displayed. Based on the result of the special game determination, a specific effect (reach effect) that suggests the possibility of a special game being played can be executed. The specific effect is not executed before the second predetermined image is displayed, and the specific effect is executed before the first predetermined image is displayed.

According to the above configuration, the player's expectations can be increased by the specific effect, and even if a performance pattern indicating a miss is displayed from the specific effect, the player's expectations can be maintained by the appearance of the first predetermined image. On the other hand, in the second effect, the second predetermined image is suddenly displayed without going through the specific effect, so the player's expectations can be momentarily increased.

The gaming machine according to configuration 28 is provided with a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not a special game is to be played based on the establishment of a start condition, a change time determination means for determining a pattern change time based on the result of the special game determination, a pattern control means for displaying the pattern in a changeable manner and then displaying the pattern in a stopped state after the change time has elapsed when the special game determination is made, and a performance control means for controlling a performance based on the result of the special game determination, and the performance control means is capable of displaying a performance pattern in a changeable manner in response to the display of the pattern in a changeable manner and displaying the performance pattern in a stopped state in response to the display of the pattern in a stopped state, and after starting to change the performance pattern based on the result of the special game determination, displays the performance pattern suggesting that the special game will not be played (a link A first performance can be executed in which, based on the result of the special game judgment, a first predetermined image (obstructing image 940) is displayed while the performance pattern is hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed; and a second performance can be executed in which, based on the result of the special game judgment, a second predetermined image (obstructing image 950) different from the first predetermined image is displayed while the performance pattern is being changed and the performance pattern is hidden, and after a second predetermined time has elapsed, the second predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed; when the first performance is executed, the background image is different before and after the first predetermined image is displayed, and when the second performance is executed, the background image is the same before and after the second predetermined image is displayed.

According to the above configuration, when the first performance is performed, the first predetermined image is displayed before and after the background image is switched, so that the background image can be smoothly transitioned. On the other hand, when the second performance is performed, the image suddenly switches to the second predetermined image while the performance symbols are changing, and then returns to the original state, so that the player's expectations can be momentarily raised and the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine according to configuration 29 is provided with a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a start condition, a change time determination means for determining a pattern change time based on the result of the special game determination, a pattern control means for changing and displaying the pattern when the special game determination is made, and then stopping and displaying the pattern after the change time has elapsed, and a performance control means for controlling a performance based on the result of the special game determination, and the performance control means is capable of starting a plurality of performance patterns to change in response to the start of the pattern change, stopping the plurality of performance patterns in a predetermined order, and stopping and displaying the plurality of performance patterns in response to the stopped display of the patterns, and after starting the change of the performance patterns based on the result of the special game determination, displaying the performance pattern suggesting that the special game will not be played (reach miss), displaying a first predetermined image (obstructed image 940) and hiding the performance patterns, and A first performance can be executed in which the first predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and a second performance can be executed in which a second predetermined image (obstructed image 950) different from the first predetermined image is displayed during the variable display of the performance pattern based on the result of the special game judgment, and the performance pattern is hidden, and the second predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed after a second predetermined time has elapsed. When the second performance is executed, the multiple performance patterns are not stopped in the predetermined order, and when the first performance is executed, the multiple performance patterns can be stopped in the predetermined order. When the first performance is executed, the time from when the first performance pattern (left pattern) of the multiple performance patterns stops to when the second performance pattern (right pattern) stops to when the third performance pattern (middle pattern) stops may differ from the time from when the second performance pattern (right pattern) stops to when the third performance pattern (middle pattern) stops.

According to the above configuration, when the first performance is executed, multiple performance symbols stop in sequence, and there is a period of time before the third performance symbol stops, creating anticipation for the player. Even if the third performance symbol stops, the first predetermined image is displayed, reducing disappointment for the player and leaving open the possibility of further developments. When the second performance is executed, multiple performance symbols do not stop in sequence, creating an element of surprise and increasing interest.

The gaming machine according to configuration 30 includes a determination means for making a special game determination as to whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a start condition, a change time determination means for determining a pattern change time based on the result of the special game determination, a pattern control means for displaying the pattern in a changeable manner and then displaying the pattern stationary after the change time has elapsed when the special game determination is made, and a performance control means for controlling a performance based on the result of the special game determination, the performance control means being capable of displaying a performance pattern in a changeable manner in response to the display of the pattern change and displaying the performance pattern stationary in response to the display of the pattern stationary, and displaying the performance pattern suggesting that the special game will not be played after starting the change of the performance pattern based on the result of the special game determination (reach miss), A first performance can be executed in which a first predetermined image (obstructed image 940) is displayed and the performance pattern is hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed. Based on the result of the special game judgment, a second performance can be executed in which a second predetermined image (obstructed image 950) different from the first predetermined image is displayed during the variable display of the performance pattern and the performance pattern is hidden, and after a second predetermined time has elapsed, the second predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed. When the first performance is executed, the display mode of the performance pattern differs before and after the first predetermined image is displayed, and when the second performance is executed, the display mode of the performance pattern is the same before and after the second predetermined image is displayed.

According to the above configuration, when the first performance is performed, the appearance of the performance pattern changes via the first predetermined image, so the appearance of the performance pattern can be changed smoothly. Also, when the second performance is performed, although there is no change in the appearance of the performance pattern before and after the display of the second predetermined image, the second predetermined image suddenly appears, so it is possible to create an unexpected performance and increase interest.

The configurations of the first to fifth embodiments and their modified examples described so far can be combined in any way as long as they are not mutually contradictory. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to the configurations of the above-mentioned embodiments and their modified examples, and other modifications may be made.

1 Pachinko game machine 45 First start gate 47 Second start gate 50 First big prize gate 56 Second big prize gate 60 First special symbol display 61 Second special symbol display 62 Ordinary symbol display 63 First special symbol reserved display 64 Second special symbol reserved display 701 Performance symbol 702 Small symbol HA First reserved icon HB Second reserved icon TI The icon

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of shooting out a gaming ball in response to an operation using a first operating means,
A determination means for making a determination;
A symbol control means for varying the symbol;
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to notify the result of the judgment by displaying the performance pattern in a stopped state after a predetermined time has elapsed since the performance pattern is displayed in a changed state.
A first emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize an effect pattern that suggests that a special game advantageous to a player will be played;
A specific notification regarding the operation of the first operating means can be executed,
The specific notification can be executed during the first emphasis performance,
It is possible to output a sound during execution of the first emphasis performance for a first time, and output a notification sound related to the specific notification for a second time longer than the first time,
A manipulation performance that prompts the user to operate the second manipulation means is executable,
A second emphasis effect that emphasizes the operation effect and changes at a predetermined period is executable;
Any one of a plurality of presentation modes including a first mode and a second mode can be set;
The gaming machine is capable of making a sound related to the second emphasis effect different between when the first mode is set and when the second mode is set.

Images